SANSKRIT PRIMER 
 
 PERRY 
 
OLihl 
 PK. 
 
 ip (p lo 
 
^--\A<l!' 
 
 
 3 1924 011 121 690 
 
 TCO^SWv=vTP'C\- 
 
 
 -V^-.-i-^ 
 
 «^4«''W,,^«^^^Stv^ 
 
 1 
 
 DATE DUE 
 
 iu: 
 
 
 
 
 tw 
 
 
 
 
 TFIW: 
 
 ^*®5aft(wY«)n»^ 
 
 
 
 •* i v.- - „ - 
 
 -*^^^fe 
 
 S8I^ 
 
 
 
 
 ■• 
 
 • 
 
 ^Sw'i 
 
 
 
 'flBSI 
 
 tiii^n 
 
 
 
 [■iito 
 
 
 
 fiifili-.gt tr 
 
 Lr» 
 
 
 
 ^i4±iP»=Rw- 
 
 
 
 '■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 "AlHiii-T^ 
 
 Klll^ 
 
 
 
 
 w?"***' 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 ■• 
 
 
 
 
 3r-«mi 
 
 
 
 
 '"TWWWSB^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^Pd"*?^^ 
 
 **iilfr 
 
 
 
 GAVLOR9 
 
 
 
 PKINT CD INU.S. A. 
 
OMN UBR^RV-gRg^^TfOK 
 
 fniNTEO IN U.S.A. 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of this book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/cletails/cu31924011121690 
 
SANSKRIT PRIMER: 
 
 BASED ON THE 
 
 LEITFADEN 
 FUR DEN ELEMENTAR-CURSUS DES SANSKRIT 
 
 OF 
 
 PROFESSOR GEORG BUHLER 
 
 OF VIENNA 
 
 BY 
 
 EDWARD DELAVAN PERRY, 
 
 OF COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW-YORK. 
 
 -^**^ 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 GINN AND COMPANY 
 1892. 
 
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1885, 
 By E. D. perry, 
 In the Office of the Librarian of Congress at Washington! 
 
 Compositton 6a 
 
 CEBRUDER UNGER, 
 
 SchBneberger Strasse, 17 A, 
 
 Berlin, SW. 
 
 john wilson and son, 
 
 university press, 
 Cambridge, Mass. 
 
Preface. 
 
 In the preface to the work* of which the following is a revision, 
 Prof. BiJHLEK writes as follows: 
 
 "The following Leitfaden was written last winter [1881 — 82], 
 and, printed in mannscript form, was used in the instruction of 
 quite a large number of scholars. It is based upon the purely 
 practical method of Sanskrit instruction, which was introduced at 
 Haog's and my own instance into the Indian secondary schools, 
 and has become established there by means of R. G. Bhandaeear's 
 text-books. The attempt to transfer this method to European uni- 
 versities is justified by the practical success which, as my ex- 
 perience shows, is to be gained thereby. For I have found that 
 beginners master the first difficulties of Sanskrit very rapidly, and 
 that learners take the most lively and continued interest in the 
 study, if opportunity for activity on their own part is given them 
 from the very first, and they are introduced at once into the living 
 language. Moreover, the question of economy of time is made the 
 more weighty by the fact that the elements of Sanskrit form an 
 
 * Leitfaden far den Elementarcursus des Sanskrit; mitUebungs- 
 stucken und zwei Glossaren. Von Georg Buhlek. Wien, 1883. — 
 I have translated above a little freely. 
 
IV 
 
 important aid to students of Classical and Germanic Philology, yet 
 to a large number of such are accessible only when the subject 
 can be mastered in a short time. On the other hand, the disad- 
 vantages necessarily entailed by the purely practical method may 
 readily be removed later by a short methodical exposition of the 
 
 grammar The verses in the exerciges are taken chiefly 
 
 from Boehtlingk's Indischen Spriichen; the sentences are in part 
 derived from various Sanskrit works, or modelled after passages 
 contained in them. To the last lessons no Sanskrit exercises have 
 been appended, since the reading of the Nala or of some other 
 easy Sanskrit work may very well be begun as soon as the form- 
 ation of the perfect has been learned." 
 
 After using the Leitfaden for some time in the instruction of 
 a class, I was convinced of its great merits as a practical intro- 
 duction to the language; while on the other hand it seemed very 
 unfortunate that it held throughout to the native system of grammar, 
 which, since the appearance of Prof. Whitney's work, we in 
 America at least have learned to distrust. Under these circum- 
 stances it seemed advisable to attempt a combination of Buhlee's 
 practical exercises with Whitney's theory; and to this end the 
 book has been really rewritten. An introduction has been added, 
 giving a general view of the structure of the language ; the exer- 
 cises have been pruned here and there, chiefly to remove forms 
 which seemed too unusual or doubtful to have a just claim on 
 the beginner's memory; and the number of lessons has been re- 
 duced from forty-eight to forty-five, by condensing the description, 
 needlessly full for beginners, of the aorist, precative, and second- 
 ary conjugations. I have endeavored to retain nothing but what 
 would supply the real wants of those for whom the book is de- 
 
signed ; yet here and there, having in mind those who may take 
 up this study without a teacher, I have added explanations which 
 I should otherwise have left for oral communication by the instructor. 
 
 A detailed explanation of the changes in the grammatical part 
 of the book would require too much space to be given here. They 
 may be summarized in the statement that I have striven to remove 
 all forms at present "non - quotable". In the explication of the 
 rules I have sought to be brief, but never to the sacrifice of clear- 
 ness. In very many cases not only the substance but also the 
 words of Prof. Whitney's rules have been incorporated into those 
 of the Primer, which was done with his sanction. It seemed quite 
 needless to designate all such borrowings by quotation-marks. 
 
 Many acknowledgments are due to those whose aid has made 
 possible the appearance of the work. Prof. Buhler's ready gene- 
 rosity in consenting to the rendering of his book into a very 
 different form from that which he gave it deserves most grateful 
 mention. To Prof. Whitney I owe deep gratitude for many valu- 
 able suggestions; he was kind enough to look over the work in 
 manuscript, and, later, to put at my disposal the advance sheets of 
 his invaluable collection of verb -forms. To Prof. Lanman I am 
 equally indebted; as well for many useful hints as for the arduous 
 task of looking over proof-sheets, which he imposed on himself 
 with characteristic readiness. My pupil, Mr. A. V. W. Jackson, 
 assisted me not a little in the compilation of the Glossaries. My 
 acknowledgments are also due to the printers, Gebr. Unger 
 (Th. Grimm) of Berlin, for the careful manner in which their part 
 of the work has been done. 
 
 From V. S. Apte's "Guide to Sanskrit Composition" I have 
 derived occasional examples. 
 
VI 
 
 The appearance of the book has been delayed considerably 
 beyond the date originally planned for it. The printing was begun 
 in November last, but was interrupted by my illness, and a re- 
 sulting stay of considerable length in the "West Indies. 
 
 I shall esteem it a favor if any who may use this book will 
 notify me of misprints or inaccuracies of any sort which they may 
 remark. 
 
 E. D. P. 
 
 Bbblin, August, 1885. 
 
 NOTE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 In this edition errors have been corrected in the plates wher- 
 ever possible, otherwise noted in a list of corrections and additions 
 at the end of the book. My thanks are due to Prof. Lanman, and 
 Prof. H. F. Burton of Rochester, for corrections furnished. 
 
 E. D. P. 
 
 New York, September, 1886. 
 
Table of Contents, 
 
 in systematic grammatical arrangement. 
 
 Th« fignres in heavy type refer to paragraphs. 
 
 Introdnctory suggestions, p. xi. 
 
 I. Alphabet and Sonnds. 
 
 Characters, I — 20. — Classification of Sonnds, and Pronnnciation, 
 21 — 47. — Light and Heavy Syllables, 48. — Accent, 56. 
 
 n. Changes of Sounds. 6ana and Yrddhi. 
 49—54. 
 
 m. Bnles of Enphonie Combination. 
 
 Rules of Vowel Combination, 105, 106, 156—161, 164. — General 
 Laws concerning Finals, 239 — 242. — Deaspiration, 242. — 
 Transferral of Aspiration, 244, 249, 428. — Surd and Sonant 
 Assimilation, 147, 148, 266, 267. — Combinations of Final 
 « and r, 95, 117—123, 129. — Conversion of « to s, p. 27 (note**), 
 191, 192, 342, 352. — Conversion of n to n, p. 32 (note**), 166. — 
 ConvMsion of Dental Mntes to Lingnals and Palatals, 149, 150, 
 p. 99 (note), 342. — Combinations of n, p. 29 (note), 138—140, 
 184. — Change of ch to cch, p. 27 (note*), 165. — Combinations 
 of TO, p. 29 (note). — Final n [and «] 184. — Final Ic, t, p, 266. 
 — Final t, 148—151. 
 
 lY. Declension. 
 
 Gender, Number, Case, 83—89. — Case-endings, 90, 91. — 
 Pada-endinga, 91, 241. 
 
 y. Substantives and Adjectives. 
 
 Vowel-stems : 
 Stems in a, m. n., 103, III. — Stems in i, m., 113, 115; n., 114, 115. 
 
Vlll 
 
 — Stems in u, m., 128; n., 136, 137. — Stems in i and u, f., 
 185—187. — Stems in a, t, U: (a) Root-words. In a, 212, 213; 
 in i, 189, 212, 214; in u, 197, 212, 214. (b) Derivative Stems, f. 
 In a, 162; in t, 183; in u, 198. — Stems in r, 201—205, 208. — 
 Stems in Diphthongs : go, 209 ; nau, 211 ; red, 277. 
 
 Consonant-stems : 
 
 General, 237—242. — (a) Root-stems, 243, 244, 246—250. — 
 (b) Derivative Stems. In as, is, us, 252 — 254. In an {an, man, 
 van), 265. — In in (in, min, viri), 251. — In ant (ant, mant, vant) 
 256 — 264. — Perfect Participles in vans, 268. — Comparatives 
 in yas, 255. 
 
 Irregular Nouns: 269—284. 
 
 Comparison, 337—345. 
 
 Formation of Feminine-stems, 187, 251, 255, 262—264, 268. 
 
 VI. Nnmerals. 
 328—336. 
 
 TIT. Prononns. 
 
 223—236, 285—288, 413. 
 
 Till. Conjugation. 
 
 Voice, Tense, Mode, Number, Person, 57—65. — Verbal Ad- 
 jectives and Nouns, 66—68. Secondary Conjugation, 69—70. — 
 Mode and Tense-stems, 71. 
 
 IX. Present-System. 
 
 Conjugation Classes, 72 — 80. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 General, 383—387. 
 
 I. Root-class (Hindu second or ad-class), 404—412, 414 
 
 —429. 
 II. Reduplicating Class (H. third o^ Aw-class), 430—440. 
 
 III. Nasal Class (H. seventh or rudh-al&ss), 441—446. 
 
 IV. Nu and w-Classes CH. fifth and eighth, or su and ten- 
 classes), 388—395. 
 
 V. iVs-Class (H. ninth or M-class), 399- 403. 
 
Second, or a-Conjugation. 
 
 VI. a-Class (H. first or bhu-dass), 92—94, 97—102, 134, 
 135, 152—154, 178—182, 188, 193—196, 199, 200, 206, 
 207, 210, 222, 260. 
 VII. Accented a-Class (Hindu sixth or tud-c\a,ss), 107—110, 
 
 152—154 etc. (as for a-class). 
 VIII. ya-Cl&ss (H. fourth or dw-class), 124—127, 131—134, 
 152 — 155 etc. (as for a-class). 
 IX. Accented ^a-Class or Passive Conjugation, 168—176, 
 188, 199, 200, 210, 222. 
 [Causative and Denominative Conjugation (partly =H. tenth 
 or cwr-class), 141—146, 152 — 154 etc. (as for a-class); 
 also 215-221.] 
 
 X. Perfect-System. 
 447—471, 474. 
 Periphrastic Perfect, 472, 473. 
 
 XI. Aorist-System. 
 
 General, 486. — Simple Aorist: Root-aorist, 487; o-aorist, 
 488. — Reduplicated Aorist, 489, 490. — Sibilant Aorist; 
 s-aorist, 491; is-aorist, 492; si«-aorist, 493; «a-aorist, 494. — 
 Aorist Passive, 495, 496. 
 
 Xn. Fntnre-System. 
 
 General, 475. — Simple Future, 476—481. — Conditional, 482. 
 — Periphrastic Future, 483—485. 
 
 Xm. Terbal Adjectives and Substantives: Participles, Infinitive, 
 Gerund. 
 
 Passive Participle in ta or na, 289 — 301. — Past Active Par- 
 ticiple in tavant or navant, 302, 303. — Gerunds: Absolutives, 
 304—313. — Infinitive, 314 — 322. — Future Passive Participles : 
 Gerundives, 323—327. 
 
 XIV. Derivative or Secondary Conjngations. 
 
 General, 497. — Passive, 498. — Causative, 507, 508. — 
 Intensive, 499—502. — Desiderative, 503—506. — Denomina- 
 tive, 509, 510. 
 
 XV. Periphrastic Conjugation. 
 Perfect, 472, 473. — Future, 483—485. 
 
XVI. Verbal Prefixes; Adverbs and Prepositions. 
 81, 82, 167, 190, 395—397. 
 
 XVn. Formation of Compound Stems. 
 
 Classification, 346—353. — Copulative Compounds, 354—357. — 
 Determinative Compounds, 358; Dependent, 359 — 361; De- 
 scriptive, 362—365. — Secondary Adjective Compounds, 366 — 
 370; Possessive, 371—377; with Governed Final Member, 378. 
 — Adjective Compounds as Nouns and Adverbs, 350, 379—381. 
 [Dwawtfeo-compounds, p. 136 (note) ; Tatpurusa-componnia, p. 137 
 (note); Karmadharaya-compoxmds, p. 137 (note); JDvigu-com- 
 pounds, 380; ^aAMonAj-compounds, p. 142 (note); Avyayibhava- 
 compounds, 381.] 
 
 XVin. Syntactical Rules. 
 
 Position of Modifiers, p. 35 (note). — Repetition of Words, p. 67 
 (note*). — Agreement of Adjectives, 245. — Force of Cases, 
 104, 112. — Prepositions with Cases, 82, 130. — Mm with 
 Instrumental (and Genitive), p. 89 (note). — Construction with 
 Comparatives, 345. — Numerals, 333. — Pronouns, 225, 234 
 — 236. — iti, p. 47 (note). — Force of Tenses: Present, 96; 
 Imperfect, 182; Perfect, 474; Aorist, 486. — Force of Modes: 
 Imperative, 194-196; Optative, 207. — Causative, 221. — 
 Passive, 177. — Past Passive Participle, 290. — Past Active 
 Participle, 303. — Gerund, 311—313. — Infinitive, 320—322. — 
 Future Passive Participle, 327. 
 
 Appendix. 
 
 Hindu Names of Letters. — Modern Hindu Accentuation of 
 Sanskrit. 
 
Suggestions for using the Primer. 
 
 The Primer can be finished by earnest students in sixteen or 
 seventeen weeks, reckoning three lessons per week, with here and 
 there an hour for review. After that Lanman's Sanskrit Eeader, 
 an introduction to which this work is partly intended to be, should 
 be taken up. Students are strongly recommended to provide 
 themselves with Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar at the outset. 
 
 It seemed advisable to leave the Introduction undivided into 
 lessons, as different teachers may prefer to impart the alphabet, 
 etc., to their scholars at different rates of speed. Some of the 
 exercises for translation may be found rather too long to be com- 
 pleted in one lesson. In such cases it will probably be better, 
 after requiring the translation of only so many sentences as the 
 pupil may reasonably be expected to master in the preparation of 
 one day's lesson, to proceed directly to the next lesson in the 
 following hour, leaving the untranslated sentences for a review. 
 
 The vocabularies prefixed to each exercise are not exhaustive, 
 since words which have been treated of immediately before are 
 sometimes omitted from them. The glossaries at the end of the 
 book will, it is hoped, be found complete for the exercises; but 
 the meaning of compound words must in most cases be learned 
 from their elements; and proper names have often been omitted, 
 their Sanskrit forms being discernible from the transliteration. 
 
 The table of contents in systematic grammatical arrangement 
 is designed to facilitate the finding of any desired article; it may 
 also be found useful as an outline for a rapid grammatical review. 
 
 Arrangement of Tocabnlaries. The vocabularies are arranged 
 
xu 
 
 in strict alphabetic order (see below). All nouns, whether sub- 
 stantives or adjectives, are given in the stem-form. All verb-forms 
 are placed under the root; prepositional compounds of verbs like- 
 wise, and not in the alphabetic place of the preposition. Of 
 verbal adjectives and nouns, some important ones have been given 
 in their alphabetic places, but the meaning of most of them must 
 be learned from their respective roots. Pronouns are given generally 
 in the form of the nominative. 
 
 Alphabetic Order. The alphabetic order is that given in § I, 
 but the following points are to be noticed here: 
 
 The visarga stands next after the vowels; but a visarga re- 
 garded as equivalent to a sibilant and exchangeable with it has 
 the alphabetic place of that sibilant. 
 
 The sign n, representing "the anusvara of more independent 
 origin", has its place before all the mutes etc.; thus dafif and 
 danstra stand before daksa. 
 
 The sign m, representing an assimilated m, is placed according 
 to its phonetic value. 1. If A, resulting from the assimilation of 
 9» to a ssmivowel, sibilant, or h, represent a nasal semivowel or 
 anusvara^ then its place is like that of w. Thus pums comes before 
 punya and samgaya before sakrt. 2. But if m be the product of 
 m assimilated to a mute, representing n, n, ^, n, or m, then its 
 place is that of the nasal so represented. 
 
Introduction. 
 
 Alphabet. 
 
 I. Sanskrit is commonly written in what is called the 
 Devanagari alphabet. The characters of this, and the European 
 characters which will be used in transliterating them, are as follows: 
 
 simple 
 
 diphthongs 
 
 Vowels. 
 
 short 
 ^ a 
 palatal '^ i 
 labial '^ u 
 lingual -^ r 
 dental '^ / 
 palatal 
 labial 
 
 long 
 
 Tie "H at 
 ^ ^ au 
 
 Visarga J h. 
 
 Anus vara — n or m. 
 
 ~X^ 
 
2 Introduction. 
 
 / J 
 
 Semivowels JP"'"*"^^' 2^ lingual T r 
 
 I dental ^ I labial '^ v. 
 
 Sibilants: palatal IJ p; lingual tf s; dental ^ a. 
 
 Aspiration ^ h. 
 
 2. The aboye order is that in which the sounds are catalogued 
 by native grammarians; and European scholars have adopted it 
 as the alphabetic order, for dictionaries, ^tc. The writing runs 
 from left to right. 
 
 3. The theory of the devanagari mode of writing is syllabic 
 and consonantal. That is, it regards as the written unit, not the 
 simple sound, but the syllable; and further, it regards as the sub- 
 stantial part of the syllable the consonant (or the consonants) pre- 
 ceding the vowel — this latter being merely implied, as is the 
 case with short ^ a, except when initial, or, if written, being 
 written by a subordinate sign attached to the consonant. 
 
 4. Hence follow these two principles: 
 
 A. The forms of the vowel- characters given above are used 
 only when the vowel forms a syllable by itself, or is not combined 
 with a preceding consonant: that is, when it is initial, or preceded 
 by another vowel. In combination with a consonant, other modes 
 of representition are used. 
 
 B. If more than one consonant precede a vowel, forming 
 with it a single syllable, their characters must be combined into 
 a single character. 
 
 5. According to the Hindu mode of dividing syllables, each 
 syllable must end in a vowel, or visarga, or anusvara, except at 
 the end of the word; and as ordinary Hindu usage does not divide 
 the words of a sentence in writing, a final consonant is combined 
 into one syllable with the initial vowel or consonant of the following 
 word, so that a syllable ends in a consonant only at the end of 
 the sentence. 
 
Introduction. 3 
 
 Thus the sentence ks^Aresu sHct4bhtr meghanam adbhir dhdnyam 
 praru(}ham — ' by the water which drops from the clouds upon the 
 fields the grain grows tall' — would be considered as consisting of 
 the syllables k§e tre fM si ktO. bhi rme gha na ma dbhi rdha nyam 
 pra ru 4ham. Each of these syllables would be indicated by a 
 single group of signs, without any reference whatever to the di- 
 vision of the words composing the sentence; and the syllables 
 are always written independently, with more or less closeness of 
 approach; either like this: 
 
 % ■% g fir. WT f*t *f 'sn 'n ^ t^ >5t 5«i TT ^ ? Ji: — or thus : %^ j- 
 
 6. In Sanskrit works printed in Europe, the common practice 
 is to separate the words so far as this can be done without any 
 alteration of the written form. Thus, ^•j(I*J' SW! indraya nama^ ; 
 but t)(4jf%.(l4T*!^1 '"* savitur varenyam, because the final j^^ t and 
 T r are not written with their full forms. But some few works 
 have been printed, in which, by a free use of a sign called virama 
 (see below, § 8), the individual words are separated. 'In translite- 
 rated texts there is no good reason for printing otherwise than 
 with all the words separated. 
 
 7. Under A. Vowels combined with preceding consonants 
 are written as follows: 
 
 1. a: Short a has no written sign at all; the consonant-sign 
 itself implies a following a, unless some other vowel-sign is 
 attached to it (or else the virama — see below, § 8). Thus 
 the consonant-signs given above are really the signs for ka, 
 kha, ca, cha, etc. (as far as ^ ha). 
 
 2. a: efiT ka. ^^ ca. ^T dha etc. 
 
 3. i and i: f^ ki. fq pi. fvi dhi. — eft H. ij^ pi. vt dhl. 
 The hook above, turning to the left or to the right, is histori- 
 cally the essential part of the character, having been originally 
 
4 Introduction. 
 
 the whole of it: the hooks were only later prolonged, so 
 as to reach all the way down beside the consonant. Observe 
 that the i-hooks and the u-hooks, respectively above and 
 below the line, are analogous in turning to the left for the 
 short vowel and to the right for the long. 
 
 4. u and u: 'a ku. ^ c«. ^ 6m. — qj hu. ^ cm. "V^ bhu. Owing 
 to the necessities of combination, consonant and vowel-sign 
 are sometimes disguised; thus, ^ du, '3" du; '^ rw, ^ rM ; 'g' 
 or ^ hu, ^ hu. 
 
 5. r and f ; oB kr, Xf pr. — m kr. T{ tf. With the ^-sign, 
 the vowel - hook is usually attached to the middle ; thus, 
 f hr. 6. I: "SRkl. 
 
 7. Diphthongs, e: % ke. ^ pe. % ye. di: ^ kdi. ^ dhai. 
 o: ^ ko. J^^ bho. du: c^ kdu. "^ rdu. 
 In some printed texts the signs for o and au are separated, 
 the .li. or .^. being placed over the consonant-sign, and not over the 
 perpendicular stroke; thus, %t ko, %I kdu. 
 
 8. A consonant-sign may be made to signify the sound of 
 that consonant alone, without an added vowel, by writing beneath 
 it a stroke called the virdma ('rest', ' stop'); thus, efi A, '^ h, 'Zd. 
 Strictly, the virdma should be used only at the end of a sentence; 
 but it is often used by scribes, or in print, in the middle of a word 
 or sentence, to avoid awkward or difficult combinations; thus, 
 f%^gfi^: li4bhih, ^m litsu, 
 
 9. Under B. The combinations of consonants are in general 
 not difficult. The perpendicular and horizontal lines are common 
 to almost all; and if two or more are to be combined, the following 
 method is pursued. The characteristic part of a consonant-sign 
 that is to be added to another is taken (to the exclusion of the 
 perpendicular or of the horizontal framing -line, or of both), and 
 tbey are put together according to convenience, either side by side, 
 
Introduction. 5 
 
 or one above the other: in some combinations either arrangement 
 is allowed. The consonant to be pronounced first is set first in 
 the one arrangement, and above in the other arrangement. Only 
 the consonant at the right of a horizontal group, and that at the 
 top of a perpendicular group, are written in full. 
 
 Examples of the horizontal arrangement are: 
 
 "T ggo:, ^ jja, xg pya, ^ nma, -^ ttha, «f bhj/a, ^ ska, 
 "QSf sna. 
 
 Examples of the perpendicular arrangement are : fg kka, ^ Ka, 
 U kva, ^ nja, TfT pta, ^ tna. 
 
 10. In some combinations there is more or less abbreviation or 
 disguise of the independent form of a consonant-sign. 
 
 Thus, of gi fc in '3f kta ; and in gpTJf kna, ^ kya etc. ; 
 of (^ t in tI tta; 
 
 of ^ d in sT dga, ^ rfrfa, ^ ddha, ^ dbha etc. ; 
 of J^^ m and "U y, when following other consonants; 
 thus, '^kya, gif kma, ^ nma, ^ dma, ^ dya, ^hma, 
 
 IT fiy^, ^ tfiyO'> ST 4!>ya; 
 
 of l^t f, which generally becomes '(^ when followed by 
 a consonant; thus, '^ fca, "^ gna, "^ gla, '^H gya. 
 The same change is usual when a vowel- sign is 
 added below; thus, ^ fw, "st gr. 
 
 11. Other combinations, of not quite obvious value, are ^ nna^ 
 ■g sta, '5 stha; and the compounds of ^ A, as ^ hna, "^ hna. 
 
 12. In a case or two, no trace of the constituent letters is 
 ■recognizable; thus, ^ ksa, "% jna. 
 
 13. The semivowel "^ r, in making combinations' with other 
 consonants, is treated in a wholly peculiar manner, analogous with 
 that of the vowels. 1. As the first of a group of consonants it is 
 written with a hook above, opening to the right (like the subjoined 
 sign of f); thus, '^ rka, ■^ rpta. When a compound consonant 
 
 ■^ 
 
6 Introduction. 
 
 thus containing r as its first member is followed by one of the 
 vowels i, I, e, o, at, au, with or without a nasal symbol, the r- 
 sign must stand at the extreme right; thus, ^rke, %f rko, %rrMM, 
 f^ rki, efif rhl, «B rkam, 'Sf|Xf^ rkansi, iff rbMih. 
 
 2. If pronounced after another consonant or consonants, r is 
 indicated by a slanting stroke below, to the left; thus, X(gra, If pra, 
 ■^ sra, 'a' dra. And, with modifications of the preceding consonant- 
 sign like those noted above, '^ tra, ^ fra. In the middle of a 
 group, r has the same sign as at the end ; thus, J3T grya, ^ srva. 
 
 3. When "^^ r is to be combined with a following ^ r, it is 
 the vowel which is written in full, with its initial character, and 
 the consonant in subordination to it; thus, "^ rr, fsj'^fll nirj-ti. 
 
 14. Combinations of three, four, or even five consonants (this 
 latter excessively rare) are made according to the same rules; thus, 
 ■^ itoa, ^ ddfiya, gf dvya, 5f drya, X^ psva, (^ tsya, "^ fcya, 
 ^ sthya; "^ nksva, ^T ?t'>'yo, r^^T tsmya; "r^et rtsnya. 
 
 15. Both MSS. and type-fonts difi'er considerably in their 
 management of consonant-combinations, but a little practice will 
 enable one who is thoroughly familiar with the simple signs and 
 with the principles of combination to decipher, as well as to make 
 for himself, all such groups. 
 
 16. A sign (J) called the avagraha, or 'separator', is used in 
 printed texts to mark the elision of initial a after final e or o (see 
 below, § 119, 158): thus rl i3«f "^ te ^bruvan. But some texts, 
 especially those printed in India, dispense with this sign. 
 
 In our transliteration this sign will be represented by the 
 inverted comma, as in the example just given. In the MSS. the $ 
 is also used as a hyphen, and sometimes as a mark of hiatus. 
 
 17. The sign » is used to mark an omission of something easily 
 understood (whether from the context, or from previous knowledge). 
 
Introduction. 7 
 
 and thus becomes a mark of abbreviation; thus, ^1(1^ "T^ "^f 
 gatas -tarn -tena, i. e. gatam gatena etc. 
 
 18. The only signs of punctuation are | and ||. 
 
 19. The numeral figures are 
 
 «| 1, :^ 2, ^ 3, U 4, M 5, § 6, ^ 7, r: 8, Q. 9, 0. 
 In combination, to express larger numbers, they are used precisely 
 as are European digits; thus, ^{{ 24, J{c;q 485, ^^^0 7620. This 
 system of notation originated in India, and was brought to Europe 
 by the Arabs, who call it the Indian system, as we style it the 
 Arabic. 
 
 20. In writing Sanskrit the Hindus generally begin at the left 
 of the letter, and make the horizontal top-stroke last; thus, T, *l, 
 "Ti ^> ^; '3T> I) <n, ^- But often the horizontal stroke is made 
 first, and the perpendicular stroke added without raising the pen 
 from the paper; thus, 1, ^; ^, ^. 
 
 System of Sounds: Pronunciation. 
 
 21. The Sanskrit is used in India to this day very much as 
 Latin was used in Europe in the previous century : it is a common 
 medium of communication between the learned, be their native 
 tongues what they may, and it is not the vernacular of any district 
 whatever. Hence it is not strange that the pronunciation of San- 
 skrit words varies greatly among scholars from different parts of 
 India; and probably no one system represents the true ancient 
 mode- of utterance with much exactness. 
 
 I. Vowels. 
 
 22. A. The a, i, and w-TOwels. These three occur both short 
 and long, and are to be pronounced in the 'Italian' manner — as 
 in (or-)gan and father, pin and pique, pull and rule, respectively. The 
 
8 Introduction. 
 
 a- vowel stands in no relation of kindred y?ith any of the classes 
 of consonantal sounds. But the i- vowel is distinctly palatal, and 
 the u-vowel as distinctly labial. 
 
 23. B. The r and Z- vowels. Both of these are plainly the 
 result of abbreviating syllables containing a "^ r or <5^_ Z along with 
 another vowel: r is to be sounded like the re in the English /6re, 
 / like le in able. 
 
 24. C. The diphthongs. 1. The e and o, which are always 
 long, should receive the long e and o-sounds of the English they 
 and bone, without true diphthongal character. In their origin, both 
 were doubtless in the main pure diphthongs (e = a + i, o = a + u); 
 but they lost this character at a very early period. 
 
 2. The ai and du are spoken like the ai in English aisle and au 
 in German Baum (ou in English house) ; that is, as pure diphthongs 
 with long prior element. They were originally, doubtless, distin- 
 guished from e and o only by the length of the first element. 
 
 II. Consonants. 
 
 25. A. Mntes. In each series of mutes there are two surd 
 members, two sonants, and one nasal (also sonant) ; e. g., in the 
 labial series, the surds p and ph, the sonants b and bh, and the 
 sonant m. 
 
 26. The first and third members of each series are the ordinary 
 corresponding surd and sonant mutes of European languages; thus, 
 k and g, t and d, p and b. 
 
 27. Nor is the character of the nasal any more doubtful. 
 What m is to p and b, or n is to t and d, that is also each other 
 nasal to its own series of mutes: a sonant expulsion of breath into 
 
 ^nd through the nose, while the mouth-organs are in the mute- 
 contact. 
 
 28. The second and fourth of each series are aspirates; thus, 
 
Introduction. 9 
 
 beside the surd mute k we have the corresponding surd aspirate 
 M, and beside the sonant g, the corresponding aspirate gh. It is 
 usual among European scholars to pronounce both classes of aspi- 
 rates as the corresponding non- aspirates with a very closely fol- 
 lowing li; e. g., ih nearly as in boathouse, ph as in haphazard, dh 
 as in madhouse. This is inaccurate so far as the sonants are con- 
 cerned; but the question of their original sound is one of great 
 difficulty, and still unsettled. 
 
 29. The aspirates are not double letters. 
 
 The several mute-series will now be taken up in detail. 
 
 30. 1. Gutturals: k, kh, g, gh; n. These are the ordinary 
 English k and g ("hard")-sounds, with their corresponding aspirates 
 and nasal; the last, like ng in singing. 
 
 31. 2. Palatals: c, ch, j, jh, n. This whole series is derivative, 
 being generated by the corruption of original gutturals. (The palatal 
 mute c and the sibilant f often represent two successive stages 
 of corruption of k; the corresponding degrees of corruption oi g are 
 both represented by /) For this reason the euphonic treatment 
 of the palatals is in many respects peculiar. The palatal mutes 
 c and j are pronounced with the compound sounds of English 
 ch and j, as in church and judge. See also § 28. 
 
 32. 3. Lingnals: t, ih, d, dh, n. The lingual mutes are said 
 to be uttered with the tip of the tongue turned up and drawn back 
 into the dome of the palate, somewhat as the English (or rather 
 American) smooth r, e. g. in very is pronounced. In practice 
 European Sanskritists make no attempt to distinguish them from 
 the dentals: t is pronounced like t, 4 like d, and so on. 
 
 33. 4. Dentals: t, ih, d, dh, n. These are practically the 
 equivalents of our so-called dentals t, d, n.* 
 
 * But the Hindus generally use Unguals to represent the English 
 dentals ; thus, ^n^*T lan^ana = 'London.' 
 
10 Introduction. 
 
 34. 5. Labials: p, ph, b, bh, m. These are exactly the equi- 
 valents of the English p, b, m. 
 
 35. B. Semivowels : y, r, Z, v. 1. The palatal semivowel y 
 stands in the closest relationship with the vowel i (short or long): 
 the two exchange with one another in cases innumerable. Very 
 probably the Sanskrit y had everywhere more of an j-character 
 than our y. 
 
 36. 2. The r is clearly a lingual sound. It thus resembles 
 the English smooth r, and like this seems to have been untrilled. 
 
 37. 3. The Z is a sound of dental position, quite as in English. 
 
 38. 4. The labial v is pronounced as English or French v by 
 the modern Hindus — except when preceded by a consonant 
 (except r) in the same syllable, when it sounds like English w; 
 and European scholars follow the same practice (with or without 
 the same exception). But strictly the v stands related to an u- 
 vowel precisely as y to an i-vowel: that is, it is a m- sound in the 
 English sense, or perhaps more like the ou in French oui. The 
 rules of Sanskrit euphony aifecting this sound, and the name "semi- 
 vowel", have no application except to such a M-sound : a v- sound 
 (German w) is no semivowel, but a spirant, like the English th- 
 soundsand/; IKt .yt.v.-r 5= » m m,- «»-( Ms. U^^-.j^ son.v.-^-r. 
 
 39. C. Sibilants: f, s, s. 1. The s is of plain character: a 
 dental, and exactly like the English s (as in lesson — never as 
 in ease). 
 
 40. 2. The s is the sibilant pronounced in the lingual position. 
 It is, therefore, a kind of «A-sound, and by Europeans is pronounced 
 as ordinary English sh, no attempt being made to give it its 
 proper lingual quality. 
 
 41. 3. The p is by all native authorities described as palatal. 
 It is the usual sh- sound of English, though the Hindus are said 
 
Introduction. 1 1 
 
 to speak it somewhat differently nowadays. By Europeans it is 
 variously pronounced — perhaps oftener as « than as sh. 
 
 42. All three sibilants are always surd. 
 
 43» D. Aspiration: h. This is usually pronounced like the 
 ordinary European surd aspiration A. But its true value in the 
 euphony of the language is that of a sonant. It is not an original 
 sound of the language, but comes in most cases from an older gh, 
 in some few cases from dh or hh,. It appears to include in itself 
 two stages of corruption oi gh: one corresponding with that oik 
 to c, the other with that of k to f. 
 
 44. E. Yisarga: ^. The h appears to be merely a surd breath- 
 ing, a final h- sound (in the European sense of h), uttered in the 
 articulating position of the preceding vowel. The visarga is not 
 original, but always a mere substitute for final » or r. 
 
 45. F. AnnsTara. The amisvdra, n or m, is a nasal sound 
 lacking that closure of the organs which is required to make a 
 nasal mute; in its utterance there is nasal resonance along with 
 some degree of openness of the mouth. European scholars give 
 the anusvdra the value of the nasal in the French -an, -on, -en, -in, 
 etc., which is a mere nasal coloring of the preceding vowel. 
 
 46. Two different signs, — and «!., are used in the MSS. to 
 indicate the anusvara. Most commonly ±. is employed; ^ will 
 not often be met with in printed texts, except to mark the change 
 of a nasal mute to anusvdra before a following semivowel, parti- 
 cularly I; thus, tlT^ ^asn^ ianl labdhdn. Cf. § 139. 
 
 47. It is convenient in transliteration to distinguish the assi- 
 milated m (in all cases) by a special sign m, from the anusvdra of 
 more independent origin, represented by n. 
 
12 
 
 Introduction. 
 
 Light and Heavy Syllables. 
 
 48. For metrical purposes syllables (not vowels) are dis- 
 tinguished as 'heavy' and 'light'. A syllable is heavy if its vowel 
 is long, or short and followed by more than one consonant ("long 
 by position"). Visarga and anusvara are here counted as full con- 
 sonants. The aspirated mutes, of course, do not count as double 
 letters. 
 
 Changes of Sounds. Guna and Vrddhi. 
 
 49. The changes to which both the vowels and the consonants 
 of Sanskrit are subject are very numerous. Among the vowel- 
 changes, the most regular and frequent are the so-called guna and 
 vfddhi, which are of frequent occurrence in derivation and inflection. 
 
 50. The following table exhibits these changes: 
 
 Simple vowels 
 
 ^a ^d 
 
 T' V 
 
 ■^M ^U 
 
 "^r 
 
 Guna 
 
 ■^a W« 
 
 Tie 
 
 '^ 
 
 ^T ar 
 
 Vrddhi 
 
 ^T a 
 
 Tfflj. 
 
 "^h au 
 
 ^TT ar 
 
 51. Theoretically the changes of f would coincide with those 
 of f, and the vrddhi of Z would be al; but actual cases of these 
 are quite unknown. The guij.a of I is al (just as that of r is ar), 
 but it occurs only in one root, kip. As will be seen in the sequel, 
 the guna-aounA coincides with the result of the combination ot 
 an '^ a with the simple vowel corresponding to that guria; thus, ^ a 
 combines with a following '^ i or f^ « into TJ e, which is also the 
 guna of ^ i and f^ t. The vrddhi, in like manner, is identical 
 with the result of combining an '^ a with the corresponding 
 guna; thus, ^ a combines with a following X[ « into ^ ai, the 
 vrddhi of ^ « and ^ I. For the present the table is to be learned 
 outright. 
 
 52. In all gunating processes ^ a remains unchanged — or, 
 
Introduction. 1 3 
 
 as it is sometimes expressed, ^ a is its own guna; ^ a remains 
 unchanged for both guna and vrddhi. 
 
 53. The 5fM»!a- increment does not, except in exceedingly rare 
 instances, take place in a heavy syllable (see § 48) ending in a 
 consonant: e. g., t%f^^ cit may become %c^ cet, and ^ m may 
 become ^ we; but f^SrT cint or f^Tt^" nind or ^^ jw may not 
 become ^«fl cent or wp^" nend or ^H _/««;. 
 
 54. Other changes of vowels and consonants occur very fre- 
 quently, in the making-up of single words from roots, by means 
 of suffixes and endings, and in the formation of compound words 
 by the union of two or more stems — a process of the very 
 greatest frequency in Sanskrit. Furthermore, in the form in which 
 the language is handed down to us by the literature, the words 
 composing a sentence or paragraph are adapted to and combined 
 with each other by nearly the same rules as those which govern the 
 making of compounds, so that it is impossible to take apart and 
 understand the simplest sentence in Sanskrit without understanding 
 those rules. The most important of the rules for such combination 
 will be given piecemeal in the lessons. 
 
 Roots and Stems. 
 
 55. A knowledge on the student's part of the meaning and 
 application of the terms root, stem, personal ending, etc., is pre- 
 supposed. The formative processes by which both inflectional 
 forms and derivative stems are made, by the addition of endings 
 to bases and roots, are more regular and transparent in Sanskrit 
 than in any other Indo-European language.* 
 
 In the present work, which aims preeminently to give the 
 student considerable practical acquaintance with the language 
 within a brief compass of lessons, not every given form will be 
 explained by analysis. But wherever any explanation of forms is 
 given, it will of course be according to this method. 
 
14 Introduction. 
 
 Accent. 
 
 56. The phenomena of accent are, by the Hindu grammarians 
 of all ages alike, described and treated as depending on a variation 
 of tone or pitch; of any difference of stress involved, they make 
 no account. These accents are marked only in certain Vedic texts, 
 and employed only in their recitation, -whereas the accents used 
 nowadays by Hindus in the pronunciation of Sanskrit (and left 
 undenoted in writing) are mainly ictus-accents, i. e. variations of 
 stress. The principles of the latter system will be given in an 
 appendix. The older system of accents has great etymological im- 
 portance; the latter none whatever; and only the older system 
 will be referred to in the following. Here it will be enough to state 
 that the primary tones or accent-pitches of the older system are 
 two: a higher, or acute; and a lower, or grave. A third, called 
 svarita, is always of secondary origin, being -ordinarily the result 
 of actual combination of an acute vowel and a grave vowel into 
 one syllable. It is uniformly defined as compound in pitch, a union 
 of higher and lower tone within the limits of a single syllable. It 
 is thus identical in physical character with the Greek and Latin 
 circumflex, and fully entitled to be called by the same name. 
 Whenever, in the sequel, accent is mentioned, without further de- 
 finition, the acute accent is to be understood; And it will be de- 
 signated by the ordinary acute sign. 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 H, 57. The Sanskrit verb exhibits the closest analogy with that 
 of Greek, being developed in tense-systems, as outgrowths of certain 
 tense-stems. In the older stage of the language, i. e. in the so- 
 called Vedic period, the modal ramifications of each tense - stem 
 are as numerous as in Greek; but in the later stage, the Sanskrit 
 proper (also called the classical language), these outgrowths have 
 
iDtroduction. 15 
 
 been lopped off to so very great an extent, that with one insigni- 
 ficant exception, the precative or aorist optative, only the present- 
 system still retains any modal variety whatever. 
 
 58. There is a simple or ordinary conjugation of verbal roots, 
 which we call primary; and there are certain more or less fully 
 developed secondary or derivative conjugations (§ 69). 
 
 59. Voices. There are two voices, active and middle, which extend 
 throughout the whole system of conjugation. For the present- 
 system alone there is a special passive inflection; the middle forms 
 outside that system, and sometimes even within it, are liable to 
 be used likewise in a passive sense. An active form is called by 
 the Hindu grammarians parasmdi padam 'word for another'; a 
 middle form, atmane padam 'word for one's self.' Some verbs are 
 conjugated in both voices, others in one only; sometimes some of 
 the tenses are inflected only in one voice, others only in the other 
 voice, or in both ; of a verb usually inflected in one voice sporadic 
 forms of the other occur; and sometimes the voice diff'ers as the 
 verb is compounded with certain prepositions. 
 
 60. Persons and l^nmbers. There are three persons: first, 
 second, and third; and, as with substantives, adjectives, and pro- 
 nouns, three numbers: singular, dual, and plural. All these persons 
 and numbers are made from every tense and mode — except that 
 the first persons of the imperative are really subjunctive forms. 
 
 61. The native grammarians denote as the first person what 
 we call the third; and as we are wont to speak of the verb 'Ks'^w, 
 the verb tpfjiuM, the verb amo, etc., so the Hindus use for instance 
 *I^f7T hhdvati (3rd sing. pres. indie, of ]/hhu) to signify the whole 
 system of verbal forms from that root, since V{^fH heads the list 
 of forms in the native grammar, as X/you, or tp-j^o/Mi, or amo, does 
 in Greek or Latin. The Hindus even make substantives out of 
 
16 Introdaction. 
 
 such catchword forms, and inflect them according to the needs of 
 expression. 
 
 62. In the following, the conjugation-class of verbs will be 
 indicated by the 3rd sing. pres. ind., placed in parenthesis after 
 the root ; thus, Vt bhu (^^f7( hhdvati). 
 
 Os. 
 
 63. Tenses and modeSt The scheme of tenses and modes put 
 forth by the Hindus holds good only for the later language, and 
 even there utterly confounds the ideas of mode and tense. 
 
 64. The only logical arrangement of the modes and tenses in 
 Sanskrit is shown in the following table (which includes only the 
 classical speech): 
 
 I. Present -System: a. Indicative, b. Imperfect, c. Imperative. 
 d. Optative, e. Participle. 
 II. Perfect- System, a. Indicative, b. Participle. 
 
 III. Aorist Systems (of triple formation), a. Indicative, b. Op- 
 tative (sometimes = "Precative"). 
 
 IV. Future Systems. 
 
 A. Sibilant Future, a. Indicative, b. Preterit(= "Conditional''). 
 c. Participle. 
 
 B. Periphrastic Future, a. Indicative. 
 
 65. The tenses here distinguished as imperfect, perfect, and 
 aorist receive those names from their correspondence in mode of 
 formation with tenses so called in other languages of the family, 
 especially in Greek, and not at all from any differences of time 
 designated by them. In no period Of the Sanskrit language is 
 there any expression of imperfect or pluperfect time — nor of 
 perfect time, except in the older language, where the "aorist" has 
 this value; in the later speech, imperfect, perfect, and aorist (of 
 rare use) are so many undiscriminated past tenses or preterits. 
 
Introduction. 17 
 
 Verbal Adjectives and Substantives. 
 
 66. Participles. The participles belonging to the tense-systems 
 have been already indicated in the table at §64. There is, besides, 
 a participle formed directly from the root of the verb, which is 
 prevailingly of past and passive (sometimes neuter) meaning. 
 Moreover, future passive participles, or gerundives, of several 
 different formations, are made, but without connection with the 
 future-stems. 
 
 67. Infinitive. The classical Sanskrit has a single infinitive. 
 It is really an accusative case of a verbal noun, having nothing 
 whatever to do with the tense-systems. 
 
 68. Gemnd. A so-called gerund, or absohitive, is especially 
 frequent, and is, like the infinitive, a stereotyped case -form (in- 
 strumental) of a derivative verbal noun. Its value is that of an 
 indeclinable active participle, with indetermrnate, but oftenest past, 
 temporal force. 
 
 Secondary Conjugations. 
 
 69. The secondary conjugations are as follows: 1. Passivej 
 2. Intensive; 3. Desiderativei 4. Cansative.^ In these, not the 
 simple root, but a conjugation-stem, underlies the whole system 
 of inflections. Tet in them all is plainly visible the character of 
 a present-system, expanded into a more or less complete conjuga- 
 tion ; the passive is palpably a present-system. Compare § 58 — 59. 
 
 70. Under the same general head belong: 5. Denominative 
 conjugation, which results from the conversion of noun-stems, both 
 substantive and adjective, into conjugation-stems; 6. Componnd con- 
 jugation, resulting from the preflxion of prepositions to roots, or 
 from the addition of auxiliary verbs to noun-stems ; and 7. Periphrastic 
 conjugation, from the looser combination of auxiliaries with verbal 
 nouns and adjectives. 
 
 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. n 
 
18 Introduction. 
 
 71. The characteristic of a proper (i. e. finite or personal) 
 verb-form is its personal ending. By this alone is determined its 
 character as regards person and number, and in part also as regards. 
 mode and tense. But the distinctions of mode and tense are 
 mainly made by the formation of mode and tense-stems, to which, 
 instead of to the bare root, the personal endings are appended. 
 
 Conjugation -Classes. 
 
 72. Of the whole conjugation, the present -system is the im- 
 portant and prominent part. Its forms are very much more fre- 
 quent than those of all the other systems together. As there is 
 also great variety in the manner in which different roots form their 
 present-stems, this, as being their most conspicuous difference, is 
 made the basis of their principal classification ; and a verb is said 
 to be of this or that conjugation, or class, according to the way 
 in which its present-stem is made. 
 
 73. Of these conjugation- classes there are nine, including the 
 passive, which is really a present-system only. The first five 
 exhibit coincidences enough to justify their inclusion into one con- 
 jugation , and the remaining four will compose likewise a second 
 conjugation. The chief distinctions between the two groups are 
 as follows: 
 
 ; ^'-'' 74. In the first, tfie classes have in common, as their funda- 
 mental characteristic, a shift of accent : the tone is now upon the 
 personal ending, now upon the root or the class-sign. Along with 
 this goes a variation in the stem itself, which has a stronger, or 
 fuller, form when the accent rests upon it, and a weaker, or briefer, 
 form when the accent is on the ending. We distinguish these 
 forms as the strong and the weak stem-forms respectively. 
 
 ^ 75. In the second conjugation, on the contrary, the accent 
 has a fixed place, remaining always upon the same syllable of the 
 
Introduction. 19 
 
 stem, and never being shifted to the endings ; and the distinction of 
 strong and weak forms is unknown. Moreover, the present-stem 
 of every verb in the four classes of this conjugation ends in '^ a. 
 There are also other points of difference. 
 
 76. The classification current among the Hindu, and hitherto 
 among the European, grammarians comprises ten conjugation- 
 classes, arranged according to no intelligible principle whatever. 
 The native "tenth class" is really no present-class at all, but a 
 causative, i. e. a derivative conjugation, which extends beyond the 
 limits of the present-system. Probably the fact that by no means 
 all conjugation- stems formed by the causative sign had really a 
 causative value induced the natives to adopt such a present- class. 
 The Hindu scheme also quite omits the passive. 
 
 Y 77. The Hindu first, sixth, fourth, and tenth classes form the so- 
 called first conjugation of their scheme, which corresponds, except as 
 regards the tenth class, with our second conjugation. The remainder 
 of the classes form the natives' second conjugation, which agrees 
 in the main with our first. 
 
 78. The classes are then as follows: 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 I. The root-class (second or ad-class, of the Hindus); its 
 present-stem is coincident with the root itself; thus, ^5^ i^-, 'eat'; 
 ^ j, 'go'; fl^tr doii, 'hate'. 
 
 II. The rednplicating class (third or Au-class); the root is 
 reduplicated to form the present-stem; thus, gj^/wte from \/^ Am, 
 ' sacrifice ' ; Ad\ dadd from Vda, 'give'. 
 
 ni. The nasal class (seventh or rwrfA-class); a nasal, extended 
 to the syllable na [jioj] in strong forms, is inserted before the final 
 consonant of the root; thus, ^«^ rundh (or ^Tipj ruriadh) from 
 ■(^VI rudh, 'hinder'. 
 
20 Introduction. 
 
 IV. a. The mm- class (fifth or «m- class); the syllable ^ nu is 
 added to the root; thus, W^ sunu from j'^ su, 'press.' 
 
 b. A very small number of roots (only half-a-dozen) ending 
 already in »^ n, and also one very common and irregularly inflected 
 root not so ending (gi kr, ' make '), add ^ u alone to form the 
 present-stem. This is the eighth or ton- class of the Hindu gram- 
 marians; it is best ranked as a sub-class, the u-class; thus, 7[^ tanu 
 from \^'i[^ tan, 'stretch.' 
 
 V. The na- class (ninth or krl- class) ; the syllable MT "« (S>t, 
 in weak forms, ^ nt) is added to the root; thus, sfhp kririd (or 
 jftuTl' krmt) from j/^R^ kri, 'buy'. See note, p. 32. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 ■fxVI. The a-class, or unaccented a-class (first or Jte-class); 
 the added class-sign is a simply; and the root, which bears the 
 accent, is strengthened by guna throughout, if it be capable of 
 taking gurta (see §§ 52—53); thus, t^ bhdva (through the inter- 
 mediate stage bhd-a) from ]/M 6M, 'be.' 
 
 VII. The rf- class, or accented a-class (sixth or iwd- class); 
 the added class-sign is a, as in the preceding class; but it has the 
 accent, and the unaccented root is not strengthened by guna; thus, 
 <T^ tudd from \/ <T? tud, 'thrust.' 
 
 VIII. The j^a- class (fourth or rfj»-class); ya is added to the 
 root, which has the accent; thus, d\tH divya from l/^V^l^ div (by 
 the Hindus given as f^^ div), 'play.' 
 
 IX. The passive conjugation is also properly a present-system 
 only, having a class-sign which is not extended into the other 
 systems; though it differs markedly from the remaining classes 
 in having a specific meaning, and in being formable from all tran- 
 sitive verbs, but with endings of the middle voice only. It forms 
 
Introduction. 21 
 
 its stem hj adding an accented yd to the root; thus, from ]'^|? ad, 
 ■ adyd; from V'-^VI rudh, ^\JI rudhyd. 
 
 79. Roots are not wholly limited, even in the later language, 
 to one mode of formation of their present-stem, but are sometimes 
 reckoned as belonging to two or more different conjugation-classes. 
 
 80. The verbs of our second conjugation show much greater 
 simplicity of formation and inflectiou and are far more frequent 
 and numerous than those of our first; their paradigms will there- 
 fore be given before those of bur first. 
 
 Prepositions and Prepositional Prefixes. 
 
 81. Prepositions, or, more strictly speaking, adverbial prefixes, 
 are used with verbs quite as frequently in Sanskrit as in Greek; 
 and more than one may be prefixed. Thus when \''S(^ &MdA+^I«I 
 anu is given in the vocabulary, this signifies that the preposition 
 ■^TT is prefixed to the proper verbal form; and the 3rd sing. pres. 
 ind. act. of the verb would then be '^rTWlvfiT anubodhati; so dhd 
 + ^T'^,-'^ (or '^IMl) sam-a, 3rd sing. ^^TT^^iTrfiT samadadhati. The 
 rules prevailing in Greek for the prefixion of prepositions, etc., to 
 verbal forms will be found to hold good in Sanskrit. 
 
 82. There is in Sanskrit no proper class of prepositions (in 
 the modern sense of the term); no body of words having as their 
 exclusive office the "government" of nouns. But many adverbial 
 words are used with nouns in a way which approximates them 
 to the more fully developed prepositions of other languages. Words 
 are used prepositionally along with all the noun-cases, except the 
 dative (and of course the nominative and vocative). But in general 
 their office is directive only, determining more definitely, or 
 Strengthening, the proper case-nse of the noun. 
 
22 Introdaction. 
 
 Declension. 
 
 83. The declension of substantives and that of adjectives cor- 
 respond so closely that the two classes of words must be treated 
 together. The pronouns and numerals, on the other hand, exhibit 
 here as in the kindred languages many striking peculiarities. 
 
 84. Ifnmbers and Genders. There are three numbers, singular, 
 dual, and plural; and the usual three genders, masculine, feminine, 
 and neuter. The dual is used much more extensively than in 
 Greek, where it appears in a moribund state. 
 
 85. Cases. The cases are eight in number, given generally in the 
 following order : nominative, accusative, instrumental, dative, ablative, 
 genitive, locative, and vocative. The object sought in the arrange- 
 ment is simply to set next to one another those cases which are 
 to a greater or less extent, in one number or another, identical in 
 form ; and, putting the nominative first, as leading case, there is 
 no other order by which that object could be attained. 
 
 For the uses of the cases in detail see Wh. §§ 267—305. 
 
 86. The stems of substantives and adjectives may for convenience 
 be classified as follows: I. Stems in "^ a. II. Stems in ^ » and ^m. 
 III. Stems in '^ a, ^ i, and ^ u: namely, A. radical- stems, and a 
 few others inflected like them; B. derivative stems. IV. Stems in 
 ^ r (or '^"1^ or). V. Stems in consonants. 
 
 87. Strong and Tveak cases. In stems ending in consonants, 
 and those in '^ r (or '^"^ or), there is seen a distinction of stem- 
 form in different cases. Sometimes the stem-forms are two, when 
 they are called strong and weak respectively; sometimes three: 
 strong, middle, and weakest. As is the case with verbs, this variation 
 of stem-form often goes hand-in-hand with a shift of accent. 
 
 88. In the masculine and feminine, the strong cases are the 
 nom. and ace, both sing, and dual, and the nom. pi. The rest 
 
Introduction. 23 
 
 are weak ; or, if there be the distinction of three stem-forms, then 
 the instr., dat., abl., gen., and loc. sing., the gen. and loc. du., 
 and the gen. pi. (all of which take endings beginning with a vowel), 
 are weakest; and the instr., dat., and abl. du., the instr., dat., abl., 
 and loc. pi. (whose endings begin with coasonants), are middle. 
 
 89. In the neuter, the only strong cases are the nom. and 
 ace. pi. ; if there be the triple distinction, then the nora. and ace. 
 sing, are middle, and the same cases in the dual are weakest. 
 Otherwise the cases are classified as in the masculine. 
 
 90. Case-ending. The normal scheme of case -endings, as 
 recognized by the native grammarians (and conveniently to be 
 assumed as the basis of special descriptions), is this: 
 
 Dual Plural 
 
 m. f. n. m. f. n. 
 
 au 2 as i 
 
 du i as i 
 
 hhyam hhis 
 
 bhydm hhyas 
 
 hhydm bkyas 
 
 OS dm 
 
 OS su 
 
 It applies entire to consonant-stems, and to the radical division 
 of I and M-stems ; and to other vowel-stems, with considerable 
 variations and modifications. The endings which have almost or 
 quite unbroken range, through stems of all classes, are bhydm and 
 OS of the dnal, and bMs, bhyas, dm, and su of the plural. 
 
 91. Fada-endings. The case-endings bhydm, bhis, bhyas, and 
 su — i. e. those of the middle cases — are called pada (" word")- 
 endings. The treatment of stem-finals before them is generally the 
 same as in the combinations of words with one another. 
 
 
 Singular 
 
 
 m. f. n. 
 
 N. 
 
 s m 
 
 A. 
 
 am 
 
 I. 
 
 a 
 
 D. 
 
 e 
 
 Ab. 
 
 as 
 
 G. 
 
 as 
 
 L. 
 
 i 
 
24 Lesson I. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 92. Terbs. Present IndicatiTeactiTe. Unaccented a-class. A 
 
 / 
 
 number of roots conjugated in this class have medial short "^ a. 
 
 Inasmuch as "^ a is its own guna", these roots merely add an ^ a 
 
 ■to form the present-stem; e. g., "Sf^ vad, present-stem ^^^ vdda. 
 
 The final ^ a of the stem is lengthened in the three first persons. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. ' , ^ 
 
 !• '^rrf'T vddami ^^|c|4^ vddavas ^^T^ vddamas 
 
 2. c^dHj vddasi cft^VjiJ^ vddathas W^^ vddatha 
 
 3. ti^fH vddati "f^^ vddatas ^^firf vddanti 
 
 u. 93. The ending of the 3rd plnr. is properly ^f^ anti; it suiTers 
 abbreviation, however, by the loss of its "^ a, in verbs whose stem 
 ends in "^ a. 
 
 r 94. As a heavy syllable ending in a consonant cannot be ganated, 
 a root like ^V^ jlv makes its 3rd sing, ^cfflf jivati; fif.^ nind 
 makes f«|ari fri nindati, etc. See § 53. 
 
 95. Enphonic rule. At the end of a word standing in the 
 final position of a sentence, or alone, ^ s and T f always become 
 visarga ', h; and generally also before cS ^, ?|r M, H ^, XB ph, and 
 before sibilants [^ p, 'B f, ^ «], whether these stand in the same 
 word, or as initial in the following word; e. g. ^^Tre Vi^TK. 
 vadatas punar becomes always ^dd! 'If t vadatalj, pundl}. 
 
 96. Force of the present. The present indicative signifies 
 1. Present time. 2. Immediate futurity. 3. Past time, in lively 
 narration ("historical present"). 
 
I Lesson I. 
 
 25 
 
 nr 
 
 Vocabulary I. 
 Terbs to be conjugated like ^ vad: 
 
 ^^ car (intr.) go, wander, graze 
 (of cattle) ; (tr.) perform, commit. 
 
 ^ fiv live, t^^^"^ ■^it^-^ 
 
 BT^ tyaj leave, abandon, n. > e « 
 
 ^W daA bum. i^^l^ 
 
 ^JTRT tffiae run. 
 
 •n^ nam (intr.) bow, bend one's 
 self; (tr.) honor, reverence. 
 
 TJ^ poK cook. 
 
 fj^pat fall; fly. 
 
 ^ra yaj sacrifice (c. ace. vers, et 
 
 instr. rei). °^ ^ 
 ■?^ raks protect. 
 ff^ vad speak, say. 
 ^^ vas dwell. '^ 
 ^ vah (tr.) carry, bear; (intr.) 
 
 flow, blow, proceed; /"y^. 
 Ij;^ fans praise. 
 
 
 ^5 lAa 
 
 Adverbs and Conjunciions. 
 
 hence 
 
 clrR^ tatas 
 
 thence 
 
 therefore 
 
 thereupon 
 
 whence 
 wherefore 
 
 lb. 
 J hi 
 
 here 
 hither 
 
 (T^ tatra 
 
 I the 
 I thi 
 
 ere 
 thither 
 
 — _ v^i f '" this way 
 ^TSIW ittham) ■' 
 
 j so 
 
 gitl^ totos I 
 
 whence? 
 why? 
 
 rf?JT to^Aa 
 
 
 in that way 
 so 
 
 where? 
 whither? 
 
 '^(f^^ yatas 
 
 ^R yatra | 
 
 , . fin which way 
 
 where 
 whither 
 
 ^I^ yaih, 
 
 finy 
 [as 
 
 ctV^i^ katham how ? 
 qi?X kadd when? 
 
 '4|W«I| adhuna now 
 ■^RT odya to-day 
 l[c|4{^ evam so, thus 
 Tf^ eva jast, exactly 
 
 j!^ toda then^^^jj^^^^ . ^^I^ y^M when, if 
 4j4'4 «an'<^*J'« everywhere 4J^| «a<f£. always 
 Tflr fe' so, Ihas (T ft/ but, however 
 
 ^ ca (postpos.) -que tH^ punar agaioo but 
 
26 Lesson I. II. 
 
 Exercise I. 
 
 T^TfiT I 8 I ^^ ^iTR'^r cT^ Ttm^ M I n •^mf^ \^[ w^ 
 ^j:w I 'Q I 3RT: iTHftr i ^ ' Mwrf»T ^^»i i o. i yT: vm^: i «io i 
 
 15. *Today^ they abandon^. 16. Now* ye go^ 17. Always^ / 
 protect^. 18. We two bow* again^. 19. Whither* runnest^ thouf 
 20. We sacrifice. 21. They two cook. 22. Ye abandon. 23. He 
 bums. 24. Now* we live*. 25. Fe <wo praise. 26. Why* do ye 
 bend*? 27. There* tSej/ fly*. 28. Where* do ye dwell*? 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 97. Yerbs. Unaccented a- class, cont'd. Roots of this class ^ 
 ■which end in a vowel, and consonant- roots not forming heavy 
 syllables (§53), gunate their vowels in forming their present-stems; 
 e. g., fsjiJ and "if^ni form %je and % we; 'g" dru and TH bhu form 
 ^ dro and J^Y 6^o; ^ smj- forms ^fj «»»«r; 'f%t^^ cit and ^Tj^^ JwdA 
 form %t^^ cet and '^^^ ftodA; gx[^ vrs forms '^q;_ war*. h^ ^ 
 V 98. With the class- sign '^ a, a final ly e of the gunated. root 
 unites to form ^'^I aya — see § 159 ; so ^ o with ^ a becomes 
 ■^qf ava; '^nr ar with ^ a yields ^'^ ara. Thus, flf ji, 3rd sing. 
 gr?fffj ^"tfj/a-ti; Vf bhu JTWfcT bhdvati; "m smr ^T^fH smdrati. 
 
 99. Roots in consonants: g\i(_ 6«dA, 3rd sing. (ftVirflT bddhati ; 
 f^fj^ cii, %fff7f ce'ta<«; ot^ «r«, ^iffjf vdrsati. TTVtf ^i n 
 
 * The superior figures indicate the position in the Sanskrit 
 sentence of equivalents for the words so designated. By this indi- 
 cation is avoided the necessity of applying euphonic rules which 
 have not yet been stated. The order of words in Sanskrit is very 
 free, and rarely influences the meaning of the sentence. From the 
 figures the number of words required in the Sanskrit sentence will 
 readily be seen. Words in Italics are not to be translated. 
 
Leason II. 27 
 
 100. The roots ?rH £f«™ and ^!H^ yam make the present-stems 
 31^ gdccha and i(t^ ydccha*. 
 
 101. The root ^f^ sad, 'sit', makes the present-stem ^fe sida. 
 The root 1J^ giwA, 'hide', makes JJ^frl guhati. 
 
 102. Several roots in final '^ a form their present-stem by a 
 peculiar process of reduplication ; thus, ^fT «f^«i 3rd sing. fTTWfH 
 tisthati**; xn /)« fiRtlT fi«'6a<J; Wf jAra tsrerffT ^J^'Arati. 
 
 103. Mascnlines and Neuters m '^ a. ' ^ 
 
 a. Masculines: ^^ deva, 'god'. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. ^^^ devas ^^ devau ^^T^ devds 
 
 Ace. ^^»i; devam . Kt^tvv „ ^^T*!. rfewan 
 
 Voc. ^^ desa ^ 
 
 b. Neuters: J^ phala, ' fruit '- 
 
 N. lh<!lH P^olam Xji% phale (a + 1) (Ji^if^ phalani 
 
 Ace. , » , 
 
 Voc. TJ^I^Aaia 
 
 * As a rule, the grammarians do not allow '^ ch to stand in 
 that form after a vowel, but require it to be doubled, becoming 
 ^" cch. An aspirate is doubled by prefixing the corresponding 
 Qon-aspirate. Cf. § 165. 
 
 ^^■j ■ •* rpfjg dental sibilant ^ s is changed to the lingual '5 s, if 
 immediately preceded by any vowel save "^ a and '^ a, or by 
 <B A or T »■ — unless the ^ s be final, or followed by "^ r. Thus, 
 f^TWfir ti-stha-ti becomes flT^fW tisthati (the change of ^ th to 
 3 <A — a process of assimilation — will be explained below). So 
 ^fVV agni-su becomes IR'^rj agnisu; and V'TOT dhanus-d becomes 
 \l«mi dhanusd. 
 
 The nasalization of the alterant vowel, or in other words, its 
 being followed by anusvdra, does not prevent its altering effect upon 
 the sibilant; thus, ^^YfN havinsi. And the alteration takes place 
 in the initial of an ending after the final V « of a stem, whether 
 the latter be regarded as also changed to 'Cr s or as converted into 
 visarga; thus, ^fc(bl| havis-m or ^f^fl'J havi^-^ instead of ^fc^M 
 
 • havii-su. _^ 
 
28 Lesson II. 
 
 104. Force of cases. 1. The nominative is casus subjectivus. 
 2. The accusative is casits ohjectivus, denoting chiefly the nearer or 
 direct, sometimes however the more remote, object; sometimes also 
 the terminus ad quern, and extent of time and space. 
 105. Euphonic combination of vowels. 
 
 1. ■^ a or '^ a + ^ or •^ = •^. e. g. 31717 ^fq gata apt 
 = 'JfTTPl gata 'pi. 
 
 2. '^or-^+'S;j or^i^-qe. e.g.l{7n+X^iii=^f^9ate'ti. 
 
 3. ■^ or -^ + 'a M or ^ M = ■9Rt 0. e. g. ^TcTT + ^cf uta 
 = IcTtc! gato Ha. 
 
 4. •^ or ^ + ^ r = '^ ar. e. g. »IfT maha, + ^flT r«J 
 = T^t^; mahar^ih. 
 
 6. ^ or 'W + U « or ^ ai = ^ ai. e. g. 5(717 + IfW ^^'^ 
 
 = ^^(^ gatdi 'eo. 
 6. ^ or ^ + ^ or ^ aw = ^^ au. e. g. afTTT + ^iTrf^: 
 osadhih = a|(f)i4f%n gatau 'sadhi^. 
 106. It will be the practice everywhere in this work to 
 separate independent words in transliteration, but not in tbc deva- 
 nagarl text; and if an initial vowel of a following word has 
 coalesced with a final of the preceding, this will be indicated 
 by an apostrophe — single if the initial vowel be the shorter, 
 double if it be the longer, of the two different initials which in 
 every case of combination yield the same result. To aid the be- 
 ginner, a point • will sometimes be placed, in the devanagari, 
 under a long vowel formed by two coalescing vowels; thus, '^rftT- 
 ■II 0^1^ agnina 'rti}a,m. 
 
 ^ ^1- ^ Vocabulary II. 
 
 Terbs, a- class : fif ji (tr. and intr.) conquer, win. 
 
 ' ?PH gam (gdcchati) go. ' '- 5 dru run. 
 
 ■^n ghrd (jighrati) smell. ^ ni lead, guide. 
 
^Lesson^II. 
 
 29 
 
 
 
 TJX 1»<8 (pibatt) drink. 
 
 ?T 6Afi become, be, exist, 
 
 ^n^ ^OTO (ydcchaW) furnish, give. 
 
 ■^ vrs rain, give rain; (fig.) 
 
 shower down; overwhelm. 
 ,^ smf remember, think- on. 
 ^n **^^ (tisfhati) stand (intr.). 
 
 Subst. Masc: 
 im gaja elephant. 
 flp^ gandha odor, perfume. 
 
 - yi 
 
 jpm grama village. 
 
 •r^ nara man {vir and homo). 
 •TtJ nrpa king. 
 y^ ^M^ra son. 
 
 Xent. : 
 ^V't! k^ira milk. 
 
 ani ^.'■^a house. 
 
 * . ,/ 
 
 jala water. 
 
 ^[T'l dana gift, present. 
 •nr^ nagara city. 
 
 InterJ.: 
 
 ^ Ae O, ho. 
 
 , Exercise II. 
 
 ^rt ^r^nr: 1 8 1 ^5^ ^irarrf^ ^r^'r: mi ^■4iy»ii iw i^rrfiT 1 % 1 
 ^T^t^ ^: I ^ I T^r^T % %wt: i ^ i fr;: ^5% ^'^fcT 1 o. 1 '^- 
 ^gr^ fsTErrfiT'n^tT^ I «jo 1 ^ ^enrR: m<i 1 3^ ^tr T^fser 1 <i^ 1 
 ?r^ ^f »T^ri: I <i? 1 ^^'^ ^Trrf% ^^f^ ^: 11 '\^ 11 
 
 15. The man* drinks' milk^ 16. The king' leads^ the elephant^ 
 17. Two houses* falll 18. The god' gives* water*. 19. Ye both 
 think' on (w) the two gods* (acciw.). 20. The king' wins' the 
 village*. 21. The two elephants* smell' the perfume'. 22. They 
 cook' fruits*. 23. The man' reverences' the gods*. 24. The two 
 elephants* live'. 25. The gods' give* rain (^^). 
 
 * Final J^ m is commonly written as anusvara if the fol- 
 lowing word begins with a consonant; but the Hindus pronounce 
 it as TT m in such cases. At the end of a sentence anusvara should 
 not be written for J^ m, though this is a habit common in the MSS. 
 Final radical J^ m, in internal combination, is assimilated to a 
 following mute or spirant. In the former esse it becomes the nasal 
 of the same class with the mute; in the latter it becomes anusvara. — 
 Final radical sj^ n, in internal combination, becomes anusvara be- 
 fore a sibilant. 
 
30 Lesson III. 
 
 Lesson III. (e v% liA.^^ 
 
 107. Terbs. Accented a-class. Roots of this class form their 
 present-stem by adding an accented ^Sl a to the root, which is not 
 gunated. The inflection of these stems is precisely like that of 
 stems belonging to the preceding class, except as to the position 
 of the accent; thus, t^XI ksvp, present-stem f^fq ksipd, pres. ind. 
 frijmfif ksipdmi, f^TTf^T ksipdsi, f^tffrT ksipdti, etc. 
 
 108. Several roots in ^ r of this class (by the Hindus written 
 with '^ f ) form stems in 1[X; «'"*'; e. g., ^ kr, ' strew', t«IiTffT kirdti. 
 The roots in ^ i and ^ u and ^ u change those vowels into 
 "^Xt iy and ^^ uv, respectively, before the class-sign; thus, f^ ksi, 
 fxilVRT ksiydti; n m, 4Jc|(r| suvdti; \( dhu, V[^f^ dhuvdti. 
 
 109. For the root '?[ll is, 'desire', '^^ ich is regarded as a 
 substitute in the present-stem; thus, ^i^fri icchdti (§ 100, note). 
 Likewise, ^ r makes its present •ii-^{7{ rcchdti ; and Tf^ prach, 
 sometimes given as XJ^ prch, makes tragffT prcchdti. 
 
 110. A number of roots following this class are strengthened 
 in the present by a penultimate nasal ; thus, fy-d sic, present ind. 
 ftl^gflr sincdti. The nasal is always assimilated in class to the 
 following consonant; thus aT n is used before palatals, <^ n before 
 dentals, ^ m before labials; and J. n before sibilants and ^ h. 
 
 111. Masculines and Nenters in ^ a, cont'd, 
 a. Masculines: 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 ,1. ^^1 devena dmmHi^ devdbhydm S'^^ devdis 
 D- ^Tni devdya » » ?«l^^ devebhyas 
 
 Ab. defldt, devat ^ „ » » 
 
 Gr. ^^^ devasya ^ej^Ttii devayos ^elHI'I^ devanam 
 L. ^^ deve » » %^^ devem 
 
 b. Neuters follow exactly the declension of masculines in the 
 above cases ; thus, Hi%<»I phatena, ik^yn phal&ya, etc. 
 
Lesson III. 
 
 31 
 
 112. Force of cases. 1. The instrumental answers the questions 
 wherewith? and whereby? and expresses accompaniment, agent, 
 or means. 2. The dative denotes the remoter object, and direction. 
 It is also used as dativus commodi; very frequently also to denote 
 end or purpose. Sometimes (and oftenest with copula omitted) 
 it is predicative, in the sense of 'makes for, tends toward'- 3. The 
 ablative answers the question whence? and very frequently denotes 
 cause. 4. The genitive is casus adjectivus, denoting all kinds of 
 belonging (e. g. gen. subjectivus, objectivus, parlitivus). 5. The lo- 
 cative denotes the place where, or the time when, an action occurs. 
 It is often used absolutely, in agreement with a participle expressed 
 or understood, as the ablative is used in Latin and the genitive 
 in Greek. 
 
 Vocabulary III. 
 Terbs, a-class: cv^^ '^^ ^^ C*'""'^'*-^ '^'"'P' '^''''P; 
 
 ,V^ 
 
 jBh) 
 
 isten. 
 
 A.S- &elrr^ . i^-^ 
 
 '"* '^H is (icchdtt) wish, desire, ^vl--']! 
 
 SS^^ krs (krsdti) plough, o^iffty'''^^^ ^J {srjdti) let go; 
 , (xjl| ksip (ksipdti) hurl, cast, """" r^~^Ais\ t^^„\^. /;.. 
 throw. • ;*'*'^" 
 
 '' fdUl dip (rfipaftO show, point out. 
 
 ^ ^ A S^ *■• CC !» '^-^ 
 
 ' tJ^f^prachCpfcchdti) ask, ask about. 
 
 f^Xf vig (vigdti) enter. 
 
 I \l-,\A.CkS 
 
 A---^ 
 
 create. 
 
 ■^p«^^ (spffdti) touch; (in certain 
 connections) wash. 
 a- class: 
 TJ^guh (guhati, § 101) hide, conceal. 
 ^Z sad (sidati, § 101) sit. S iA ^ ^^ 
 
 ^' 
 
 Snbst. Masc: 
 
 mZ ^"■tO' mat. PxAA-f^ '^'^ii^ 
 
 ^inf kunta spear. 
 
 ■^■RI hala child, boy. 
 
 t{X^ marga road, way, street. 
 
 ^^ megha cloud. 
 
 ■jj'^ fara arrow. 
 
 ^^ hasta hand. 
 
 Nent.: 
 
 %^ ksetra field. 
 VT dhana money, riches. 
 511* 'sf lahgala plough. , ;' 
 f^ visa poison. .' cc 
 
 sukha fortune, luck, happiness. 
 
32 
 
 Lesson III. IV. 
 
 Exercise Ml. 
 ^^''rrf'r ^^ ^gnifnTi 1 1 «|j«i(K?^rr«rrf^Tmr:i^ i^in^'n^ 
 
 ^^: I m ^ ftrwfrT ^^ I § I v^'r f^^f^r^^ ttt: i ^ i f - 
 
 %^Tftr ^TTft: f^t^ I <i<i I TTt ^tft f^w. \'\R\ it: s^w 
 v^ T^fw I q^ I ITT'f wffi ^: I1 18 II 
 
 15. The boy* asks' the men^ about the road* (000.). 16. The 
 clouds^ drop* water' on the fields* (loc). 17. The two men* go* 
 6?/ two roads* (instr.) into the city'. 18. The king* gives' the two 
 men* money*. 19. The man's* sons* sit* on mats'. 20. The gods* 
 give' the water* of the clouds*. 21. We wash' (use W^J both 
 hands* mth water*. 22. Both men* lead* their sons* (dual) home' 
 (w^). 23. The two boys' point out* the road* to the city* (gen.). 
 
 Lesson lY. 
 
 113. Mascnlines iu ^ i. ^rf^ agni, 'fire' 
 Singular. Dual. 
 
 N. ^fJCI^ agnis 
 
 A. ''^rf^m agnim 
 
 !• 'Wf^TTT agnind 
 
 D. ■4JM*i' a^woj/e 
 
 A. '^^ agnes 
 
 C^- » » 
 L. '^I^ agnau 
 V. ^ 
 
 » » 
 TSrf^pjn't, cignibhyam 
 
 » D 
 
 Plural. 
 ■^PirSRt, agnayas- f 
 ^ira^ agnm 
 '^ffqfjiret, agnibhis 
 '?rf^«I^ agnibhyas 
 
 » » 
 
 '^IMI'IIH. agninam 
 ^f^rg agnisu* 
 
 * See note to § 102. .v,^ Jn»/>v.'' v'"^ ' 
 
 The dental nasal wj^ n, when immediately followed.by a vowel, 
 or by «t^ w or 5fl; TO or ^ y or ^^ «, is turned into the lingual 
 ^H^ 9 if preceded in the same word by the lingual sibilant or semi- 
 vowel or vowels — i. e. by ^ «, TT r, ^ r, or '^ f • and this, not 
 
Lesson IV. 
 
 33 
 
 114. Neuters in ^ i. ^jfx vari, 'water* 
 
 Singular. 
 
 A. n J) 
 
 I- «l I r<Ul I varind* 
 
 D. '^TfT!% varine 
 
 Ab. c|||\um^ vdrinas 
 
 G. » » 
 
 L. '^rfrtW ^^^^ni 
 
 V. '^l^tiare or '^xfT "^'^ 
 
 Dual. 
 «( I pJ^uTi' vdrini 
 
 Plural. 
 cJI^QflJi varini 
 n n » » 
 
 "(TfT'^rW; vdribhyam ^ifrt'l^ vdribhis 
 » » Trf^'ir^C varibhyas 
 
 IB n 5) 
 
 e(|(\n vdrisu 
 
 115. Masculine and neuter adjectives in |[ i are declined like 
 the substantives above. But neuter adjectives (never substantives) 
 may, in the dat., abl., gen., and loc. sing., and the gen. and loc. 
 dual, substitute the corresponding forms of masculines. 
 
 116. Euphonic changes of ^ « and -^ r. These two sounds 
 stand to each other in the practical relation, in external combination, 
 of corresponding surd and sonant: in countless cases ^ s becomes 
 ^ r in situations requiring or favoring the occurrence of a sonant;, 
 and, less often, "^ r becomes ^ s where a surd is required. In 
 internal combination the two are far less interchangeable. The s 
 is extremely common as an etymological final, the r not common. 
 
 117. A. Final ^ s. 1. Before a sonant, either vowel or conso- 
 nant (except X' '■ — see below), ^ s is changed to the sonant T »" 
 — unless, indeed, it be preceded by t!I a or "^ a; thus, '41 (Mil, 
 
 only if the altering letter stands immediately before the, nasal, but 
 at whatever distance before the latter it may be found: unless, in- 
 deed, there intervene a palatal (except "^ y), a lingual, or a dental. 
 Thus, «f3I^I!f nagarey,a, XITIOT mdrgeijia, MU||fi|j puspdni. 
 * See preceding note. 
 
 Ferry, Sanskrit Primer. o 
 
34 Lesaon IV. 
 
 ■^I^ agnis atra becomes ■4|fy<'N agnir atra; '4(fMU^ ^¥Rt agnis 
 ddhati becomes -ilPiJ^^nT agnir dahati. See also § 95. 
 
 118. 2. Final ^f^ as, before any sonant consonant or before 
 initial short ^ a, is changedto '^ o — and the initial '^ a is 
 dropped j thus, <1MH W^rf^ nrpas jayati becomes ifift «l^Tf^ Wpo 
 jayati ; '^XT^Q^ '^r^ Krpas atra - •pft i'^ ''.'PO '*''*■ ■^-y ' § ^' ^ '' •^, 
 
 119. It is the practice in our system of transliteration to render 
 the sign i, which denotes this dropping of an initial ^ a, by an 
 inverted comma. 
 
 120. 3. Before any initial vowel other than short '^ a, final 
 ^^ as loses its ^ s, becoming simple ^ a; and the hiatas thus 
 occasioned remains ; thus, •TT^ T^fffT nrpo^^ icchati becomes "^ 
 4,'<djfW nrpa icchati; TTcT^ ^^chi{, tatas udakam = fnT 'd^'^H, ^^^'^ 
 udakam. 
 
 121. 4. Final "^Cm^ as before any sonant, whether vowel or 
 consonant, loses its ^ s, becoming simply ^T a; and the hiatus 
 thus occasioned remains ; thus, Itn^ ^^^ft'iT nrpas icchanti = 'Wirr 
 ^^?5f% nfpa icchanti; ■^ITR^ ^PSffnT nj-pas jayanti= •lt(T ^I^Tf^fl 
 nrpa jayanti. 
 
 122. B. Final "^ r. 1. Final "^ r in general shows the same 
 form which ^ s would exhibit under the same conditions: thus 
 l|«C<^ punar standing at the end of a sentence becomes jsj; punalj,; 
 aJV?; g^r, ^f^: gih. But original final "^ r, after ^ o or 'JSTT «> 
 maintains itself before vowels and sonant consonants ; thus, U«(f^^ 
 punar atra, M^I'sK^fd punar jayati. 
 
 123. 2. A double "^ r is nowhere admitted: if such would 
 occur, either by retention of an original ^ r or by conversion of W « 
 to T »", the first TC; r is omitted, and the preceding vowel, if short, 
 is made long by compensation; thus, i\^\ 'J^\^', punar rdmah, = 
 J«rr Xrnr: puna ramah; ^?rf^^ Tt^ agnis rocate - ^fq^ tN^ 
 agm rocate; ^f^^ <X^ dhenus rocate = ?i^ 0"^^ dhenU rocate. 
 
Lesson IV. 
 
 35 
 
 Terbs: 
 ^J^^ krt (krntdti) cut, cut off. 
 ^x|^ muc (muncdti) free, deliver, 
 release, ^-v-^-^.^iy^^ ■ '^4^ 
 
 l-L o 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ^ffq agni, m., fire; (as proper 
 
 name) Agni, the god of fire. 
 ^rfx; ari, m., enemy. 
 '%(f^ asi, m., sword.'t'^'-^^'' 
 ■^flf rsi, m., seer. 
 ^fcj kavi, m., poet. 
 firnC S'*") "^-i mountain. 
 ^Pf jana, va., man; (pi.) people. 
 ^:?5f du^kha, n., misery, mis- 
 fortune. § ur- 
 
 Vocabulary IV. 
 
 ^f ruh (rdhati) grow. 
 t%t(^ lip (limpdti) smear. 
 
 'grj^ lup (lumpdti) break to pieces, 
 
 6 
 
 devastate, plunder, 
 
 tJTftj pdni, m., hand. 
 
 XTRiJopa, n., sin. 
 
 TJ^rama, m., nom.pr., name of 
 
 a hero, 
 ■a^ vrksa, m., tree. 
 fij^ pfoa, m., nom. pr, name of 
 
 a god. 
 ^(g«ai^a,n., truth, righteousness. 
 ^f?; Aan, m., worn, /jr., name of 
 
 a god. 
 
 Exercise IV. 
 
 ffr ^5^t^ I M I 3kS^ ^-ii-ii v^ g»qf^ 1^1^ t^: (abi.) 
 TTfTfri I ^ I UTrfN^T? t^rm^ I '= I f^ t^ ftffnT I Q. I ^wt: 
 n^ rR -rr^ fTreH: 1 10 1 ffr: ^lif^t ^MiPi ^r^^ 1 <i«» 1 
 ^fwt (§ 123) -^nft ^'al^T I •i'^ I ^rM'fiO'sn fiTfxsr ^ 
 ^fHtT I <i? itIt 'ftTW ^nm: 11 «i8 11 
 
 15. 9iva* dwells* in the mountains^. 16. Both enemies* hurl* 
 spears^ at the king' (^dat.) 17. Rama* touches* his two sons' with 
 his hands^. 18. Fire' burns' the trees^ 19. Seers* speak^ the 
 truth'. 20. Through righteousness* happiness' arises* (m) for man- 
 
 * Modifiers generally precede the word which is modified. 
 
36 Lesson IV. V. 
 
 kind* (1|»T, gen. pi.). 21. The seer's* two hands* touch* water'. 
 22. Fruits* are' (use ^JT) ow the trees*. 23. People* remember' 
 Hari*. 24. Eama* hurls* the sword' from his hand* (abl.). 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 124. Terbs. Unaccented ya- class. Roots of this class form 
 their present-stem by adding '^l' ya to the root, which bears the 
 accent. Thus from •re nak is made the present-stem •Tfl ndhya; 
 from ^pT lubh, ^^Jf liihhya. 
 
 125. The inflection of stems of this class follows the model of 
 ■^^ vad. 
 
 126. Certain '^ a-roots, because of their peculiar exchanges 
 with ^ i and 1^ j-forms, especially in the formation of the present- 
 stem, are given by the Hindu grammarians as ending in XT e or 
 ^ ai or ^ (cf. § 132), and by them assigned to the » lih% or 
 (a-class. ThusVTd^aj 'suck' (Hindu ^ dhe), forms tj^rffj dhdyati; 
 the root "W hU or ^ hva (Hindu ^ hve) forms S^^rfTI hvdyati; 
 ATT g^ (Hindu J[ gdi) makes TTTfTI gayati. 
 
 127. For the root t^TI drg, 'see', is substituted in the present- 
 system another root THfT pap, which makes ij^rf^ pdgyati. 
 
 t/ 128. Mascnlines in ^ u. t^m hlidnu, '■ aim'' . 
 
 Singular, Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. *rrg^ hhanus WfT^ hMnu VPTiR^ bhanavas 
 
 A. ^|«i«i^ hhanum n » 'TIKfl hhanun 
 
 !• TT^TT ihanund >j|| j^|4i, bhdnubhydm ^TT^f^^ bhanubhis 
 
 D. tU^ bhanave » „ lin'^mf^bhanubhyas 
 
 A-b. *rKrtC bhanos n r> » » 
 
 G. „ n *rn^t^ bhanvos tjy^^fjj^ bhanunam 
 
 L. Wft bhdndu » n >)T»J5 6Aa«w«M 
 
Lesson V. 
 
 37 
 
 Mascnline adjectives in ^ u are similarly declined. 
 
 129. Enptaonic Changes of ^ s, cont'd. 1. Final ^ s, the dental 
 sibilant, whether original or representing final X *■) before the palatal 
 surd mutes [^ c, "^ cK], is assimilated, becoming palatal T(T p. Thus 
 •TT^ ^rtK naras carati becomes •HT^TfiT narag carati; '<^\^^ 
 ^^«| naras chalena becomes «t<^'U.^^«| narag chalena. 2. Before 
 a lingual surd mute ['Z h "S tK]> in lil^e manner, it would become 
 lingual tf ?, but the case almost never occurs. 3. Before the dental 
 surd mutes [f^^ t, ^ th], since it is already of the same class with 
 them, it of course remains unchanged; thus, "XTT^ f?T¥ftT rdmas 
 tisthati. 
 
 130. The preposition "^ a is sometimes used with the ablative 
 (much less often with the accusative), in the sense of 'hither from', 
 .'all the way from''; but far more usually to signify 'all the way 
 to', 'until'. As a prefix to verbs, ^ a means 'to', 'unto', 'at'. 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 %^ as (dsyati) throw, hurl. 
 ^ ^TJ^ kup (kupyati — w. gen. or 
 
 Vocabulary V. 
 
 ■^ ruh (rdhati) rise, spring up, 
 
 grow. 
 + ^ST o, (arohati) climb, mount, 
 
 ascend. 
 
 
 dat.) be angry. 
 'W^ krudh (kriidhyati — w. gen. 
 or dat.) be angry. 
 - im^ gam + tSJT a (agdcchati) come. 
 -W tr (tdrati) cross over. 
 ^ tenn wflif (ndfyati) perish. 
 tm P«P (po^9yoii) see. 
 
 likh (likhdtt) scratch ; write. 
 151*1 lubh (lubhyati — w. dat. or 
 
 loc.) desire, covet. -^'^ " > jc 
 Tre gus (pusyati) dry up^ t,',iA'''^ 
 f^'S snih (snihyati — w. gen. or 
 J, loc.) feel inclined to, love. 
 % hu or ^ hvd (hvdyati) call. 
 
38 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 anna, n., food, fodder. 
 ■^pg' agva, m., horse. 
 Tg^fisj udadhi, m., ocean. 
 ire guru, m., teacher. 
 q^ pattra, n., leaf, letter. 
 TfX^ parafu, m., axe. 
 
 TIT^ pado, m., foot; quarter; 1^ fatru, m., enemy. 
 
 ray, beam. 
 ^TW hahu, m., arm. 
 fk'i bindu, in., drop. 
 
 HTI hhanu, m., sun. 
 TTR!!' mai;jj, m., jewel. 
 XjS[ ratna, u., jewel. 
 ■^Xflj rdfi, m., heap, 
 ■^■g wa^M, m., wind. 
 f^tm visnu, m., nom. pr. name of 
 a god. 
 
 f^pU'^ (ikhara, m., summit. 
 ftj^ P%a, m., pupil, scholar. 
 W^ swAia, n., Vedie hymn. 
 
 Exercise V. 
 
 ^nrr: fvm: I ? i ^ ^rft^jr: fwf^ 1 8 1 ^rf^r^^ fTrefrr i m i 
 5T^: fWnsrf f%irt^ i «i«i i ^mhuI ^mt iftRt -^mf^ i <^'i i 
 ^ S^srfw tt: 1 <i^ I ^: Tf^ ^trm^ »iT^ ^m tj^nr: ii i^ ii 
 
 19. Now* the sun's^ rays climb' the mountains^. 20. A drop^ 
 
 of water^ falls* down from the cloud'. 21. O* men^, w e see* 
 
 the city*. 22. Both kings^ love' poets^ (gen. or loc). 23. The 
 
 wind^ blows* (^W) from the summits' of the mountains^ 24. The 
 
 king^ hurls* spears' at his enemies^ (dat. or loc), 25. The scholar^ 
 
 bows' before Ms teacher^ (ace). 26. Two men^ come' with their 
 
 sons^ (instr.)} 27. The two kings^ desire* the poet's^ jewels' (dat. 
 
 or loc.)ii2S. 0^ seer,^ we sacrifice* to Visriu' {ace). 29. The two 
 
 * Orthodox Hindus maintain that the Vedic hymns, etc., were 
 revealed to their reputed authors, who thus 'saw' them. 
 
Lesson V. VI. 
 
 cook' food* with fire*. 30. The seers* praise* Visnu* with hym 
 31. In the city* the king* calls* his enemies'. 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 131. Yerbs. ^a-class, cont'd. The roots of this class which 
 in ^IJ^ om lengthen their ^ a in forming their present-stem ; tl 
 rlJ^ tarn, t{Jl^fj{ tdmyati; V[J{^ bhram, ^^'l^^fd bhrdmyati — but 
 last makes some forms with short ^ a. The root '^^ mad 
 the same lengthening: TTT^Tfil mddyati. 
 
 132. Certain a-roots (five — by the Hindus written with fins 
 make present-stems with an accented yd; thus, ^ da, '^(ftf di 
 
 133. The root ^HJ vyadh is abbreviated to f^^ vidh in 
 present-system : fe)U|(?T vidhyati. 
 
 134. The root ifm^ kram, said by the natives to form 
 present-stem according to this class, really forms it only accorc 
 to the a-class, and the root-vowel is lengthened in the active vo 
 but not in the middle; thus, ^TUTf^ krdmati, but middle ^ 
 krdmate. 
 
 135. The root ^H^ cam, used only with the preposition "m 
 forms ^JT^TTffT dcamati. 
 
 136. Neuters in '^ u. t^ madhu, ' honey '. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. ^ra madhu 41^<n madhunl ^TOt'I madhuni 
 
 ■A- » » j> » » » 
 
 I. flVrr madhund MVI^IBJf{, madhubhydm 7T^f)T^ madhuM 
 
 D. 71^^ madhune „ „ 7?^)2[^ madhubh 
 
 Ab. THiH^ madhunas „ „ » » 
 
 G. „ „ ^^*i^H. ^ccdhunos 44>4<tlH. madhani 
 
 L. TT^irf'I madhuni „ „ 'T^ madhum 
 
 XT TTLT .^. JH, t V 
 
40 Lesson VI. 
 
 137. Neuter adjectives (but not substantives) in ^ « may take 
 the forms proper to the masculine in the dat,, abl.-gen., loc. sing., 
 and gen. -loc. dual. 
 
 138. Changes of final •(_ n. Before initial ^ j and ^^| f, 
 «^ n becomes sT w; thus, TfT't. ^•Il'l, tan janan becomes rTT- 
 ^^Trj^ tan janan ; TTTt, ^^jt. *'^'* gatrun = (lT'»^"»l't. tan fatrun. In 
 last case, however, igcA is almost always substituted for the initial 
 ■^ f ; thus, cJ|»et'-dH tan chatrun. 
 
 139. Final «|;^ n, before an initial «r I, is assimilated and becomes 
 nasalized ?, which is written W nl, or (what is the same thing) 
 — wj thus rIT'l. H)ch|«(, tan lokan becomes <n^ ^t^TI, tdnl lokan 
 or eft <!n«)il«t, tan lokan, 
 
 140. Before the surd palatal, lingual, and dental mutes there is 
 inserted after final <^ ti a sibilant of each of those classes re- 
 spectively, before which «J^ n becomes anusvara; thus for "tfj^ ^ 
 tan ca we find TTPS ianp ca; for <n^ 7f^ tan tatha, "rHM^ tans 
 tatha* 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 ^r (rcchdti — § 109) go to; fall 
 
 to one's lot, fall upon. 
 siiT^ kram + '^ a (dkrSmati) 
 
 stride up to, attack. 
 
 Vocabulary VI. 
 
 ^>^ cam + ^ a (dcdmati) sip, 
 drink, rinse the mouth. 
 
 cm^iam (tdmyati) be sad. fc^/ Ci 
 
 cTET tus (tusyati) rejoice, take 
 pleasure in (w. instr.). 
 
 '^t\ dw (dlvyati) play. 
 
 * This rule really involves an historic survival, the large ma- 
 jority of cases of final ?[^ ra in the language being for original ns. 
 Practically, the rale applies only to "^^ m before x^ c and ?T t, since 
 cases involving the other initials are excessively rare. 
 
Lesson VI. 
 
 41 
 
 V(J{^ hhram {bhrdmyati — § 131) 
 
 ■wander about. 
 IT^ mad (madyati) get drunk. 
 eSj^jJ^ vyadh (mdhyati) hit, pierce. 
 IJH fam (ghmyati) become quiet, 
 
 be extinguished, go out. 
 
 ■^H^ pram (grhmyati) become 
 
 weary. 
 ^ Af Qidrati) take away, steal, 
 
 plunder. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 aksa, m., die, dice. 
 HH^ adharma, m., injustice, 
 
 ■wrong. 
 ■411^ all, m., bee. 
 ■^rg asfTM, n., tear. 
 ■fm rksa, m., bear. 
 ■^^q kopa, m., anger. 
 
 j W\ 
 
 Vv\> 
 
 ^f%?T ksatriya, m., warrior, man 
 
 of the second caste. 
 ■grjfTl nrpati, m., king. 
 •T^ weira, n., eye. 
 ?TO madhu, n., honey. 
 ?T1I mukha, n., mouth, face. 
 TM mrtyu, m., death. 
 •^WwosM, n., wealth, money. 
 
 (i 
 
 Exercise VI. 
 
 ^ ^rtw^ ^^^9f^ I ^ I ^M^ ^ ^rratTT 1 8 1 ITT fi'tluii^T 
 t^H'Tf'a I M I ttt: ^R*ii'H<.J3««|*i*<f?i i § i ^jwf^^r^rN ^- 
 ;ffm: I ^ I ■^Mft ^PTRT ^^ irf^ I ^ 1 'fTt ^^'^''^ > ^ • 
 
 wt ^rn?T»T: n'^ i ^: ftjizr^ mMiTii*ti f?T i «i? i iwr 'nrir 'rr- 
 ^^f^ I IS I Twr ^flTTsr ^ ^^tNt ^t^: ii «im ii 
 
 16. The ■warriors* play' for money^ {instr.). 17. The king's^ 
 horses^ become weary* on the road* to-day*. 18. The. warrior* 
 pierces* his enemy' tiiith the spear^. 19. Bees* are fond of' (?Tq ) 
 honeyl 20. The water^ of his tears* moistens* (flf^) his feet'. 
 21. There^ bees* are flitting about' ('^(TQ. 22. Two men* are cook- 
 ing' honeyl and* fruits'. ^23. When* the teacher's^ anger' ceases*, 
 then* the scholars' rejoiced 24. Tears^ stand* in the warriors'^ 
 
42 Lesson VI. VII. 
 
 eyes^. 25. The enemies^ overwhelm* (gif) the king^ mth arrows'. 
 26. A quarter^ of the injustice* falls upon* (yg) the king' (ace). 
 
 Lesson VII. 
 
 141. Cansative Verbs (native "CMr-class"). The Hindu gram- 
 , marians describe a certain present-system which they assign to a 
 
 so-called "car-class". This is, however, in fact no present-class 
 at all, but a causative or secondary conjugation, which is not con- 
 fined to the present-system. But many formations of this sort have 
 no causative value; and it is chiefly these that are grouped by the 
 Hindus in their cur-class, which also includes some denominative- 
 stems in dya, with causative accent. For practical purposes it is 
 well enough to consider these verbs here. 
 
 142. The causative-stem is formed by adding '^r'JJ dya to the 
 root, which is usually strengthened; and the strengthening process 
 is in the main as follows: 
 
 143. 1. Medial or initial ^ i, ^u, and ^r have the guna- 
 strengthening, if capable of it; thus, ^T^ cur, ^^TTfcI cordyati ; 
 f^^ 'oid} «1^'t(fTT veddyati; but xj^s ptd, m!'^'*!!?! piddyati. 
 
 144. 2. A final vowel has the crddAi-strengthening ; thus, 
 \I dhr, VFTTftT dhardyati. Before '^^aya, ^ai and '^ au become 
 ■^TRT % and ^TT^ o,v respectively; thus, jfV bhi, HTfrfH bhdydyati; 
 'Shhu, HT^lfri bhdvdyati. 
 
 * 145. 3. Medial or initial ^ a in a metrically light syllable is 
 sometimes lengthened, and sometimes remains unchanged; thus, 
 ^^ ksal, cans. ^T^TTffT ksaldyati; but ^(^jan, caus. 5J«|'*j'fVf 
 jandyati. 
 
 146. The inflection is the usual one of a-stems. 
 
 147. Bnles of enpUenic combination. In external combination 
 an initial sonant of whatever class (even a vowel or semivowel or 
 nasal) requires the conversion of a preceding final surd to a sonant. 
 
trason VII. 43 
 
 148. Final c(^ r. 1. Final t^ t becomes ? d, before any iaitiai 
 sonant, except the palatals, the nasals, and ^ I: thus, ^tTTct '^T^ 
 meghdt atra becomes 4)V||d's( meghdd atra; mi||r(^ T^tfT papat 
 raksati or ^IMlf^ bhramyati or <n1'mi|I?T gopdyati becomes m^JT- 
 "^^ftl pdpdd raksati or lllMI'^TMlRl pdpdd bhrdmyati or mi||sf1|l||- 
 ^fTT pdpdd gopdyati. 
 
 149. 2. Final ?([^ Hs assimilated to an initial palatal, lingual, 
 or ^ ? in the next -word; thus it becomes ^ c before ^c and 
 ^ ch, ^ j before 3J j, and 5r I before ^ I: e. g., 4{Vlcl, ^ meghdt ca 
 becomes ^[^(^ meghdc ca; ^^TR^. ^RH^ meghdt jalam becomes 
 7TV|l'^<!lH, '"O'^ghoj jalam; l||mr(^ Wt^fiTt^. papdt lokdl becomes 
 ^IMIgh'hltl. papal lokdt. 
 
 150. 3. Before initial '^ p, final t(^ t becomes ^ e, and the 
 Jf f then becomes ^ ch; thus, •im((^ ^J^: nrpdt fatruh becomes 
 ajm-i^^; nrpdc ehatruh. 
 
 151. 4. Before initial nasals t^^ t becomes »^«; thus, fl^ [<\^ 
 •RitfT grhdt nayati becomes <JfT3^f?I gr^an nayati. But the change 
 into ^d is also permitted, though hardly used; thus, T^T^^Tfil 
 grhdd Jnayati. 
 
 Terbs: 
 «^V|44 kathaya (denom. stem — 
 
 kathdyati) relate, tell. 
 ^g^ ksal (ksdldyatt) wash. 
 7{l^^ganaya (denom. — gartdyati) 
 
 number, count. 
 ^^ cur (cordyati) steal, 
 rl^fad (td4dyati) strike, beat. 
 
 Vocabulary Vil. 
 
 ira' tiil (toldyati) weigh. 
 ^TjgTET dan^aya (denom. — da- 
 
 n^dyati) punish. 
 ■^ + ^T ni + a (andyati) bring. 
 ■q^ pid {plddyati') torment, vex. 
 ira puj (pujdyati) honor. 
 Vipr (jpdrdyati^ov&cpome', prevail. 
 
44 Lesson "VII. VIII. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 ^ '^(^Sfi janaka, m., father. 
 
 a'U;^ danda,m., stick ; panishment. 
 
 VJ^ punya, n., merit. 
 
 Tg;^ phala,n., fruit; reward. 
 
 I^I'^I^QI ramayana, n., a noted 
 J, poem. 
 ^ Adverb ; X^ iva as, like (postpos.), 
 
 '^tq^ rUpaka, n., gold-piece. 
 <!n<li loka, m. , world, people 
 
 (sing, and pL). 
 TSJ^i sadhu, m., holy man, saint. 
 
 ^^rW suvarr^a, n., gold. ^^^J^^^^ 
 ^H suta, m., drijrer, chanjjteer. i 
 '^^ stena, m., thiet. 
 
 Exercise VII. 
 %^: ^^ ^^i^ 'JfTWK'rffii *f I ^T^'f'^ t^^rrar^^rf^i ^ I 
 
 sit "nrf^ I M I T^ '^M'^lfU! *m*\t\\ 1$ I -gUT^-^ISli ^T!#r 
 
 ^ti«ff ^t^: ^iRifTT II q^ II 
 
 14 Thieves' steal* the people's^ money^ 15. The two boys' 
 wash' their mouths^. 16. The father' tells* his sons^ (dat.') the 
 reward* of sin'. 17. The scholars' honor' and* reverence* their 
 teacher^. 18. Ye both bring' fruits' in your hands^ and* count* 
 them. 19. Merit' protects' from misfortune^ (abl.). 20. The char- 
 ioteers' strike* the horses^ with sticks'- 21. In anger' (a6Z.) the 
 king^ pierces* the thief' with a spear*. 
 
 Lesson VIII. 
 
 152. Terbs, a- conjugation. Present IndicatiTe Middle. The 
 
 present indicative middle, of verbs whose stems end in a is inflected 
 as follows: 
 
Lesson VIII. 45 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1. "Sf^ vdde c(^'l«Q' vdddvdke W^TT^ vdddmahe 
 
 2. '^^% vddase , - '^^^ vddethe "W^^ vddadhve 
 
 3. «(^^ vddate '^^^ vddete (:|d'<d vddante 
 
 153. The ending of the 3rd pi. is properly ^f^ aw<« (cf. fitT 
 nti for '^fsfT anti in the act.); before the TJ e of the 1st sing, the 
 Stem-final is dropped. Tf^ ethe and T^ ete are hard to explain. ihJ 
 
 154. With verbs inflected in both voices, the chief force of the 
 middle is this, that the action is performed for the benefit of the 
 actor himself; thus, IfW^ ydjati 'he sacrifices' (for some one else); 
 ■^JSlfT ydjate 'he sacrifices for himself. But many verbs are 
 conjugated only in the middle, like the Latin and Greek deponents. 
 
 155. The verb JT mr, 'die', makes f^T!?^ mriydte in the pres- 
 ent; and "^(H^jan, 'give birth', substitutes as present mid. STPEJ^ 
 jdyate, 'be born'. J tAj^ nWXv)(^.j (.« ,.^^ kd vn/vivjjvi( : ■wy^^'>^ 
 
 156. Combination of final and initial vowels. Two simple 
 vowels, either or both of them short or long, coalesce and form 
 the corresponding long vowel. For the a-vowels, see above, § 105. 
 Thus : 1. ^ i or ^t + ^ i or % I = % j; e. g. ai^^ftT J^ gaochati 
 iti becomes ^T'^'dl fcT gacchati Hi. 2. '^Mor^w+'^Mor^M 
 = ^ a ; e. g. ^TO '^W^, sadhu uktam becomes ^TT^nRT^ sadhu 
 ^ktam*. 
 
 157. The «-vowels, the w-vowels, and "^Ti before a dissimilar 
 vowel or diphthong, are regularly converted each into its own 
 corresponding semivowel, ^ y or ^ « or "J r. Thus, frl^fTf W^ 
 tisthati atra becomes f?lB(4|'^ tisthaty atra (four syllables); "I^ '^(^ 
 nadt atra becomes ^RT^ nady atra; ?T^ ^T^ madhu atra becomes 
 TT^'^ madhv atra; o|JH ^ kartf iha becomes «lif^ kartr iha. 
 
 * And theoretically 3. ■^r+^r='^f, but probably this has 
 no occurrence. 
 
46 Lesson VIII. 
 
 158. Final TJ e and ^ft o remain unchanged before an initial 
 short "^ a, but the "^ a disappears. Thus, '^^ '^T^ vane atra be- 
 comes ^^ ^ vane Hra; t\\^ ^'^ bhdno atra becomes M\^ ^ 
 bhano Hra. By far the commonest case of final ^^ o is where it 
 represents final ^I^ as (see § 118). 
 
 159. The final '^ i or ^ M-element of a diphthong is changed 
 to its corresponding semivowel ^ ^ or "W v, before any vowel or 
 diphthong, except when the rule of § 158 would apply. Thus, TJ e 
 becomes "^[^ ay, and ^ ai, '^JT'I ^yj 'Wt " becomes iSref av, and 
 ^ du, '-^lel dv. Thus, in internal combination, ^-^ ne-a becomes 
 •fJI na^a; iff-^ JAo-a becomes tj^ hJiava; so ^~'^(^ ndi-aya yields 
 *||i|i| nay-aya, and >^-'^r?[ bhau-aya yields )J|'c('i| bhdv-aya. 
 
 160. In external combination, the resulting semivowel is in gen- 
 eral dropped; and the resulting hiatus remains. Thns, '^ f^ 
 vane iti becomes "^^ J^ vana iti (through the intermediate stage 
 «J«ir4|f?I vanay iti) ; Vil^ ^[f?f bhdno iti becomes ITPf Tfil bhdna 
 iti (through ITTTf^fW bhdnav iti). The case of final TJ e is by far 
 the more frequent. See also § 164. 
 
 161. Certain final vowels maintain themselves unchanged be- 
 fore any following vowel. Such are 1. ^i, ^ u, and 'Jfe as dual 
 endings, both of declension and of conjugation;, thus, f^TrV ?[? £"'»■' 
 iha, ^TV ''?r^ sddhii atra; TJi% ^'^ phale atra. 2. The final, or 
 only, vowel of an interjection ; thus, ^ ii[^ he indra, ^ ^% he agne. 
 
 Vocabulary VIII. 
 
 Verbs (deponents): 
 '^J^^ arthaya (denom. — arthd- 
 yate) ask for (w. two accus.). ){^mr (mriydte) die. 
 
 ■f;^ tks (iksate) see, behold. 
 sB^^ kamp (kdmpate) tremble. 
 gp^ jan (jdyate) be born, arise, 
 
 spring up (mother in loc.) 
 Vfm bhds (bhd^ate) speak 
 
 'm{^yat(ydtate) strive for (w. dat.). 
 ■^rei yudh (yudhyate) fight (w. 
 instr. of accompaniment). - '/^ 
 
Lesson VIIl. 
 
 47 
 
 X*(^ Tobh + ^ a (ardbkate) take 
 
 hold on, begin. 
 "^^^ruc^rdcate) please (dat., gen.). 
 ^n^ labk (Idbhate) receive, take. 
 
 , vand (vdndate) greet, honor. 
 flf^ fiks (fiksate) learn, t ^/ 
 ^^ sah {sdhate) endure. "^ ( 
 
 ^■3 sev (sdvate) serve, honor. ^., 
 
 *l«itq manusya, va., man (homof. 
 
 ^^ y^J^Oi ro-5 sacrifice. /Xi r-^ 
 ■qif oowa, n., -woods, forest. 
 fcj«|4| vinaya, m., obedience. 
 ■^Vf^ vid, va., wave. 
 ^T^ fdstra,n., science; text-book. 
 T^ fudra, m., man of the fourth 
 
 caste. 
 f^cT tea, n., advantage. 
 
 Adverl): if na, not. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 '^•I'M anartha, m., misfortune. 
 B^^I udyoga, va., diligence. 
 ch<^|U| kalydria, n., advantage ; 
 
 salvation. 
 f|'?5 taru, m., tree. 
 tl[«I dvija, m., Aryan. 
 f|[gnt?T dvijdti, m., Aryan. 
 Vl^dharma, va., right ; law ; virtue. 
 ^^ dhairya, n., steadfastness. 
 TTO ^JflfM, m., beast. 
 ■^^ hala, n., strength, might. 
 
 Exercise Vill. 
 
 ^ HT^ 1 5^ I ^f^ Tnftfnft^^R^t 5^^ I ^ I 7n# (§ lei) 
 ■?r^^ tlr^T^Tf t^T !?■% itrM'irfTT 1 8 1 tnxn^:?t wr^ i q i 
 
 ^% I ^ I t^wt: (abi.) ^ ^^ft ^■^ I ^ I '^i^^lig ^^% I e I 
 wt t^ Tra: 1 10 1 v%^ ^5PT^ ^'^'HT I «i«i I ^r^ ^: 
 Tn«^ trt: %w^ MR I ^ ^^ Trg^p^ MHL*nr*dHTT: i <j? | 
 ^% ^R^ ^rr^ I <)8 I ^%f^gT#T ^'erf'fi i sm i ''gf^T '^ft 
 %^ II «i§ II 
 
 17. The two houses* yonder* tremble^ by the power' (instr.) 
 
 * ^ffT, 'thus', is very comm,only used as a particle of quotation, 
 following the words quoted. 
 
48 
 
 Lesson VIIL IX. 
 
 of the ocean's^ waves*. 18. The father' beholds* his son's^ face.* 
 19. "We strive' after the advantage* of the scholars';" thus* 
 (TtW) speak* the teachers'. 20. The children* ask* their father* 
 for food' (accus.). 21. In the forest' yonder* elephants' are 
 fighting' with bears*. 22. The two ^"dras' serve* the two Aryans* 
 here*.) 23. Fruits' please' the children*. 24. Whence' do ye receive' 
 money*? 25. Now' the two seers* begin* the sacrifice'. 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 162. Feminines in '^ a, declined like ^•n' send, 'army.' 
 
 N, 
 A. 
 I. 
 
 ^•fl^TI^ senabhydn 
 
 %«i«(t^ 
 
 ^•nf'T^ sendbUs 
 ^TT'il^ sendhhyas 
 
 9*(I*(IH. sendndm 
 %irr^ sendsu 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 %^ send %^ sene (a + i) ^Tl^ sends 
 
 %TnF^ sendm n ■>, » » 
 
 %?|^ senayd 
 I). %<n% sendydi 
 Ab. %irnn^ «ewaja« 
 
 G. » T) 
 
 L. ^•1|i{IH. sendydm 
 V. %% sene 
 
 163. Adjectives in '^ a are declined in the masc. like ?^, in 
 the fem. like %^, in the neuter like il^r. But often the fem. 
 stem ends in % i, and is declined like ^f^ (in Less. XI). 
 
 164. Final ^ di and ^n" ^% according § 159, become '^TT ^y 
 and -^nq dv respectively before any following vowel or diphthong. 
 The ^ or '^ may then be dropped, leaving a hiatus. The ^ is 
 in fact always dropped, but the ^ not often. Thus, %in^ ^T^ 
 becomes, through the medium of %*7|4||<(^ ^T^, %TR|T W^l 
 ^^ ^■^ becomes "^^M^. 
 
 165. Initial ^, after short vowels, the preposition ^, and the 
 
Lesson IX. 
 
 49 
 
 prohibitive particle ?n, becomes ^■. thus, ^f^ ^TTT becomes ^^ 
 
 166. An initial •^^ of a root generally becomes tjf after a 
 verbal prefix containing T^, either original or representing ^; such 
 as '^^•5; 'between', f^^, ipCTi etc. Thus, THSJ^rf^, ffWf^- 
 
 167. The following prefixes are often used befoie verbs: ^J«T 
 'after, along, toward '^^.^^'^ 'down, off'; ^^^qp, up forth or out'; 
 
 ,^TI 'to, toward'; f^ 'down; fn, jnto'; f^fW '6*iIf[''f&Hh' ; ■qrf 'to ' 
 iJB, distance, away'; nfx^ 'round about, around'; U 'forward, forth''; 
 ^'JFl 'along -with, completely.' 
 
 Vocabulary IX. 
 
 Active Verbs: 
 
 IJ^ + '^^ (avagdcchati) under- 
 stand. 
 
 H + '1S[^ (avatdratt) descend. 
 
 •ft + ^XI (upandyati) introduce, 
 consecrate. 
 
 + Vl^{'parii}dyati) lead about; 
 marry. 
 
 Vi^ + ^T (utpdtati) fly up. 
 
 ■^^ + ^cf (avardhati) descend. 
 
 Deponents: 
 Ifj^^ + ^pF^^ (samgdcchate) come 
 together, meet. 
 
 Snbst. : 
 
 ^g m., arrow, c os r. to-us 
 cliHTT f-> daughter, maiden. 
 
 Ferry, Sanskrit Primer. 
 
 f^ + 'TCI (pardjdyate) be con- 
 quered (rarely w. act. sense: 
 conquer). 
 
 xrg" + H (prapddyate) flee for re- 
 fuge (ace.) to (ace. of person), 
 
 fif^ (hUksate) beg, get by begging. 
 
 ^31^ (denom. — mrgdyate) hunt 
 for, seek. ' ' 
 
 a<^ (vdrtate) exist, subsist, be, 
 become. 
 
 WW (fdbhate) be brilliant, shine; 
 be eminent. 
 
 t[W\ gangs f., n, pr., the Ganges. 
 jj^f^ m., householder, head of 
 family. 
 
 ^'i^*. 
 
50 
 
 Lesson IX. 
 
 ^IITJIT f-) shade. 
 
 1|'«||J| m., nom. pr., Prayaga (a 
 
 city, Allahabad). 
 t{^ n., fear. 
 JTf^T f.j wife, woman, 
 ?Tnrr f., speech, language. 
 flr^ f., alms. 
 4|44«|| f., n.pr., Yamuna (a river, 
 
 the Jumna). 
 XTJ m., n., battle. 
 Xlin f-) street. 
 
 f^^TT f') knowledge, learning. 
 f^fJT m., bird. 
 eI[JV m., hunter. 
 
 ■jfTTJf n., protection. 
 #srr f; twilight. 
 ^j} m., heaven. 
 ^^ n., heart. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^^, f. »^^, black. 
 Tfm, f. »^, bad, wicked. 
 TflfH, f. '^rr, much, abundant; 
 pi. many. 
 
 Adr.: 
 
 ^ together with (_postpos. , w. 
 
 insir.). 
 M^ii[ suddenly, quickly. 
 
 Exercise IX. 
 finrf^ R I ^ l^;%g ^'i*i«ri ^^: i ^ i it: ^wt ttt: -qftr 
 
 ^^ ^^TS-TTTW ira^ I ^ I t»T^^ TTT^ ftr^^ ^^ I ^ I 
 
 ^r^ 31^ ifRt f^^ cT^ ^ ^nr^ i ^ i ^s^qr^ (§i64) ^ 
 
 15. The two scholai*'^ beg^ much* alms^ from the wives* of 
 the householders*. 16. At Prayaga^ the Ganges^ unites* with the 
 Yamuna'. 17. Bad* men^ do not* reach* (gfJ^) heaven'. 18. 
 Vispu*, to-day' ^iva* marries'^ Ganga*, Hari's* daughter'- 19. In the 
 battle* the kings' fight* with arrows^ and^ conquer^ their enemies*. 
 
 * "Birds of a feather flock together?'. 
 
Lesson IX. X. 51 
 
 20. Here^ in the street^ the two kings* dismount^ from their black* 
 horse8M21. The seer's^ two sons' are eminent* in learning* {instr.). 
 
 22. From fear^ of the wicked* hunters' (aJZ.) two birds* fly up'. 
 
 23. At twilight* Qoc. du.) the seers? (§ 13, 3) reverence* the godsl 
 
 24. In the street' of the village* the teacher' and^ the scholar* meet^ 
 
 25. We two sacrifice' to the gods* for ourselves ; we do not* sacri- 
 fice' for Hari^ 
 
 Lesson X. 
 
 168. Terl)s> Passive Inflection. A certain form of present- 
 stem, inflected with middle endings, is used only with a passive 
 meaning, and is formed from all roots for which there is occasion 
 to make a passive conjugation. Its sign is an accented "^ yd added 
 to the root, without any reference to the classes according to which 
 the active and middle forms are made. The inflection is precisely 
 like that of other a-stems. Thus, fpil tanye, cT^^ tanydse, t\'H'r[ 
 tanydte, etc. 
 
 169. Outside the present-system middle forms may be used in 
 a passive sense; but there is a special form for the aor. pass, in 
 the 3rd sing. ^yrvw-.i/C ^ *w.Ui— "^ -i fi f'i' aPu^c 
 
 170. The form of root to which the passive-sign is appended 
 is usually a weak one. Thus a penultimate nasal is dropped; and 
 certain abbreviations which are made in the weak forms of the 
 perfect, or in the past passive participle, are found also in the 
 passive present-system. E. g. from ^I^, pass. '^351^; from ^s^, 
 
 171. In the roots ^^, ^, ^t(^, ef^, ^^, and ^t^, the «f va 
 becomes ^ w in the pres. ; thus, '<d'«i|di 'dU(d> ^(ii|r| (see note to 
 § 102), Mliid*. Similarly, ^jg( makes '?[^^, and ^^ and TTIF make 
 ^TfJ^ and ^^g?r^; ^TW: makes l\|6i|"fi. 
 
 4* 
 
52 Lesson X. 
 
 172. Final ^ and ^ of roots are generally lengthened; thus, 
 
 173. Final ^ is in general changed to f^; thus, ^, t^B^nj 
 but if preceded by two consonants it takes guna; thus, ^, ^qjq. 
 The roots in "variable r", which the natives write with '^ f, 
 change '^ to %tc;, or, if a labial letter precede, to ^T^"! thus, g, 
 7fh§%; |i, ' strew', ^5t^; but ^, ^[^. 
 
 174. Final '^ of roots is usually changed to f;; thus, ^, 
 ^^; ?rr. 'fN^; '^rr, VN^- But vn makes TJrra^; and so some 
 other roots in '^. jx^x ^ It 
 
 175. The roots TJ^ and Ti^ usually form their passives from 
 parallel roots in ^T; thus, dl^lT). But (T'?r% and ^t«j7i occur. '^ 
 
 176. Verbs of causative inflection, and denominatives in ^HI} 
 form their passive by adding ^ to the causative or denominative 
 stem after ^^ has been dropped ; thus, -ifllffl ' is stolen '; *|«!{(7i 
 ' is counted '. 
 
 177. The personal passive construction, with the logical subject 
 in the instrumental, is particularly common with transitive verbs; 
 and not less so the impersonal passive construction, both with 
 transitive and intransitive verbs. Thus, ^rXW ^^11 <!f^7) 'Heaven 
 is reached by the man'; -4||J|M|^ 'one comes hither'; ^XJI% 'one 
 sleeps'; ^^"?| 'it is heard', i. e. 'they say'- The predicate to the 
 instrumental subject of such a construction is of course also in- 
 strumental; thus, <^|*j(JjfqT!n' ^^^ 'Rama lives as a seer'. 
 
 Vocabulary X.;--r'-'^^ ^>^-^ 
 
 Verbs, with passives; 
 
 g; (p. kriydte) make, do, perform. 
 '^'^(khdnati; p. khdydte,khanydte) 
 
 dig. 
 ifX (g^yati; p. giydte) sing. 
 
 "^JW^p.grhydte) take, receive, seize." 
 ^^ (ddfati; p. dagydte) bite. 
 2ZT {dydti; p. diydte) cut. 
 ij^a (dwyati; p. divydte) play. 
 IVT (p- dhtydte) put, place. 
 
Lesson X. 
 
 53 
 
 2VT (difdyati; p. dhiydte) suck. 
 VfT (dhyayati; p. dhyaydte) think, 
 
 ponder. 
 :0T (P- piydte) drink. 
 Itf (Hindu tl; p. purydte) fill. 
 '^sa (p. badhydte) bind ; entangle ; 
 
 catch. TTtra-^.et. /(hOWoL .U^-v-* neglect, 
 
 e,asure. 
 
 fvl^-: 
 
 iTT (p- miyate) irft_- 
 ^^ (p. ucydte) speak, r 
 
 Substantives: 
 tJJT^T f'5 command. 
 ^rniT f-, hope. 
 ep'^ n., fagot; wood. 
 
 ^l7In.,-song..2j>^^(h^te 
 
 ^3 m., pot, vessel. 
 
 ^cf n., melted butter; ghee. 
 
 Vf^r n., grain, 
 
 TniJ na.) noose, cord, snare. 
 
 ^TJ^ (vdpati; p. upydte) sow, scatter. 
 ^freC. (p- fisydte) rule; punish, f 1 
 ^ (p. ffii/'ifO hear. ^.'^^_ 
 ■crYp. stuydte) praise. 
 ^xj^ (p. supydte) sleep, '^.^.-.w^ 
 1^ (p. hlydte) abandon, give up; 
 
 r o"" "S} Qivdyati; p. huydte) call. 
 + '^ call, summon. 
 
 JTT^ m., burden. 
 
 fiT^ m., beggar, ascetic. 
 
 Tf^ m., servant, f i^\j>t-' 
 
 *n^T f-, garland. 
 
 <|'34| n., kingdom. 
 
 ■ftrsT m., child. 
 
 ^ft| m., snake. t 
 
 Adj.: 
 f%^, f. 0^7, obedient. 
 
 Exercise X. 
 
 yaiti ^^ ^^ r ? I fwfn: m^4*ii^ i ?i i ^^^ji< trt^ i m i 
 I ftn^ Ji<iu!i^*iv| I § I 'ft: ^^irar: f^R^ i ^ i ^cf^fir^Tn: 
 ^r^ ^^ I 'S I TT^T f»T^ ^fw^ Ti^^ f*rf^ ^^% I ft I 
 ^fisrnjrt 'ftft 'i^W i «io i ^wf^rrir ^^ ^^^ i ii i Tswt T% 
 «T^ ^TRT whi^ M^ I f ^ ^rr^: ^^T ^^^ I «i^ I 
 ^T ^Twr: ft[^i^ I <18 I iT»Tfi: ^^-Ri wft 'I'^^iul^Ti i «m i 
 ^T 3Rf TfN^ I <j§ I ^iirhir TTSJT •fti^% ^"^Tsr i <i^ i ^"^ 
 
 ^^ T^ I '^ I ^^TRnilT^ II 'VL II 
 
54 Lesson X. XI. 
 
 (Use passive constructions throughout.) 
 20. Grain^ is scattered' for the birds*- 21. Garlands* are twi- 
 ned' (use ^^) by the maidens^. 22. Again^ Hari* is praised* 
 by Kama'. 23. Visnu* drinks* water' from his hand^. 24. 'Pleas- 
 antly* (^I%f) one sleeps' in the shade^'; so* say' the people . 
 25. Both seers* sacrifice^. 1 26. The father* sets* hopes^ on his child' 
 (loc). 27. The scholar' neglects* the teacher's* command^ 28. The 
 two scholars* think' about their text-book* (worn.). 29. Grain* is 
 sown' in the fields*. 30. They play^ with dice* (impers. pass.). 
 
 31. The king's* commands" are received' by the obedient' servants*. 
 
 32. The man* digs' in the field*. 
 
 Lesson XI. 
 
 178. Yerbs. Imperfect Actire, a-coDJngation. The imperfect is 
 formedfrom the present-stem by prefixing the augment '%, and adding 
 a set of secondary endings. 
 
 179. If the present-stem begin with a vowel, the augment unites 
 with it to form always the «rddAi-vowel, not the ^Mna; thus'^ + '^ 
 or ^ or U ='^; ^ + ^ or ^ = ^^; ^ + ^ = ^IT. 
 
 180. If a preposition be prefixed, the augment comes between 
 preposition and verb, as in Greek; thus, from 3TI-<ft, impf.-stem 
 ■gxTR'?!, i. e. ^3TT + ^ + I'^T; f^-'fl", impf.-stem aq<izr. 
 
 181. The inflection in the active is as follows: 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1- '^e(^4{^ dvadam ^Rf^T^ dvadaoa '^^CT^T dvadama 
 
 2. '^'^^^ dvadas 'W^^jt^ dvadatam -4|c(^'r| dvadata 
 
 3- '^R^?!^ dvadat '-^IcI^'dTI. dvadatam '^^^•(^ dvadan 
 
 182. The imperfect is the tense of narration ; it expresses past 
 time simply, without any further implication. 
 
 183. Poly syllabic Feminines in % t, declined like ^f^, * river.' 
 
Lesson XI. 
 
 55 
 
 N. 
 
 A. 
 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 G. 
 
 L. 
 
 V. 
 
 Sing. 
 •I^ nadl 
 •irf)*{_ nadtm 
 «1«ll nadi/d 
 •1% nadyai 
 •RII^ nadyas 
 
 Dual. Plural, 
 
 •f^n nadyau 151^ nadyas 
 
 •I^^UnH nadXbhydm, *|/)fi{{^ nadihUs 
 
 ■n n •T^t^r^ nadibhyas 
 
 » » 1^^ nadyos •T^IT'^ nadi?iam 
 
 "T^Tl^ nadydm „ „ l^t^ wadisw 
 
 184. Final uasals. The nasals ^, Iffj and »(^, occurring as finals 
 after a short vowel, are doubled before any initial vowel: thus, '^- 
 fH^^ ^f becomes -^f^^W"^. 
 
 Terts: 
 ■^(^^ + '^^ (avahntdti) cut off or 
 
 down. 
 tra (pdihati) recite, read. 
 
 Vocabulary XI. 
 
 f%T|T + U (pravipdtt) enter. 
 
 + '^TT seat oneself. 
 % + '^ (ahdrati, -te) fetch, bring. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 '^r^m.,purpose; meaning; wealth. 
 ^[^ m., nowj. I""., the god Indra. 
 ^^|(if| f., nom. pr., the goddess 
 
 Indrani. 
 cBT^r D., poem. 
 ?nsr m., literary work, book. 
 ^«|«n f., mother. 
 d liTl f., female slave, servant. 
 ^1^ f., goddess, queeu. 
 TTT^ f., city. 
 •ITT) f., woman, wife. 
 
 X(^ f., wife, consort. 
 
 y^ f., daughter. 
 
 Uf^cA n., book (manuscript). 
 
 H^ m., flood, high water. 
 
 14(^41 f'? earth ; ground. 
 
 ^T^TiJ' m., priest, Brahman. 
 
 f{^ m., fish. 
 
 d([l[\ {., cistern. 
 
 ^pn f-) council, meeting. 
 
 %irr f-, army. 
 
 ^^ n., song of praise. 
 
56 Lesson XI. XII. 
 
 Exercise XI. 
 
 tH^t ^trarrfxir ^*)^ ' m i i^ Jn^rfnrerR i § i 3^ J5sn 
 
 14. When* ye besoo^t* (TTOi?) the king* for protection' (ace), 
 then* ye were^ (^T) in misfortune®. 15. In the two rivers* Gaiiga' 
 and* Yamuna' it is® (^Tl^) high-water^ ( 16. The two women* sang* 
 a song of praise' about Rama* (gen.). 17. 0* seers*, why' do ye 
 both sacrifice® to the goddesses* with melted butter*? 18. The queen's* 
 women-servants* brought® jewels' and* precious stones*. 19. In 
 anger* (abl.) the teacher* struck* the scholar* with his hand'. 
 
 20. The two servants* brought* water* from the cistern' jn pots*. ,, 
 
 21. Ye cut off* (impf.) wood' from the trees* with the axe*. ■22. The 
 seer* praised® Indrani*, Indra's* consort', with hymns*. 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 185. Feminine Substantives in ^ i and ^ u are declined as in 
 the paradigms on the next page. The two series of forms exhibit 
 complete parallelism: where the one shows i, y, e, or ay, the other 
 shows respectively u, v, o, or av; of. §§ 50, 51. In the D., Ab-'-i 
 
 G., and L. sing., these stems sometimes follow ^^i thus matyai, 
 
 -. - ji -■ - - '''•- f'^ *''' 
 
 -yai, -yam; dhenvai, -vas, -vani. 
 
 186. Feminiues in ^ i and ^u: fffTf 'opinion'; ^<I 'cow'. 
 

 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 57 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 flfrl^ maUs 
 
 flfft matt 
 
 JTrl^reC matayas 
 
 A. 
 
 ?rfrm matim 
 
 » » 
 
 *{tft^ maiM 
 
 I. 
 
 M^l matya 
 
 ?Tf7Wr»l matibhyan 
 
 » TTRt^^ matibhis 
 
 D. 
 
 Vr^ mataye 
 
 n 1) 
 
 IRfTlWj;^^ matibhyas 
 
 Ab. 
 G. 
 
 Tcl^ mates 
 
 T^t^ matyos 
 
 » » 
 
 V n 
 
 *1dl»(Il^ matmam 
 
 L. 
 
 H^ matau 
 
 » i> 
 
 '^[t[^ matim 
 
 V. 
 
 ^% male 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 \l«J^ dhenus 
 
 ^^ dhenu 
 
 \in=f^ dhenavas 
 
 A. 
 
 \|<J4{^ dhenum 
 
 n r> 
 
 \I^^ dACTMS 
 
 I. 
 
 \p^J dhenva 
 
 \l^*H\t( dhenubhyam \(^fvi^ dhenubhis 
 
 D. 
 
 
 ■n i> 
 
 Vf 'JT^ dhenubhyas 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ^^ft^ dhenos 
 
 » -n 
 
 J) » 
 
 G. 
 
 » » 
 
 ^Wt^ dhenvos 
 
 ^iR'IT'^ dhenundm 
 
 L. 
 
 ^^ dhenau 
 
 y> » 
 
 \I»fg dhenum 
 
 187. Adjectives in ^ j and ^ m are often inflected in the fe- 
 minine like irfW and ^g. But adjectives in ^ a preceded by one 
 consonant often form a derivative feminine stem by adding 'l^ j. 
 Thus, ^^ 'much', N. masc. ^^^, f. W^, n. ^^; 3J^ 'heavy', 
 m. a|4^{{^, f. 31^, n. ?l^. This fem. is then declined like •T?^- 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 W:^^ (kdlpate) be in order; tend 
 or conduce to (w. dat.). 
 
 Vocabulary XII. 
 
 i^TI + ^T Qj/padigdti) teach, in- 
 struct. 
 ^f^T (vinddti, vinddte) acquire. 
 
58 
 
 Lesson XII. 
 
 Snbst. : 
 qj^f ni., quarrel. 
 efiT^ n., poem. 
 cgVf^ f., glory. 
 arrt m. , cowherd, shepherd; 
 
 guardian. 
 gjtfir f-i birth; caste; kind. 
 \irRT f., decision of character; 
 
 courage. 
 tJTf^W ni., prince. 
 ^f^ f., prudence, intelligence. 
 irfw f-, devotion, honor. 
 VfJH m., part, piece. 
 *lfiT f-) prosperity, blessing. 
 ?jfiT f.j earth, ground, land. 
 
 TTf^T f-, fly, gnat- 
 
 uHh f-, salvation, deliverance. 
 
 ^fSf-, stick, staff. 
 
 <_piJT m., ray; rein. 
 
 TTf^ f., night. 
 
 sfTU' m., wound. 
 
 UrfiiT f., repose. 
 
 ^srfJT f-> hearing ; holy writ. 
 
 "mfff f., tradition ; law- book. 
 
 ^^ m., sleep; dream. - 
 
 fjf., jaw. >^-)^V^ 
 
 Adj.! 
 ■^, f. o^, low. V^ 
 
 Vi^, f. o'^^ principal, first. 
 ^ m., f., n., or f. o^^ light. 
 
 A, I 
 
 ^i^rclse XII.' 
 ^'^: «h«^^f*<^n ff int^'rf'r^f^ w]v^: ii ^ ii 
 
 fn: 1 8 1 5#^ ^tw ^r*r6^ i m i ^^tw?^ rfr^^y^i^rrt: i § i 
 ^^■nqti: I c I ""^^wf wra^ ^"^ aro^ i e. i f^iwnfNt wrfrrg 
 
 ^ II «1J{ II 
 
 15. Visnu* rejoices* at the devotion^ (instr.) of the pious* (pi.), 
 and^ gives' deliverance'. 16. Men' of many* castes^ dwelt' in the 
 city*. 17. The birds* see' the hunter^, and' fly op* from the 
 ground*. 18. By the power^ of intelligence' we overcame* advers- 
 
Lesson XII. XIII. 59 
 
 ity^ 19. The cowherd* guards* the cows' in the wood^ 20. By 
 intelligence* and' diligence^ ye acquire® much* glory*. Jsi. The 
 poem* tends* to the poet's^ glory' {two datives'): 22. For prosperity* 
 we bow before* (yiva* (ace). 23. The reins* are being fastened* 
 (■^TOT) to the horse's^ jaws' (Zoc). 24. In the night* we both read' 
 (imp/.) holy writ^. 
 
 Lesson XIII. 
 
 188. Verbs, a-coiyngatioii. Imperfect Middle. The imperfect 
 middle of verbs in a is as follows: 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1. '^^4T cilabhe (a + i) »*lTWfW 'iiobhavahi 'JTTTfW dldbhamahi 
 
 2. ^rSWTRC. dlabhathas "If^H dlabhethdm oV(\£(r{^ dlabJiadhvam 
 
 3. ■^RTHrf dlabhata '^fTTH dlabhetam <»JT«3 dlabhanta 
 
 "With H^H( and TtrTfl of the dual, cf. TJ% and TJ^ of the 
 pres. ind. mid. 
 
 189. Root -words in % i are declined as follows: 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 '"n. V, 
 
 . V^rf^JS 
 
 f^J^ dhiyau 
 
 f%\H^ dhiyas 
 
 A. 
 
 t^44^ dhiyam 
 
 7i » 
 
 !) M 
 
 I. 
 
 flraT dUya 
 
 'sJfjrT'^. dhibhyam 
 
 \nf*4^ dhlbhis 
 
 D. 
 
 1^1% dhiye 
 
 » » 
 
 \JVkI^ dhlbhyai 
 
 AU. 
 
 fvq^ra: eOdyas 
 
 )) » 
 
 n » 
 
 G. 
 
 n i> 
 
 tv^t^ i^^iyos 
 
 t^TTW; dhiyam 
 
 L. 
 
 ■f%rf«I dhiyi 
 
 » n 
 
 \^dhisu 
 
 In the D., Ab. -Gen., and L. sing., and G. pi., these stems 
 sometimes follow sj^; thus, dhiydi, dhiyas, dhiyam, dhmam. Cf. 
 § 185. Observe that where the case- ending begins with a vowel 
 the stem- final I is split into ty. 
 
60 Lesson XIII. ^ 
 
 190. The following additional prefixes are used with verbs: 
 ^f%J 'over, above, on'; '^fq 'unto, close upon'*; '^S(fi{ 'to, unto', 
 'against' (often with implied violence) ; f5( 'down, into, in '; Trfll 
 'back to, against, in return'; f^ 'apart, away, out'. ^{ " 
 
 191. Both in verbal forms and in derivatives, the final ^ or ^ 
 of a prefix ordinarily lingualizes the initial ^ of a root to which 
 it is prefixed; and, in a few cases, the X( remains even after an 
 interposed ^ of augment or reduplication; thus, from ^T? + f'Tj 
 'R'fl^fW; Wr+^Tf>il, pres. pass. '^rf^^V?T^, impf. pass, ^nzf- 
 
 192. The final 5^^ of prefixes in '^[^ and '^^ becomes '^ be- 
 fore initial ^, ^, t(^, TJR; thus, from T^+ fsf^, f«lHl?I%. 
 
 Verbs: 
 gnu +^f^ {ati^Tdmati, -krdmate) 
 
 pass beyond or by, transgress. 
 ^P[^ + ^^ (ujjdyate) be born, 
 
 arise from (a6Z.). 
 + U arise, come into existence. 
 V7 + '^ft cover, keep shut. 
 •r^ + f^ (vindgyati) disappear, 
 
 perish. 
 •T^ + 5EfI^ (samndhyaW) gird; 
 
 equip. 
 ^T^ + f'RC (nispddyate) grow; 
 
 arise from (abl.). 
 
 Vocabulary XIII. 
 
 V[m + irfw (pratibhdmte) answer 
 
 (w. ace. of pers.). 
 7H+T( arise; rule. 
 ■^^ (racdyati) arrange, compose 
 
 (a literary work), 
 ■ftra +'irflT(f>'«*«^et^tt)hold back; 
 
 forbid. 
 %g^4-f«I(ni«e«a<e) dwell; devote 
 
 oneself to; attend. 
 ^rr + ^f^ mount, stand above 
 
 or over; rule, govern. • 
 
 ^+lff?T hinder; injure; offend. 
 
 Sometimes, with the verbs "ff^ and VT? abbreviated to fll; 
 but in classical Skt. most commonly used as a conjunction: 'also', 
 ' too '. 
 
Lesson XIII. 
 
 61 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 ^1^ f-) permission. 
 
 t;gx; m., god ; lord. 
 
 oRlftTT ra., dove. 
 
 eRxt m., ear. 
 
 elTfJf m., love, desire. 
 
 ^iTTW °-5 reason, cause. 
 
 ^t>il m-, anger. 
 
 WRT n., net. 
 
 \}V f., understanding, insight. 
 
 «II3( m., destruction. 
 
 TRT m., n., lotus. 
 
 lj4^M m., man (homo). 
 
 *I^KI^ m., great king. 
 
 ^f^ m., sage; ascetic. 
 
 1^^ f-, girdle. 
 
 ^ft? HI., infatuation. 
 
 X[^ m., wagon. 
 
 ^'fr Ki) desire, avarice. 
 
 ^'fffrf f-, dwelling. 
 
 ^ f., luck, fortune, riches; as 
 
 nom. pr., goddess of fortune. 
 *iij^ m., ocean. 
 Wfg f., creation. 
 ■g^ f., modesty, bashful ness. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^M> f- '*'^, whole. 
 t(H^, f. "'^beautiful. 
 >s[^'?^, f. o'^lT) steadfast, brave. 
 %<T, f- '^TTj white. ,v v \', 
 
 Exercise XIII. 
 ^tHT'^tf^ TTST^ ^t»T: TR^ «*l<U!*i II R II 
 
 wr^nrT I ^ I ^ 5^ t%r^. ^r^t fM%^^ i ? i Trf^^fiT ^^ 
 ^rti**ldiH I 8 I ^ t^r^rr (gen.) ^^f^i: i m i fv^ ^%^ g^qr 
 i:^rrf^ mk^^Htt i § i t^ iW^NrfT tt^ i ^ i ^>^f t^r^- 
 
 ^fm^ I ^ I flr^ WT^^T ^PTSIT I Q. I 'TTgt^frff : MO I 5- 
 
 ^rfrr I '^^ I ^g vRi f^TO?i% I <i^ I 5T^ *irfii-<-«i*ifiti flr- 
 ^TT^ yychiR f^r^rfiiT ii qa ii ^ 
 
 15. *The goddess of fortune was born from the ocean. 16. Why- 
 did ye hold your ears shut? (pass, constr.) 17. "The ^udras spoke 
 
 As the principal euphonic rules have now been stated and 
 
62 Lesson XIII. XIV. 
 
 the language of the Aryans": thus answered (impers. pass.) the 
 Brahmans. 18. By its cleverness the dove was freed from the 
 net, 1 19. ''The teacher girded both boys with the girdle.y 20. When 
 the scholar's modesty disappeared, then the law was offended against. 
 21. AVhence did ye get (^H? ) the white cows ? 22. The whole 
 earth was ruled by the great king. 23. For prosperity (dat.) we 
 took refuge with the king (H-TTS'). 24. Two law-books were com- 
 posed by Vis^u. 25. The milk of the black cow is drunk by both 
 children. 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 193. Terbs, a- conjugation. Present Imperative Active. The 
 
 inflection of this mode is as follows: 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1- ■f^rf'f vdddni ef^T^ vddava ^^TT vddama 
 
 2. "^[^vdda vXe- -Sf^fm^ vddatam ^f^ vddata 
 
 3. c|(^fl vddatu '^^y^^. vddatam ^^nT vddantu 
 
 194. The three first persons are properly subjunctive forms, 
 and accordingly often express a wish or future action. 
 
 195. The second and third persons of the imperative express 
 oftenest a command; sometimes a wish or future action. The 
 negative used with the imv. is ^. n 
 
 196. A rare imv. form, either 2nd or 3rd pars. sing, (or plur.), . 
 is made with the ending -HJ^; thus, ^RrTTct- Its value is that of 
 a posterior or future imv. (like the Latin forms in to and tote). 
 
 197. Root-words in ^ fl, inflected like W f., 'earth'. 'V 
 
 exemplified in the exercises, no further indication need be made, 
 except in special instances, of the position of the words in the 
 Sanskrit. 
 
Lesson XIY. 
 
 63 
 
 NV. 
 
 A. 
 
 I. 
 
 D. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 G. 
 
 L. 
 
 Sing. 
 W^ bhus 
 WqTT^ bhuvam 
 VS(J bhuvd 
 ■JJ^ bhuve 
 wq;^ bhuvas 
 
 t{f^ bhuvi 
 
 Dual. 
 
 bhuvau 
 
 vn^TTH bhubhyam 
 
 0>k 
 
 ?T^^ bhuvos 
 
 Plural. 
 M?f^ bhuvas 
 
 1) n 
 
 )jfH^ bhubhis 
 3ra^ bhubhyas 
 
 n !> 
 
 JTefTI^ bhuvam 
 nn bhum 
 
 pi., these stems some- 
 bhuvam, bhundrru Cf. 
 
 In the D., Ab.-6., and L. sing., and G. 
 times follow •T^; thus, bhuvdi, bhuvas, 
 §§ 185, 189. 
 
 198. Polysyllabic Feminines in ^ m, inflected like ^V f., 
 ' woman '. 
 
 Dual. 
 ■^"5^ vadhvau 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. c|^4^ vadhus 
 
 A. c]V4H vadhum 
 
 I. "^^S^ vadhvd 
 
 D. '^^ vadhvai 
 
 Ab. cfl^l^ vadhvds „ „ 
 
 G. y, y, «tb4^^ vadhvos 
 
 L. c)Vc4|4{^ vadhvam „ „ 
 
 Plural. 
 <1%c|<^ vadhvas 
 
 ■^^iHJrm vadhubhydm '^tirfl?^ vadhubhis 
 „ „ '^V^Jf^ vadhubhyas 
 
 <t'M<IIH vadhunam 
 ^^^^ vadhusu 
 
 7-^s 7 
 Yerbs: 
 ^!R(. + •^rf*r (abJiydsyati) repeat, 
 study, learn. 
 
 H- U (prdsyati) throw forward or 
 into. 
 ■ferri + ^ (ddigdti) command. 
 
 Vocabulary XIV. ^ 
 
 ■^Tt inpass. (drgydte) seem, l^ok. 
 ^^+f^(m«a«fl!ft') inhabit; dwell. 
 ^fll + T (pravdrtate) get a-going, 
 
 break out, arise. 
 ig^ (fo'ca^i) sorrow, grieve. 
 ^?+tif (nisidati) seat oneself. 
 
64 
 
 Lesson XIV. 
 
 Snlist.: 
 ^frrf^ m-, guest. 
 TSfwfff n., untruth. 
 '^n^rra m-i study; recitation. 
 ■^X^^ ra-) command, prescription. 
 ■4||^<t n., seat, chair. 
 W^ f. , spoon, esp. sacrificial 
 
 spoon. 
 TJYS m-j lecture, lesson. 
 TTWr f'j creature; subject. 
 M f., earth, ground. 
 
 ^rfTT f-) song of praise; praise. 
 ^ l| I' f., daughter-in;law. 'V 
 
 Adj.: 1 
 
 ■^TlIT) f- "^5 lower; other. 
 T^X^, f. "'Wl, highest; other. 
 ^^, f. "^TT) crooked, bent. 
 ^i^, f. f:, beautiful. 
 
 Adr.: 
 
 ■^y*s(|{J^ under, underneath (^m.). 
 
 ^i^H. long (of time). ^ o A i }* 
 ■ ^v}h; far, afar. 
 
 ^rr prohibitive particle, like Greek 
 fjivi, Latin we. 
 
 •i*- 
 
 H^nir n., ornament. ^ 
 
 ?Jf., eyebrow. -'O" <^ (? "^ "j^ 
 
 cHI f., woman, wife. Wa~. . ^'i'Ax^j (postpos.) or. 
 
 %f^ f., altar. I^'^ "^^^ by. 
 
 ■g^ f., mother-in-law. 
 
 Exercise XIV. 
 
 ^"^ tl^cl ?n 1^ TC VWr{ TTIT^ II ? II 
 %1 ^ rR f^m^rR I s^ i f^ (^en.) ^4t ^ 1^ I 3 I 
 
 ^w ^rra% f^ft^'j 'Tf^ t^T^n: 1 8 1 ^mf*r: iff w^i ^^ri: 
 
 ■JTR^fT I M I ^ ^rf^^: ^if'^^TjlNI^cT Vm\ 'HI ■^•^ Ui^'^id'Rl 
 
 ■gfr: ^Mi-<*feltici: ^"^ i ^ i ^^^: f^ir^: i e. i xnz^rrafrT- 
 
 fn n<i 1 1 ^ TTiJiT srawR^ I <>R I ^ST ^ff t^rFfii i <«^ i 
 ^^trv^rrt^ am I1 18 II 
 
 i' 15. The women sing the praises (singular) of Indranl (pass, 
 constr.). 16. "Study ye holy writ and the sciences, speak the 
 
Lesson XIV. XV. 65 
 
 3te truth, honor your teachers " : thus* is the prescription' of the 
 text-books^ for scholars* (gen.). 17. Let kings protect their sub- 
 jects and punish the wicked: thus is the law not offended ('^ pass.). 
 18. vO women , reverence your mothers-in-law. ig.V^Let not the 
 coachman strike or torment the horses. 20. "Bring the jewels": 
 thus the two maid-servants were commanded by the queen. 21. Let 
 us with two spoons drop water on the altar. 22. "Let us play with 
 dice for money" (instr.): thus spoke the two warriors (pass.). 
 23. ^"To-day lot me initiate (imv.) my two sons": thus says the 
 Brahman. 24.MLiet the men dig a cistern. 
 
 Lesson XV. 
 
 199. Verbs, a- conjugation. Present Imperative Middle. The 
 
 present imperative middle is inflected thus: 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1. '^m Idbhdi ^mm% Idbhavahai '^V[^^^ Idbhamahai 
 
 2. ^TH^ Idhliasva ^ntv!||'44^ Idbhetham ^TT^^'FC, Idbhadhvam 
 3- ^TWrm Idbhatam ^l^rfTT^ Idbhetam ^^•dlT^ Idbhantdm, 
 
 200. The first persons are really subjunctive forms. The in- 
 flection of the passive imv. is precisely similar; thus, flfi'?!, fsh^*^* 
 f^^TflTJi;, etc. 
 
 201. Nouns in '^ r. These stems, like many belonging to the 
 consonant-declension, exhibit in their inflection a difference of 
 stem-form: strong, middle, and weak. (For the cases called strong, 
 etc., see Introd., § 87). In the weak cases (except loc. sing.) the 
 stem-final is "^ /•, which in the weakest cases is changed naturally 
 to X '>'• But as regards the strong cases, the stems of this declension 
 fall into two , classes : in the one — which is much the larger, 
 comprising all the nomina agentis, and a few others — the ^ is 
 vriddhied, becoming 'WTK. «'"; while in the other class, containing 
 
 Perrj} Sanskrit Primer... 5 
 
66 Lesson XV. 
 
 most nouns of relationship, the rg is gnnated, becoming ^P^ ar. 
 In both classes, the loc. sing, has '^r^ or as stem-final. The abl.- 
 gen. sing, is of peculiar formation; and the final "'^ J* is dropped 
 in the nominative singular. 
 
 202. Nomina agentis in ^ r, like efirT m., ' doer '. 
 
 Sing. c Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. eB<fT karm_ ' ^T^ kartarau 'Sf^^JTM. ^^rtaras 
 
 A. «)ni|<4i^ kartaram „ „ ^^^ kartfn 
 
 I. ^5^ kartra oR^^ITI^ -trbhyam eR^fll^ kartrbhis 
 
 D. ^'^ kartre „ „ efc'^WJ^i; kartrbhyas 
 
 ' Ab. ^R^ kartur (or -w) „ „ , „ 
 
 G. , , «B^f^ kartros ^dujll. karfrnam 
 
 L. eR^fT kartari „ „ efigg kartrm 
 
 V. efi^'^ kartar 
 
 203. Two nouns of relationship, ^Iff., "sister", and "fR m., 
 'grandson', follow this declension; but ^^ makes the ace, pi. 
 ^^^ svasr-s. 'ivvv/s- 1jAa;1(a, S n^ ffur./t y*'- 
 
 ' 204. The nouns of agency are sometimes used participially, 
 or -with adjective value. The corresponding feminine-stem is made 
 in ^z, and declined like •T^; thus, "m^ kartrl. c,?. ^KtXJ'\ , vvwTy 
 
 205. The grammarians prescribe a complete neuter declension 
 also for bases in W, precisely analogous with that of ^jf^ or ?re[, 
 but such forms are rare. 
 
 Verbs; 
 J[f{^ + ^ra (anugdcchati ) follow, 
 ^■^+^T^-'^ (samacdrati)commit, 
 perform, do. 
 
 Vocabulary XV. 
 
 ^^-|- f^ (vivddate) dispute, argue. 
 
 f%r + ^TT {agrdyate) go for pro- 
 tection to, take refuge with 
 (ace). 
 
Lesson XV. 
 
 67 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ''^j'm4 ™-j teacher. 
 '^'^ m., doer, maker, author; as 
 
 adj., doing, making. 
 ch|<!| m., time. 
 ^tqr f-i graciousness, pity. 
 aicl ni-> giver; as adj., generous. 
 ^4^ Da-» scamp, rogue.\lT\ "' 
 JTS m., seer, author (of Vedic 
 books); as adj., seeing. 
 ' VRT m., creator. (y»s-(U.-"*J^ 
 f^r^^ m., decision; certainty. 
 %H m., leader. 
 ll'fU^cI m., learned man ; pandit. 
 
 Tf^ n., step. 
 
 Ul^ny-rl n., penance, expiation. 
 
 1T«T m.j supporter, preserver ; lord, 
 
 husband; master. 
 X;t^«T m., protector. 
 aji^fTT ™-) *"*!' law-suit. A.!rAu- 
 
 y||4ri m., punisher, governor. 
 ■^S m., creator. 
 
 •m^ n., honor, glory (o/few os 
 indecl., w. foll'g dat.). 
 Adj.: 
 
 ^fr^, f. o^rr, poor. 
 
 ^^, f. o^TT) best, most excellent ; 
 better (to. /oW'^ a6Z.). 
 
 Exercise XV. 
 
 ?Rf ^^rt^ ^in%^ i^'r^ ^ i^* ii 8 ii 
 gw^ (rfaf.) t^^: ^: ^^ jR^al^srr ^^irrw: i % i ^tRni: 
 
 •TTRh^ 'W: I c I ^^^ ^^»^ ^iTft ^TH»9l' "^^^^ -fft 
 
 tjt: II a II / 
 
 * Words are often repeated, to give an intensive, a distributiv.e, 
 or a repetitional meaning. So here: "at every step". The po- 
 sition of ^ is very unusual; it would naturally follow ^M4^. 
 
 ** Loc. absoi. — supply "being". 
 
68 Lesson XV. XVI. 
 
 y 10. Let the wife love her husband. '' 11. Let the warriors follow 
 their leaders and fight with the enemy (jpl.). 12. At the river the boy 
 is to meet his two sisters (instr.). IS.yThe world was created by 
 the creator. 14. In the houses of pious givers alms is given to 
 ascetics. 15. King Bhoja was ('^R^) generous toward the author 
 (loc.) of the eulogies. n6. Let servants always be useful to (%^) 
 their masters (ace). 17. For protection* (ace.) betake yourselves* 
 to the gods', the protectors^ of the pious^. ^8. Men live by the 
 graciousness of the creator. 19. generous one, the poor bend 
 before theel 20. The man leads his sisters to the city (pass, 
 constr.'). 
 
 Lesson XVI. 
 
 206. Verbs, a-conjugation. Present Optative Active. The 
 
 present optative is formed from the general present-stem by the 
 addition of a mode-sign, after which are used secondary end- 
 ings (in 3rd pi. act. '^^ us, in 1st sing. mid. '^ a, in 3rd pi. mid. 
 "^sj^ ran). After an a-stem, this mode-sign, in all voices, is % i, 
 unaccented, which blends with the final a to 1^^ e (accented, or 
 not, according to the accent of the a) : and the If is maintained 
 unchanged before a vowel-ending (^I^, B1E^^, -41 1 V| |f(^, '4(MIH) ^Y 
 means of an interposed euphonic '^y. The inflection in the active 
 voice is as follows: 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1. c|^i|4{^ vddeyam '^^^ vddeva ^^IT vddema 
 
 2. Sf^^^vddes cp6f»'> -Sf^^rfn^ vddetam Sl^r^ vddeta 
 
 3. Sf^j^ vddet (^f^o '■''''sf^ynti, vddetam ^^^^ vddeyus 
 
 Similarly, f^^tJJ^ vigeyam, .j||iJJH, ndhyeyam, ■^^<<(^^^^^ 
 cordyeyam, etc. 
 
Lesson XVI. 
 
 69 
 
 207. The optative expresses: 1. ■wish or desire; 2. request or 
 entreaty; 3. 'what is desirable or proper; 4. what may or might, 
 can or could be. It is also largely used in conditional sentences. 
 The subject is often indefinite and unexpressed. The negative used 
 ■with the opt. is •T na. Both the prescriptive and the prohibitive 
 optative are very common. 
 
 208. The nouns of relationship in "^ (except ^?I and •TJT — 
 see §203) gunate ■^ in the strong cases; thus, 'fcnT tn., 'father', 
 ?nrT f.) 'mother', declined as follo-ws: 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. ^ 
 
 N. fxmT fUTn ftfrO -rrmti ftfR^ »nrrT^ 
 
 etc. etc. etc. 
 
 209. The stem 3ft m., f., 'bull' or 'co-w', is declined thus: 
 
 Sins 
 
 i-(i'J> 
 
 if 
 
 •^ 
 
 Dual. 
 
 NV. aft^ gavs 4||41 gdvau 
 
 - '•'•'Y-i>-V 
 
 ^ftwrrR gobhydm 
 
 A. 
 
 I. 4|c|| gavd 
 
 D. 31^ gave 
 
 Ab. aftB; 90s 
 
 Gr. „ „ 
 
 L. 3rf% 9<^'''^ 
 
 T^^H, ^a«o« 
 
 Plural. 
 W[^^^ gdvas 
 vm, gas 
 iftf*!^ gobhis 
 
 T^Tl^ gavam 
 Tft^gom 
 
 Yerbs: 
 JT^t, (mdnyate) think, suppose. 
 g'? (mddate) rejoice. 
 ■^j^ {fdnsati) proclaim (see also 
 in Vocab. I.). 
 
 Vocabulary XVI. 
 
 ^ (smdrati; p. smarydte) re- 
 member; think of; teach, esp. in 
 pass, 'it is taught', i.e. 'tra- 
 ditional'. 
 
70 
 
 Lesson XVI. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 aft m., f., bull, steer, cow ; f., 
 
 speech. 
 i jft^ n., ox-nature ; stupidity. 
 ^TTO !"•» fodder, hay. 
 ^|4j|d m., son-in-law. 
 fffg f., daughter. 
 Tf^ n., mud, bog. 
 frnr ni., father; du., parents; pi., 
 
 manes. 
 Tf^JS m., user, arranger. 
 "^Vl m., wise man, sage. 
 ifTtT m., brother. 
 ^TTJT f'j mother. 
 TTRT tn., month. 
 ^flJf n., pair. 
 ■^t!f n., protection. 
 3S||>^ n., an oblation to the manes, 
 
 accompanied by a sacrificial 
 
 meal and gifts to the Brah- 
 mans. 
 
 Adj.: 
 
 ^rf^I^, f. 'm, more, greater, 
 greatest. 
 
 eRTJTf^, f.o^, granting wishes; 
 as f., so. Vftf, the fabulous Won- 
 der-cow. 
 
 ^t>H^fh , f- "^j badly arranged 
 or used. X^Kx.^, rfli.# 
 
 TT^rfi, f- '^5 arranged, used. 
 ^, f. m, best. <f 
 
 Pron.: 
 
 ^ f., she, it. 
 
 AdT. and Conj.: 
 %i;if. 
 
 fsf^m always, daily. 
 Tf^ if. 
 H*H^ well, properly. 
 
 Exercise XVi. 
 
 aft^ wmf^* 'B'^r^ im^iT w^ h^: i 
 
 ^"iH^fhl J'Rfw ITTt^: t^ t^Sf^ II M II 
 
 *r^Tt *>^^ fiifit Tra-< 'q t?^ ^Trf^^ ^^i^ni an ■^%i-- 
 'il^ ri^ fq% w f^r%^ I ? I fti^jgt ^nt wr% ^rr^ ^rUg: 1 8 1 
 
 JlWM'H il^riUifrf VTfT^ g^T^ X l '^idlH I Ml 'ft: 'ft^W ftt- 
 
 i[w) ^ft^scTR I § I 'imrd«i4i M^ 4j (^ Mi4 i*< «t« I ^ I iff- 
 
 • Predicate. Play upon words throughout the verse. 
 
Lesson XVI. XVII. 71 
 
 Tit f^fT^ X%«Tf ^^ 'jTfift ^T^ jmg T%^: I ^ I ^ 
 
 IPT II <^R II 
 
 13. By Rsabhadatta, son-in-law of Nahapana, many cattle and 
 villages and much money were given to the Brabmans. 14. Thou 
 shall give the mother's jewels to the sisters (opt. or imv,). 15{vtet 
 the coachman bring ('^-^) fodder for the horses ; let him not tor- 
 ment the horses. 16i Of the father's property a greater part is to 
 be given {imv.) to the eldest of the brothers. 17. 'Ajhildren, bring 
 wood and water into the house daily"; thus was the father's com- 
 mand. 18./Let the cows graze in the forest. 19.i^et both live on 
 the milk (instr.) of the black cow. 20. '-The wagon is drawn by 
 two steers; ^1. The seer rejoices over the pair {instr.) of white 
 steers. 22.mari and^iva marry two sisters, the daughters of Rama. 
 
 Lesson XVII. 
 
 210. Terlbs, a- conjagation. Present Optative Middle. The 
 
 optative middle (and passive) of a-stems , formed as shown in the 
 preceding lesson, is inflected as follows : 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 1. ^WT Idbheya ^|%^f% Idhhevahi '^(f{f% IdbhemaM 
 
 2. <8l*<^l<l Idbhethds ^MH\^H( Idhheydtham ^nft^ IdbJiedhvam 
 
 3. ^|%(T Idbheta ^d^^ldlH Idbheyatam ^W'^'t^ Idbheran 
 
 Similarly ^^l^^ coryeya, ^Tf^^ samgaccheya, etc. 
 
 211. Declension. The stem ^ f., 'ship, boat', is entirely reg- 
 ular, taking throughout the normal endings, as given in § 90. 
 Thus: 11^, 'TRl^, TRT, etc.; ^nf[, M\*H[*(, etc.; MT^^, 
 ^^f'TI^, etc. 
 
72 Lesson XVII. 
 
 212. The stems ending in long vowels ('JHT, ^) ^) fall '"'o 
 two well-marked classes: A. root-stems — mostly monosyllabic — 
 and their compounds, with a comparatively small number of others 
 inflected like them; B. derivatire feminine stems in '^T and ^, 
 with a few in Bf, inflected like STTTT) 1^ and ^^- The stems 
 of class A take the normal endings throughout, with optional ex- 
 
 ' ceptions in dat., abl.-gen., and loc. sing, fem., and with 5^^ inserted 
 before '^"n^; of the gen. pi. The simple words are as nouns with 
 few exceptions fem. ; as adjectives (rare), and in adjective com- 
 pounds, they coincide in masc. and fem. forms. The declension of 
 the simple words in '|^ and ^ has been given (in §§ 189, 197); 
 those in "^ are rare that it is not possible to make up a whole 
 scheme of forms in actual use. 
 
 213. When any root in "^ or % or ^ is found as final member 
 of a compound word, these root -finals are treated as follows: 
 1. Roots in ^ lose that vowel before vowel-endings, except in 
 the strong cases and in the ace. pi., which is like the nominative. 
 Thus, f^^-tJl m., f., 'all- protecting': 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N.V. fq'JJin^ -pas f^■^^\ -pdu f^'^^m_ -pas 
 
 A. fe(JymH. -pam f¥iWtJW[K r, » 
 
 I. f^^TT vifvap-a f^"^Tft^ vipvap-os fef'^qif^l^ etc. 
 
 214. 2. Roots in % and gj change their final vowel, before 
 vowel-endings, into ^ and ?^_, if but one consonant precede the final 
 vowel; but if two or more consonants precede, the change is into 
 ^[^^ and ^3^ . Thus, ^I^-sR^ m., f., • corn-buying ' : nom.-voc. ^^^• 
 ^^-, ace. ^^ft||4J44^; ^RT-l? m., f., 'street-sweeper': nom. sing. 
 ^T^Rja^, ace. ?|Rn^J^. 
 
Lesson XVII. 
 
 73 
 
 Terbs: 
 t;^ + TTRt (pradksate) expect. 
 •r*^ + '^f^ (ahhindndati , poet. 
 
 -te) rejoice in, greet with joy 
 
 (ace). 
 
 Vocabulary XVII. 
 
 ■^J^^ (rdmate) amuse oneself. 
 
 + ^(virdmati') ceaaefrom (abl.y, 
 
 cease. 
 ^T+^g (anutis(hati) follow out, 
 
 accomplish. 
 
 Subst.: 
 B<S4I«I n., garden. 
 ^f^ f., agriculture. 
 (jllRifl n., life. 
 t^^'Sf m., command. 
 4|^MT^ n-, cattle-raising. 
 yORrtm-, domestic priest, chap- 
 Iain. 
 ^l^Tir n., eating. 
 ?JfI«(i m., servant. 
 ?T'?^ n., death. 
 
 fir^ n., friend. 
 
 "^ n., battle. 
 
 ^THpH n., trade. 
 
 fwfV m., rule; fate. 
 
 ^^J^ m., father-in-law. 
 Adj.: 
 
 7^, f. 0^^^ good, pleasant, dear; 
 as n. subst., fortune. 
 
 ^f^I^, f. «^, doubtful; un- 
 steady. 
 
 Exercise XVil. 
 ^^1%^ inft^rr f^lf ^^ 'T'TT* II % II 
 
 ^rraf T ^^: ai<.M*j^^i ^ i ^f^ it: ^^: ^w fwNfjtliw- 
 ^^ ^rvfir: WTi: i ^ i t^in: "^m ^ftr#i Trrgtrr^i ^t 
 ^Tn. I ? I ^^J 'nw iTftf fi; 1 8 I ^f^ ifT^ ^Tfrftr f^- 
 ^ (i^ ^ ?|5^^E^ I M I ^?rniT: ^a^^i'^dm : ^gi;tff<rc^ 
 jTT^ •pRT^ li^Ti I § I wT^rtNr^^^ <ff^?i I ^ I ^^fM 
 ii<,N*im ^ ^t^ irwr ^f^ I ^ I ^i?(ft '?rft:f»Tf^^- 
 mn I a I ^ gi^m^ I '\o I «<Hi3-yR ■^'srnrR; ii s«i ii 
 
 * Rule for an ascetic, who is to put aside all earthly desires 
 And passions. 
 
74 Lesson XVII. XVIII. 
 
 12. Let fodder be brought (^STT-l) (opt., imv.) by the brother 
 for the horses of the all-protecting king. 13. May ye see good 
 fortune (pZ.); may ye acquire (Wi) glory. 14. The king with 
 bis warriors crossed the sea in a ship. 15. Tell (opt, imv.) where 
 our friends may meet with their brothers. 16. You may amuse 
 yourselves in the garden, but cease eating (abl. of H^W) '^^ fruits 
 (geny: 17. Mayest thou be saved by the all-protector from thy 
 misfortune. 18. To-day let the king's two sons be consecrated 
 (opf., imv.) by the house -priest. 19. Ye both shall greet {opU, 
 imv.) your parents. 20. If we two should speak untruth, then we 
 should be punished by the king. 21. May I conquer the enemies 
 with my brave warriors: thus is the king's wish fjise '^Tf^ pass.). 
 22. May we receive the reward of virtue. 
 
 Lesson XVIII. 
 
 215. Cansative. The chief points to be noticed in the form- 
 ation of causative- stems have been given already (in Less. VII) ; 
 some additional ones follow. 
 
 216. Most roots in ^X and '^ add 'H^ before the conjugation- 
 sign ; thus, ^T^TTffl from l^T; ^iTITJ^lf?!; IW^lfTI; ^ij^f?? from 
 ^. ^1 makes ^M^jffl; '^and^Tj sometimes ^Ttj'JjfTl, etc., some- 
 times ^Xl^rfflj etc. iTTTi 'drink', makes IfTITfil (as though from 
 X^). A few roots in ^ and ^ take the same H^, with various 
 irregularities ; thus, ^rartM*lf7( from '^rf^l-^. 
 
 217. Medial or initial ^ in a light syllable is commonly length- 
 ened, but sometimes remains unchanged. Thus, TR^, 'mrjijfcT; 
 els'?., WR^j ^l^, TTT^rf^- But most roots in ^JJ^, and ^s^, 
 «^, HW, ^^^, with other rarer ones, generally keep the ^ short; 
 thus, ^11^. IT^fTT- 
 
Lesson XVIII. 75 
 
 218. Final vowels take vrddhi before iH^; thus, W, ^TR^lffT; 
 
 219. Some verbs of causative meaning are by formation de- 
 nominatives; thus m^iCnr, 'protect', called causative to 2Tn; ift" 
 W^fri, to ift; ^q^f?T, to ift; tTTrrafrr, to f^. 
 
 220. For the passive of causatives, see Less. X. 
 
 221. The causatives of intransitive verbs are transitive. The 
 causatives of transitive verbs are construed sometimes (a) with two 
 accusatives, sometimes (h) with an ace. of the object and an in- 
 strumental of the agent. Thus, "he causes the birds to eat the 
 cakes " may be rendered either (a) : fc|^'ll<t, fMU^H, ^l^^ld) 
 
 or (*) f^\%: fv -mo- 
 
 222. Participles. The general participial endings are ^>rl 
 (weak form "%<() for the active, and '^rTT for the middle. But 
 after a tense - stem in ^, the active suffix is virtually trT , one 
 of the two ^'s being lost; and the middle suffix is TTPT (ex- 
 cept '4||<| sometimes in causative forms). Thus, IT^n^^ bhdvant, 
 'a^«iT tuddnt, T^c^wfl divyant, ^"^^pfl cordyant; tm^tfj^ bhdva- 
 mdna, etc. For the declension of the participles in ^(nf see below, 
 Less. XXIIL 
 
 223. Frononn of the First Ferson. The pronominal declension 
 exhibits some striking peculiarities which are not easily explained. 
 The pronoun of the first person is declined thus : ^ /^ 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 A. •r^[^,, wi ^^>^ w(W[H., ^ ^r^TR:, i^ 
 
 D. jTfjj^, ^ ^-"^ „ , ^ "^im^im.' 'TO: 
 
 Ab. ?Tc^ OUL, -rttfti; » ^*H<1 
 
 G. Jm, ^ ^SJT^^Tt^, '^ ^^TT^i»i:, 'TO: 
 
76 
 
 Lesson XVIII. 
 
 224. The forms TTT, ^, ^> 'TOL are enclitic, and are never 
 used at the beginning of a sentence, or before the particles ^, 
 
 225. In pronouns of the first and second persons the plural is 
 often used for the singular. Pronouns (and other words as well) 
 show in Sanskrit a curious tendency to agree in form with the 
 predicate rather than with the subject to which they refer. 
 
 Verbs, with causatiTes; 
 ■^■"I eat; cans, (agdyati) make 
 
 eat ; give to eat. 
 ^ + '^rf^ study, read ; caus. (a- 
 
 dhyapdyati) teach, 
 ^(^in caus. (kalpdyati,-te) make; 
 
 ordain, appoint. 
 ol't^ in caus. (jandyati) beget. 
 ■^T + "^ in caus. (ajndpdyati) 
 
 command. 
 1?T give; caus. (ddpdyati) make 
 
 give or pay. 
 "^l^ see ; in caus. {dargdyati) show. 
 1^ + 'Rfr? in caus. ( dhapdyati) 
 
 make put on, clothe in (too ace). 
 ■"^ + "Wl lead away (caus. apa- 
 
 naydyati). 
 U'Sr in caus. (jprathdyati) spread, 
 
 proclaim. 
 
 Vocabulary XVIII. 
 
 W die; caus. (mardyati) kill. 
 ■^JSI sacrifice; caus. (ydjdyati) 
 
 make to sacrifice; offer sacrifice 
 
 for (ace.*). 
 ■^■^4- 'Wf*r in caus. (dbhwadayati) 
 
 greet. 
 f%? know; caus. (veddyati) in- 
 form (jdat.). 
 
 + fif in caus. inform (dat.). 
 H^ (vdrdhate) grow ; caus. (var- 
 
 dhaydti, -te) make grow; bring up. 
 ejj^ in caus. (vyathdyati) torment, 
 ^hear; in caus. (grdvdyati) make 
 
 hear, i. e. recite, proclaim (ace, 
 
 of pers.). 
 "^(T stand; in caus. (sthapdyati) 
 
 put, place; appoint; stop. 
 
 + IT {pratisthate) start off; in 
 
 caus. (prasthapdyati) send. 
 
 The priest who performs sacrifice for the benefit of another 
 person is said to "make that person sacrifice", as though the 
 latter (who is called i(^4(|<t) were celebrating the sacrifice for 
 himself. 
 
Lesson XVIII. 
 
 77 
 
 Subst.: 
 
 WWti n-) nectar. 
 
 "dH»l*(«( n., initiation, investiture. 
 
 qr^ m., hand; trunk ('of ele- 
 phant) ; ray ; toll, tax. 
 
 <4\ir<!l^l'fl m., nom. pr., a noted 
 poet. 
 
 ^llSfl' f-, nom. pr., the city of 
 Benares. 
 
 3JWm., quality ; excellent quality, 
 excellence. 
 
 ?[irTT m., nom. pr. (Rama's 
 father). 
 
 ^TO m., slave, groom. 
 ■571 m., messenger, envoy. 
 UliHsy^ n., nom. pr., the city 
 
 of Patna. 
 JT^tr^ ■"•) "wish. 
 '^'^ n., garment. 
 f^f%I m., Brahman (the deity). 
 ■aTSR m., wolf. 
 
 %^ ra., science, knowledge; esp. 
 sacred knowledge, holy writ. 
 Adj.: 
 ?rfU, f- <"?IT, new. 
 ^, f. o'^SfT, own, one's own. 
 
 Exercise XVIII. 
 
 ^ I ■WTT ^rnrir ^ew; 1 <i 1 ^^!rrwnnrf?r ^: 11 s^ 11 ^- 
 
 ■fri Iff jq^^TfT I ^ I «ii<n45«« fTT^ vnm^ 1 ^ 1 'wfwr ^ 
 
 ftRr TTrfT^tfr^ M"^ I ^f inn'f f^^^rfJT tht: ?irrerr f?re- 
 fJT I '^'^ I ^n^ i^rnft t^^ g^^ tt^^ %^^rm: 11 qg 11 
 
 14. I cause a mat to be made (caus. pass.). 15. Show me 
 (dat.J the books. 16. Let Brahmans teach us both and offer sacrifice 
 for us. 17. The king determined (ordained) the taxes in Ms kingdom. 
 18. I have my field ploughed by slaves. 19. Give me water and 
 food. 20. They had the boy taken (led) away from me (abl.). 
 21. The kings sent envoys to Pataliputra. 22. Thieves stole our 
 (gen.) cows, and wolves killed our* flocks. 23. The king made the 
 * The expression of possession, etc., on the part of pronouns 
 
78 Lesson XVIII. XIX. 
 
 poet recite (use «4il«mf !T) a eulogy of Visnu. 24. We torment our 
 hearts with wishes. 25. Both scholars greet the teacher. 
 
 Lesson XIX. 
 
 226. Pronoun of the Second Person. This pronoun (for which 
 the natives assume ^^^ and 'g^^ as bases) is declined thus: 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 <^H. 
 
 *i1l*l 
 
 1*<*^« 
 
 A. 
 
 «?(ra;, ^T 
 
 g^TfC, Tm 
 
 g'lTH, ^^ 
 
 I. 
 
 <<4*<l 
 
 ^TTO7»^ 
 
 <jwiirii«. 
 
 D. 
 
 g«nn, % 
 
 „ , ■'^^^. 
 
 ^«i5r:, «««, 
 
 Ab. 
 
 *s«< 
 
 » 
 
 ijmd. 
 
 G. 
 
 rl^, ^ 
 
 *i=(*nH., «ii*i 
 
 ij'HI.**!, ^ 
 
 L. 
 
 ^t^ 
 
 » 
 
 <j"^l^ 
 
 227. The forms '^Tj ^) '^Tt> '^T'EC ^^^ enclitics, subject to the 
 same rules as J{J, % etc. (§ 224). 
 
 228. The Pronoun of the Third Person (for which the natives 
 assume cI? as base — the base is really »T) is declined as follows 
 
 (note nom. sing., m. and f.): 
 
 
 
 
 Masculine: \^^,m/^— 
 
 
 Feminine: 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. Plural. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. , >TPlural. 
 
 r 
 
 N. 
 
 ^ ;? 
 
 (ft % Tb« 
 
 TXT i^v^^^': 
 
 A. 
 
 m. 
 
 THK -^ 
 
 Timr.^' 
 
 » » 
 
 I. 
 
 ^ 
 
 cn«rT*l %^ fui 
 
 tlVT 
 
 dl«ll*i. dlf*1<i. 
 
 D. 
 
 rl# 
 
 W«l^ 
 
 «T# 
 
 » diwm. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 d<i<l<(. 
 
 
 fI«4JHi 
 
 » 5) 
 
 7f^ 
 
 n 
 
 T!^^ rrT^"ni ^ 
 
 L. 
 
 „ T^ToinlfW^ 
 
 ,^1 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 is made almost entirely by the genitive case, not by a 9ferivative 
 possessive adjective. But often the uncmphatic possessive pronoun 
 of the English is omitted in Sanskrit. 
 
Lesson XIX. 79 
 
 Neuter: 
 
 Sing. „JiAuJ^ Dual. Plural. 
 
 n 
 
 N. 
 A. 
 !• TTT fTP'irnH ^'B;^ etc., as in the mascnline. 
 
 229. The nom. sing. masc. ^^, and its compound IfSf^, lose 
 their final ^ before any consonant; before vowels, and at the end 
 of a sentence, they follow the usual euphonic rules. Thus, ^ H- 
 
 230. The third personal pronoun is used oftenest as a weak 
 or indefinite demonstrative, especially as antecedent to a relative; 
 and often like the English "definite article." 
 
 231. Like r{ are declined: (a) TJfT) 'this', formed by prefixing 
 TJ to the forms of 7f, throughout; thus, nom. sing. m. TJXJ^, f. T[V[J, 
 n. TpT^; (p) the relative pronoun (and adj.) 'Zf, 'which, who'; 
 (c) comparatives and superlatives from pronominal roots, such 
 as ^«11^, which (of the two)?' and ^frHFT 'which (of the many)?' 
 So <|d< and ijr|4{; Tr^frTR' 'one of many'; 'm'rif 'other', with its 
 comparative '^pJfff^; and vj^rf^ 'different'. — Yet other words are 
 so inflected, but with ^[J^^ instead of '^T in nom.-acc.-voc. sing. 
 neut. : as, ;6f^, f%^, 'all'; "([^ 'one', in pi. 'some'; ■4HM, f- '^ 
 (only smg. and pi.), ' both '. ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^^^ ^ 
 
 232. The interrogative pronoun eg (for which the Hindus give 
 the base as i^fm) follows precisely the declension of «T, except 
 nom.-acc. sing. neut. f^; nom. sing. m. ej}^, f. SSJ. ..tec^^ .-^-t.^ , 
 
 233. A number of words follow the pronominal declension in 
 some of their significations, or optionally ; but in other senses, or 
 without known rule, lapse into the adjective inflection. Such are 
 comparatives and superlatives from prepositional stems, as -M^K 
 'lower', •MViH 'lowest'; tf^ 'chief, ij^ 'earlier', ^rlT 'upper', 
 
80 >i , 'I Lesson XIX. 
 
 'northern', ^f^TSf 'southern', etc. Occasional forms of the pro- 
 nominal declension are met with from numeral adjectives, and from 
 other words having somewhat of a numeral character, as -insn 
 'few', ■^ 'half, etc. 
 
 234. Peculiarities in the nse of relatire pronouns, etc. The 
 Sanskrit often puts the relative clause before the antecedent claase, 
 and inserts the substantive to which the relative refers into the 
 same clause with the relative, instead of leaving it in the antecedent 
 clause. In translating into Sanskrit, a relative clause is to be 
 placed either before or after the whole antecedent clause; 
 but not inserted into the antecedent clause, as is done in 
 English. Thus, "the mountain which we saw yesterday is very 
 high " would be in Sanskrit either : ^^ Xf^ ^RJ ^ft itj^TT ^ 
 5fft^ W-' °^' ^ ^'^ ^^ ^W^ ^ ^ -JtWHT; but not ^ 
 M^rTl '^ ^^ fft iftjIUT'T, etc., according to the English idiom. 
 
 235. The relative word may stand anywhere in its clause; 
 thus , f^J^ ^f^^Nf % ^yn'' " the gods whose chief is Qi^*"- 
 Sometimes relative or demonstrative adverbs are used as equivalents 
 of certain case-forms of relative or demonstrative pronouns; thus, 
 
 236. The repetition of the relative gives an indefinite meaning: 
 'whosoever, whatever'. The same result is much more commonly 
 attained by adding to the relative the interrogative pronoun, with 
 (or, less usually, without) one of the particles ^, ^sf, f^^, ^fq, 
 ■^T- Sometimes the interrogative alone is used with these particles 
 in a similar sense. Thus; '^f^^^ ^^i^^f?T ''whatever this {woman) 
 relates"; ^^^JfR: '^fTc^ "whatever any one's disposition may 
 be"; ^I^ e|5^ f^^R^ "he gives to some one or other"; ij<j( | (c|) - 
 ^rrfWB^ ^WW "he takes from no one whatever". 
 
Lesson XIX. 
 
 81 
 
 Vocabulary XIX. 
 
 Yerbs! 
 
 ^n^ sit; in cans, (asdyati) place. 
 ITTt drink; in cans, (pdydyati) 
 
 give to drink, water. 
 2117 protect; in cans, (pdldyati) 
 
 protect. 
 T^ rejoice; in cans, (^prtndyati) 
 
 make rejoice, please. 
 if^fear; in cans, (hhlsdyate, bhdyd- 
 
 yate) terrify, frighten. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 chlij n., business, concern. 
 
 eliXISJ m., n. pr., a god. 
 
 ^irarr t; n. pr. 
 
 ^rfTTf., gait; refuge. 
 
 x|<,U( m., n., foot, leg. 
 
 If^ n., umbrella. 
 
 ZICl n., milk. 
 
 ^^eB^ f., n. pr., Krsna's mother. 
 
 XJTlsft f.) earth. 
 
 5^, as prefix to proper names, 
 has the meaning 'famous', 'ho- 
 norable'. 
 
 cj^ say, speak; name; in caus. 
 
 (vdcdyati) make (a written leaf) 
 
 speak, i. e. read. 
 ^TW (sdhate) endure. 
 tlra (sidhyati) succeed; in caus. 
 
 (sddhdyati) perform, acquire. 
 ■^ij^ kill; caus. (ghdtdyati) have 
 
 killed. 
 ^ call ; in caus. (hvdydyati) have 
 
 called. 
 
 ^ET^TT HI') companion, helper. 
 
 Adj.! 
 
 ■^Hf other. 
 YrTK. other. 
 ■f%^ all (Vedic). 
 ^^ all. 
 f^\i sweet. 
 
 Indeel.: 
 ^rPl also, even. 
 
 fc(«)| without (w. instr, or ace; 
 often postpos.). 
 
 Exercise XIX. 
 
 •^1^ ^ <Ui»t i rM Tfii: ^i^ TR^i^ II ^ II 
 
 f^^^^RI ^^tt^HT^^i^i^j^^TTTsro^iSi 
 
 Perrjr, Sanskrit Primer. 
 
82 Lesson XIX. XX. 
 
 ^ ^^TFfi^ trr^RTf'rr en ^^t ^rm^m i ^ i ^^t^t f :^ "»- 
 tiT^ ^Bf^: ^Rtf^*<*iiy*<<l II R8 II ^ .^ 
 
 15. The husband^ of that' (gen.') Kausalya^ (loc), of whom* 
 (loc.fbm.) Rama^ was born*, is called* Da9aratha^. 16. The teacher* 
 rejoices' at thy* diligence" (abl). 17. Why (efi^Tf^) speakest thou 
 so? 18. Others than we could not endure this suffering. 19. The 
 teacher teaches** us holy-writ and the law-books. 20. May all' 
 those'' kings^ who* protect" their subjects'"' according to* (j^m,post- 
 pos.) the law' (ace.) be victorious*. 21. The fruits of all these 
 trees are sweet. 22. May the glory of all women, who honor their 
 husbands, increase (j.mv.). 23. In this kingdom the king's punishment 
 terrifies the wicked. 24. Which of the two fruits do ye wish ? 25. My 
 father had gold given to me, oows to thee, to the other brother 
 nothing. 
 
 Lesson XX. 
 
 237. Declension of Stems in Consonants. All noun -stems in 
 consonants may well be classed together, since the peculiarities 
 shown by some concern only the stems themselves, and not the 
 endings. Masculines and feminines of the same final are inflected 
 precisely alike^ and neuters are peculiar (as usually in fhe other 
 
 "Other than thou". With ^pir> as with comparatives, the 
 ablative is used. 
 
 ** "Makes us read" (^!rf%r-^, ccms.). 
 
Lesson XX. 83 
 
 declensions) only in the nom.-acc.-voc. of all numbers. But the 
 majority of consonantal stems form a special feminine stem by 
 adding f;; (never ^) to the weak form of the masculine. 
 
 238. Variations, as between stronger and weaker forms, are 
 very general in consonantal stems : either of strong and weak stems, 
 or of strong, middle, and weakest. The endings are throughoat the 
 normal ones (Introd., § 90). 
 
 239. The general law concerning final consonants is as follows: 
 
 1. The more usual etymological finals are ^,1^, J^, w^^, (^, 
 ^5 \! '5; sporadic are ^, ^^, TO as finals. 
 
 2. In general, only one consonant, of whatever kind, is allow- 
 ed to stand at the end of a word ; if two or more would etymo- 
 logically occur there, the last is dropped, and again the last, 
 until but one remains. 
 
 3. Of the non-nasal mutes , only the first in each series , the 
 non-aspirate surd, is allowed as final; the others — surd asp., and 
 both sonants — are regularly converted into this , wherever they 
 would etymologically occur. 
 
 4. A final palatal, or '^, becomes either m, or (less often) 2; 
 but ^ in a very few cases (where it represents original V) he- 
 comes c^. 
 
 240. According to 239. 2, the ^ of the nom. sing., m. and 
 {., is always lost ; and irregularities of treatment of the stem-final, 
 in this case, are not infrequent. 
 
 241. Before the pada-endings, V(m.i t^TO!.! 'JRC, and ^, a stem- 
 final is treated as in external combination. 
 
 242. An aspirate mute is changed to its corresponding non- 
 aspirate before another non- nasal mute or a sibilant; it stands 
 unaltered only before a vowel or semivowel or nasal. Hence such 
 a mute is doubled by prefixing its own corresponding non-aspirate. 
 
 243. Consonant-stems of one form in ?^, 5, >J and J? . Be- 
 
 6* 
 
84 Lesson XX. 
 
 fore suffixal *J , both c^ and ^^ as stem -finals become ^; W as 
 stem -final becomes ^. Examples: »|^ m., 'wind'; ^"R^ f-, 
 'misfortune'; «I3Rr. n., 'the world '- 
 
 Sing. Plural. 
 
 N.v. ^r^ I ^rrtici; i gr^ ii *i<».d«. i ^tr^ i ^Tt^ ii 
 A. ^^fw: I ^(m<*i, I ^R«i. II » » » 
 
 I. ?T^fn I ^iM< i 1 3iJnn ii »i^fw^ i -iHMf^H. i ^mfm. n 
 
 D. TT^ I ^m^ I ^^ II »ni?ra: I ^rnrsra; i ^nnra; ii 
 
 Ab. ^I^rn5.|^q^|5Rcre:i| „ „ „ 
 
 G. , » » M\f\\i( I ^m<iH I ^icni^ II 
 
 L. »I^ I '^TRf^ I Slirflr II »T^ I ^nvm I 5Rc^ 11 
 
 Dual. 
 N.A.V. »l^ I ^|M<{1 I 5R<1^ II 
 
 i.D.Ab. *{^^Tn I ^TR^rnt I ^Piirr^ ii 
 
 G.L. H^^ I -JI I Mi^lii I «R^ II 
 
 For the •^^ inserted in nom.-acc. pi. neuter, cf. phaldni, ma- 
 dhuni, etc. 
 
 244. In a few roots, when a final sonant aspirate (^ , V , W ; 
 '■"also '^, representing 13) loses its aspiration according to §§ 239. 3, 
 
 242, the initial sonant consonant (II , "S, or 3) becomes aspirate; 
 thus, ^, nom.-voc. sing. ^; ^^T^, JJ^. 
 
 245. A^eoment of adjectives. If the same adjective qualify 
 two or more substantives, it will be used in their combined number; 
 if the substantives are masculine and feminine , the adj. will be 
 masc. ; but in a combination of masc. or fern, subjects with neuter, 
 the adjective will be neuter. 
 
LesBon XX. 
 
 85 
 
 Terbs: 
 
 ■^ grow; caus. (rohdyati or ro- 
 pdyati) make rise or grow; 
 plant. 
 
 Vocabulary XX. 
 
 ^W , in caus. (lamhhdyati*) make 
 receive or take; give. 
 
 Snbst. 
 ^TTf»rq^f., name of certain Vedic 
 
 writings. 
 ^"4<JYrI n., sacred cord (worn by 
 
 the three higher castes). 
 <lf^ f-, lightning. 
 "^^S f.> stone. 
 
 f^rafTT f., contentment, happiness. 
 Mji^ch m., supporter, maintainer. 
 Hm^ m., king; mountain. 
 iJXJ^ m., wind; as pi., n. pr., 
 
 the Storu-gods. 
 ■^TfT m-j wind. 
 
 f^^TO ™-) trust, confidence. 
 H^ m., n. pr., a demon, Vrtra. 
 
 '^(T n., a hundred. 
 'SJ'^^ f., autumn; year. 
 ^rf*r>i(, f., fagot. 
 ^f^ f., river. 
 ^T^? m., friend. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^l|^, f. »^, skilled, learned. 
 f^Hf^ m., f., n., threefold, triple. 
 '^^)f, f. '^T, hard to find or 
 
 reach ; difficult. 
 mS, f- 'WT> devoted, true. 
 
 Indecl. : 
 ■41 (M also; even. 
 TJ'g'n^ behind (w. gen.). 
 
 Exercise XX. 
 
 
 * If a nasal is ever taken in any of the strong forms of a 
 root, it usually appears in the causal. 
 
 •* See § 225; ^ER = ^rf^^t and ^WH^; see § 235, end. 
 
86 Lesson XX. XXI. 
 
 5m: I f I ^ ^1^ ^nr: TFtw; i 'O i *WfT: (gen.) ftjiirt ^^- 
 '^nfH: ^rfrfw: ^'i^«ri i o. i tttI" laf^f^fT i qo i tjwt'. 
 
 14. Indra, with the Maruts as his companions, killed Vrtra. 
 
 15. Without a companion no one can perform a difficult business. 
 
 16. One (express in pi.) should plant trees on all the roads, for the 
 sake of the shade. 17. Those friends who are true in misfortune 
 are hard to find in the three worlds. 18. The girdle and the sacred 
 cord of Aryans are to be made tiireefold (neut dual). 19. Put 
 (^T cans.) this stone behind the fire. 20. The ocean is called by 
 the poets the husband of rivers. 21. All subjects must be protected 
 (imv.) by their kings. 22. Some of these Brahmans are learned in 
 the Upanisads, others in the law-books. 
 
 Lesson XXI. 
 
 246. Declension of Consonant-stemg, cont'd. Stems in pala- 
 tals, etc. 1. Final ^ of a stem reverts to the original guttural 
 when it comes to stand as word-final, and before the ^Jada-endings, 
 becoming ^ when final, and before ^, and Tf before Vf . 2. Final 
 3r_ is oftenest treated exactly like 5^ — for cases of other treat- 
 ment, see below. 3. In the roots* f^T^, f^ and WV , the Tff is 
 treated in the same way. 4. The ^ of ^ becomes T[ after ^ • 
 
 * In classical Sanskrit not many root-stems are used as inde- 
 pendent substantives; but they are frequently employed, with 
 adjective or (present) participial value, as final element of a com- 
 pound word. 
 
Lesson XXI. 87 
 
 thus, «^. E.g. Tl'^f-i 'speech, word'; ^Sf^ f., 'illness'; f^^l, f-j 
 'direction, point of the compass': 
 
 Sing. Plural. 
 
 N.v. ^=B 1 ^ 1 1^^ II m^^ I ^^ I f^^ra; II 
 
 A. ^r^Ji; I ^uii; I t^ijji; II » „ „ 
 
 I. •^■RT I >piT I f^ II ^TftiTO: I ^m^ 1 1^fi^^, ii 
 
 L. ^Tf^ I ^Sflf I f^ II TTf I ^^ I f^'^ II 
 
 Dual. 
 ^Tft I ^^ I f^^^ II 
 
 ^ttotr; I ^Twm, 1 1^TOn»i; ii 
 ^rfra; i ^^t^: i f^^ ii 
 
 247. 1. Final T[T jof a stem regularly becomes the lingual mute 
 (^ or "Z) before M and 5J, and when word-final. For exceptions, 
 see § 246, 3. 2. The final ^ of the root-stems XT^> 'rule', ^JST, 
 'sacrifice', and VSI , with others; and 3. the final ^ of a number 
 of roots, are treated like ^ above. Thus, f^9^ m., 'enemy'; 
 fg^ m. pi., 'people', the ' Vai9ya- caste'; f^ m., f . , (adj.) 
 'licking'- 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.V 
 
 . R;4 1 Rii II 
 
 ff^ 1 fWn^ 1 1 f^Tf^ 11 
 
 A. 
 
 f^K 1 r^^H II 
 
 r> r> » 
 
 I. 
 
 fli^i fsr^i II 
 
 l^c^fi^ 1 t%^f^^ 1 t^I^fiTO: II 
 
 L. 
 
 flifti f^ii 
 
 f^ 1 f^^^ 1 f^g II 
 
 Dual, 
 ff^ I l^fft II 
 
 fl[^jjn*i I f^rfHTfJi, II 
 fli^B; I t^rfra: ii 
 
 248. But ^flf^ m., 'priest', though containing the root ^51^, 
 
88 
 
 Lesson XXI. 
 
 makes -^g f^ c^ etc.; and ^^f^^ f., 'garland', though containing 
 i/^«r^, makes ^ra etc. 
 
 249. 1. Nouns having the roots ^^, 'burn', and ^^, 'milk', 
 5^ 'be hostile', with others, as final element, and also 'dfUy?' f. 
 (name of a certain metre), cnange the final ^ into cK and t( . 
 Thus, WreT'?) ' wood - burning ', makes nom.-voc. sing. '^^Til^; 
 ^TT^^ f., ' granting wishes ', nom.-voc. sing. qT^Hir^; ace. "^^, 
 loc. pi. o^J^; fW^^ 'friend-betraying,' nom.-voc.-sing. fff^- 
 JT^ etc. 2. In words with ^f^, 'bind,' as final element, where ^ 
 represents original V , the ^ becomes ^ and cj^ ; thus, ^HT'I? f-> 
 'shoe, sandal,' nom.-voc. sing. x^JMMci;, ace. '•f^?^, instr. du. 
 •Tsnn, ^°c. pi. o^n^. 
 
 Terbs: 
 
 ^H in cans, (dam-dyati) tame; 
 
 compel. 
 ^S (drihyati) be hostile; oifend. 
 ^ in cans, (dhdrdyati) bear. 
 H (bhdrati, -te) bear, support (lit. 
 
 and fig.). 
 
 Vocabulary XXI. 
 
 ^W^ + ^^ (utsrjdti) let loose or 
 out; raise (the voice). 
 
 ^W(^+''!(fK(parisvdjate*) embrace. 
 
 1| + IT (prahdrati) strike out; 
 smite. 
 
 Sabst.: 
 ^(•^ m. pi., n. pr., a people in 
 
 India. 
 ^^ f., verse of the Rigveda ; in 
 
 pi., the Rigveda. 
 ^^■insf n-5 medicine. 
 cA\«(t«< m., nom. pr. 
 
 ■^Tf^ f., look, glance; eye. 
 
 t^fB m., enemy. 
 
 ^tq m., tears. 
 
 TWf^ m., bee. 
 
 ?TT^^ n., sweetness. 
 
 ■"^ f., sickness, disease. 
 
 titiN m., great king, emperor. 
 
 * ^^ and a few Other roots, whose nasal is not constant 
 throughout their inflection, lose it in the present-system. 
 
Lesson XXI. 
 
 89 
 
 ^THrT m., vassal. 
 
 4«f Id4 m-j one who has taken a 
 
 certain ceremonial bath. 
 ^TVim m., private recitation (of 
 
 sacred texts). 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^ishl*a, f. "^ (pass. part, of 
 
 '^i'^.+ '^), attacked, smitten. 
 t^T. f- '"^, "ch. 
 ^1*1^^ m. f. n., granting wishes ; 
 as /. subst, the Wonder-cow. 
 J,f.»^,rigbt hand; southern. 
 
 •TIM^ (i- e. f^H;^-'^^) m. f. n., 
 
 healthy, well. 
 XITEBf, f. '>'%n, wholesome {gen.), 
 ^t%^) f- Wf, strongest. 
 ^l', f. o'^srr (pass. part, of ^Vj. 
 
 besieged, surrounded; suffused. 
 t^fliS, f- ""^ (pass. part, of 
 
 f^ + f^), bated, detested. 
 ^, f. o^T (part, of ^), old. 
 ^rrf^im, f- ''W[, sick, ill. 
 ^tTTrTj f- ^, provided with. 
 
 Adv.: 
 ^<^|-<l»1, itfi^lNfl., ^^if^lj ever. 
 
 Exercise XXI. 
 ^I^»!: ^T'^ f^p^ (abl.) ej^fifl I «^ I ITOTWt rfxT Tjm 
 
 ^ «^^rrf II <1^ II -—^^ 
 
 14. In the private recitation of the Veda an ascetic must 
 
 * t^iV^ (interrog.), with some other words expressing use or 
 need, takes with it an instrumental of what is used or needed, and 
 a genitive of the user. So here : " of what use to a well man are 
 medicines"? 
 
90 Lesson XXI. XXII. 
 
 raise (opt. or imv.) his voice. 15. That one among the priests is 
 called hotr, who recites the Rigveda. 16. A snataka must wear 
 shoes and a garland, and carry an umbrella. 17. "Among my 
 friends Rama is the strongest": thus spoke Ravana. 18. Let an 
 emperor keep his vassals in check (^^ cans.), and protect (TTF 
 caM«.) the people in all the earth. 19. In the Rigveda occurs ('^TT 
 pass.) the Usnih. 20. The father's glance fell upon me (loc). 
 21. Among the betrayers -of- friends is named (sniT'^ pass.) 
 Vibhisana. 22. The seer praises Indrani with verses of the Rig- 
 veda. 23. The emperor smote his enemies (ace, dat., or loc.) 
 with the sword. 24. In the battle Krsna was killed by his en- 
 emies. 25. " May our enemies be tormented by diseases '' : thus 
 spoke the Brahman in anger (abl.). 
 
 Lesson XXII. 
 
 250. Declension of Stems in ■^. The stems in ^ and ^f^ 
 lengthen the vowel before consonant- endings, and in nom.-sing., 
 and the ^ of the nom. is lost. In the nom.-sing. the final X 
 then becomes ^ (or visarga) under conditions requiring a surd 
 as final (see § 95, 116). Thus, fl|^f., 'voice'; J^f., 'city'. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N.V. aJY^ I ^ II fan^ I ^7^ II fan:^ I gii;^ II 
 
 ^ f^TTTR; I 3T^ II „ „ « « 
 
 I- fTTT I 5TT II ^4tr: I ^»#T»i: II 'I^^l^f^ II 
 
 L. farfr I jfK II fTTRc I gfm: n 'ftf i qg^ 
 
 251. Stems in ^ [and in fj|^ and f^^. These are masc. 
 and neut. only; the corresponding feminine is made by adding '|^; 
 thus, ^Jrf'l'fl'-* They lose their final i^^ before consonant -endings; 
 
 Almost any noun in ^ may form a possesive derivative with 
 
Lesson XXII. 9 1 
 
 and also in the nom. sing., where the masc. lengthens the ^ in 
 compensation. Thus, ^rf'ft, na-j n., 'rich'. 
 
 Masculine. Xenter. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 A. Vf^Tt, , „ „ „ „ 
 
 I- Vt'HT ^if'Wm >ilf'Tf*ret. as in the masculine 
 
 L. vM^ >irfMt^ y(f^ ^. ^ 
 
 252. DeriratlTe stems in ^^^[7^^' ''S^- The stems of this 
 division are mostly neuter; but there are a few masculines and 
 feminines. Their inflection is nearly regular (for '^, ^^, '^T be- 
 fore l^^ see § 241; for the loc. pi. , p. 27, bottom of page). Masc. 
 [and fem.J stems in '^{(^ lengthen the ^ in nom. sing.; and the 
 nom.-acc pi. neut. also lengthen ^ or ^ or ^ before the inserted 
 nasal (anuat'ara). Thus, 41«|^ n., 'mind'; ^f«m_ n., 'oblation'; 
 \srg^ n., 'bow'- 
 
 Singular. Dual. 
 
 N.A.V.»n^ I ff^l \ig^|| JTil^l ffWl-l ^il^ll 
 I. 'T'reT I flwr I >JR^ II ♦I'ilwIIH I ff^'^TT I >iig4T»i: II 
 
 li- ^Hfir I ff^f^ I ^ii^ II »iwm: I fft^ I ^Tjfm: n 
 
 Plural. 
 N.A. *i«lifi| I f^'f^ri Wf^ll 
 
 I- 'T^tfiTO: I if^fil^ I ^f^ II 
 
 L. fl^r^ I ff^^ I v^F3 II 
 
 or ITTf I or ff%:g | or ^^^IJ || 
 
 253. ^rf^T^ ™- (name of certain mythical characters) : nom. 
 sing' ^rf^TTit, ace. ^rf^<^«<> "'istr. ^f^<«H, voc. ^^rf^T^; 
 nom.-acc. pi. ■4irg'<*J^. 
 
 the suffix ^; thus, from ^^f n., 'strength', ^f%5^, 'having 
 strength, strong'. Stems in fir't. and t^^ are very rare. 
 
92 
 
 Lesson XXII. 
 
 tor 
 
 ^v^i 
 
 254. Adjective compounds having nouns of this class as final 
 member are very common. Thus, 4J4{«|4^ 'favorably-minded.' 
 
 Singular. Dual, 
 
 m. f. n. m. f. n. 
 
 N. ^4i«ii^ o'ra; ^TT^ •'ret 
 
 A. ^M'WK •'TO: „ 
 
 ^vi|4j4^ 'long-lived': 
 
 Singular. Dual. 
 
 N. ^^7^^ ^^^ "^^ 
 
 I- 4i<5l^m etc. ^t^l^^^TI^ etc. 
 
 Plural, 
 m. f. n. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 » » 
 
 <0^'yf*^ etc. 
 
 Terb: 
 
 '^^{sdjat^; but often pass. : sajjdte 
 
 Vocabulary XXII. 
 
 for sajydte) hang on, be fastened 
 on (as thoughts — w. he. ). 
 
 Snbst.: 
 W^T^ f-» heavenly nymph, 
 "d^sfi f'l "• i""-) an Apsaras, Ur- 
 
 va^i. 
 RfflV m., king. 
 f^r^ f., voice; song. 
 ^^ n., eye. 
 ■«l"j(,*IH. ""-J moon. 
 'i^TT «!•) spy- 
 WSn f., bowstring. 
 
 a*nrdH,°-) light; star; heavenly 
 
 body. 
 71^1 m., pond. 
 1[TT f., door, gate. 
 
 >i|«r^ n., bow. 
 
 •rrat f., pipe, conduit. 
 
 T^'^T^ n., milk. 
 
 3^ f., city. 
 
 y^^l*!. ™v '"■■ f-i Pururavas. 
 
 Urftni. «'•> (living) creature. 
 
 *!TH<5|lfc^ m., n., pr., India. 
 
 *J»Jtl^ n., mind. 
 
 •iPwV m., minister (of state). 
 
 tj^tj^ n., sacrificial formula, text. 
 
 ^ITO. "•> glory, fame. 
 
 ^frpT^ m., merchant. 
 
 ^^ra; n., age. 
 
 *l*l»t^ f., flower. 
 
Lesson XXII. 
 
 93 
 
 ^Tq m., sun. 
 
 OS 
 
 4^H n., place, spot, locality; 
 
 stead. 
 ^Tt^T't, ID- J possessor, lord. 
 ^f%^ n., oblation. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^f S, f. ""Wl (part, of |ixr^+'^), 
 
 drawn, bent (as a bow). 
 ?rqf^5J_ suffering, doing acts of 
 
 asceticism ; as m. subst., ascetic. 
 ^orf^'t. courageous. 
 TraT, f. "Wt, first. 
 ^nr, f. '^T (part, of Jf), dead, 
 
 fallen, 
 f^, f. o^ (part, of ^T), 
 
 standing. 
 
 Indecl.: 
 
 % to be sure, in sooth. 
 
 Exercise XXII. 
 '^'^: Tn?rf5»i RfdMi^'^TfJnf^ ^pto ii qo ii 
 
 "^ ^^ i^iTsnT I M I ^rm^ >it^ 5rm: ^t% i^nr: Trrnsrf 
 ^T^ ^'T'ref^ret^ I ^ I HiTaj-il *<»iif« wtf^ ^Rt^ i ^ i 
 
 crm; i qo i -^ 
 
 11. Raise ye the voice in praise (dat.) of Hari. 12. In the 
 cities of India dwell rich merchants and courageous warriors. 
 13. The praise of Pnruravas was sung by Kalidasa. 14. The king 
 gave orders (^T-'^ cavs.) to have his minister called (use or. recta). 
 15. The minds of ascetics must not dwell (^^) on riches (^, loc. 
 sing.). 16. At night the moon gives light to all creatures. 17. One 
 should sacrifice to the gods (</. ^151^ in Voc. I) flowers, fruits, and 
 milk, not living creatures. 18. The Apsarases lead into Heaven 
 warriors fallen in battle. 19. In age (instr.), not in knowledge, 
 
94 Lesson XXII. XXIII. 
 
 9iva is the eldest among Ms brothers (loc, gen.). 20. The gods live 
 by the oblation, 21. A merchant -wishes wealth (^), a warrior 
 fame, an ascetie deliverance. 22. The woman's eyes are suffused 
 with tears. 
 
 Lesson XXIII. 
 
 255. Declension. Comparative Adjectives. Comparative ad- 
 jectives of primary formation have a double form of stem for mas- 
 culine and neuter; a stronger in TSrf^ (usually %^t^), in the strong 
 cases, and a weaker in ^J^ (usually §^4Jt(^), there being no 
 distinction of middle and weakest cases. The voc. sing. masc. 
 ends in ''q*^^. The feminine-stem is made with % from the weak 
 stem-form. Thus, %?rT^> 'better': I'v^,*'^ ^ '^ 
 
 Mascniine. Nenter. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. ^^tr: ^t^ ^^■re^ N.v. ^^ra; %^r^ Si*iifti 
 A. %?ITO»^ „ ^^^ » » B 
 
 I- %«reT %^«rr^ Si^ltfi rai ^^^ ^^^ mascnUne. 
 
 Fem. stem. ^i|^, declined like "I^. 
 
 256. Stems in '5J5n (or ^c(^) fall into two divisions: A. those 
 made with the suffix ^5{^ (^If^.), being, with few exceptions, active 
 participles, present and future; and B. those made with the pos- 
 sessive suffixes TItiT (.or JT?t.) and ^5^ (or ^). They are raasc. 
 and neuter only, the fem. being formed vvith ^. 
 
 257. A. Participles in ^PB (or ^). E. g. ^V^?CT m., n., 
 'living.' 
 
Lesson XXIII. 95 
 
 Mascnline. Neuter. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 A. ^^^nfJi; „ ^^rm_ r, « « 
 
 I. ^V^WT WN^T»l qn«^r^H. «s >" masculine. 
 
 L. m\^^ ^'^cfr^ ^^^ 
 
 258. The strong form of these participles is obtained, me- 
 chanically, by cutting off the final '^ from the 3rd pi. pres. (or 
 fut.) ind. act. ; thus , Hilfnl gives strong form of pres. act. part. 
 ■sf^^, weak 'I^f^^; fciafiiT, fH8t1^ and f?J^;— TUl'fr, TilnT 
 and ^^(i; — ^It^ilfnT, ^T^^T'S and ^T!S^^; — *rf^fstT 
 (fnt.), Hf%^I^^ and ITf^^R^. 
 
 259. But those verbs which in the 3fd. pi. act. lose the ^^ of 
 the usual fsfl (as e. g. the verbs following the reduplicating class 
 in the present -system), lose it also in the present participle, and 
 have no distinction of strong and weak stem. Thus, from j/^, 
 3rd pi. pres. ind. act. gfgfll, , part, (only stem -form) ^f^r^: nom.- 
 voc. sing. masc. W^t^, ace. ol^rjt^ ; nom -voc.-acc. du. ^grft, 
 pl. 3|gfl^; nom.-voc-acc. sing. neut. aj^t^, du. ^^<f), pi. ^gtcT-* 
 
 260. Only the present participles of verbs of the a -class, the 
 ya-class, and causatives, invariably insert w^^ in nom.-voc-acc. du. 
 neut. Present participles of the a-class, of the root-class when the 
 root ends in "^n, and all future participles, may either take or 
 reject it; thus, neut. -sing, fsgj^, du. Ri^h) or tw^«^; ehP^lilel^ 
 (fut.), du, ejif^^cft or <*r<'il'H^; "Wttl (pres. part, from ^, 'go'), 
 du. iJIcfl or '^IT'ift- Participles of all other verbs, and all other 
 stems in ^nt.) leave out the 5^ in the du. neut. ; thus , '^^7^ ('^!I^ 
 'eat', root-class), du. 'W^ dl- 
 
 261. The adj. lT^«fT , 'great', takes in strong cases the stem- 
 
 * The grammarians, however, allow these verbs to insert the 
 •^ in the nom.-voc-acc. pi. neuter of the present participle. 
 
96 
 
 Lesson XXIII. 
 
 form HgTnt : nom.-sing. masc. 1TlT«t. (see § 239, 2), ace. ♦i^imn.i 
 voc. ?ff^; du. neut. »If<ft, pi- ^Tflf^- Otherwise the inflection 
 is like that of participles. 
 
 262. The feminine of participles and adjectives in ^R?ff (or 
 ^R^) is always made with f[, and the form is always identical 
 with the nom. dual neuter. 
 
 Vocabulary XXIII. 
 
 Verbs; 
 filirf (nindati) blame. 
 T^J^^rdjate) shine; rule. 
 
 Tg + "^(Tf (apasdratt) go away; in 
 cans, (apasdrdyaii) drive away. 
 
 Nouns (snbst. and adj.): 
 ■^Tf^ m., sun. 
 'IO^IH. (comp.) very honorable. 
 ^^ (pr. part, of ^) giving. 
 H<*ir»J«l,j f-"^, bright, glistening; 
 
 (act.) illuminating. 
 1T<T) f. °'^> become (past. pass. 
 
 part, of M); as neut. 
 being, creature. 
 
 subst; 
 
 ^^ m., calf. 
 
 ^i|J4^ better, best ; as neut. subst, 
 salvation. 
 
 ^«fT (neut. ^[^) being, existing; 
 as masc. subst., good man ; as 
 fern. (Ucfl)) faithful wife.* 
 
 Adv.: 
 ^^ to-morrow, 
 f^ surely, indeed. 
 
 Exercise XXIIi. 
 
 ^ir<«*i T^ WTT^ 5ft*T!n^' n . h i r v 4«ft II «i«^ II 
 
 fH^^ ^ fll^ 5^ff18si-«d;«Tl*IHJ|-5fe^Nnm^y|'^f^*** | ^ | 
 
 Ji0<»«: (ace. pi.) %€re ^rara«i: I ^ I ^Tf^i'rerqt^^q^ ^ ^^: 
 
 • Especially a widow who immolates herself on the funeral- 
 pile of her husband ; whence Anglo-Indian suttee. 
 •* "Even though they exist". 
 *** '^TT in composition often conveys the idea of imitation. 
 
Lesson XXIII. XXIV. 97 
 
 ^m^ f^KPCt g^zm: I M I HTfr (gen. du.) -^jjft ^nr^ ifV- 
 ^tr: I § I Ti^ ^fxprr v^Tf^ ^TfrTnT ^^ i ^ i ^isjt -rn 
 ^(T I ^ 1 ^^T% MtT^t f^'f't'^ ^^ f<*<«Tl: ^5«rr "^r^w; i q. i 
 fHt^f^cfflTcn;: ^^tr:^ Trrt^T^ ^rt^rrt t a^'^g: i qo i 
 ^^ x[^^ -^m frmwTT^ I «i«) I ^j^ rMdi-«ii<it ^m ^ ^- 
 
 14. We blame the driver who strikes (part.) the horses. 15. The 
 king who punishes {part.) the bad and gives (part.) food to the 
 good is praised. 16. The warrior who conquers (part.) in battle 
 attains great fame. 17. Among the heavenly bodies the sun and 
 moon are the two great ones. 18. In the field I saw birds flying. 
 19. He who lives (part.) to-day is dead to-morrow. 20. The word 
 of the good must be followed (done). 21. Dwell among good men. 
 22. A maiden, making (W^ ) garlands, sits on a stone. 23. A hus- 
 band shall punish a wife who steals (pari.) his property. 24. The 
 child (gen.) was afraid (use subst. , no copula) of the bees (abl.) 
 flying about (VTH) in the house. • 
 
 Lesson XXIV. 
 
 263. Declension. Stems in '^^ (or ^[(f), cont'd. B. Stems in 
 Tpt^ (jftQ and ^'c^^ (^)- Adjectives formed with these suffixes 
 are possessives. They are declined precisely alike*; and differ in 
 inflection from the participles in ^(tx{^ only by lengthening the ^ 
 in the nom. sing. masc. The feminine is made in t^; thus, 'Zft- 
 ^?ft. In the dual neut. ^ is never inserted. Thus, ^ft^T'B, 
 'rich', 'celebrated:' 
 
 * The two adjectives ■'4;v«rt^, 'so great', 'so many', and fqi- 
 ^ptT, 'how great?' 'how many?' are similarly declined. 
 
 Peiry, Sanskrit Primer. y 
 
98 Lesson XXIV. 
 
 Mascnline. Nenter. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. ^Dm^ ^^'Tnfr ^'Tfra: nv. ^sf^jTti; ^!f^<ft ^;r1^ 
 A. ^n^n^ „ ^1*1 cm_ y, „ „ 
 
 I. ^\JTrrr ^TSITR; ^*<f^H. as in the masculine. 
 
 L. ^M Vfi ^^(fr^ ■^('mm 
 
 V. ^jftJI^ 
 
 264. A stem H^fl,* (to be carefully distinguished from »T^«t^, 
 pres. part. act. of M) is frequently used in respectful address as 
 a substitute for the pronoun of the second person. It is con- 
 strued with the verb in the third person. Its nom. sing. masc. is 
 *fen«^ (fem. tfcfcD) ; and ift^, the contracted form of its older 
 voc. J^'^^, is a common exclamation of address: "you, sir I'', "ho, 
 there!"; and is often doubled.** 
 
 265. DeriYative stems in "^Sl^. These are made by the suffixes 
 ■^rti T't., and '^i^, and are, with one or .two exceptions, masc. 
 and neut. only. The stem has a triple form. In the strong cases 
 of the masc. the vowel of the suffix is lengthened to '^T-, in the 
 weakest cases it is in general dropped; in the middle cases the 
 final •^^ is dropped, and it Is also lost in the nom. sing, of all 
 genders. In the neuter, the nom.-acc. pi.., as being strong cases, 
 lengthen the vowel of the suffix; the same cases in the dual (as 
 weakest cases) lose '^ — but this only optionally. After the J^ 
 or '^ of ^T'^ and i^, when these are preceded by a consonant, 
 the tST is retained in all the weakest cases, to avoid too great an 
 accumulation of consonants. Examples: XT^fl hi-j 'king'; •TTT'I. 
 n., 'name'; -4||(M<t m., 'soul, self; '$|^<T n., 'devotion '- 
 
 * Probably contracted from )f3r^«(T 'blessed'. 
 ** Ht^ loses its final ^ before all vowels and all sonant con- 
 sonants; thus, ?ft ^t ^'%. 
 
Lesson XXIV. 99 
 
 Mascnline. Neuter. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 or ^TTO^ 
 A. TWRJ^ „ TT^5^ 
 
 L- Traf^ Tmt^ TT5W TT»rN TP^ THTO 
 
 or Tjf^ or ^rrf^ 
 
 V. -^T^iit^ ?itih: or irm 
 
 N. '^rraR ^rrarr^ ^^rni^ stir ^wwt wwrfti 
 A. ^rrarpfjR: „ '^iran^ „ „ 
 
 V. 'M\4i'l ^^r^ or WW 
 
 266. Euphonic rules. Final "SR, "Z and H^ remain unaltered be- 
 fore initial surd consonants ; before sonants, whether vowel or con- 
 sonant, they become respectively T , ^, W • Before nasals they 
 may be still further assimilated, becoming the nasals ^, TO, H^- 
 Thus, Tjr<stTZ T becomes either qf^sIT^ or qf^s(T^; m^^ T 
 becomes ^M(<4 or ^l^f^. The latter method is much more usual. 
 
 267. Before initial ? a final mute is made sonant; and then 
 the ^ may either remain unchanged, or be converted into the so- 
 nant aspirate corresponding to the preceding letter; thus, either 
 *|*4JJ^"^ or ^n^TTCRr:; either TJ^^ f^TTtl. or d<ill'^*sHfl,. In 
 practice the latter method is almost invariably followed. 
 
 When a dental mute comes in contact with a lingnal or pa- 
 latal mute or sibilant, the dental is usually assimilated, becoming 
 lingual or palatal respectively. Thus, tistkati from ti-stha-ti; rdjnd 
 instead of rajna. 
 
100 
 
 Lesson XXIV. 
 
 Terbs: 
 
 tl^+'^rw cut off. 
 
 JTSf in caus. (marjdyati) rub, rub 
 off, polish. 
 
 Vocabulary XXIV. 
 
 ■^TSf^ (denoni. — varndyati) de- 
 scribe, portray. 
 
 f^^ +'^^ in caus. (udvejdyati) 
 terrify. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 TJlTSt ™-' ^^""^i self; often as sim- 
 ple reflexive pronoun ; in geni- 
 tive, his, etc.; one's own. 
 
 ^^«^ n., deed; ceremony; fate. 
 
 ^4*(, !*•) hide, skin; leather. 
 
 WtP[^ n., birth. 
 
 »fV^ n., bank, shore. 
 
 f^SJ? f., name of a metre. 
 
 f^ n., day. 
 
 ^cjeh<!| n., temple. 
 
 •n^ m., hell. 
 
 •qf^^ m., bird. 
 
 V[m n.j pot, vessel. 
 
 sj^«|^ (brahman) n., devotion; 
 sacred word (of God) ; sacred 
 knowledge; the world-spirit. 
 
 3^p^ (brahman — a personifi- 
 cation of the preceding) m., the 
 supreme All-Soul, the creator. 
 
 ^T^Pt^ n., ashes. 
 
 ■^rfll m., ascetic. 
 
 '<.Nn, m., king. 
 
 <at*<»l. n-j bair. 
 
 ^■^ n., year. 
 
 ^TTPIT m., meeting, encounter. 
 
 ^n*<»^ f., border, boundary; out- 
 skirts. 
 
 ■^•iT m., slayer, killer. 
 Adj.: 
 
 '4(|'i|(>q<ri^ long-lived (often used 
 in respectful address). • 
 
 <4|«ri^ so great, so much (263). 
 
 f^B^na how great? how much? 
 
 giM*!!, f. "^rr, poor; niggardly. 
 
 <liq<n so much, so many. 
 
 f^-«f^4J, f. «''^, second. 
 
 fi|4|<*4«l, kind. 
 
 rH4<c||x(^ saying pleasant things, 
 
 sociable. 
 ■<^5I'cJ«ri^ strong, mighty. 
 )f j| c| sa^,f .^tft, honorable; blessed. 
 )lltc)<n shining, brilliant, 
 ^rfTTTfl shrewd, prudent. 
 
 44l«|<rl how much, as many. 
 
 ^1^, f. 0'^, harsh, rough. 
 
 f^H) f. "l^j pervading, far- 
 reaching; omnipresent; mighty. 
 
 fiT, f. o^JT (pass. part, of fsQ 
 killed. 
 
 Adv.: 
 MI^UJ commonly. 
 
Lesson XXIV. 101 
 
 Exercise XXIV. 
 
 ^TRt'tr fri^ ^nft^ftr ^Tff^ f^^ tTT^1% ^^rfw w 'frr 
 ^^ 1.^ "^^ ^^ tli^rnr^: ^^r^ i ^ i f^^nft ^rrap^^p^T- 
 
 ^'SRf^ 5Rf7|7n?t ^lT?T*tl'^<ft (gen.) % JtRt: I ^ I ^t^ Tlf^ 
 
 ■fl[3rrcn^ lti^^: \ ^ i ^% trf^^r^ f^Tti^ ^fT»^?T»ww "«it- 
 ^j e. I- iicRiT gfr ^^wt tt^: ^Tnnfr i^rnm i «io i ?twi 
 
 «f*<M-^Tl II qR II 
 
 13. Brabmans have their shoes itiade {use o|; caus.) of leather 
 (in«<r.) or wood. 14. A temple of blessed Visnu stands in the 
 outskirts of this village, on the bank of the river. 15. Let him 
 rub off the vessels diligently with ashes (pL). 16. The servants 
 annoanced to the king that the two celebrated poets were 
 coming (use or. recta with Xf^). 17. O children (du.), tell me 
 your (^STWT i 5'««- du.) names. 18. The world-spirit is described 
 in many Upanisads. 19. It is said by the seers that the world- 
 spirit is omnipresent {use or. recta). 20. That part of the world-spirit, 
 which is encompassed by the body, is called the soul of man (cf. 
 § 234). 21. Candragupta was the mighty emperor of the whole 
 earth. 22. All the mighty warriors who fought in Krsna's army 
 were killed in battle by the enemy. 23. In the Rigveda {W^ P^-) 
 occurs (f%^ pass.) also the Tristubh. 24. The king of Pataliputra 
 is by birth a ^ud'a ; Jet him not marry the beautiful daughter of 
 the ascetic Mitratithi. 
 
102 Lesson XXV. 
 
 Lesson XXV. 
 
 268. Declension. Perfect Active Participles in ^t^. The 
 
 active participles of the perfect tense-system are quite peculiar as 
 regards the modifications of the stem. In the strong cases the 
 suffix is c| j^, which becomes e(|«(^ in the nom. sing, masc, and 
 is shortened to ^5^ in the voc. sing. In the weakest cases the suffix 
 is contracted into>^ir ; and in the middle cases it is changed to 
 ■^f^^. A union-vowel ^, if present in the strong and middle cases, 
 disappears before ^tr in the weakest. Radical ^ and '|^, if preceded 
 by one consonant, become ^ before ^tf, but if preceded" by more 
 than one consonant, become ^[^ ; whereas radical '^ always be- 
 comes '^^ before ^11 , and radical '^, '^. Thus, ti|«n«l'Hi,» t'f- 
 
 ^J ■^^'f^' '^^^H,; ^f^'reC' ^^N- '^^^ feminine stem is 
 formed with % from the weakest stem -form; thus, (^•yifl'. 
 Examples: 
 
 !• f%^T^ 'knowing': 
 
 Mascnliue. Nenter. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 N. f^ljm^ f^lt^ f=l*t<d*i N.V. f%^ fWfft t^KTftr 
 
 A. t^^Ji; „ t^lW » » » 
 
 I- t^f^ f^f^Srm; f^^^ as in the masculine. 
 L. f^^ fWf^ f^ff^ 
 
 2. wfTTTri^ 'having gone'*: 
 
 Another form of perf. part, of this verb (^H^) makes the 
 strong and middle stems gpi^t^ and gjip^; the weakest form 
 is as above, <^J4|(J . 
 
Lesson XXV. 103 
 
 Masculine. Xeuter. 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. giftlT^T^ ^rfWTTRft o^-rera. WfTlff^ Wr^ SjfT^RTtlr 
 A. ^♦»c(ii4*i » ^^^^ « )) » 
 
 I. WJVm o^lTR^ o^f^ as in the masculine 
 
 L. bUijHi ^fl^ ^f7fl^<g 
 
 269. Stems ^'t,, Tl^*^^. The stems ^«^^ m., 'dog', and 
 '^(^\ m., n., 'young', have as weakest stems '^^ and ^t^; in 
 the strong and middle cases they follow '^U'l.; voc. ^?^^, "^ST^^. 
 Fem. ■«nft and ^^f?f. 
 
 270. The stem iT*I'«l»l, '"•> * generous ' (in the later language 
 almost exclusively a name of Indra), has as strong stem l)V(c)7<^, 
 mid. o^, weakest ^vTl*!,- Nom. sing. IT^RTj voc. "^i^^. Fem. 
 
 271. The stem MI^«^ n., 'day', is used only in the strong and 
 weakest cases, the middle, with the nom. sing., coming from ^TfT 
 or Wf^. Thus : 
 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N.A.V. ^f^ (»^) ^If^ or ^l^ '^fTf^ 
 
 I. W^ ^^«II»t ^ftt*I^ 
 
 L. Wff^ or ^f^ Wf^ ^ff^ °^ '^^l 
 
 272. Compounds with y/'^^ or '^(W- The adjectives formed 
 from this root with prepositions and other words are quite irregular. 
 Some of them have only two stem-forms: a strong in '^f^ and a 
 weak in '^Sl^; while others distinguish from the middle in ^I^ a 
 weakest stem in ^, before which the ^ is contracted with a pre- 
 ceding ^ (^ ) or ^ {^^) into f" or ^. The fem. is made with ^ 
 from the weakest (or weak) stem; thus, fsj^^fl. The principal 
 stems of this sort are as follows : 
 
104 
 
 Lesson XXV. 
 
 Strong. Middle. Weak (weakest). 
 
 UTW 'forward', 'eastward' HT^ 
 
 • ^c| [^ 'downward' M|«)l^ 
 
 ^^^ 'northward' >3^^ 
 
 U'^I^'backward', 'westward' TTM^ 
 
 ' low ' •11^ 
 
 'following' ^^SP^:\ 
 
 f^n§^' going horizontally' ffl^'^ 
 
 
 MK 
 
 
 ■«41-il 
 
 ^<-l 
 
 ^(^* 
 
 Hc«|-< 
 
 wK 
 
 5«rq: 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^l«<-cl. 
 
 ^'^ 
 
 ftT^'^ 
 
 f?IT^* 
 
 Verbs: 
 in + W^I'H (astamgdcchati) go 
 down, set (lit'ly "go home" — 
 used of the heavenly bodies). 
 
 Vocabulary XXV. 
 
 + '^^ (udgdcchati) rise. 
 "m^ (sprhdyati) desire (dat). 
 
 Snbst.: 
 A^T;^ n., weight; dignity. 
 ^ »| ct^ n., that which lives. 
 cl^ftj^rrf-, n. pr., a city (Taxila) 
 
 in India. 
 fa 4^ in., n., animal. 
 «q^ m., n. pr., a god, Tvastar. 
 l((\l|d f., assembly. 
 ujjehT^ n., Baroch (a holy place 
 
 in India). 
 H^r^ m., Indra. 
 ^^5j^ m., n., young; f. ^fTT- 
 r«(mc4i m., ripening; recompense. 
 
 TSTT HI., pains, trouble. 
 ftif m., lion. 
 ■^Iwf n., bathing, bath. 
 ^f?;Tg' m., gazelle. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^J^^TI, f., »'^T, learned, studied. 
 (lf<^ c< (B^ having stood; as n. 
 
 subst., the immovable. 
 fM^^*!, three-headed. 
 fl[S, f. OtRT, (part, of ^T[^) bitten. 
 ^•rart^'t. forest-dwelling. 
 f«<^in knowing, wise, learned. 
 
 ^ inserted, irregularly, in weakest forms only. 
 * irregular (f!T^+^l^). 
 
Lesson XXV. XXVI. 105 
 
 Exercise XXV. 
 
 U'tiny ^r«i% ^ f%^ ^^ w^ ii«)^ ii 
 ■^Tf^ Tiqr ^f^4jM*j^7rm; i 8 i yrr ^ ff^iTfrr: ^T'wr- 
 
 ^f^if^ I a I f*«i%<frf»T: ^rren: tt^tt'rts^ i «io i in^ 
 
 ^5^^ II <^'\ H 
 
 12. Vrtra was killed ('^'t^, caws. jpas«.) by Maghavan and the 
 Maruts. 13. Young women sang a song. 14.-Two learned BrShmans 
 dispute. 15. Sarama is called in theRigveda the dog (/.) of the gods. 
 
 16. Great forests are found in the west (expr. as pred., nom. pi.), 
 
 17. In the assembly let the best among the learned teach. 
 (^TI-'feT[T) the law. 18. Those who have committed evil deeds 
 must stand by day (ace.) and sit by night. 19. Glory was attained 
 by the young warrior. 20. Turned toward the east (nom. sing.) let 
 one reverence the gods; the east (ItN^) is the quarter (|««HI ) of 
 the gods. 21. Day by day one must worship (xm ) the sun. 22. The 
 gazelle has been killed by dogs. 23. The lion is king of forest- 
 d'welling animals. 
 
 Lesson XXVl. 
 
 Some Irregular Substantives. 
 
 273. ■4|fc(| f., ' mother ' : voc. sing. -^SflSf. 
 
 274. 1. ^f^ m., 'friend': sing. nom. ^^, ace. 4i<^i«(«i,, inst. 
 ^Ptrr. dat. ^r#, abl.-gen. ^^T^, loc. ^I^, voc. ^; du. «<al«n> 
 
106 Lesson XXVI. 
 
 ¥f^*!rR;, ^^"li:; pi. nom. ^^rnra:, ace. WK, Jnstr. ^JlfH^; 
 the rest like ^f^. — 2. lyfiT m., is declined regularly (like ^f^) 
 in composition, and when meaning 'lord, master'; when meaning 
 'husband', it follows ^fJIT in the following forms: inst. sing. TnUT, 
 dat. X(^, abl.-gen. T^g^, loc. TJ^. 
 
 275. The neuter stems '^rWJ^ 'eye', '^R-'?J5^ ' bone' , dy«(^ ' cnrds ', 
 ^^'ffi^ 'thigh', form only the weakest cases; thus, '4|'?Hj(, ^^^, 
 ^c(>V!|f«T or ttHf^i etc. ; the rest of the inflection is made from cor- 
 responding stems in ^; thus, nom. sing, '^rf^ etc. 
 
 276. 1. flT^ft f.) 'goddess of fortune', makes nom. sing. ^T^ft^- 
 — 2. '^^f., 'woman', follows a mixed declension; thus, nom. sing, 
 ^, ace. f^^H or ^^, instr.f^^, dat.f^, abl.-gen. f^^n^, 
 loc. t^a^TRC; du. f^^, ■^\wm,, f^^tV^', pl- nom. f^^^, 
 ace. f%^l^ or ^^, instr. ^Vf»re:., etc. ; gen. ^UjHK;. 
 
 277. 1. ^T(_ f., 'water', only pl. ; its final is changed to ^ be- 
 fore Vj thus, nom. ^TPJ^j ace. ^tl^, instr. ^rf^^, dat.-abl. 
 ^?Er^i gen. ^xrn^, loc. ■^n^. — 2. f^^ f.,* 'sky', makes nom. 
 sing. 5^^, du. ^T^, pL (sometimes) ^^^; the endings are the 
 normal ones, but the root becomes ^ before consonant-endings: 
 thus, ace. sing. f(^e(4{_, nom.-aec. pl. l^ej^, instr. ^rf^^- Not 
 all the cases are found in use. — 3. Stem^ m. (rarely f.), 'wealth': 
 sing. Tree. TT^n^, Trar etc.; du. ^T^"^. TWm, TT^I^; pl- 
 TF^^ (nom. and ace), :(jf?^ etc. 
 
 278. 1. ^RT^^ or ^JT^^m., (from ^R^ + '^^ 'cart-drawing', 
 i.e.) 'ox': strong stem -4|*<^Tf , mid- ^If^, weakest ^H^; 
 nom. sing. '^<f^|«(^, voc. TjJSiasj^. — 2. The stem XPH^ m., 'road'j 
 makes all the strong cases, with irregulat nom. sing. Mt)!||^; the 
 corresponding middle cases are made from Tjf^, and the weakest 
 from TJ^; thus, ace. sing. t|>!]l*)T^, dat. H% ace. pl, TRT^, 
 
 In the older language oftener masculine. 
 
Lesson XXVI. 107 
 
 dat. 'qfBpii^. [The stems M^^ m., ' stirring-stick ', and ^JJ^'t, 
 m., an epithet of Indra, are said to follow l|>)!|«t^.] 
 
 279. The stem li^ m., 'man', is very irregular. The strong 
 stem is JTTt^, mid. ^, weakest 5^. Thus, sing. •qJTR;, tmrer^, 
 g^, etc., voc. giT^; da. j^rNft, ^int(m,, 5^^; pi- JITO^, 
 3«^, ^f^ etc., q^. 
 
 280. For the stem grTTT f- , ' age ', may be substituted in the 
 cases with vowel -endings forms from ^T^ f-j thus, ^1^ or 
 
 281. ^? n., 'heart', does not make nom.-voc.-acc. of any 
 number (except in composition), these being supplied from ^<^i\ a, 
 
 282. The stem TJ^ m., 'foot', becomes TH^ in strong cases; 
 and, in compounds, in the middle cases also; thus, nom. sing. tJT^, 
 ace. tlT^l^, instr. q^, etc. From 'fl['?«r 'biped', ace. sing, f^- 
 trt^H, pi. f^M^*!,, instr. pi. f^ff ^. [The stem TIT^ m., 'foot', 
 has the complete declension of a-stems.J 
 
 283. The root ^sj;^ 'slay', as final member of a compound, 
 becomes ^ in nom. sing., and loses its <^ in the middle cases 
 and its ^ in the weakest cases (but only optionally in loc. sing.). 
 Further, when ^ is lost, ^ in contact with «^^ reverts to its original 
 ^ ; thus, 5[^^»J^m., 'killing a Brahman', makes nom. sing. WWWTj 
 ace. ofljp^*, instr. s^^yL etc., loc. WWf^ <"■ "ffW) voc. ofs^^; 
 du. st^^uH, "f^JITl etc.; pi. nom. »fl!j^, ace. o^^. 
 
 284. The stems MM^l. m., n. pr., and '41^41 1^ m. , n. pr. (both 
 personifications of the sun), make the nom. sing, in '^, but 
 otherwise do not lengthen the tJI; thus, nom. xi'HTj ace. 'nqTjfT^, instr. 
 qWT- 
 
 * In compound words, an altering cause in one member some- 
 times lingualizes a •t^ of the next following member. But a 
 guttural or labial in direct combination with «(^ sometimes prevents 
 the combination, as in the instr. ^^^. 
 
108 
 
 Lesson XXVI, 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 "^ move; in caus. (arpdyatt) aeni; 
 
 put; hand over, give. 
 tf^ {gAhati) in caus. {guhdyati) 
 
 hide away, conceal. 
 
 Vocabulary XXVI. 
 
 fp^ (trpyati) be pleased or satis- 
 fied, satisfy or satiate oneself. 
 5IH^ + f^ (vildpati) complain. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ■^rW^ ('^rf^) n., eye. 
 ■•^a^^ m., faithfulness. 
 ■^W^ m., demon. 
 t^rl n., notice, thought, mind. 
 ?c((fT f.j divinity, deity. 
 ^U|^ ^^'^^^'^st "VV^) no-) n.pr., 
 
 a Vedic saint. 
 TTff m., foot. 
 m>!|«| n., protection. 
 
 ^ni^ HI') man (homo). 
 
 sfJT n., vow, obligation, duty. 
 
 Adj.: 
 grnsr f-, "^T, one-eyed, 
 ^fl'^'l? four-footed, quadruped. 
 T^M^ m., biped. 
 f5RIH, f. o^Jn (part, of f^-^^O. 
 
 ordained, fixed, permanent, 
 ftf^, f. *>^, beneficent, gracious, 
 
 blessed. 
 
 Exercise XXVI. 
 
 TTWRt irra^ %^ f^rem ^»|«ri ^rR ii <^8 ii 
 
Lesson XXVI. XXVH. 
 
 109 
 
 18. The meeting of the men and women took place on the 
 road. 19. In the Veda they call the sun Ptisan, Mitra(m.), Aryaman, 
 and Savitar. 20. Water also is named (1^^, pass.) among the 
 deities in the Eik (use ■M'^H) ^^^ ^° '^* sacrificial formulas. 
 21. Be gracious, ^iva, to biped and quadruped. 22. The seers' 
 view 18 , that fire is to be found in the water (use '^fj^ , and make 
 a direct statement with, '?[f?|). 23. The Asura was slain by Maghavan 
 with a bone of Dadhyanc. 24. Who knows the wind's path (pas8.')'i 
 25. Mother, satisfy (H't, caus-y the child with cards. 26. Have 
 food brought (use '^-^, caus., pl.J from our friend's house. 
 27. The Maruts are Maghavan's fri«nds. 
 
 Lesson XXVII. 
 
 285. Demonstrative Pronowns. Two demonstrative-declensions 
 are made up with particular irregularity: they are those of the 
 pronouns ^Sf^J^ »"d ^R^ (for which the natives give the stem-forms 
 as ^rf*^ and ^R^ respectively). The first is a more indefinite de- 
 monstrative: 'this' or 'that'; the other ^ignifi,es especially the re- 
 moter relation. 
 
 
 286. '^rr; (T^): 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 •4)*l*(. \M\ 
 
 T^ 
 
 ^'w: 
 
 T^ 
 
 TfT^a: 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 i*<i*i 
 
 
 1) 
 
 L 
 D. 
 
 
 Ab, 
 
 • ^WTc^ 7, 
 
 •n 
 
 V 
 
 
 n 
 
 G. 
 
 ^^ 'Ji'i^n^. 
 
 -«HtJl*1, 
 
 L. 
 
 ^n«< , 
 
 "^J^aiH 
 
 'Sll^ 
 
Feminine. 
 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 0>k 
 
 ^*i^ 
 
 ^T^ " 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 •4I4JMIH. 
 
 ^*i6!|lH 
 
 '^nm 
 
 1 10 Lesson XXVII. 
 
 Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing. X^t "J"- T^' P'- TTTf'f; the rest 
 is like tbe masculine. 
 
 287. ^n^C'?!^): 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 A. -^^ „ "^i^ 
 
 I. ■^TT ^j|wnn, ^fftfira;. 
 D. HM^ „ w^\^^_ 
 
 G. ^r^ ■■^ijvtia; wNm 
 
 L. ^!I^i3Ti: , wt^ 
 
 Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing. -41^44, du. "^Sf^, pi. '^JJTf'I; the rest 
 like masc. — The final t| of '^'ft '8 unchangeable (cf. § 161). 
 
 288. There is a defective pronominal stem TTSf, which is 
 accentless, and hence used only in situations where no emphasis 
 falls upon it. The only forms are the following: Sing. ace. m. 
 T[!ni, n. Tpl^, f. TTTIJ^; instr. m., n., I^Sf, f. Ii«|*j|. Du. ace. 
 m. TJ^, f., n., T^; gen.-loc. m., f., n., Ttf^rRT,. PI. ace. m. Tf^H^ 
 n. TJTTf'I) f- TTTT^- — These forms may be used only when the 
 person or object to which they refer has already been indicated by 
 a form of HUti or TJ^. Thus, ^'%^ ^rR|7TV^r|^<i <*l !<*<<!!- 
 Tfurnr?! "this one has read the art of poetry; teach him grammar". 
 
 289. Past PassiTC Participle in rf or 5f. By the suffix rf — or, 
 in a comparatively small number of verbs, •! — is formed, di- 
 rectly from the root of the verb, and unconnected with any tense- 
 stem, a verbal adjective called the past passive participle. The 
 fern, ends always in «'^. When this participle is made from 
 transitive verbs, it qualifies something as having endured the action 
 expressed by the verb; thus, ^'=tT dattd, 'given'; ^^Jf uktd, 'spoken'. 
 When made from an intransitive or neuter verb, the same par- 
 
Lesson XXVII. Ill 
 
 ticiple has no passive, but only an indefinite past, sense; thus, afrli 
 'gone', 3JrI, 'been'; Trf?IfT, 'fallen'. 
 
 290. This participle is often used as an adjective. Very com- 
 monly, also, it supplies the place of a finite verb, when some form 
 of t!T^, 'be', or ^ is to be supplied; thus, ^ ![({', "he is gone"; 
 m\\ trs (Hl^rl^ "by me a letter was written". The neuter is 
 frequently used as a substantive ; thus, ^-ri+l. '* gift'; '5'W^ ' milk '; 
 and also as nomen actionis. Sometimes it has a present significa- 
 tion, particularly when made from neuter verbs ; thus, f^cf (from 
 ■^n) often 'standing'. 
 
 291. A. With suffix wf [JSf]. The suffix «T is taken by a number 
 of roots. Thus : 
 
 1. Certain roots in ^TT) and in i and m- vowels; thus, TZIT or 
 •4\ 'swell, be fat', T^^^; fT 'abandon', ^ffl; ^T 'wither', ^Tf 5 
 f^ 'destroy', '^^; ^T or f% 'swell', ■^•, ^'cut', ^!I. 
 
 2. The roots in variable "^ (so-called f-rootsj, which before 
 the suffix becomes ^ or igf^, as in the pres. pass.; thus, 2^ 
 
 (f^), ^M; ^, wt^; iq (^) 'fill'. ^- 
 
 3. A few roots ending in gf (which becomes 31^ before the wj); 
 thus, ?T^^ 'break', ^m ilj^^ 'bend', ^; ?rW^ 'sink', J^; 
 •^ 'be sick', ^q; f%^ 'fear', f^. Also one or two others 
 which exhibit a guttural before the ^: g?r^ 'attach', ^TO; W^^ 
 'cut up', ^^^. 
 
 4. A number of roots, some of them very common, in «[ 
 (which becomes 51, before ^): ^, ^tW; (f'T-'^rf , f^raWO f'lf 
 'cut', f^W.* 
 
 292. Some few verbs make double forms; thus, ^ 'hasten', 
 rnj or «^tT7T; t%f 'acquire', fwW or f^- 
 
 * Commonest exceptions: ^Tf^tT from TiT«[ 'eat'; Wf[ from 
 "f ! Wf^ from JT^ 'rejoice'; ^f^ from ^^ 'weep'; ^srf^ 
 from ^^ 'speak'"; f^f^d from f^^ 'know'- 
 
112 
 
 Lesson XXVII. 
 
 Verbs: 
 %^ + ■^TJ (upeksate) neglect, 
 2eR + f^ (vikirdtt) scatter. 
 3|(!J«4 + '^r^ (den. — avagandyati) 
 
 despise. 
 ^^ + '^^ , in caus. (ucedrdyati) 
 
 pronounce, say. 
 fT + '^T^ (avatdrati) descend. 
 
 + ^T (uttdrati) emerge, come 
 
 out. 
 ift or XSIT (^ySyate) become stout 
 
 or fat. 
 
 Vocabulary XXVII. 
 
 ?f^ (bhaksdyati) eat. 
 
 »^^^ break. 
 
 2^gr^ + ^gXT enjoy. 
 
 ^ + tjf^ (paribhdvati) despise. 
 
 41 '331 (.indjjatt) sink. 
 
 ■gif in caus. (yojayati) yoke, 
 
 harness. 
 ^PT Qdgati) attach; hang, cling, 
 
 adhere. 
 ^T? (pdati) sit, settle down; be 
 
 overcome, exhausted. 
 
 Sulbst.: 
 
 ^f^<t| m. du., nom. pr., the 
 A^vins (the Indian Aios xoOpoi). 
 
 WIWTK. ™' » "walk and con- 
 versation " ; conduct of life, ob- 
 servance. 
 
 ^gtff n., debt. 
 
 ^^rre in-j «• pr- a mountain. 
 
 '^^ f., hunger. 
 
 sl^'^4 n- > life of holiness, i. e. 
 religious studentship. 
 
 jft^rT n,, meal-time, meal. 
 
 *r5^m., n.pr., a Vedic personage. 
 
 '44^1(4 m., sweet drink. 
 
 ^W7 f-, pearl. 
 
 <,|i<j^ m., demon. 
 
 Wm m-; acquisition, gain. 
 
 fe(e('|'^ m., wedding, marriage. 
 
 cSrrfV m., illness. 
 
 IJWS m., car. 
 
 ^nm f-, bed. 
 
 ^ m., n., plough. 
 
 ^TT ">•) chain, garland. 
 Adj.: 
 
 ■qV«!! (part, of 2'^) reduced, de- 
 cayed; ruined. 
 
 ^tW f- ''W[, gi'eat, strong, violent. 
 
 t5^ (part, of tft) fat. 
 
 9|^'<4lf\*l. studying sacred know- 
 ledge; as m. suhst., Brahman 
 student. 
 
 ^^ (part.) abandoned; wanting 
 in ; and so sometimes w. instr., 
 = 'without'- 
 
Lesson XXVII. XXVIH. 113 
 
 Exercise XXVII. 
 
 C Os. 
 
 i: fwr <«n<«t«iluj: ^(wr ^ ^m*iimnsi8fW i ? i ^iNi^tH 
 
 ^ft^TTfimTf'i <<<j^n!n.*i ^%ffi 5f^ if?rf^ ^jfrrT^g'H ^- 
 ^ II <i<^ II 
 
 12. Have medicine given quickly (use pass. part, of "^TK.' '^ 
 nom.) to these sick persons. 13. This is that mountain Kailasa, on 
 which Qiva dwells. 14. In order to attain (^TTTi dat.) this and 
 that other world (gen.) the priest offered sacrifice for me (7^^ cazts.). 
 
 15. The flowers in the garlands of these women are withered. 
 
 16. By that king, who was praised by us, we were delighted with 
 these jewels. 17. The peasant yoked two fat oxen to the plough. 
 
 18. The learned Brahman emerged (pass, part.) from the water. 
 
 19. Here comes (pass, part.) the queen. 20. A chain of pearls 
 hung (pass, part.) on the neck of this demon. 21. What sin is 
 not committed by persons reduced in fortuned 22. This garden is 
 filled with men and women. 
 
 Lesson XXVm. 
 
 293. Past Passive Participle, cont'd. B With suffix rT. 
 
 I. Without union-vowel ^. Much more commonly this parti- 
 
 * "I am so-and-so; N. or M." 
 
 ** Translate the pronoun-forms by 'here', and cf. § 225. 
 
 Ferry, Sanskrit Primer. g 
 
114 Lesson XXVIII. 
 
 ciple is made by adding the suffix TT to the bare root ; thus, ^TTT 
 from ^; fw(r{ from f^T; t^^ from f^; ^n from ^ (or gl); 
 HtJ from ^. 
 
 294. If the root end in a consonant other than gi, J^, tj^, ^, 
 the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as follows: 
 
 1. Final ^ and ^^ become ^; thus, f%H from f^^; g^ 
 from ^l^ ; Wli from BfH^. 
 
 2. Final TFT becomes tl , after which, as also after radical 
 final H, t^^ becomes "Z; thus, '^S from '^'J^; fifg from f|fq . ^fg 
 and TTB are made from ^51 and ?Tgf , and T^ from ^ol , contrary 
 to 1. Ulf makes ITS; and TI^, fTS- 
 
 3. Final \il becomes ^, and )f , ^ ; and the following c^ be- 
 comes V > thus, '^^ from cfyj , ^(3i( from ^M . 
 
 4. Final '^ is treated in various ways, according to its his- 
 torical value, a. Sometimes ^ combines with c^^ to form "g, before 
 which short vowels (except ^) are lengthened; thus, an? from 
 TTf) ^^ from f^, ^S from ^; Jf^ from IT^; but fZ from 
 ■(1^. ^Tl' forms ^t^. 6. Where ^ represents original '^ , the com- 
 bination is J^; thus, ^iq from ^; f^J«T from f^; ^KJ from 
 ^^. The root ^^ forms also TH^- c. •ra , where '^ represents 
 original \t, makes •Tg'. 
 
 295. The root before rf usually has its weakest form, if there 
 is any where in the verbal system a distinction of strong and weak 
 forms. Thus: 1. A penultimate nasal is dropped; e. g., ^'3f from 
 ^^; ^^ from ^i^; ^^ from #b; <or ^^)^, Tipgr from ij^. 
 2. Roots which are abbreviated in the weak forms of the perfect 
 suffer the same abbreviation here; e. g., ^f^j from W^i '^TT f™™ '^^.t 
 Jfrfffrom^T^, BfS from^^; ^SfromZI3r (the same form frora^[t(^); 
 f^ from -sil^j xi^ from TT^. 3. Final '^STT is weakened to % 
 in ifttT from 317 'sing', •q^Bf from 1X(\ 'drink'; to ^ in t%<T from 
 'Bn. fVi from ^3[[ 'put' (with V^ also changed to ^), finf from 
 
Lesson XXVIII. 115 
 
 ^^^^ 'measure', and a few others. L A final ^^ is lost after ^ in 
 1*1, ^IcTj Ifl, T<T (from 1[J{^ etc.); and likewise final «^ in ^rf, 
 HTT, Iff) ^<T) ?cl (from ^wj^ etc.). 5. Isolated cases are f^JH 
 from ■JJT^; ^ff from ^^^ 'play'. 
 
 296. More irregular are the following: 
 
 1. Some roots in 1S(J{^ make participles in TJIT'rf; thus, cBTnT, 
 ^T'fr, '^TTnl, <n«Tr, ^«?T, ^Tnr, ^•tT, from cRj^ etc. 
 
 2. gi«C., ^'t,, and ^^t, make ^(lf{ etc. 
 
 3. The root 1^, 'give', forms ?tT (from the derivative form 
 ?^). The contracted form tI is widely found in composition, 
 especially with prepositions; thus, TT^rf or TTrl, f^T^rl or •TIt!, etc. 
 
 297. II. With union- vowel ^. The suffix with ^, or in the 
 form Xl\, is regularly used with the derivative verb-stems in se- 
 condary conjugation, also often with roots of derivative character 
 (like f^in] , f^^), and not infrequently with original roots. 
 
 298. When ^rT is added to causative and denominative verb- 
 stems the syllables ^^ are dropped ; thus, ^TT, pass. part. ^tfTfl' 
 IWT, TpSm; <r3. rnf%<T; V, caus. inT^rfW, cans. pass. part. 
 fllfrd; 1^, caus. tTTrRTfTf, ^TrffTfl- 
 
 299. Among the original roots taking Xft "nay be noticed the 
 following: 
 
 V[^ 'fair, TrfTlcT; ^H;, ^rT; ^^ 'dwell', ^ft<T; ^^^, 
 ^ftRT; ^'thirst', ^f*RT; f^,, t%f^<!; t^, tf^; ^f, 
 ^rf^. Xff makes ^fjrl; ^ 'lie' makes Tl^ft- 
 
 300. A few roots form this participle either with or without 
 the auxiliary X; thus, iTrl and ?Tt?[rf fro™ 'l^- 
 
 301. The grammarians reckon as participles of the wa-formation 
 a few derivative adjectives, coming from roots which do not make 
 a regular participle; such are ^J^ 'burnt' (^); ^ 'thin', 'hag- 
 gard' (^FC); tut 'ripe' (Tl^); ^^ 'dry' (-g^); Jiir ' expanded ' 
 
 (grar).' 
 
116 
 
 Lesson XX VIIL 
 
 302. Past ActiTe Participle in TT^n^ (or 'l^'?^). From the 
 past pass. part, is made, by adding the possessive suffix g»t^ (f. 
 ■gift), a secondary derivative having the meaning and construction 
 of a perfect active participle ; thus, ohd«l'<^, 'Brfil'TW^'?^- 
 
 303. This participle is almost always used predicatively, and 
 generally without expressed copula, i. e., with the value of a per- 
 sonal perfect-form. Thus, TTT "T ^ifWTS^T't, " no one has seen 
 me"; or, with copula, JTft^i^ ^IH^^ctlf^ "thou (fem.) hast come 
 into great misery". This participle comes to be made even from 
 intransitives; thus, ^ J|(|e|(f) "she has gone". 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 ff+H in caus. (pratardyati) de- 
 ceive. 
 
 *\^+'^T{^(saihndhyati) equip one- 
 self. 
 
 11^+ f^-^in caus. (vydpdddyati) 
 kill. 
 
 ■q^rra * (pdlayate) flee. 
 
 23JH^ enjoy, eat. 
 
 ?1^+^J^ honor. 
 
 Vocabulary XXVIII. 
 
 ^^(muhyati) be confused or dazed 
 
 or stupid. 
 ^V^ + ^R besiege. 
 ^ + TT (prardhati) grow up. 
 f^l^ + Ti (j>ravifdti) penetrate, 
 
 enter. 
 ■^t^^ -I- If in caus. (jpravartdyati) 
 
 continue. 
 ■Rpi + ^T^ remain over, survive. 
 
 ^ + ^T bestrew. 
 
 Snbst. : 
 ^JttT m., end ; in he, at last. 
 ^•j^J4^ n., n. pr., Delhi. 
 Ti^ m., ass. 
 jpiT f-, cave. 
 ^fT<T "•) behavior, life. 
 'QI'^^TW m., nom. pr. 
 
 ift^ m., citizen. 
 
 Ml^l^' m., palace. 
 
 11^^ m., Greek, barbarian. 
 
 3jJrra m., jackal. 
 
 ^r*|c|| m., soldier. 
 
 '^'^ n., army. 
 
 ^f%5t m., elephant. 
 
 A guasi-ioot from ^ 'go' + T^'^ 'away'. 
 
Lesson XXVIII. XXIX. 117 
 
 Adj.: 
 ¥[?T^ (comp.) more. In neat, 
 sing, an adv.: mostly. 
 
 t^TCT (part, from f%^) affectio- 
 nate. 
 
 Exercise XXVIII. 
 
 ^VjTWt (abl.) IJ^: ^%^: ^Bt^fHfTSTOr ^^f% ^I3Trf«T I «l I 
 grifr »TWTTRrI J^^ l[TfT f^rT: ^ftsll^^ ^Tm ^S: I 5^ I "S" 
 
 f'T^fVtft f frwt ^nv#nnf^: i ? i 55!: ^stt: ^^>rRr^ t%ren- 
 t^^TfTH: irarftH: ftli^ 3iT^TJrnm%«r itt: 1 8 1 %^ t%iiT- 
 
 f^^ (abl.) 4|c(^i>c||J|t^(^ ^^TTW T^TTWnt^T ^f f^- 
 
 (In the following render all finite verbs by participles.) 
 10. Many of the soldiers were killed ; some who survived fled 
 into the city. 11. The gates of the city were shut fast (^?T ^ft- 
 r^(ilO) tbe citizens equipped themselves for battle. 12. The Ya- 
 yanas approached and besieged the city (pass."). 13. Finally the 
 Yavanas , proving victorious (past act. part.), entered the city by 
 force. 14. The young and old men were mostly murdered ; the ' 
 women made slaves; the great possessions of the citizens plundered, 
 the palaces and houses burnt with fire. 15. The end of Prthviraja 
 has been described by the Yavanas, and his previous life sung 
 by the poet Canda. 
 
 Lesson XXIX. 
 
 304. Gerimd, or Absolntive. The gerund is made in classical 
 Sanskrit by one of the suffixes "^ and Mf. 
 
118 Lesson XXIX. 
 
 305. A. '^Tf- To uncompounded roots is added the suffix ^. 
 It is usually added directly to the root, but sometimes with the 
 vowel ^ interposed. With regard to the use of ^, and to the form 
 of root before if, this formation closely agrees with that of the 
 participle in Tf or •!. A final root- consonant is treated as before 
 rf. Roots which make the past pass. part, in if generally reject ^ 
 before '^. 
 
 Examples. 1. Without inserted ^: -5] (<«( |, fsfc^, <f|(<4r, ^STTj 
 ^<3T; f^Wr from ^(T. tf^ from l^T 'place' (cf. fftT) and from 
 IT, ^[WT from ^T (cf. ^), aft^T from an; '^^fH from o[^, 
 ^^T from ^5r^; ai^T from 1[1{^, J{T^ from Tp^, f^WT from 2f^ 
 'find'; «f^^ from TT (cf. el^l^), q^ from Xf (cf. TJlf); ffT from 
 f^' IWT from ^, JJT from ^gf^ (cf. § 295, 2), ^yfj from ^^, 
 ^^foTS^ from ?ni^, ^T^ from ^. 
 
 2. With inserted 1[: f^f^Tfrom if^^'know', ^f^^nffrom 
 gi[_ 'dwell', ^Jlt^T from ^ft (cf. Iff'Tfl), '\{\vi\ from HJ (cf. 
 
 306. Some verbs make both forms; thus, from T^^J^ either ^- 
 fif^T or ^TWT; from vm^ either ?jfi?^T or ^fT^^T- 
 
 307. Gausatives and denominatives in ^g^ make ^f%|(c|'| ; thus, 
 ^, ^W^^; cTf, cmf%I^T; ^IM^lfrl, ^mr*l<<4|. 
 
 308. B. ^. Roots in composition with prepositions (or some- 
 times with elements of other kinds, as adverbs or nouns) ttike the 
 suffix '?J', before which ^ is never inserted. A root which ends in 
 a short vowel ad^s «^ before ^. Thus, trf^Tj^, -^IWH^; — f^- 
 
 f^, mwm, '^nltw ('^srfti-T) ^ftif^- 
 
 309. Roots in '^J^ and ^'^ whose pass. part, ends in ^HT 
 form this gerund in ^31; thus, "^TWi "^^^ But such am-roots 
 (not aw-roots) may preserve the nasal; thus, »JIJ?J'. Final change- 
 able '^ becomes %^ or ^f^ ; thus, 'cf^, "tr^. Final '^T remains 
 unaltered; thus, "•^T^T^- Some roots show a weak form before 
 
Lesson XXIX. 119 
 
 this suffix; thus, Tl^ff, IffiJ^PT; Vt^ (TT-^^) from TT-'^'^; IR- 
 ^ from ^--g^; ^ff from f^-^. 
 
 310. Causals and denominatives in ^f^ reject those syllables ; 
 thus, l|-^"1<4(fTT, W^; TTrlTSr; 3T^TT2I; '^l^^TW; -flHmilflT 
 (^■'^)) ^TTTTSl- But if the root ends in a single consonant and 
 encloses short ^ which is not lengthened in the causative, then 
 the gerund of the caus. ends in ^pSfi to distinguish it^ from the 
 gerund of the simple verb; thus, '^rg-?m, ger. ^c^3IM(; caus. ^'^- 
 
 311. The gerund or absolntive is used generally as logical ad- 
 junct to the subject of a clause. It denotes an action accompanying 
 or (usually) preceding that which is signified by the verb of the 
 clause. (In the later language it is not always confined to the 
 grammatical subject of the clause as an adjunct.) It has thus vir- 
 tually the value of an indeclinable participle, present or past, qual- 
 ifying the actor whose action it describes. 
 
 Thus, tT^ ''^tjwi W^ -mmi ^IWr ^^ let: "having heard 
 this, having abandoned the goat, having bathed, he went to his 
 own house".* 
 
 312. The gerunds of some verbs have not much more than 
 prepositional value; thus, ^JT^T^ 'having taken', i.e. 'with', like 
 Greek Xa^u/v, t-/^wv; ;frprT ' having released', i. e. ' without', ' except'. 
 
 313. Before all gerunds may be used the privative ^(^ or ^ ; 
 thus, ^^n^lo^lT " without having received"; ^*||^^ " without having 
 summoned. " 
 
 Verbs: 
 ^reC + ^ (nydayati) entrust (to 
 one's care). 
 
 Vocabulary XXIX. 
 
 ^m acquire, attain, reach. 
 ^ + TJ go forth ; die. 
 
 * Of course the absolutives are often best rendered by relative 
 clauses, or even by clauses coordinate with the principal clause. 
 
120 
 
 Lesson XXIX. 
 
 «li+^rf%I put at the head, ap- 
 point as ruler over (Zoc). 
 
 ^^ + II (pracdlatt) move on, 
 march. 
 
 t^St^^ (cintdyati) consider. 
 
 ^ {cydvate) totter, fall. 
 
 S[T + '^T take. Cf. §312. 
 
 VT + ^m-^T lay or place on. 
 
 "ft + f^l^ (nir^dyati) bring to an 
 end, determine, settle. 
 
 ^H^ +f^ (vibhdjati, -«e) distribute. 
 
 ■^gj ■\-T((j>ravrdjati) wander forth ; 
 leave one's home to become a 
 wandering ascetic. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ^tWn^ m-. plaH) design. 
 ^ITW n-5 bringing. 
 cRfri m., monkey. 
 e|if\;«t^ m., elephant. 
 
 gjZT m., victory. 
 
 ■^^irr ^-J misfortune. 
 
 xrg" m., wing J side; party. 
 
 ^cB m., frog. 
 
 ^IW\ f-» "• i""-* Ceylon. 
 
 Tnr m-) hero. 
 
 flTV'T n., means, device. 
 
 %(r m., bridge, dike. 
 
 ^•TflSf^m., n. pr., a monkey-king. 
 
 ^TT^Jir^ (nom. o^) m., fire. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^f?rl disagreeable. 
 ^TF responsible, trustworthy. 
 ^vr du., both. 
 W^, f. '^j little, small. 
 t?far, f- "^j daily, regular. 
 44V|4( on the head. 
 
 Prepos.: 
 Trf^f (postpos., with ace.) against. 
 
 Exercise XXIX. 
 
 T% f^^ ^fifrfti *r^ *rafH ^^: ii <i^ ii 
 ^TOWFra ^rgrNFT ^TTrf% '^ ^T^ war wrwwt t w^ft 
 
Lesson XXIX. XXX. 121 
 
 11. After the king had conquered the vassals of the western 
 lands he marched (pass, part.) against the eastern vassals. 12. The 
 merchants, in joy (pass, part), took the money and gave the jewels 
 to the king (use ger., and pass, constr.). 13. "After adoring the gods 
 at twilight, and placing fagots on the fire, bring water from the 
 cistern": thus having spoken, the teacher seated himself (^ass. part.) 
 on the mat. 14. The hero fought (ger.) with his enemies and gained 
 (part.) great glory by the victory over them (gen.). 15. The Brah- 
 man, abandoning his own (pZ.), became an ascetic (TT-sTSf , pass. part.), 
 16. When the merchant had imparted (f'T-t^T, caus.) his plan to 
 the servant, he sent him into the village. 17. The master of the 
 house had money brought (ger.) and distributed it to the poor. 
 18. Let not kings decide law-suits without hearing the arguments 
 (e| |-t() of both sides. 19. Whoever despises powerful foes, and 
 fights with them without considering the means to victory (gen.), 
 perishes. 20. Whoever becomes an ascetic without having studied 
 the Veda, attains (jger.) not salvation, but falls into hell (toe). 
 
 Lesson XXX. 
 
 314. InflnitiTe. The later language has a single infinitive, the 
 ending of which is g^ (or X^)- The root takes guna, when 
 possible. 
 
 315. The ending 7^ is added directly: 
 
 1. To almost all roots ending in vowels, except those in 'af 
 and changeable ^. Thus, VJ, MlfJHJ ^> <M*i5 t^T, %^i 
 
 2. To a number of roots ending in consonants. As root- 
 
122 Lesson XXX. 
 
 finals, gi, t^^, T^ and ^ remain unchanged before tfl^; thus, 71^, 
 
 'curse', ^'H'l; 3^^ 'dwell', ^^p^. — Other finals are changed 
 according to the rules given in Lesson XXVIII for the con- 
 version of final consonants before the participial suffix cf. Thus, 
 
 trq;, v;^; m\, mwf{^; 11;, ^^*; ^, w^*i f\' 
 
 Final "S becomes c^, and final H, irj^; thus, '^I^, ^'^H.; f^J 
 'know', %^ (also %f^gn); 11^, 'PR^l- 
 
 316. The ending TT'H with ^ (in the form ^g*Q is taken by- 
 roots in final long ^ and the root '^, with a few other vowel- 
 roots ; by the majority of roots in consonants ; and by verbs of the 
 secondary conjugations. Thus, tj, t^f^'^^m ift, aifqn*!^; t^.^5 
 
 tf^gjt; ^i|;, ^t^J?;; jf, ^gn; (cf. § lOl). 
 
 317. Causatives and denominatives in ^T^ have ^fijijH, the 
 root being treated as in the present; thus, ^^, T^YX^r|*(^ ^W . 
 
 318. Some roots in consonants insert or reject ^ at pleasure; 
 thus, ^W^, TTP^fJ*!; or ?n^»t.**. The root ^^ makes ^f^T^. 
 
 319. The rules for the use of -^ in the infinitive agree closely 
 with those governing its use in the formation of the «-future and 
 of the nomen agentis in 'H. 
 
 320. Uses of the inflnitive. The chief use of the infinitive is 
 as equivalent to an accusative, as the object of a verb, especially 
 of the verbs 'JJeli 'be able', and ^^ 'be worthy', 'have the right 
 
 The increments of '^ are sometimes T^ and '^ instead of 
 ■^r^ and '^X.' especially where a difficult combination of consonants 
 is thus avoided. 
 
 ** In all the tense-systems, and in derivation, the root n^ 
 exhibits often the vrddhi instead of the ^u^ia-strengthening. 
 
Lesson XXX. 123 
 
 or power'; thus, ^VnHjfj ^sftfrT "he is able to tell"; ^altgirlfrl 
 ^i'TTT' "tlie prince ought to hear it". -^^ is often thus used with 
 the infinitive to express a respectful request or entreaty, as in the 
 last example. The infinitive is also often found with verbs of 
 motion, and with those meaning 'desire', 'hope', 'notice*, 'know', 
 and the like. 
 
 321. But often the infinitive has a case-value not accusative. 
 Thus, a dative value: l^wHl )ftli7T^T^ "there is food to eat" i. e. 
 "for eating"; a genitive value: ^U^ Inm "capable of going". 
 Even a construction as nominative is not unknown. 
 
 322. In certain connections the infinitive has a ^uasz-passive 
 force. Thus, ^^^T^a^'. " begun to be made " ; ^7T T ^ ^^ " it is 
 not fit to be heard." This is especially frequent along with the 
 passive forms of ^ofi; thus, "Sfis T TXWtffl "be cannot abandon", 
 but ^# .f ll^^ "he cannot be abandoned"; iH^ 1[*1 1 Hl^^rm. 
 "the two men can be brought hither." 
 
 323. Fatnre Passive Participle, or GernndiTe. Certain deriv- 
 ative adjectives, mostly secondary, have acquired a value quite 
 like that of the Latin gerundive; thus, 'c|i|i|' (from m) 'to be done', 
 
 /adendus. They may be made from every verb. The ordinary 
 suffixes are three: ^, "Ifgi, and -4|<ni|. 
 
 324. A. Suffix ^.* a. Before this suffix final radical tJIT be- 
 comes H; thus, from ^,^^; ^IT. 't^- ^- Other final vowels some- 
 times remain unchanged, sometimes have the guna or even the 
 wrcfdAi-strengthening; andlj often, and ^ always, are treated before 
 ^ as before a vowel; thus, from f^, %^ and 51^; from l|^, ^^ 
 and VfZ^; from ^T, ^RI and^gj; from e|i, «BT^; from ^, WI; from 
 T. W^- — c. In a few instances, a short vowel adds a before 
 the suffix; thus, ^3r(T)) ^<^ (^)' |»^ (^)- ''■ Medial ^ remains 
 
 * The original value of this suffix is ia. Hence the conversion 
 of TJ to ^r^I and of "^ to '^T^ before it. 
 
124 Lesson XXX. 
 
 unchanged in one class of words, and is lengthened in another 
 class; thus, ^MT, ^'?T, 'Era, but J^tH (IT^), Tl'^ C^)- 
 e. Initial or medial i, u, and f- vowels are sometimes unchanged, 
 sometimes have the gfu/ja-strengthening; thus, ^^, TST, 5^; ^3r» 
 ^JVhi, ^t^- /• The root I[T^ makes f^I^. A form ^^ (from 
 the defective root ^^) is assigned to ^^. ^TT-^DT makes ^"RJl^ 
 and 4|<!(4-42|'. g. Causatives and denominatives in ^d^ are treated as 
 in the present, but omit the syllables '^HT; thus, ^T, Sft'^. 
 
 325. B. Suffix Ti^. This is a secondary adjective derivative 
 from the infinitival noun in 7{. Hence, both as regards the form of 
 root and the use or omission of \[, the rules are the same as for 
 the formation of the infinitive; thus, ^||f3I, ?R^^, ^rf'^fT^I, Tlt^- 
 7T^ (Tft). 
 
 326. C. Suffix ^^^ [^Xlft^]- Generally radical vowels 
 will be found gunated before this suffix; causatives and denomin- 
 atives in "^Sf^ are treated as in the present- system, without the 
 syllables ^^S[^; thus, ^V^ (^), VJ^ (^n), WP^ (^), ^- 
 
 327. The gerundives in T^aHare common in the impersonal pas- 
 sive construction described in Lesson X, and not seldom have a 
 purely future sense; thus, ^«T W'TT ^f^TT Hftm^W; "with that 
 thou shalt be happy". 
 
 Terbs: 
 
 "^^ (drhaW) have the right, etc. 
 
 (cf. § 320.) 
 ■illH^ + ^ifH finish, attain. 
 ^+'W(-'^ pay. 
 'm + ^rf*f (abhigdcchati) visit, 
 
 attend. 
 
 Vocabulary XXX. 
 
 1T^ + "^Sm (avag&hale) dive under 
 
 (ace). 
 HT^ (tdpati, 'te) burn (tr. and 
 
 intr.); pain; in page,, suflfer, 
 
 do penance. 
 >in + t^ arrange, ordain, order, 
 ^i^ (nftyati) dance. 
 
Lesson XXX. 
 
 125 
 
 ^+ IT be mighty, able; valere. 
 ^c^ + TH (pravdrtate) continue, 
 go on. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 4«in«('4 m., husbandman. 
 flftcT n., song, singing. 
 dMH. n., heat; self-torture. 
 •rrZ«li n., drama, play. 
 •TtT n., dance, dancing. 
 gq^ n., body, figure. 
 4J^|^ m., convention, company. 
 ^TJ«^^ n., Vedic melody, song; 
 pi., the Samaveda. 
 
 Adj.: 
 'c('<v'U; f- °%> young, delicate. 
 
 tre stout, fat. 
 
 fll'J«('ir«(»^ acceptably speaking. 
 
 TJi^r^j^ ft-uitful. 
 
 ^rs!*t destined or suitable for 
 
 sacrifice. 
 f^fffT (part, of f^-VT) ordained. 
 ^JP?, f., »^Tj capable, able. 
 ^■^JW self-existent ; as in. subst., 
 
 epithet of Brahma. 
 Adv.: 
 ^Rm enough, very; w. instr., 
 
 enough of, away with ; w. dat., 
 
 suitable for. 
 ^■^H at pleasure. 
 
 Exercise XXX. 
 ^^w: I ^ I Trqii*m*iT|fltfr «^Tnrt: ^3^^: wvfnf^ tt %- 
 
 ^«ri »TraT TT^'W ^^ (§ 322) | Q. | Ma|e|.)^|^ -^c^Z ^% 
 giM|c|H '^^S^: I '\0 I ^^TWTT gRr^ »ni: frW^ II IS II 
 
 (Sentences with must may fte rendered either with '^j^ or weiA 
 gerundives), 12. A Brahmacarin must not visit any companies 
 to see (ll-'llj^) dancing or to hear singing. 13. Remembering 
 that works will be fruitful in the other life (use "thus thinking", 
 after or. recta), a man must strive to perform what is ordained. 
 
126 Lesson XXX. XXXI. 
 
 14. The maidens seated themselves (pass, part.) in the garden to 
 bind wreaths. 15. True friends are able to save from misfortune. 
 
 16. The daughters came (pass, part.") to bow before their parents. 
 
 17. How is the delicate body of this fair one capable of enduring 
 penance? 18. You must become a scholar (iise *r^«fl , and cf. 
 § 177). 19. You must bring a boat to cross the river. 20. Who 
 is able to stop the mighty wind? 21. The gentlemen (use ^lf^^rt) 
 are to read this letter. 22. Having finished the Veda, he went on 
 to study the other sciences. 
 
 Lesson XXXI. 
 
 328. Numerals. Cardinals: TJoR i, ^ 2, f^ 5, ^TT^; 4, tjg 5, 
 
 ^ 6, ^j{ 7, ^?re 8, ^^ 9, ^^ 10. — iim^m a, itr^ ^2. 
 
 ■^"^91 13, ^1^ U, TI^^TT i5, •qt3^ 16, ^^ 17, '^fST^lI 18, 
 TW^ id, f^TTfrr 20. — T[^^f?r 21, IfTf^irffl 22, etc. — 
 
 f^cm, 30, ^^TftiTfi: 40, tnrrsrci; so, trf% eo, ^irfri 70, ^?rsf^- 
 
 fH 80, ^^fTI 90, ^7\ 100. — f|[^ or ^ ^J^ 200. — ^f^ 1000, 
 t^f^ or "^ ^gf % 2000, 'SJlrJ^f^ or ^p^ 100 000. 
 
 329. The numbers between the even tens are made by pre- 
 fixing the unit -number to the ten; thus, tjgfsf^fcT 25. But note: 
 ■^WT^^, not H^cj)(J ' t{ , 11. 42, 52, 62, 72 and 92, either fli^RfT- 
 f^ilff^^ or^^T^o, etc.; 43—73, and 93, either f^o or •^zra^To etc.; 
 48—78, and 98, either ^re" or ■4iaN c=l l '» etc. 96 is ^^^fTT- 
 
 330. There are other ways of expressing the numbers between 
 the tens. Thus: 1. By the use of the adj. 'gfT 'deficient', in com- 
 position; e. g. UchlMRajfW '20 less 1', i. e. 19. This usage is. 
 not common except for the nines. Sometimes Tj^ is left off, and 
 ^Tff^TrfiT) etc., have the same value. 2. By the adj. ^iftRi or 
 'dTi< 'more', also in composition; e. g., ^?Tf^cii<|c(f|f (also 
 
Lesson XXXI. 127 
 
 331. The same methods are used to form the odd numbers 
 above 100. Thus, Tj^^Ifl^iOi, ^^TETITrl'^ ^08, H^Tf^I^ii l^Jm^iOS, 
 ^^trrt Til^W: i07. 
 
 332. Inflection of cardinals. 1. HeR is declined like ^^, at 
 §231 (pi.: 'some', 'certain ones'). The dual does not occur. 
 11^ sometimes means 'a certain'; or even 'an, a', as an indefinite 
 article. 
 
 2. "^ (dual only) is quite regular; thus, nom.-acc.-voc. m., '^, 
 f. n. \, IfTWrm, K^^. 
 
 3. f% is in masc. and neut. nearly regular; the fem. has the 
 stem frIH- Thus, nom. m. '^^J^, ace. m. '^•J^, nom.-acc. n. 
 'ftftr; instr. f^f?1^, dal.-abl. t^«re:, gen. -W^nWIH: , loc. f^^. 
 Fem.: nom.-acc. ffreT^, instr. fll^f^rei;, dat.-abl. ffT^«I^, gen. 
 ft^WT?!,, loc. 'Rr^f • 
 
 4. x({1<^ has '^TfITT '° strong cases; the fem. stem is ^rT^T. 
 Thus, nom. m. ^WIT!^i ace. m. ^TJ'^^; nom.-acc. n. ^^^Tf^i 
 instr. ^UTO^ etc. Fem. : nom.-acc. T|rJ4^((^, instr., etc., ^TT^fj^^, 
 
 (3 — 19.) These numbers have no distinction of gender. They 
 are inflected with some irregularity as plurals. Thus : 
 
 5. 7, 9, 10. Tig-, TTWf'TO:, "^Ri:, ^^T-R;, tigf • «^, 1W, 
 ?^J, and compounds of ^If, are similarly declined. 
 
 6. ■qtr^ as follows: 'q^, •Jf^firai, ^^f«I'^i W^m, '^^• 
 
 8- ^S may follow V^, or be declined thus: ^I^, ^Slf^ra^, 
 
 20, 30, etc. t^fTT, f^^, etc., are declined regularly as 
 fem. stems, in all numbers. 
 
 100, 1000. IJfT and ^^^ are declined regularly as neut, 
 stems, in all numbers. 
 
 333. Constrnction of nnmerals. 1. The words from 1 to 19 
 are used as adjectives, agreeing in case (and in gender, if possible) 
 
128 Lesson XXXI. 
 
 ■with the nonns. 2. The numerals above 19 are nsaally treated as 
 nouns, either taking the numbered noun as a dependent genitive, 
 or standing in the sing, in apposition with it; thus, 'SJ^ ^1^*1 in, 
 or '51'?! ^1^': "a hundred female slaves"; "^^i;} <||<,(U "in sixty 
 antnmns". 
 
 334. Ordinals. ITTO' 'first', ^^, ^^T^T' ^g^' ''^^^ 
 ■^^i ^FT, ^^*\, 'RT, ^TTT, lj.ehl<^ (to 19ih, the same as the 
 cardinals, but declined like ^^, etc.); t^lf or f^^fdcff 20th; 
 t^ or Rsj-d*i 30th, etc Note also H<j?^«ini5[ or ^^rf^, 
 TnSt'rf^^lt^IfW or ^pirf^IffTnnT, i9th. The shorter forms (f^htetc.) 
 are by far the commoner. 
 
 335. TTSm, f^«ll?J and rldl^il make their fem. in o'^; the 
 rest, in ^. Occasional forms of the pronominal declension are 
 Diet with from the first three; but the usual declension of nouns 
 is the normal one for ordinals also. 
 
 336. Nnmeral adverbs. 1. H^^ 'once'; f|[^ 'twice'; p|4^ 
 'thrice'; ^»f^ 'four times'; M^<t<<4^ or Tjg^TT'l 'fi^^ times'; 
 and so on, with «^i^^ or '^TT'l.- ~ 2. "^^reiT 'in one way'; 
 fl[^ or ^^ 'in two ways'; f^^ or '%\iJT, ^H^T, '^W3^\, ^^ 
 or ■q^^, etc. — 3. TJ^FSJ^ 'one by one'; UldSm, 'by hundreds', etc 
 
 Vocabulary XXXI. 
 
 Terbs; 
 "epS + ^pi^ (samkaldyati) put to- 
 gether, add. 
 ?I5?^+'^rf?T pass (of time). 
 ^(^I(jdlpati) speak, chat. 
 
 ira in cans, (bhojdyati) feed, 
 f^f^ + '^Sf^ (cUihisincdti') anoint 
 
 as king. 
 ^+^^-^ cite, mention. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 vjHijc l '^^ m., the fourth Veda. 
 
 '* XT^ forms no ordinal. 
 
 ^if^'simi"* n., tupr. a city. 
 
Lesson XXXI. 
 
 129 
 
 cBfi | <j<| n., the "Iron Age" of 
 the world. 
 
 ^^ n., wheel. 
 
 wHldM n., astronomy; astrono- 
 mical text-book. 
 
 ^^•1 n., philosophical system. 
 
 «|i^<4 D., lanar mansion. 
 
 mU:^^ m., n. pr., descendant of 
 Paijda. 
 
 U<^|l(| n., one of a class of works 
 on the creation of the world. 
 
 f^lBTrfSW tn-j "• pi"-) a famous 
 king. 
 
 TiyS m., Scythian. 
 
 H'^T. n-) body. 
 
 tllimi {., branch, edition, re- 
 daction. 
 
 il <*<«<. tn., year. 
 AdT.: 
 
 •4l»l«TK*i. («'• "b^- — offen posi- 
 pos.) after, immediately after. 
 
 ^frjtl^ sometimes (in altern.). 
 
 t{<H^\ namely, to wit. 
 
 iJIWdH. ^^ present. 
 
 Exercise XXXI. 
 
 «4<cti<<ii: »<(\M^ ^l^dir-i ^m ^Tfn; n i^ ii 
 *jhhi^mI«iit ttO^iHu f^f% TraTprrf'T f^sra* ii q ii 
 
 'ffflT f^f^ *nTJ^ I sj I '^'^ %^T^ g ^f^ ^rrar ^?f^ i ? i 
 «m^ I ^*^<i*& v^ ^rrar «<«j^<«a tn^ftfli: 'but^^ ^tht- 
 
 ^njnt ^wTfr «^<Hifui 'R aidifii ^snftfrrg ^l>ig'i«a ^- 
 
 ^i afd ? hMir»i I $ » 4inr«)**iir<rtii4«i^< vy<<^i8iifvr% sidd*i 
 
 ^ ai«hHi Trgt ^^rfftr iJuf-i ii '= ii ^tfiir ?mfw i^ ^t«^ 
 ?mrra^JT^%^ wrsnNt <-diR i ^ i ^ if^ ^ ^ ^twi^ 
 
 ■s<l^<l!MT'T»?to|*<d, II *10 II 
 
 11. The wagon of the A^vins is fitted (g^ , part, paw.) with 
 three wheels. 12. The A^vins are praised by the seer with four 
 
 * i, e., in the seven stars of the Great Bear. 
 
 Venj, Sanskrit Frimei. a 
 
130 Lesson XXXI. XXXII. 
 
 Rik-verses. 13. Krsna is the eldest of six brothers. 14. Arjuna 
 is the third among the five Pandavas. 15. Some think there 
 are eight sorts of marriage {pi.); others, six (model after 2nd 
 sentence in Sanskrit above). 16. Twenty-seven or twenty-eight lunar 
 mansions are mentioned in astronomy. 17. One should consecrate 
 a Brahman in Ms eighth year, a Ksatriya in his eleventh, a Vai^ya 
 in Ms twelfth. 18. Two great lights shine in the sky. 19. The 
 teacher, having taught the fifth Rik- verse, recited the sixth. 
 
 20. 9akyamuni Buddha died in the eightieth year of his age (life). 
 
 21. Sometimes 33 gods are reckoned in the Veda, sometimes 3333. 
 
 Lesson XXXII. 
 
 337. Comparison of Adjectives. Derivative adjectives having 
 comparative and superlative meaning — or often, and more origin- 
 ally, a merely intensive value — are made either (A.) directly from 
 roots (by primary derivation), or (B.) from other derivative or com- 
 pound stems (by secondary derivation). 
 
 338. A. The suffixes of primary derivation are |^*Jf{_ for the 
 comparative, and ^ for the superlative. The root before them is 
 accented, and usually strengthened by guna (if capable of it), or 
 sometimes by nasalization or prolongation. — In classical Sanskrit 
 few such formations are in use; and these attach themselves in 
 meaning mostly to other adjectives from the same root, which seem 
 to be their corresponding positives. In part, however, they are 
 connected with words unrelated to them in derivation. 
 
 339. Thus ^MJiJf^ and ^fTO (l/f^K.) attach themselves to 
 f^JI 'quick'; c|0*<H. ^"^ WfT^ (l^'^ 'encompass'), to ^^ 
 'broad'; MIMlt^li, and xrrf^?, 'worse' and 'worst', to the snbst. 
 ATM; mXI<<4A. and Tlfe^, to tf^ 'skilful'; ??ft^ and Trff? to 
 
Lesson XXXII. 131 
 
 TfrTj ^r^^V?ra; and ^f^, to ^f^^^ or sj^jfcjtrfj ^T^V'Rt, and 
 ^TN¥ to ^TO- 
 
 340. The following are examples of artificial connections: 
 ^f^a^'near', %^?I^, %f^^; ^i^ 'little', BR^l^ra;, ^f^^ 
 
 (but also ^^rafhra:, '''f^re); ^ 'heavy', ^ifhra;, arfTW; ^ 
 'long') S^.l'Tlettl,, ^f%re; mr^ 'praiseworthy', 'good', ^^Pf(^ 
 'better', ^ 'best'; flj^ 'dear', ^^J^, t[^; ^^ 'much', ?1^^, 
 
 'Jf^; g^ 'young', ^ft^^, -qf^Tj; ^^ 'old', ^T^to;, ■^- 
 
 f^?' iniqtl, and ^^ correspond sometimes to TT^^ or ilTOf, 
 sometimes to H'g'. 
 
 341. The stems in ^^ are inflected like ordinary adjectives 
 in ^, with the fem. in ^; those in t'Tt^ have a peculiar de- 
 clension, with a strong stem in |i|J4^, and fem. t^ret, for 
 which see § 255. So also S rijl^j ^ ^ and If^T^* 
 
 342. B. The suffixes of secondary derivation are fT^ and tfJf, 
 They are of almost unrestricted usp. That form of stem is usually 
 taken which appears before an initial consonant of a case-ending. 
 Stems in ^^ are always unchanged; final ^[^ and ^^ become 
 ^ and ^^, after which the c^ of the suffix becomes •^. 
 
 Thus, fHilcji-^;, fir^RTltT. °li^; Vf^^l, ^irf^nTT;. "fW; fk- 
 
 343. Some stems which are substantives rather than adjectives 
 are found to form derivatives of comparison; thus, TrrrffTT 'most 
 motherly', •nTt 'most manly', IT^TrlTT 'most like an elephant.' 
 
 344. Comparison of Adverbs. Adverbs are compared by adding 
 the suffixes in the forms 7TT7H and fTTPH; thus, ^ 'well', ^rf- 
 
 345. Constmction. With a comparative (and sometimes with 
 other words used in a similar way) the ablative is the regular 
 construction; thus, l|-4|(s||ii(T <T^ ^^toI' "a daughter is dearer 
 to him than a son"; T?f7l^^ ^^IstO't^Tl "intellect alone is 
 
 9* 
 
132 
 
 Lesson XXXII. 
 
 stronger than force". After the superlative either genitive or locative 
 may be used. The comparative often has the force of a strength- 
 ened superlative; thus, »lO*ll*l, 'most honorable'. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ajiq^m., one of a band of celes- 
 tial singers, a Gandharva. 
 y^ m., n. pr. 
 ^■^ n., running, course. 
 M<^I(1I<1, HI., the world-spirit. 
 ifr^ m., deliverance, salvation. 
 
 ^^ n., metal; iron. 
 
 c||«|4J m., crow. 
 
 ^^T'rTm-, a system of philosophy. 
 
 Vocabulary XXXIf. 
 
 f^«Q m., n. pr., the Indus. 
 M4^m m., drunkard. 
 \nfH m., winter. 
 
 Adj.: 
 '^rar little, small; as n. subst., 
 
 atom. 
 '411^ swift. 
 t;?*[.' f- tf^. such. 
 ^KjnS, f- "^ and 0% old. 
 ?rf^5^^ abiding, being. 
 
 Indecl.: 
 
 ^ sometimes in sense of if. 
 
 Exercise XXXII. 
 m^ ^jTfTT fwr ^tItt ^ra f^^ H41->^nT I 
 
 M\^ [ i\ TgrrsT ^^: «iy|*i Tfn ^Ti ^^aiH i «t i ^Broni g 
 i^^irr ^^ ^ ni«iid<n ^m% ii ^^ ii '^^ <*«n*ii^ 'fifiTt tt- 
 T^THW^ I 9 I <i«fl*i«7 *n^ Mr<ui<ict I 8 I ^ ^B-RT »n- 
 
 M<*<i<tii<in<'^<in<<i'*<^d1 ^ Tfh^n^^i^g '^^ I $ I ^- 
 
 ^ "^aiRaifdil^*!! ^d<^«j^*<<ji MRiiDdi^dw Of^^iH 
 «Tn: ^FR^ I ^ I ^%»r: fTRi: miH^t'ic ^^ i o. i tt- 
 
 a^ II <1<1 II 
 
 * Translate as thoagb genitive. 
 
Lesson XXXII. XXXIII. 133 
 
 12. Of the three wives of Da9aratha, Kausalya was older and 
 more honored (^, com^J.) than Kaikeyi and Sumitra. 13. In winter the 
 nights are very long. 14. Not very many (express as pred.) such 
 jewels are found on earth. 15. Among those kings of the North 
 Pj-thviraja was the mightiest. 16. The poems of Kalidasa are 
 sweeter than the works of Bana. 17. Anathapindika was the richest 
 among all the merchants in Rajagrha. 18. Iron is lighter than gold, 
 but heavier than wood. 19. In running the horse is the swiftest 
 of quadrupeds. 20. Qakuntala was more beautiful than all other 
 women of that time, and became the wife of the mightiest monarch 
 (^^T^ ) of the whole earth. 21. The crow is called the shrewdest 
 of birds. 
 
 Lesson XXXIII. 
 
 (Part I.) 
 
 346. Compounds. In all periods of the language the combination 
 of stems of declension with one another, forming compounds which 
 are treated in accent, inflection and construction as if simple words, 
 is one of the most striking peculiarities of the Sanskrit tongue. 
 In the Yedic period compounds of more than two elements are 
 rare. In the later language this moderation is abandoned; and 
 the later the period, and especially the more elaborate the style 
 of composition, the more unwieldy and difficult do the compounds 
 become. To such an extent is this carried that the advantages 
 of an inflective language are often deliberately thrown away, and 
 a clumsy aggregation of elements replaces the due syntactical 
 union of inflected words into sentences. 
 
 347. Sanskrit compounds fall into three principal classes: 
 
 I. Copulative or Aggregative compounds, of which the members 
 are syntactically coordinate : a joining together of words which in 
 
134 Lessou XXXin. 
 
 an uncompounded state would be connected by 'and'. E. g. ^- 
 clTgirlH; 'done and undone'; ^^^I^J'^Jn^trT: 'gods and Gan- 
 dharvas and men'- The members of such a compound may obvi- 
 ously be of any number, two or more. 
 
 II. Determinative compounds, of which the former member is 
 syntactically dependent on the latter, as its determining or quali- 
 fying adjunct: being either a noun limiting it in a case-relation, 
 or an adjective or an adverb describing it. Thus may be distin- 
 guished two sub-classes: A. Dependent, and B. DescriptiTC, com- 
 pounds; their difference is not absolute. 
 
 Examples are: of dependents, '?ffJI'^%!rT 'army of enemies'; 
 Mid) (^4 'water for the feet'; ^^rajcT 'made with hands'; — of 
 descriptives, H^T^gt ' great king ' ; fjl^^'^ (§353, 2) 'dear friend'; 
 ^^r| 'badly done'. 
 
 348. The character of compounds of classes I. and II., as 
 parts of speech, is determined by their final member, and they are 
 capable of being resolved into equivalent phrases by giving the 
 proper independent form and formal means of connection to each 
 member. But this is not true of the third class, which accordingly 
 is more fundamentally distinct from them than they from each 
 other. 
 
 349. III. Secondary AdjectiTe compounds, the value of which 
 is not given by a simple resolution into their component parts, but 
 which, though having as final member a noun, are themselves ad- 
 jectives. These again are of two sub-classes: A. Possessive com- 
 pounds, which are noun-compounds of the preceding class (II. A. 
 or B.), with the idea of 'having' added, turning them from nouns 
 into adjectives; and B. compounds in which the second member is 
 
 * This class of compounds is of comparatively recent devel- 
 opment; only the other two are common in others of the related 
 tongues. 
 
Lesson XXXIII. 135 
 
 a noun syntactically dependent on the first: namely, 1. Participial 
 compounds (only Vedic), of a present participle with its following 
 object; and 2. Prepositional compounds, of a preposition and fol- 
 lowing noun. This whole sub-class B is comparatively small. 
 
 Examples: '^^•f 'possessing a hero-army'; TT^T^filTI 'having 
 desire of progeny'; '^fTWl'^ 'excessive'. 
 
 350. The adjective compounds are, like simple adjectives, some- 
 times used, especially in the neuter, as abstract and collective 
 nouns; and in the accusative as adverbs. Out of these uses have 
 grown apparent classes of compounds, reckoned and named as such 
 by the Hindu grammarians. 
 
 351. A compound may, like a simple word, become a member 
 in another compound, and so on indefiuitely. The analysis of a 
 compound (except copulatives), of whatever length, must be made 
 by a series of bisections. Thus the dependent compound XT^^PJI- 
 ^iJT) ' done in a previous existence ', is first divisible into gift and 
 the descriptive TIc|^>jj«t^, then this into its two elements. 
 
 352. Euphonic combination in compounds. The final of a stem 
 is combined with the initial of another stem in composition according 
 to the general rules for external combination. But: 
 
 1. Final ^^ and ^^ of a prior member become ^[xr and ^3^ 
 before surd gutturals, dentals, and labials; thus, siTlfd'^htl,. 
 
 2. Final ^l^ of a prior member often remains unchanged under 
 similar circumstances. 
 
 3. After final ^, ^, ^, an initial ^ often becomes lingual. 
 
 4. Pronouns generally take the stem-form of the neuter; for 
 the personal pronouns are oftenest used ?T^ and ^^ in the sing., 
 '^l^'^ and 'g^^ in the pi. 
 
 5. For TT^^fT , in the prior member of descriptive and possess- 
 ive compounds, is used ?J^. 
 
 6. A case-form in the prior member is not very rare. 
 
136 Lesson XXXIII. 
 
 353. In all classes of compounds, certain changes of final are 
 liable to appear in the concluding member; generally they have the 
 eifect of transferring the compound as a whole to the a-declension. 
 Thus: 1. A stem in '^fs^ often drops the final «t^, as in o^^, o^^, 
 "ml, 'Tjm- 2. An ^ or t is changed to ^, as in »*J?T, »TT^i '^ra. 
 oxpJI. 3. An ^ is added after a final consonant, sometimes even 
 after an u-vowel or a diphthong, as in "^^ ('^WO' 1^ (.'^)- 
 
 The separate classes of compounds will now be taken up. 
 
 (Part II.) 
 
 354. I. Copnlative componnds. Two or more nouns — much 
 less often adjectives, and once or twice adverbs — having a co- 
 ordinate construction, as though joined by ' and ', are sometimes com- 
 bined into a compound.* 
 
 355. The noun-compounds fall, as regards their inflective form, 
 into two classes: 
 
 A. The compound has the gender and declension of its final 
 member, and is in number a dual or plural, according to its 
 logical value as denoting either two, or more than two, individual 
 things. Examples are: '3^1^?l^ 'rice and barley'; "^TT^- 
 TClft' 'Rama and Erspa'; ■■4fiJp|T«fi(: 'goats and sheep'; WfWW^f^- 
 '^^tlil^s(l> 'Brahmans, Ksatriyas, Vai^yas and 9ii<^''as'; ftRfn^ 
 (§ 352, 6) 'father and son'. 
 
 B. The compound, without regard to the number denoted or 
 to the gender of its constituents, becomes a neuter singular collective 
 (so-called samahara-dvandva). Thus, TDlHiim^H. 'hand and foot'; 
 ^tl«Tgi^rH 'snake and ichneumon'; ^x^MH^H (§ ^53, 3) 'um- 
 brella and shoe'; -^f^^N*^ (§ 353,2) 'day and night'. 
 
 356. The later language preserves several dual combinations 
 
 * This class is called by the Hindus dvandva, 'couple'; but a 
 dvandoa of adjectives they do not recognize. 
 
Lesson XXXIII. 137 
 
 of the names of divinities, etc., which i;etain their earlier forms ; 
 thus, ^f-RTOf^^'V and iSTRTM^ 'Heaven and Earth'; fjTTI- 
 ^^Tlft' 'Mitra and Taru^ia'; ^^iHt^ft' 'Agni and Soma'. 
 
 357. Adjective copulative compounds are made likewise, but 
 are rare. Examples are : J^^h^tQf ' light and dark ' ; ^TlTltT ' round 
 and plump';* ^TrlT^f^'JT 'bathed and anointed'. 
 
 358. Determinative compounds. A noun or adjective is often 
 combined into a compound with a preceding determining or qual- 
 ifying word — a noun or adjective or adverb. The two principal 
 divisions of this class are, as indicated above, A. Dependent, and 
 B. Descriptive, compounds. Each class falls into two subdivisions, 
 according as the final member, and therefore the whole compound, 
 is noun or adjective.** 
 
 359. A. Dependent compounds. 1. Noun -compounds. The 
 case-relation of the prior to the second member may be of any- 
 kind, but is oftenest genitive, and least often accusative. Thus, 
 crfq^^= rl^ g^:; ^^cnf^ 'hundreds of fools'; — m({)((.» 
 (= in^«r ^a^'^iJi;) ' water for the feet' ; — f%[^^J^ ' money (ob- 
 tained) by science'; -iH^^Tf^ (= ^nWH ^f^»^) 'likeness with 
 self; — ^^-^^T^ (='^Trr?I*l) 'fear of a thief; — Si^r^^ 
 (= ^% W\'') ' sport in the water ' ; — W|3('^i|tiif (= ^JJ-SQ ajo) ' going 
 to the city'; ■^l^^rfiT 'lord of speech', n. pr. (§ 352, 6.). 
 
 360. 2. Dependent adjective compounds. Onlj a very small 
 proportion of the compounds of this class have an ordinary adjective 
 as finarraember; usually the final member is a participle, or a de- 
 rivative of agency with the value of a participle (§ 204). The 
 
 * The Hindus reckon these as karmadhdrayas (see next note). 
 
 ** The whole class of determinatives is called by the natives 
 tatpurusa (the name is a specimen of the class, meaning 'bis man'); 
 the second division, the descriptives, bears the special name karma- 
 dhdraya, a word of obscure meaning and application. 
 
138 Lesson XXXIII. 
 
 prior member stands in any possible case-relation. Thus, TSnJ{Z[([ 
 'gone to the village'; %^fw^ 'Veda-knowing'; — fST^Xif^fl 
 'protected by Qivsk'; flTtflrT (=1^ ffflO 'good for the cow'; — 
 l^'lMRlir] 'fallen from the sky'; Tf^^g^TcPC 'more mobile than 
 waves'; — f|[WtTnT (= f|[3lT«1TH ^tITO 'best of Brahmans'; — 
 ^T^V^Wf 'cooked in a pot'. 
 
 361. Compounds of this sort having as final member the bare 
 root — sometimes modified in form, and, if it end originally 
 in a short vowel, generally with an added c^^ — are very numerous : 
 thus, ^^f%? above (§360); ""(^^^ 'standing in the wagon' (or 
 simply 'in the wagon'); ^T^IT 'on the head'; XJcfi^J 'only-born'; 
 ^M^TC (§ 352, 6) 'forest-dwelling'; ^fvf^T; 'firm i" battle'; ^R- 
 f^gf 'born in the heart' (i. e. 'love'). 
 
 362. B. Descriptive componuds. In this division of the deter- 
 minatives, the prior member stands to the other in no distinct case- 
 relation, but qualifies it adjectively or adverbially, according as the 
 final member is noun or adjective. Thus, flHI^I (§ 353, 2); Q^cf 
 'well-done'; dt»*tl^ 'evil-doing' (adj.). 
 
 The compounds of noun-value cannot well be separated in 
 treatment from those of adjective-value. 
 
 363. The simplest case is that in which a noun as final member 
 is preceded by a qualifying adjective as prior member. Thus, ^- 
 WPST (= chuyl STSO 'black horse'; 4{^|i|4^i4 'great man'. Instead 
 of an adjective, the prior member is in a few cases a noun used 
 appositionally or with a g'wasi-adjective value; thus, W^ff^ 'priest- 
 sage'; ■^jgrfi 'king-sage'. 
 
 364. Sometimes compounds of this sort express a comparison; 
 thus, W*1^l^ 'black as a thunder -cloud' (cf. 'coal-black', etc.). 
 Reversed, tj^tfgjT'?! 'man-tiger', i. e., 'a man fierce as a tiger';* 
 
 * Literally, a tiger which is not a tiger after all, but a man. 
 Or, perhaps better, 'tiger of (or among) men' (so Whitney). 
 
Lesson XXXIII. 
 
 139 
 
 •r^f^^ 'man-lion'; TTT^XRi 'foot-lotus', i. e. 'a foot lovely as a 
 lotus'. 
 
 365. The adverbial words most commonly used as prior 
 members of descriptive compounds, qualifying the other member, 
 are the verbal prefixes ("prepositions"), and the \?ords of direction 
 related to them ; likewise the inseparable prefixes '^[«^ or '^ priva- 
 tive, ^ 'well', '5^ 'ill', etc. These are combined with nouns (in 
 quasi-adjectival value) as well as with adjectives. Thus, '^RRT 'not 
 done'; '^tXTfr^cf 'not a scholar'; ^R^ 'misfortune'; ^fcj^ 
 ' more than a god ' ; ^triTT ' exceedingly far ' ; "^f^H^ ' excessive 
 fear'; TtRtT^ 'opposing side.' 
 
 Terbs: 
 ^rnC. + ^J^ complete. 
 ^^ + f^ station, place, appoint. 
 
 Vocabulary XXXIII. 
 
 X^ + ^f (anurdjyati, -ie) be 
 
 devoted to, inclined to Qoc). 
 '^^^-\■ TT go away (on a journey). 
 ■^f^^ + t^ return home. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ^rnimt m., air, sky. 
 ^TRfTT m., hermitage. 
 eP3 m., n. pr. 
 ^UTT n>-. boy, prince. 
 •^S(^ U game, sport. 
 t?|^rc|; m., ornament (often fig.). 
 ?fV^ n., bathing-place; place of 
 
 pilgrimage. 
 f ^ ^jH'tt n., «^ f., the threefold 
 
 world. 
 Ubt|i;i m., n. pr. 
 i^j'(l|«l^ m., panther. 
 
 XJ^ n., step; place. 
 
 Tj^ m,, n. pr. 
 
 jrff^ f., queen. 
 
 ^J|i|| f., chase. 
 
 ^T^f-) march, journey; support. 
 
 '^^ m., race, family. 
 
 c(T|'|«d m., state of affairs ; news. 
 
 'IQ4^ f., female friend. 
 
 ^[tojrn; m., hospitality. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^•i^q, f. 0^, suitable. 
 
 af^, f- "^i adopted. 
 
140 
 
 Lesson XXXIIL 
 
 antl't) f- •%, in the manner of, 
 or suitable for, the Gandbarvas. 
 ■fegi, f. otSJT, heavenly, divine. 
 ^TTf^, f- 't". human. 
 
 '^4f)u,f. o^T, near; as neui.subst., 
 vicinity, nearness, presence. 
 
 Adv.: 
 XfXJ earlier, formerly. 
 
 Exercise XXXIII. 
 ■f^Wt Tr»? TTWff : ^[J5^1lfd'«!l<*nj5l^*IT fW^.* |if^ ^- 
 
 'TR T^irat i^f^RT^ 'RfttfY^ f^=tll«|*JM< l^^Pl. I 8 I ^i^^ 
 
 *ii«iJmfw^T II § II 
 
 (i^orm compounds of words joined by hyphens'). 
 7. When he had seen her, brilliant (JJ^ F''^*- part.) with di- 
 vine-beauty, as though (X^O more-than-human, the heart of the 
 king-sage was inclined (pass, part.) toward her. 8. Thereupon, 
 having learned that she (ace.) was the daughter-of-an-Apsaras (ace), 
 he married her by the gandharva-ceremony (f^^T?) suifable-for- 
 Ksatriyas. 9. Dussanta, after dwelling very many days-and-nights 
 in the hermitage, abandoned Qakuntala and returned to his-own- 
 city. 10. Afterwards, when Kanva had finished his pilgrimage, 
 and returned to the hermitage, learning (f^^) the new8*-of-his'- 
 daughter's^-marriage', he sent her into-the-presence-of-Dussanta. 
 11. The royal-sage at first disowned (Htfll-'^L </«''•) 9^kantala when 
 she was come^-to-the-city* ; but at last he put('f^-'g^ , part.in'^tin) 
 her in-the-place'-of-the-first*-queen^. 12. In the course of time 
 
 * "To engage in the sport of hunting"; cf. below, § 375, 3. 
 
Lesson XXXIII. XXXIY. 141 
 
 (^'M<I l^flT) a beautiful-prince, named Bharata, was born to 
 her (foe). 
 
 Lesson XXXIV. 
 
 366. III. Secondary AdjectiYe Compounds. A compound with 
 a noun as final member very often wins secondarily tbe value of 
 an adjective, being inflected in the three genders to agree with the 
 noun which it qualifies , and used in all the constructions of an 
 adjective. The two divisions of this class have been given above 
 (§ 349). 
 
 367. Certain changes are sometimes necessary in the stem of 
 the final member to make possible the inflection in diiTerent genders. 
 Masc. and neut. stems in ^, and fem. in '^, generally interchange ; 
 thus, from H + ^^ comes the compound ^^4^ 'with excellent 
 hands ', nom. sing. B^^l^, "^TT, "^T^ ; so also (from f^ + fsjgr) 
 t^rfslS^, »ST' °S15 and (from ^+ TS^n.) ^tfi^t^, 'm, "^W;. 
 The same holds good for masc, fem., and neut. stems in ^ and ^, 
 and stems in consonants. 
 
 368. But often a fem. in f^ is used by the side of a masc. and 
 neut. in ■^; thus, f^mjj 'two-leaved', f. flfqilff. 
 
 369. Very frequently the suffix ^ (attenuated into an element 
 of indefinite value) is added to a pure possessive compound , to 
 help the conversion of the compounded stem into an adjective; 
 especially to fem. stems in t; and ^, and to stems in ^; and in 
 general, where the final of the stem is less usual or manageable 
 in adjective inflection. Thus, ^^«|<fl^ 'rich in rivers'; ^ff^^^f-, 
 'whose husband is dead', i. e. 'widow'; *l^l<4Ul^ (nom. masc. 
 
 and fem. •^TRC) *"" TfT^^ir^- 
 
 370. Sometimes the possessive-making suffix ^[!^ is added to 
 secondary adjective compounds, without effect upon the meaning; 
 thus, a| ^*4 »<lf^« i, (= "IT^ 'having an ass's voice.' 
 
142 Lesson XXXIV. 
 
 371. A. Possessive compounds. The possessives are determin- 
 ative compounds to which are given both an adjective inflection 
 (as just shown) , and also an adjective meaning of a kind best 
 defined by adding 'having' to the meaning of the determinative. 
 Thus, the dependent ^'q^^tj n., 'beauty of a god', becomes the 
 possessive y'^'^tf, '■^J, m. f. n., 'having the beauty of a god'; 
 the descriptive '^^^^ m., 'long arm', becomes the possessive 
 ^'t^^T^ m. f. n , 'having long arms'.* 
 
 372. Dependent compounds are, by comparison, not often thus 
 turned into possessives. But possessively used descriptives are 
 extremely frequent and various; and some kinds of combination 
 which are rare in proper descriptives are very common as pos- 
 sessives. 
 
 373. An adjective as prior member takes the masculine stem- 
 form, even though referring to a feminine noun in the final member; 
 thus, ^M«4^l4 (from an^) 'possessing a beautiful wife'. 
 
 374. As prior members are found: 
 
 1. Adjectives proper; thus, ^ti|4^M ' of other form'. — 2. Parti- 
 ciples; thus, ^TWTfnR 'whose mother is slain'. — 3. Numerals; 
 thus, ^TITf^ 'four-faced'; P^t^xIH 'three-eyed'. — 4. Nouns 
 with quasi- lid jectiv&l value; thus, f^ <<K<f ^ 'gold-handed'. Es- 
 pecially common is the use of a noun as prior member to qualify 
 the other appositionally, or by way of equivalence. These may 
 well be called appositional possessives. Thus, chti(ij«{|44«i^ 'having 
 "Krsna" as name'; 'W^'^lJ^'Er 'having men who are heroes'; 
 ^"n^"^^ 'using spies as eyes'; ^T^TT 'having thee as mes- 
 senger'. — 5. Adverbial elements (especially inseparable prefixes); 
 
 * This class of compounds is called by the natives bahuvrlMi 
 the name is an example of the class, meaning 'having much rice'. 
 — The possessive may generally, in accented texts, be distinguished 
 from the original determinative by a difference of accent. 
 
Lesson XXXIV. 143 
 
 thus, ^<|<d 'endless'; nm^f 'childless'; ?tH'^ 'with excellent 
 sons'; '^^rfiei 'ill -savored'. The associative prefix ^ (less often 
 ^I^) is treated like an adjective element ; thus, ^'<^q ' of like form ' ; 
 fX^fi or ^^TJ^ 'with a son', or 'having one's son along with one'; 
 tllicn^tl C^ + ■^•I=K5r n.) 'favorable'. — 6. Ordinary verbal pre- 
 fixes; thus, IT^^^ 'of wide fame'; ^'^ 'limbless'; f^^M 
 'powerless'; ^'J'^ 'with uplifted face'- — 7. Ordinary adverbs; 
 thus, '?[ff^'fT 'with mind directed hither'. 
 
 375. Certain words, very frequent in the compounds mentioned 
 at § 374, 4, have in part won a peculiar application. 
 
 1. Thus with ^ifrf 'beginning' (or the derivatives ^|<jj or 
 ■^f^efi) are made compounds signifying the person or thing de- 
 signated along with others — such a person or thing et cetera. 
 Thus, ^yH T.'Si\4,*i'' ' ^^^ go^s having Indra as first ' , i.e. ' the 
 gods Indra, etc' Often the qualifying noun is omitted; thus, 
 '4|(^l|H|^f<| 'food, drink, etc' — 2. Words like Xt^ (^<|e(i) etc., 
 are used in the same way, to denote accompaniment; chiefly ad- 
 verbially. — 3. The noun ^T^ 'object', 'purpose', is used at the 
 end of a compound, oftenest as a nent. subst. (ace. or instr. or loc), 
 to signify 'for the sake of, and the like; thus, ^1Ti|*(t|v3 'for 
 Dam'ayanti's sake'; 3J«i||(!( 'for a bed'. (See below, §-379). — 
 4. ^•iT"^ (as neut. subst.) often means 'other' in possessives; thus, 
 %7[T « ri'^C °'j 'another region' (lit. 'that which has a difference of 
 region '). 
 
 376. In appositional possessives, the final member, if it de- 
 signate a part of the body, sometimes signifies the part to which 
 belongs what is designated by the prior member: that on or in 
 which it is. Thus JTftl'a^ 'with necklace on neck'. Such com- 
 pounds are commonest with words meaning hand ; thus, ^Rim[<!] 
 'with sword in hand'; ^TT^^^ 'with club in hand'. 
 
 377. The possessives are not always used with the simple 
 
144 Lesson XXXIV. 
 
 value of qualifying adjective. Often they have a pregnant sense, 
 and become the equivalents of dependent clauses; or the 'having' 
 implied in them becomes about equivalent to our 'having' as a 
 sign of past action. Thus, MIH^H*! 'possessing attained ado- 
 lescence', i. e. 'having reached adolescence'; ^Hrv^'MUilM' 
 •with unstudied books', i.e. 'one who has neglected study'; J| r( H lUI 
 'whose breath is gone', i. e. 'lifeless'; ^TRT^^W 'to whom death 
 is come near'. 
 
 378. B. Componnds with governed final member. 
 
 1. Participial compounds, exclusively Vedic. 
 
 2. Prepositional compounds. Thus may conveniently be called 
 those compounds in which the prior member is a particle with true 
 prepositional value, and the final member a noun governed by it 
 Thus, -^ifcKN 'lasting over night'; ^rfTTTT^ 'beyond measure', 
 'excessive'; '4(fi(cA(!r 'next the ear'. 
 
 379. Adjective componnds as nonns and adverbs. Compound 
 adjectives, like simple ones, are freely used substantively as ab- 
 stracts and collectives, especially in the neuter, and less often in 
 the feminine ; and they are also much used adverbially, particularly 
 in the ace. sing, neuter. 
 
 380. The substantively used possessive compounds having a 
 numeral as prior member, with some of the strictly adjective com- 
 pounds, are treated by the Hindus as a separate class, and called 
 dvigu*. Examples of such numeral abstracts and collectives are: 
 f^ej^f n., 'the three ages'; f^^tSTT n., 'space of three leagues '- 
 Feminines of like use occur in the later language ; thus f^^fft'St 
 (by the side of "oR n.,) 'the three worlds'. 
 
 381. Those adverbially used accusatives of secondary adjective 
 
 * The name is a sample of the class, and means 'of two cows' 
 (said to be used in the sense of 'worth two cows'). 
 
Lesson XXXIV. 
 
 145 
 
 compounds ■which have an indeclinable or particle as prior member 
 are considered by the Hindus a separate class of compounds , and 
 called avyayibhava*. 1. The prepositional compounds are especially 
 frequent in this use; thus, irfrl^MH^ 'at evening'; ^3T^7^ 'in 
 sight'; ^j'l^Ji; (sffT^^ ^) 'along the Ganges'; ^qJIfT^; 
 *on the G. '; MTd<4l4H, 'every year'. — 2. A large class of avyayl- 
 bhdvas is made up of words having a relative adverb, especially 
 Jf^, as prior member. Thus, ^I^^^p^, '^^T^lTm;, ^«i^*i, 
 *as one chooses'- And, -with other adverbs: ^T^^^^J^ 'as 
 long as one lives'; ^'^e|iT»Hl. 'whither one will'- 
 
 382. Occasionally quite anomalous compounds will be met 
 with. For such, cf. Whitney, § 1314. 
 
 Verbs: 
 f^ + f'TH determine, decide. 
 H -|- f^ in caus. (vidardyati) tear 
 
 open. 
 TO (patdyati) split open. 
 ^ + ^lf)f overpower. 
 
 Vocabulary XXXIV. 
 
 2^ (vardyate) choose, select. 
 
 i^^ + ^T {asidati) approach. 
 + WW[ in caus. (samdsaddyati) 
 meet with, encounter. 
 
 ^If (hdrsati; hfsyati) rejoice, be 
 delighted. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 
 ■ n., limb, member, body. 
 
 ■ ^|cM<; m., form, figure. 
 
 ^^ m., moon. 
 
 ^^ n., belly. 
 
 %a m., banner. 
 
 ^f«Cf-. peak; point, tip. 
 
 ^^37 f.. top-knot, scalp. 
 
 ^T?T n., knowledge; insight. 
 
 tfra n., palate. 
 
 riuyi f., thirst, desire. 
 
 "ZJIT f-, tooth. 
 
 ^flf f., brilliancy. 
 
 Tl^ m., mountain. 
 
 qf^id m., a tribe in India. 
 
 TT^XX. ""-J stroke, shot; wound. 
 
 VijlH m., breath, life (often pi.). 
 
 4i4sl'c|i n-» *iead. 
 
 * The word means 'conversion to an indeclinable '- 
 
 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 10 
 
146 
 
 Lesson XXXIV. 
 
 jfVT tn., fish. 
 
 '^'■^^^ n., chest, breast. 
 
 ^XTTf m-, boar- 
 
 %^^T f., pain. 
 
 ^T^ in-, tendon; bowstring. 
 
 Adj.: 
 
 ^<|^^, f. »^T) blameless, fault- 
 less. 
 
 ^J^cB^, f. »^, favorable; as 
 neut. suhst., favor. 
 
 ^nl'^, f. "^Ti inner; as neut. 
 subst, the interior, middle; 
 interval , diflference ; occasion, 
 
 juncture (§ 376, 4.) 
 TO skilled. 
 ^T^, f- o^, young. 
 
 Indecl. : 
 
 ^^ then, thereupon. 
 
 rf? {adv. ace.) therefore. 
 
 rlT^ so long; often merely = 
 
 done, dock. 
 ^^<^as long as, while; as soon 
 
 as. 
 ^ asseverative particle; gives to 
 
 the present the force of an 
 
 historical tense. 
 
 Exercise XXXIV. 
 
 '^jfcTWWrfiRfl^ ^^^ *t^t!l T^ II <»Q. II 
 Trf%«T: 1^1^^^ H«<5dl (pres. part.) l1^<Tftr*sl<l<*ITt TfT- 
 
 T^f : ?nn^f^: i ? i tt ?fT ^TnTT^^^iir « '^ ^m- 
 fcr: I 8 I %Trfti ^rtf w ^ttrrf^l^ ^r^^f^ft'n ^t^ m- 
 fA<r i « : jf^^ Twimfr WRT^TJTJn; i q i ^^i^ ^s(t^ ^vn^ 
 WTTfr Sft( ^TTtrfK^^T^ ^: I § I Tlrrfwnf T ^Rf^^W^ 
 ^■ra id<d"d: tif^:»;r?ra ^9i*ir'm: i ^ i ^^^iTTfjf^r^^ viw^ 
 ftT^fRIst ^nT^ I IK t ?ft: ^^^ ^ 'W^: I Q. I "%%fi^- 
 
 fn ^ TrnmTRT ^r^flr i <=» i d-riNdi^ *Hi*jmai v^wrfz^ 
 
 »T^fi|rI*IK«Vi: I <^^ I cHT^ ^^ ^T^ rlT^ ft^ >itg«^- 
 ft^^RiTTW^ "N^TnTT M8 I ^ ift ^: II IM II 
 
 16. Those-who-have-done-evil must do penance twelve-days, 
 
Lesson XXXIV. XXXV. 147 
 
 six-days, or three-days. 17. Pururavas, Indra's-friend, married the 
 moon-faced*, faultless-limbed* Apsaras Urva9i. 18. Bhrgnkaccha 
 is situated (^cl_) on the Narmada. 19. There stands the long- 
 armed, broad-chested king-of-the-Angas , sword-in-hand. 20. The 
 path-of-knowledge is better than the path-of-works. 21. In-the- 
 opinion-of-the-ancient-seers (cpd in loc. or instr.) one-whose-hus- 
 band-is-dead may choose a second at-pleasure. 22. Love is bodiless, 
 and 6ear«-a-fish-in-his-banner ; so say the poets. 23. The Brahman's- 
 daughter, Sita-by-name*, is lotus-eyed.* 24. The king, although 
 (■^rPl) many-wived, is childless. 25. The eloquent** pandit has 
 arrived with-his-scholars. 26. With-upturned-face (^•i|<sf) Cataka 
 prays for rain-water. 
 
 Lesson XXXV. 
 
 383. First Conjugation of Verbs. Present System.*** In this 
 conjugation the optative act., the 2nd sing. imv. act., and the 3rd 
 pi. mid., are formed otherwise than in the a-conjngation. 
 
 384. Strong forms. The forms in which the stem assumes its 
 strong form are these : the three persons sing, of the pres. and 
 impf. indie, act., all first persons of the imv., act. and mid., and 
 the 3rd sing. imv. act. All other forms of the present system 
 are weak. 
 
 385. Endings. For the middle endings ^T^, ^irr, and '4|<HIH 
 are substituted ^%, ^HT, and ^HTP^; and after reduplicated stems 
 (and a few others) ^rfTT, W^, and ^^^J^ are substituted for the 
 
 * Secondary adj. cpds., fem. in %• 
 
 ** Dep. cpd, "skilled in speech". 
 
 *** For a comprehensive view of the ways of forming the present- 
 stems of verbs following this general conjugation, see Introduction, 
 §78. 
 
 10'* 
 
148 
 
 Lesson XXXV. 
 
 active endings '^rfiil, W^, and '^fs^ (impf.). The 2nd sing. imv. 
 often takes the ending f^ or f%j. Otherwise the endings are the 
 same as in the a-conjugation. 
 
 386. Optatire mode-sign. The sign of the opt. act. is ^ yd, 
 with secondary endings; but ^3^ is the ending in the 3rd pi., and 
 ■^ is dropped before it; thus, "^T^. 
 
 387. Present participle middle. In the first conjagation this 
 participle is made with the suffix -^ll*! [^"Hir]) before which the 
 stem takes the same form as before the 3rd pi. pres. ind. The fem. 
 is always in ^. 
 
 388. Class IV. A: «M-class. The present-stem is made by adding 
 to the root the syllable •! nu ['nr mm], in strong forms ^ nd 
 [TJ^ wrf]. The ^ of the class-sign may be dropped before '^^ and 
 H^ of the 1st du. and 1st pi. endings, except when the root ends 
 in a consonant; and the ^ before a vowel-ending becomes ^ or 
 ■^^ , according as it is preceded by one or by two consonants. 
 
 -The ending f^ of the 2nd. sing. imv. is dropped if the root end 
 in a vowel. 
 
 389. I. Roots in vowels. ^ 'press'. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 1. «5ftfjr 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 _:i 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 ^Tl'^*! 
 
 ^i*<«. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^d''"^ 
 
 8v/n6mi 
 
 sunuvds 
 
 mnumds 
 
 sunve 
 
 sunuvdhe 
 
 sunumdke 
 
 2. ^■^T^ 
 
 ^V^^ 
 
 ^H'^ 
 
 ^tJ^ 
 
 f^T^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 sundsi 
 
 3. ^"nnf 
 
 sunuthds 
 
 sunuihd 
 
 sunuse 
 
 sunvdthe 
 
 sunudhve 
 
 *!d'«^ 
 
 ««4rnf 
 
 sun6ti 
 
 sunutds 
 
 sunvdnti 
 
 sunute 
 
 sunvdte 
 
 sunvdte 
 
 The forms ^^, ^^i(^, ^^f, ^'?lt. are alternative with 
 those given above for 1st da. and pi., and occur oftener. 
 
Lesson XXXV. 
 
 149 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 3. '^Tf^ ^^^Wm; ^fJ^I. ^g^rT ^«<1HI*1, ""^^ 
 
 The briefer forms ^g*^, ^fW, ^^'•^ff, ^^^f, are al- 
 lowed and more usual. 
 
 1- f^TTrf^ ^'RT^ 
 
 sundvdni sundvdva 
 
 sunu** sunutdm 
 suncJiw** sunutdm 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 sundvdma sundvdi 
 
 sunutd sunusvd 
 sunvdntu sunutdm 
 
 sundvdvahdi 
 
 sunvdthdm 
 
 sunvdtdm 
 
 Optative. 
 
 sunuydm mnuydva sunuydma sunviyd sunvtvdhi 
 
 Participle. 
 ^nT , f. ^tfY W^T^, f. »^ 
 
 390. II. Roots in consonants. ^TR 'acquire'. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1. ^^srmtt^T ^rra^^ ^rrajro: '^1% 'tth^ 
 3. ^TKtf^ -^iiydH. wg^f^ ^Tg^ ^rrg^T^ 
 
 sundvdmahdi 
 
 sunudhvdm 
 
 sunvdtdm 
 
 sunvimdhi 
 
 
 * The augment, without any exception in verbal conjugation, 
 
 is the accented element in the verbal form of which it makes a part. 
 
 ** The rare imv. in THfl, (cf- § '96) would be formed thus: 
 
150 
 
 Lesson XXX7. 
 
 Imperatire. 
 
 3. ^rratH ^rr^fTR ^rra^ ^rrsfmn ^rra^Trrw: "^rn^ 
 
 Participle. 
 
 The other forms of this tense follow the model of ^. 
 
 391. 1. The root "sa, 'hear', contracts to ij before the class- 
 sign, forming imjf)' frnd and "spu grnu as strong and weak stem; 
 2nd sing. imv. act. vnSi 2nd da. ind. act. tqtyem^ or J^UeJl^, etc. — 
 2. The root \st shortens its vowel in the present-system. 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 ^P^ (acnute) acquire, obtain. 
 
 + ^W^ obtain. 
 -4||i{^ (apndti , rarely apnute) ac- 
 quire, reach. 
 
 + '^W, IT, or ^H, reach. 
 f^ (cindti, dnute) gather. 
 
 + JT or ;BfH, gather. 
 
 + f^l^ or t^t'T^j decide, con- 
 clude. 
 ^^ + ^ (pracoddyati) urge on. 
 "S {dundti), intr., burn, feel pain 
 
 or distress; tr., pain or distress 
 
 (ace.') 
 
 Vocabulary XXXV. 
 
 V (dhundti, dhunute) shake, 
 
 I'W (vrndti, vrnute) cover,surround. 
 
 + '^ cover, etc.. 
 
 + ^qr open. 
 
 + f% explain, manifest. 
 
 + ^T^ shut. 
 ^[eB (fakndti) be able. 
 ^ (frndti, grnute) hear. 
 ■^ (strndti, stri^ute) scatter, strew. 
 
 + ^XJ scatter. 
 f^ (hindti) send. 
 \-\-T!(tE[\(j>ratyahdrati)\irmgha,c^. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ■^rrf TT m., food. 
 f^^^ m., day. 
 
 1[T:^ m., doorkeeper. 
 
 Trfjjjm. pi., n.pr., certain demons. 
 
 THTTW m., might, power. 
 
Lesson XXXV. 
 
 151 
 
 ^^[1f m., enjoyment. 
 
 ^T^ n., root. 
 
 ■^ m., taste, feeling. 
 
 ^HH^ m-, a Brahman in the 
 
 third period of his life. 
 f%1T m., Brahman. 
 '^^ m., sound J noise; word. 
 
 Adj.: 
 •r^, f. o'^Tj new. 
 
 tpgr, f. «^, iperitorious, holy, 
 auspicious. 
 
 oJTra sharing. 
 
 H^tfT» f- °^) entrancing, agree- 
 able. 
 
 X^^«a , f. ^<fV, tasteful. 
 
 ^■^■^J, f. »%, similar; worthy. 
 
 Exercise XXXV. 
 'ilNKU! g t^W. ^TPfi^WT^r^f^ II \0 II 
 
 f^ ni ^HH^: ^r^^rr^ ^ "^n^ifKw^^^fw^tvrmwK i ^ i 
 
 ^ftmTTf^T'n^TSTg ^T^ Trf?^ I ? 1 1 TPSl^ trfr^fHTTjfriT 
 
 f^rfr:^: im^fT 1 8 1 ^ff^T^'^T^Ri ^t^: ^^ v^f* i'^^t^- 
 '^'ssf I M I ij«ij|ch4f*i^ ^f^ar ^fTT. ^'1 ^•flTM^ ^ f^T^m- 
 ^^'^rarRTU^TT I § I ^i%g ftgn^tf^ ^n^^: 'bItt ^ cj'm; I ^ I 
 TTra^ U\Ti ^T'^'sr '^'^f^^^^ Ten^ fSrftfif'a'';'raTn- 
 
 ■ftr^jr: m«<<a|iM "ii^uTlfi, ii '\o n 
 
 11. Having entered the temple of the worshipful(»i*iq{jJ- 
 Visnu we heard the ear-entrancing (■^fd^l'Tl^O ^ong of-the-young- 
 women (use STT at end of cpd). 12. Listen to this word of a de- 
 voted (f%^, pass, part.) friend. 13. The greedy (^K[^, pass, part), 
 who are always gathering riches, never attain the enjoyment of 
 
 • Infin. of ^. 
 
 ** The instr. is sometimes used to express the medium, or space 
 or distance or road, traversed. 
 
152 Lesson XXXV. XXXVI. 
 
 them. 14. By tasteful, well-composed poems ye may attain glory 
 in the ten regions of the world (frfJH). 15. ^^I^untala, mayest thou 
 get (imv.) a husband worthy-of-thee. 16. My-too-brothers deter- 
 mined to travel to Benares. 17. May the king's-sword bring grief to 
 ("S, imv. or opt.) the hearts-of-the-wives-of-his-enemies. 18. Clouds 
 cover the sky. 19. Let the doorkeeper close the door. 
 
 Lesson XXXVI. 
 
 392. Verbs. Class IV. B. w-class. The few roots (only six) 
 of this sub-class end already in ij^ — except one, 'gj, of consid- 
 erable irregularity — and so add only ^ as class-sign. The in- 
 flection is quite that of the nw-class, the ^ being gunated in the 
 strong forms, and dropped (optionally, but in fact nearly always) 
 before ^ and J^ of 1st dual and plural. 
 
 393. Thus cist^, 'stretch', makes ffwftf'T, rl'Ttft, etc.; 1st 
 <3u. 71*^ (or 71^^), 1st pi, cl'Jra: (or fig^RC) ; mid. 71^, 71^, 
 cnJI%, etc. — all like a vowel-root of the wtt-class. 
 
 394. The root loR, 'make', makes the strong stem eB'JCl') weak 
 ^^; the class-sign B is always dropped before ^ and Jf^ in 1st 
 du. and 1st pi., and also before ^ of the opt. active. Thus : 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 1. ^iftm 
 
 ^^«. 
 
 ^^5^ 5"^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^'i 
 
 2. qiftft 
 
 ^^W 
 
 ^^ f^ 
 
 1^^ 
 
 w^ 
 
 3. ^iftRT 
 
 «Pin^ 
 
 ^4f^ ^<i^ 
 
 ^^Tt 
 
 1^^ 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 2. 'st'wOtk ^^nnn '^ra^ ^if^^mc ^^4miH: ^^5^^^ 
 
Lesson XXXVI. 153 
 
 Imperatire. 
 1- ^iT^Tf^ ^^TR ^^»T ^it% gnc^^ ?BT^Tirf 
 
 2. ^^ ^i^JTJ^; ^^ ^T^ ftT«rTJi: ^^^^ 
 
 3- ^g «j!MHi ^55 l^m»T: ^^TcrnR; ^ttr: 
 
 Optatire. 
 1- ^^»l ^^ ^^ ^Wf^ ^^fwff ^fJlff 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 395. This root sometimes assumes (or retains from a more 
 original condition) an initial ^ after the prefix ^m^*; thus, ^^- 
 
 396. The adverbial prefixes -411 f^y^ and ITT^TB^, 'forth to sight', 
 'in view'; fTPC;^ 'through', 'out of sight'; y^ 'in front, 
 forward'; and the purely adverbial '^^rn 'enough, sufficient', 
 are often used with gi, and with one or two other verbs, oftcnest 
 tJJ^ 'be' and 9f 'become'. 
 
 397. Any noun or adjective-stem is liable to be compounded 
 with verbal forms or derivatives of the roots '3R and M, in the 
 manner of a verbal prefix. If the final of the stem be an a-vowel 
 or an i- vowel, it is changed to f"; if an m- vowel, to ^. Conso- 
 nantal stems take the form which they have before consonant- 
 endings — of course with observance of the usual euphonic rules; 
 but stems in ^Ji^^ change those letters to 1^. Thus, ^H'^iOt^ ' ^^ 
 makes his own', 'appropriates'; ^^^Tl^hOfW (T^I'C) 'he changes 
 to ashes', i. e. 'burns': ^fJI^^T^lTT 'becomes a post' (^^); 
 'JJ^'l^fH 'becomes pure' (Tf^); 41l^chOrd 'makes holy'. 
 
 398. The suffixes tTT (f-) and ^^ (n.) are very extensively 
 used to form abstract nouns, denoting 'the quality of being so- 
 
 Also sometimes after Tjf^ and ^^, 
 
154 
 
 Lesson XXXVI. 
 
 aiid-so ' , from both adjectives and nouns. 
 ^f^^T^ H., 'the rank of a Ksatriya'. 
 
 Thus, '^rf^^nn f., 
 
 Verbs; 
 
 cR (karoti, Icurute) do, make. 
 + mm do evil to , harm (jjen., 
 
 loc, or ace). 
 + ^^n^ prepare, adorn. 
 + ^rrf^'EC^ (aviskardti) make 
 
 known, exhibit. 
 + ^TJ do good to, benefit ^en., 
 
 loc.). 
 + "HlT^ ^i'is ; blame, find fault 
 
 with (ace). 
 + ^T^ P^^ ^^ ^^^ head. 
 + Uf^T pay, recompense; punish 
 
 (ace. rei,gen., dat.orloc.pers.). 
 
 Vocabulary XXXVI. 
 
 + TTT^^ make known, or visi- 
 ble. 
 
 + ^Cl. (§ 3^^) prepare , adorn ; 
 consecrate. 
 
 ^«^^ (ksa'i}dti, Icsarpite) wound. 
 
 rjij^ (landti, tanute) stretch, ex- 
 tend (tr.) ; perform (a sacrifice). 
 + '^H' cause, bring about. 
 + H spread abroad (tr.), 
 
 •ffH (dusyati) be defiled. 
 
 ^^<i^^ (manute) think, consider. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ^t^ltf^t ™-» priest of a cer- 
 tain kind. 
 '^^^ m., progeny, descendant, 
 ^fijin^m., plan; view; opinion. 
 sgX^ n., breast. 
 ehf^'^ m., name of a tribe. 
 ofiTt'tl f-j charm, grace. 
 '^Ic^TTT ^-i astonishment. 
 ^TH^rt^ n., a certain sacrifice. 
 ^°t^<1^ m., name of a tribe. 
 tl!TWftWt f-. veil. 
 
 ^^(^ m., fault. ' 
 
 •f^ffl f., conduct of life; ethics; 
 
 politics. 
 *mgi m., king. 
 ?T^T«re n> kitchen. 
 ^^'\^ n., flesh. 
 <^c(U| n., salt. 
 <4|^<1 n., spice. 
 ^^fT^ m., trade, 
 i^lj^ m., doubt. 
 ^T? m., cook. 
 
Lesson XXXVI. 
 
 155 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^^, f. 0-^, blind, 
 -^c))^, f. o'^, necessary, 
 'W) f- "'^1 knowing. 
 "Jjar^ enjoying. 
 
 ^IR, f. o'^, dear. 
 ^^^, f- »Wi wrong, false. 
 ■»nT, f- "'^i good, proper. 
 ^^, f. 0^, ready. 
 
 Exercise XXXVI. 
 ^ ^'^^w '5^'n^ T^lfTr ¥T5g^:* ii ^<^ ii 
 
 ^^ fl^^lT^tfrr 5^ i^ T ^a^r^: II R^ II 
 
 ^%^i^t^fst ^ ^trt: ^^ T -^mw. II R? II 
 
 ^i^T^^ m ft % ^t»TP«rei frf TR f^ xi*(«c(i|<*(rd»?tfcl I R I 
 
 ift TT^^ ^Vfli^m^ 'Tf^wmf'TBT^ ^wr ^if^ ciT^V^^er I ^ I 
 
 t^*Rf^ 1 8 1 ^rra^^rqi^rTft injTi^i^: ^^ *<^h^ ^^^: i q i 
 ^gNMi'i'rij ^T^j ^-gi«j ^rwhj^r ^3U!Hin<<»j4^ i % i '^mxi^- 
 t^T^ffwr ^gf^rr^f^ if^-sjMi^ Twrgirnr^^ ii ^ ii 
 
 8. Every-year an Agnihotrin must perform the Caturmasya (^'Z.). 
 9. Mayest thoa, O Great- King, protect thy kingdom, benefitting 
 thy friends and harming thy enemies. 10. Brabmans find fault 
 •with the trade-in- salt. 11. What thou didst (mid.), that distresses 
 thy friends even now. 12. May I recompense him (dat.) who has 
 done me a service. 13. By the command of the great-king consecrate 
 the four princes according to the law (f^fVj instr."). 14. The 
 Caulukyas held sway (TJ^ ^i) in Anahilapataka 247 years. 
 15. By-the-charm-of-her-face the lotus-eyed eclipses (fr|<<0)) even 
 the moon. 16. If one consecrates a scholar, teaches him, makes 
 
 Poss. cpd, cf. § 374, 5. 
 
156 Lesson XXXVI. XXXVII. 
 
 him holy, then this one becomes his child (ITSTT)- 1'^- The king- 
 of-the-Kaliiigas wounded his enemy in the breast with an arrow. 
 
 Lesson XXXVII. 
 
 399. Verbs, na-class. The class-sign is in the strong forms 
 the syllable •fT w« [WT ?*^]j accented, which is added to the root; 
 in the weak forms it is <^ nl [TJ^ rjJ] ; but before an initial vowel 
 of an ending the fj i of •f^ ni [l^^ r}i\ disappears altogether. 
 
 400. Thus, sp^ 'buy': strong stem ^<jj|' hrirj.h, weak sni*!?! 
 hrira (before a vowel, ^^^ krin). 
 
 ludicatirei 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1- w^wrfJi ^Tii^^ ifH^^ ^ft% #H^t ^bWti 
 2. ■^TrrfH sfiW^rec wtifhT iftwR ^^wr^ ^bW^ 
 
 3. ■^iTJnfTr ^Wtrl^ ^^T!rf% ^Wl^ ?rW^ IR^T!!^ 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1. '^nffNiTu ^issHV^ whsft^T "ftij »TBHff "xg^irff 
 
 2. ^ sffluinn, ^s gl u H d i i '^isfluTId " uTImi^ "TirmTi: "isfh^ 
 
 3. ^shlujiti: ^shlunmi^ ^siHuin. "wtfT »WTrrm: "ism 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 1- ^Tsnnr wNi^ ^Ww #^ ^\WTWf #T!rm% 
 
 2- ^t'^tff sfiuTld Ti: i^c^ ^Wl^ ^tnnm»i: ss^xifh^ 
 
 3. ^^"ra wWrrm ^^sg Whiftfim W^rrm sfllSIdlH 
 
 Optative. 
 
 1- ^rh^^iti ^hvtr ^w^ttt sinurt*! wtwNtf ^<i n* <fi 
 
 etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 401. The ending of the 2nd sing. imv. act. is f^, never f%j; 
 and there are no examples of its omission. But roots of this class 
 
Lesson XXXVn. 157 
 
 ending in a consonant substitute for both class-sign and ending in 
 this person the peculiar ending TSn*! and; thus, '^vrfi '^ItTT, ^- 
 TR, ^ITW (see §§ 402, 403). 
 
 402. The roots ending in ^ shorten that vowel before the 
 class-sign; thus, T|, Tj^TfVl, ij^t^. The root ^^ is weakened to 
 5f ; thus, iJ^TfH- 
 
 403. A few roots which have a nasal in some forms outside 
 the present-system, lose it in the present; thus, fT^ or ajJSJ , 71- 
 ^(f; ^^, ^^dfH; ^*r. ""■ ^^^.,' ^^JTfcf- Similarly, -^ makes 
 WRTfri- 
 
 404. Root-class. In this class there is no class-sign ; the root 
 itself is also present-stem, and to it are added directly the per- 
 sonal-endings; in the opt. (and subj.: §60, end) of course combined 
 with the mode-sign. The root-vowel takes gw^a, if capable of 
 it, in the strong forms. 
 
 405. Boots ending in Towels. B.oots in ^T of this class are 
 inflected only in the active. In the 3rd pi. impf. act. they may 
 optionally take as ending ^^ instead of '^P[^, the '^T being lost 
 before it. 
 
 406. Thus, ^gr 'go': 
 
 1. ^t% 
 
 2. *jiRr 
 
 3. ^nfii 
 
 InflicatiTe. 
 
 
 Ml^R 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 ■4I«T4 ^^TK 
 
 «<l«l*i 
 
 
 ■41*1 Id+I^ ^?n?i 
 
 ^TTcT^ 
 
 or ^<Jtl^ 
 
 * The same ending is also allowed and met with in a few 
 roots ending in consonants; viz. lf%^ 'know', ^(\, t^^, ^1, 
 
 A ■• 
 
158 
 
 Lesson XXXVII. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 1. ^rrf% ^rr^ ^m "^n^nK 
 
 Part. ^TnT , f. ^TRft or ^(ft (260). 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Verbs: 
 
 2^1^ {agndti) eat. 
 
 ■^ (A;rma'ij, Jcrmite) buy. 
 
 ■^ftST (grathndti) string together; 
 
 compose. 
 ^I^ (jgrhndti, grJimte) take, seize. 
 
 + fif hold, restrain, check. 
 
 + irfTT take, receive. 
 ■^ (Janati, jamte) know. 
 
 + '^TT allow, permit. 
 2Tn' {p&ti) protect. 
 Vm (pumdti) make increase or 
 
 grow. 
 H (pundti, punite) clean. 
 J(\{priiidti,pnip,te), act., delight; 
 
 mid., rejoice. 
 
 Vocabulary XXXVII. 
 
 5r + ^n (apldvate) drench. 
 ^T«r (badhndtij badhmtd) bind; 
 
 catch; join; compose. 
 Vf\ (llidti) gleam, glance. 
 TTT (mdti) measure. 
 
 + t'f^ work, create, 
 ^r^ (musndti) steal, rob. 
 
 2^ (^T!^) + t'RC steal. 
 
 2'a (vrnite: also vardyati, -te) 
 
 (jhoose. 
 f^J^ + '^«[ remain over. 
 ■^ (strr/.dti, strnite; see also in 
 
 Vocab. XXXV) strew. 
 ^T (sndti) bathe. 
 ^'t. + Wl remove. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ^St^ m., a gesture of respect- 
 ful greeting.* 
 ^^fl f., wish. 
 ^iH m., rise. 
 
 efi^ f., crescent. 
 eRfTf f., work (literary). 
 iRt^ m., treasure; treasury. 
 ^1!!' m., n., moment; time. 
 ^T»!^ZB^ n., gold. 
 
 • The two hands hollowed and opened, and raised to the 
 forehead. 
 
Lesson XXXVII. 
 
 159 
 
 i^'HSf m., demon. 
 
 •TTT ni") snake. 
 
 ^^ n., leading-rope, cord. 
 
 T'^It. (§ 278) m., stirring-stick. 
 
 ^T'^'^ m., n. pr., a mountain. 
 
 '^^ m., sacrificial post. 
 
 «!tt!t|d n-) forehead. 
 
 l^X; (vara) m., suitor, bride- 
 groom. 
 
 2T^ (vara) m., choice, privilege, 
 favor. 
 
 ^jq m., n. pr., a snake-demon 
 who supports the earth. 
 
 ^(♦jflffr f., height, elevation ; high 
 position. 
 
 Adj.: 
 
 ■^"ilfll* of to-day. 
 \irrf^ right, just. 
 ireff (part of TT-^) kindly dis- 
 posed. 
 •f^T knowing, 
 f^^flgij^ shrewd. 
 
 AdT.: 
 ^^jT^}^ before, in the presence 
 of (w. gen.). 
 
 Exercise XXXVII. 
 
 fcRrf T^TRTfrT '^Hfi^Vf-f^tf^rtJi; II RM II 
 
 ^f^^srrgfJT^pq^OTR: tt^ ^^f^ ^rf^^ ^*!nd"w:i <i i 
 
 ^% M^^^^'jtda ^5 TWTH^yT'iT II R || %^7^ «jr>MlfM 
 
 ^rf?i t^wt THiT ^rrf^^i^R^whT II 8 II wt^ f^rwr f wp^- 
 w 5^ II M II ns^TiMWfi T^sTR ajM-ii'l ^ ^M fm %w^- 
 
 «RT ^^rin 'fltt^tVJW^ 11 $ II "Hm ^^ ^3^ JlTfTT «T^T 
 MIMMM^Fil TfT^Rrr^rfT ITT t^'TTf'iT l| ^ II ^aeiJl^''^ 'J^"*n- 
 
 'F^^T^ftl^<<^I II *= II 
 
 9. Allow me to go now. 10. Take these jewels which I have 
 
 * With the suffix cfsf (sometimes ^) are made adjectives from 
 adverbs, especially of time; thus, THW 'ancient', h I (t<0*T 'early', 
 ■g^sf ' of the morrow'- 
 
160 Lesson XXXVII. XXXVIII. 
 
 given you (pass, constr.). 11. Let the great poet weave (T[^, 
 'S(^) a verse-wreath of word-pearls (inatr.). 12. Every-day two 
 thieves robbed the king's treasury. 13. He who receives (part.) 
 gifts from every one is polluted (^■q ). 34. The Creator formed 
 the world by his will (^t^4|t) alone. 15. Betake thyself (Tft) for 
 salvation to the gods' protection. 16. Let kings restrain the wicked 
 by punishments. 17. We saw Rama's daughter coming out 
 (pres. part.) of the house. 18. Let the bridegroom grasp the maid- 
 en's hand before the fire. 19. An Aryan must not eat an- 
 other's leavings (^ff-f^Jtl , pass, part., neut. sing.). 20. One must 
 bathe daily in unconfined (part, from f'T-''^^) water. 21. May the 
 three-eyed god, the great-lord (^T^'^ whose-forehead-is-adorned- 
 with-the-crescent, protect you. 
 
 Lesson XXXVIII. 
 
 407, Verbs. Boot-classj cont'd.* Roots ending in an «-vowel 
 or an M-vowel (except i-'^ 'go') change these into '?[^ and '^el 
 before vowel-endings in weak forms, when not gunated. 
 
 408. Root ^ 'go' (act., but used in mid. with the prep. '^fV! 
 'go over for oneself, i. e. 'repeat, learn, read'; the ^ then be- 
 comes ^[^) as above). 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1- ttPt f;^ ^[^Rt: ^rv^ ^nfNf ^r^VTf 
 3. Trfw ?7ra: ^rf% "^x^ ^r^ft^^ ^rvhEi% 
 
 * A number of roots belonging to this class accent the root- 
 Syllable throughout, in weak as well as in strong forms — except 
 of course in the imperfect. 
 
Lesson XXXVIII. 161 
 
 Imperfect, 
 (for augment cf. § 179.) 
 
 1. •^rran; "^^ "^^ ^f^ ^^ '^»rff 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 1- ^rarf'T ^r^TR ^t^tt ^a^^ ^rw^^t ^ivrTT^l 
 
 2. ^ T(T?i. T^i ^vfNr ^j^^^tr: wh^ 
 
 Optative. 
 X^rm. etc., 3rd pi. ^^^ 'WNY'T etc. 
 
 Participle. 
 ^Pff , f. znfV WhiTT, f. "W 
 
 409. The root '5J^ (mid.), 'lie', has guna throughout; thus, '31%, 
 ^, ^) ^f etc. ; impf. "W^i^f^, ^^^?[^ etc. ; opt. TT^V^T etc., 
 part. ^'4J1«|. Other irregularities are the 3rd persons pL: indie. 
 
 410. The roots of this class ending in ^ have in their strong 
 forms the vrddhi instead of the giMna-strengthening before an ending 
 beginning with a consonant. 
 
 411. Thus, ^ 'praise': 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1. ^>f*T ^^ ^TfC ^ ^^'% ^Jfl 
 
 2. ^^ ^^ ^ ^ ^1% ^ 
 
 3. WtffT ^TRC ^^[f^ ^ ^^^ ^^^ 
 Imperfect. Act.: 1. ■^RR?^, 2. ^ra^, 3. ^RJ^, 3rd pi. 
 
 '^r^^n:- Mid.: 1. ^^T^, 3rd pi. ■^Tf^cf. 
 
 Imperative. Act. : ?j|«n'Pl. ^ff . ^«T, ^TR etc. , 3rd pi. 
 W^^- Mid.: ^, ^^, ^RrnfC, ^^T^t etc., 3rd pi. ^^fHI^- 
 
 Optative. ^^Tfl. etc. tdcHii etc. 
 
 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. jj 
 
162 Lesson XXXVIII. 
 
 Participle. Act.: W^^ , f- "^ffl"- Mid.: ^TTR- 
 
 412. The root sT, 'say', takes the union-vowel f^ after the root 
 when strengthened, before the initial consonant of an ending.* Thus: 
 
 Indicatire. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 2. ^ftftr f^ra: f5 ^ f ^^ ^ 
 
 3. srfrtcT wrra: f^ ,1^ f ^"^ f w% 
 
 Imperfect. Act.: ^T^^H, ^TW^^, ^TK^^; ^(^^ etc.; 3rd 
 pl. ^^(W^- Mid.: ^Wf^, ^f5TO: etc.; 3rd pi. ^(WW({- 
 
 Impcratiye. Ac(.: ^^iftsr, ^, ^^t^; sRT^ etc.; 3rd pl. 
 ^^ig. Mid. : ^% ^ etc. 
 
 Optative. Act. : $)^|4{_ etc. Mid. : W^^ etc. 
 
 Participle. Act. : W^nl . Mid. : sRl T- 
 
 413. Empliatic Pronoun. The uninflected pronominal word 
 ^«(fl, signifies 'self, 'own self. It is oftenest used as a nomin- 
 ative, along with words of all persons and numbers; but not 
 seldom it represents other cases also. 
 
 Verbs: 
 T (^«0 go- 
 
 + '^rf^ (adhite) repeat, read. 
 -H^JT^ (apaitt) go away, depart. 
 + ^rfH approach. 
 + ^l^slH. set (of heavenly bodies). 
 + '^^ rise (of heavenly bodies). 
 + ^fll approach. 
 W (braviti, brute) speak, say, state. 
 
 Vocabulary XXXVIII. 
 
 + TT explain, teach ; announce. 
 
 + f^ explain, etc. 
 ^ (rauti) cry, scream. 
 
 -I- f^ scream. 
 'jfY (fete) lie, sleep. 
 
 + ^f^J lie asleep on (ace), 
 ^^ (_sute) bring forth, bear. 
 
 + TT bring forth. 
 ■^ (stauti) praise. 
 
 Special irregularities in this verb are occasionally met with, 
 such as ^tir, sl'Clf?. Some of the verbs in ^ are allowed to be 
 inflected like 9, but forms so made are rare. 
 
Lesson XXXVIII. 
 
 163 
 
 ^rf^t m., witness. 
 ^|<4j m., crane. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ^^HT, f. o'^, ready. 
 ^"<nr'l»l, diligent, energetic. 
 eh4|,(ij, f. 0'^, lamentable. 
 "•lilR,^ making, doing. 
 
 AdT.: 
 '4|V{4^ below, down, on 
 ground. 
 
 Snbst.; 
 f%|»Iin., n.pr., a name of Buddba. 
 fgiST f., tongue. 
 ^^eBT^ m., n. pr. 
 ^m^ m., logic. 
 XfVCf n., flower. 
 JT^r m-) question. 
 4ll«1tl n., sense, understanding. 
 
 gV m., killing, murder. Ht^H below, down, on the 
 
 TT.'SP? m., n. pr. 
 ^^AX. ™' > companion ; o"!^ f., 
 wife. 
 
 Exercise XXXVIII. 
 ^\n'4idi*«inyMsi4t?i; II <i II ^p[»Tf*T^T^ t^r^rer ^-m^mIm »ft 
 
 (§ 264) ^rl II s^ II gnt^ irtWrfX!! '^Smi FR^^: I ? I HTRTflt^ 
 ^ ^if'nf^ ^•HHchiyMfeH^ ^ «I^f^ II 8 II -^IMlqlJII - 
 
 ciaifiH^nH^r'x^snr^'jtHwt ^ f^iffw n m u '^^tf^ 
 
 5^^rftff *ji<i*iMfd ^rwh ii $ ii ^ f^sr m f^w ^^tfw wfwrf 
 ^Roj*^ T^»^ II ^ II ^TT^: fa!«ii«^i| i?^% ii ^ ii frRTf^rr: 
 ^T^rr. ^r^w f^^^rf^ ii o. ii '^*\^ <N(*i<i^di: ^rfrs^rrr: 
 
 11. The three wives of Da^aratha bore four sons. 12. Bama 
 and Laksmana, foUowed-by-Sita, went {X) into the forest. 
 13. Women whose-husbands-are-dead must sleep six months on 
 the ground. 14. A witness stating anything othei-than-what-was- 
 seen-or-heard is to be punished (Jut. pass. part.). 15. All guilt 
 departs from one-who-has-done-penance. 16. One must not look 
 
 11* 
 
164 Lesson XXXVIII. XXXIX. 
 
 at (Tr-%^ ) the rising or the setting sun. 17. Why hast thou come 
 (^jflT-T) to-my-house with-wife and witb-children ? 18. "Praise 
 Varuna'': thus the gods addressed ^unah^epa who was bound to 
 the sacrificial post. 19. Always speak the truth. 20. In a kingless 
 land the rich do not sleep in peace (^nat). 
 
 Lesson XXXIX. 
 
 414. Terlbs. Boot-class, cont'd. Roots ending in consonants. 
 
 The endings of the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act. are generally dropped, 
 and the resulting root-final treated according to the usual rules for 
 finals.* Cf. §§ 239, 242. But a root ending in a dental mute some- 
 times drops this final mute instead of the added ^ in the second 
 person ; and, on the other hand, a root or stem ending in ^ some- 
 times drops this ;^ instead of the added (^ in the third person: 
 in either case establishing the ordinary relation of ^ and (^ in 
 the second and third persons. 
 
 415. Roots in ^ and ^ substitute oR for those letters before 
 c^, ^^ and ^ (which then becomes If^); and J[^ before ^. Thus, 
 ^^ 'speak': ^f%T, wf^, ^f^ (only these three forms used). 
 
 416. Root If^f^ 'know, (act. only): 
 IndicatlTe> Imperfect. 
 
 1- ^fli f%i[^ f^?ra: "^T^K '^rf^ ''it^ 
 
 2. tf^ f^^ f^ ■'^^ or ^^ 'Sf^THi: ^Ht^Tl 
 
 ImT.: %^Tf^, f%fir, ^^; ^^T^, f^rfTC, fWrlTJC; %^TH, 
 f^, f%^. — Opt.: f%3n»l, etc. 
 
 * In the inflection of roots with final consonant, of this class and 
 the reduplicating and nasal classes, euphonic rules find very fre- 
 quent application. The student is therefore advised at this point 
 to read carefully the chief rules of euphonic change in Whitney's 
 Grammar, §§ 139 — 232 (the two larger sizes of print). 
 
Lesson XXXIX. 165 
 
 417. This root also makes a perfect without reduplication (but 
 otherwise regular) which has always the value of a present. The 
 forms of the indie, are: 
 
 Sing. 1.^^, 2. ^, 3.^^; du. 1. ftf, 2. f%^^, 3. I^^WSii 
 pi. 1. f%?T, 2. t^, 3. f^^. The participle is 1^^, f. f^f ft 
 (cf. § 268). 
 
 418. The root '^^, 'eat' (act.), inserts ^SI before the endings 
 of the 2nd and 3rd sing, inipf. ; thus, ■^1^4^,, '^n^<^. 
 
 419. The root ^<^, 'kill' (act.), is treated somewhat as are 
 noun-stems in ^•^ in declension (§ 283). Thus : 
 
 IndicatiTe. Imperfect. 
 
 1- lf% f^^ f^^ '^f^ ^f^ "^V^ 
 
 3. ff% frra: wf^ ^f^ '^iffnn; ^-^ 
 
 Imv.: f^rrff, 3rff*, J^; f^-R, fTW;, frTm;; fJT^, f fl, 
 ^tfr. — Opt.: f«irm etc. — Part.: ^pn, f. ^^. 
 
 420. Roots in 'J^, l[ , ^ , substitute efi before ^ (which then 
 becomes ■«[)> ^ before <^ and ^^ (which become "Z and ^), and 
 ^ before >i(^ (which becomes g). Thus, f^ 'hate' (act. and 
 mid.): 
 
 IndicatiTe Act. Imperfect Act. 
 
 2. "^f^ tl[TO: fli? ^'^^ ^^»l '^itl^ 
 
 Imv. Act.: ^trrfWj f^i^fS> 1[S; ^^TW etc. 
 
 421. 'q^ , 'see' (mid.): Pres. Ind.: ^, ^, ^; ^^f, 
 '^^1%, '^TT^; '^W- '^f. '^^^^ - '™P'*' "^^^^ ■^'^^\^, 
 
 Anomalous dissimilation. 
 
166 
 
 Lesson XXXIX. 
 
 422. 1. ^wj^, ' rule ' (mid.), inserts ^ before endings beginning 
 with ^ and >i(^; tlius, 2nd sing. tfiJTf. — 2. -sr^, ' wish ' (act.), is in 
 weak forms contracted to ^'t^; thus, 3rd. pi. ^IjfiiT. 
 
 423. WH , 'rub', 'clean' (act.), has vfddhi in the strong forms, 
 and optionally also in weak forms when the endings begin with a 
 vowel, In the treatment of the root-final this verb follows the 
 roots in 1^. Thus, ind. 3rd sing. M\{^, du. ^S^, pl- WHf^tl or 
 
 Terbs: 
 ^'l. ('??«) rule, own (w. gen.). 
 '^(^ (cd«fe)+'^T relate ; call, name. 
 
 + ^T explain, 
 f^fq (dvesti, dviste) hate. 
 
 + H hate extremely. 
 JT^I (mdrsti) rub, wipe. 
 
 + '^^ wipe away, off. 
 
 Vocabulary XXXIX. 
 
 + IT wipe off. 
 "^V + "^T? (aparddhndti) do 
 
 wrong. 
 'WJ^ {vdsti) wish. 
 \f^'Z(vetti ; veda) know, consider. 
 1*1.+ ^H smite. 
 
 + fil kill. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 ^^ m., lip. 
 
 ^^ m., decay, destruction. -^ 
 ^^ n., eye. 
 ^(T m., conqueror. 
 ^^IT f-) compassion, pity. 
 K^^ m., destruction. 
 vm m., n. pr., a name of piva. 
 TTc^m., sacred text; spell, charm. 
 ■^n^T m., watch (of the night). 
 ^nr n., conduct. 
 
 ^T^iT'T "•> grammar. 
 
 5lTiI m., n. pr., a Eishi. 
 
 ■JJ^T f-, hesitation. 
 
 TJq m., n. pr., a name of ^i^'a. 
 
 ^«^ n., learning. 
 
 ^Epir m., creation. 
 
 f^rfTf f., condition, existence. 
 
 Adj.: 
 
 ^T^, f. 0^, blameworthy, cul- 
 pable. 
 
Lesson XXXIX. 167 
 
 Exercise XXXIX. 
 
 if%fs ^TT^^-ra ^ ^Y^fw TTsraR II R^ II 
 
 ^tW^T^ ifiiT ^rf^ H'^^^* II ^l^ II 
 ^f fm^ ^^I^tWT^^I^ II q II ^^ Tf^ TTTW: ftr^RT- 
 
 '^^ ^^ ■<<*!<¥: II % II TTflt^' VTJrl f^ Tf l^^arawtftr- 
 
 f^ II ? II HTT^f f^«l»J«jiif%f7IH'!l*JI-«*ll*n ^T^% 18 1^ 
 f5"p|f¥ ^ 'q ^^ tl^^^fil^^tTm II Mil ^ sTW^it '^ftWr 
 
 ^r^Tsn^'grrft ^rarftf^ wifH H ^a^^^^ ^t«i^ f^i: ii § ii 
 ^•iM<N' ri«ftM5ji<jli!f ^ 'fr: q-nrrai^T^ m it% ii ^ ii ^pgf%- 
 
 f^FT'f ^ ITWgTrf^: Trfr^ffS II c II »T^ f^^ *t^ tl ^- 
 f^Rm II Q. II IT V^'tft" TIT# TT^^tf II <40 II ^WTfq ^wV^ 
 
 f^^ (§ 374, 6) ^r^^ ^Ri-iiy-i. II «»<» II 
 
 12. Hear the words of the learned man who explains (pres. 
 part.) the-science-of-grammar. 13. Know that Rama (ace.) is the 
 son, famous in the-three-worlds, of Da9aratha, and the conqueror 
 of Ravana, lord-of-Lanka. 14. Having sipped ('^T-^H) water 
 thrice, one wipes the lips twice; according to others, once.** 15. Two 
 warriors smote (^rf'f-'^'t.) 'with arrows the king-of-the-Angas, who 
 had murdered their companions. 16. Kill without -hesitation even 
 C^JIm) a teacher who approaches (past. pass, part.) in order to kill 
 you, 17. Why dost thou consider (f^^) me a ^udra, though know- 
 ing ('^ ger.) my leai-ning-and-conduct? 18. Do not hate the sons- 
 of-Pafldu. 19, The women loAose-sons-ioere-dead, having lamented 
 greatly, wiped the tears from their eyes. 20. Thou, O Lord, rulest 
 over bipeds and quadrupeds (ffen.). 
 
 * Refers to false witness before a court. An untruth where 
 small beasts (sheep, etc.) are concerned, involves the destruction 
 of five ancestors ; where cattle are concerned, of ten, etc. 
 
1G8 Lesson XL. 
 
 Lesson XL. 
 
 424. Verbs. Eoot-class, cont'd, -^tj^ 'sit' (mid.): Indie. 
 
 wm, ^nm, '^n^; ^^^etc; '^n^t, wi%*, '^rra%- impf* 
 
 •^rrf^, ^T^ra;, ■^nra etc. Imv. ^t, '^TR^, ^TWR; etc. Part. 
 '^T^l (unique). 
 
 425. Tlie root IfT^' 'command ' (act.), substitutes in the weak 
 forms with consonant- endings the weakened stem f^JW ; thus, 
 indie, sing, ^f^ etc.; du. fljig^ etc.; but 3rd pi. ^JT^fTT. 
 Impf.: ^^Sin^li;, '^m^, -^nXTft.**; '^rflr^ etc.; but 3rd pi. 
 ^rSTT'g^- IniT. 2nd sing. '5JTf^; 3rd pi. ^■RTH- 
 
 426. The extremely common root l^!!^, 'be' (act.), loses its 
 vowel in weak forms, except when protected by the augment. The 
 2nd sing. imv. is 'QfV; in the 2nd sing, indie, one ^ is omitted; 
 in the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. ^ is inserted before the ending. 
 Thus: 
 
 Indicative. Imperfect. 
 
 1- ^(fw ^^. w^, "wwji ^n^ ^n^ 
 
 2. "^rf^ ^^ ^ ^i«l*i ^T^m ^"rei 
 
 3. ^rf% ^n^. ^rfsfi Hinflc^ ^rrerrfc wt^ 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 1. ^^f% ^«7W '^raW Opt.: ^TRetc; 3rdpl. ^;5^. 
 
 2. TTfV ^H 'SJ Part.: ^1B , f. ^tft. 
 8. ^Sm Wm, iT'B 
 
 427. Roots in ^ (except f^^ and "^f) combine ^ with c|^, 
 ^ and >I into ^, and .then lengthen preceding '^, ^, ■g; before 
 ^, ^ becomes "SR; in 2nd and 3rd sing. impf. act. (where the 
 endings are dropped) the ^ becomes '^. Thus, fg^ 'lick' (act. 
 and mid.): Impf. act.: ^|%^, ^J%^, ^|%Z; ^f^, W>SH, 
 
 * Or ■^■Q[. So ^^H or ^TH^ (imv., impf.). 
 
 ** See § 414. ^lITct; is said to be used in 2nd pers. also. 
 
Lesson XL. 
 
 169 
 
 428. In the two roots T^, 'milk' (act. and mid.), and f^f, 
 'smear' (act.), the final ^ represents an earlier guttural which 
 reappears in the inflection. Thus, from 'S^: 
 
 ludicatire. Imperfect. 
 
 3. ^tf«I** fi^^ Ift^ ^nlt^ ^V^TK ^X^^ 
 
 Ind. mid : ^f , \il%, ^J^; ^gf etc. Impf. mid.: ^^f, 
 ^irerra:, '^TfTCT; '^TfSt? etc.; ^^uTi, '^T^^^, ^^ffl. 
 ImT. mid.: ^f, ^^, ^I^»i;; «{t^T«<% etc.; ^flJT|, ^T^^, 
 
 429. The roots ^, 'weep', ^H, 'sleep', ^T^, 'breathe', 
 ^Tf(^, 'breathe' (all act), insert \ before all endings beginning 
 with a consonant, ^except ^ and ^^^ of 2nd and 3rd sing, impf., 
 where they insert either ^ or %. Thus, y^: Pres. indie: ■^- 
 f^fir, Ttf^ etc., 3rd pi. ^i^t^. Impf.: ^fT^J^, ^ft^ or 
 »^hC. "^ or o^^; ^^f^c( etc.; 3rd pi. ^^^. Imv.: ^t- 
 ^f^) ^Cf^f?, Ttt^ etc. Opt.: 1^1?^. etc. (^ being mode-sign). 
 
 Terbs: 
 ^P[^ (dniti) breathe. 
 + U {prd,i}iti) live. 
 ^^ {dsti) be. 
 
 Vocabulary XL 
 
 ■^(T^ {dste) sit. 
 + ^TJ sit by ; wait upon ; at- 
 tend; reverence. 
 
 • cf. §§ 244, 249. 
 
 ** When the final sonant aspirate of a root is followed by <^ 
 or W of an ending, the whole group is made sonant, and the aspir- 
 ation of the root-final is not lost, but is transferred to the initial 
 of the ending. 
 
170 
 
 Lesson XU. 
 
 ^^ + If-t^ (pravicdlati) move, 
 
 stir (tr.). 
 fS'^ (degdhi) smear, 
 ■ff^ (ddgdhi, dugdhe) milk. 
 IR^ + f^l (nirrnlati) shut (the 
 
 eyes). 
 ■^ff (rdditi) weep. 
 f^'^ (ledhi, li4he) lick. 
 
 + ^^ lick. 
 
 Subst.: 
 ■gxurt^I m., enjoyment. 
 ^■JJ m., hair. 
 •^JTf n., gift, generosity. 
 ■^T^IT f'j girl) maiden. 
 3T9^ m., n., club, pestle. 
 ■^fvi^ n., blood. 
 ^^ n., sacrifice. 
 ^t%{f m. , n. pr., the sun -god 
 Savitar; the sun. 
 
 f%T[t^ + ^W( approach. 
 ^j-p^ (fdste) command, govern. 
 (fvdsiti) breathe. 
 + '^rr or ^1T breathe gently, 
 
 revive. 
 + f^ be confident, trust (to. gen, 
 
 or loc. of pers.) 
 Iff + ^i?* (uttisthati) arise. 
 
 "^^S^ m., shoulder. 
 
 Adj.: 
 ■^J^Tj f- °^' &rm, resolute. 
 fifqTir, f. "^(l, shrevyd, skilled. 
 HTTSr, f- "»'^, right, proper, 
 Dfj-rl, f. »'^T) careless. 
 
 Indecl.: 
 JITci"^ early, in the morning. 
 )np^ greatly, much. 
 
 Exercise XL. 
 
 %^ ^gf^ ^% f ^T Wfh^sfr TIWR^^W ^nfV ^TfJT- 
 Pd^'MI d, II «1 II t'T-^'g^ ^ifqg 1 t^^ftrffT ff^»n^ II ^ II Tft- 
 
 * After ^g[, the initial ^ of ^7 and ^PJI^ is dropped; thus, 
 ^i^TH?^ for ^3r^T^- 
 
Lesson XL. XLL 171 
 
 f^tr^T^jft f^mf% f^'t^ ^iiMN«lN"l(i i H II 8 II f <a»rRrt 
 a^^Tf^ 'ng'T^^ifr CT^n^^rr ^wnt ^;^ ii m ii ^'^ 
 
 ^ II ^ II -ji^stTlvinfttn: fwr xjR "^^r^^^m ii ^ ii ^i^ 
 ^nr: ^fi^ ^t f%ra: ^'a t g v^ f^'n ^ m^mv. ii = ii 
 ^T^>T»frift^: 3«i»^tijjfij ^ ict^ftf II a II <0^^-pi^m^ ' ^ ^ 
 ww^ ^Tf^ II <io It 
 
 11. Long may the great-king govern the earth according to 
 law. 12. There was a mighty king, Nala by name (•Ttf), son of 
 Virasena. 13. The lion, satiated-with-the-blood-of-the-slain-gazelle, 
 licked his mouth with his tongue. 14. Let the householder say to 
 the guest: "where didst thou sleep during the night"? 15. The 
 cowherd milked the cows twice daily. 16. The boy, beaten by 
 his father, wept bitterly (^THl). 17. Whose daughter art thou, 
 girl? 18. Know that that by which thou livest, and the whole 
 world lives, is the world-spirit. 19. Having arisen in the morning, 
 reverence the sun (^(c|d)- 20. If you do not praise Rama , there 
 ■will be no salvation for yon (use '^I^, in pres. opt.). 
 
 Lesson XLL 
 
 430. Terbs. Bednplicating Class. This class forms the present- 
 stem by prefixing a reduplication to the root.* 
 
 431. The rules governing the reduplication are as follows: 
 
 1. The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is in general 
 the first consonant of the root; thus, 3T, ^« |. But, (a) a non-as- 
 pirate is substituted for an aspirate; and (b) a palatal for a guttural 
 
 * Only a small proportion of the roots of this class retain the 
 accent on the root-syllable in the strong forms. In the great ma- 
 jority, the accent is on the reduplication, both in the strong forms 
 and in those weak forms whose endings begin with vowels. 
 
172 Lesson XLI. 
 
 or ^; thus, VT, ^^yn; f^f , t^f%|[; ft, fmft; (c)if the root 
 begin with a sibilant followed by a non-nasal luute, the latter is 
 repeated (with observance of a), not the sibilant; thus, '^Tj tl^T- 
 2. A long vowel is shortened in the reduplicating syllable; 
 and ^ is replaced by X; thus, ^^ and ^yn above; ?ft, f^jft; 
 
 432. The present-stem gunates the root-vowel in the strong 
 forms; thus, f^^ft, strong f^^; f^, strong f^H^. 
 
 433. The verbs of this class lose the "^^ from the endings of 
 the 3rd pi. in the active as well as in the middle; and in the 3d pi. 
 impf. act. always take g^, before which a final radical vowel has 
 gur^a; thus, ^f^*l^- 
 
 434. Root Vt, ' bear, carry '. For 2nd and 8rd sing. impf. act., 
 cf. §§ 122, 414. 
 
 ludicative. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 i.f^jim t%^^^ t^^Tw; r^^ f^^cff fsr^Jit 
 2.f%iTf^ tW^pw; f^ipf f^^ f^T^ f^^ 
 
 3.f%Hf^ f^iTrl^ t%»ff71 t^"^ f^«fT% f%«r% 
 
 Imperfect. 
 l-'^rf^HT^ ^t%^^ ^rf%^ ^W»f ^f^Jpff o^Trff 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 3.f^»T^ f^jpiTR: f^g f^ww: t^ifiTH: f^^^mi: 
 
 Opt. act.: t%^^I^ etc.; mid.; t^^^V^T etc. 
 
 Part, act.: f^c^. (§ 259), f. f^fft; mid.: f^TW- 
 
 435. Thfi roots 1^, 'give', and l\rT, 'put', lose their radi- 
 cal vowel in the weak forms, leaving the weak stems "ZjS and «re| . 
 
Lesson XLI. 173 
 
 In the 2nd sing. imv. act. they form ^f^ and ^t%. The inflection 
 of VT is as follows :* 
 
 IndicatiTe. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1- ^ynfii ^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^t^l ^^"^ 
 3. ^>irrfcr vthbc ^^'tri \ij% ^^ ^% 
 
 Imperfect. 
 1. ^^TT^ ^^^ '^J^TJT -^^fsi ^^ff ^^^Wrf? 
 
 3. '^r^TiiTci: '^rarrni. ^i^^ '^^irti ■^^vtcitr: "^j^ 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 1. ^c^nf^ ^^[m ^^TR ^ ^^^trI ^t^t^I 
 
 Opt. act.: ^Tzrn^ etc; mid.: syfj'q etc. 
 Fart, act.: ^>in^, f. ^Vcf^; mid.: ^^TH. 
 
 436. The root 1^ is inflected in precisely the same way, but 
 with change everywhere of \t to ?, except where TJ belongs to 
 the ending. 
 
 437. The root 1^, 'quit, abandon' (act.), drops the '^ in 
 weak forms where the ending begins with a vowel, and in the opt. ; 
 thus, indie. 3rd sing. «|fTtfT, pl. ^I^tll; impf. 3rd. sing. '^U^Tcj;, 
 pl- ^5!^^ ; opt. SrUTf^- The 2nd sing. imv. is Stfttf or ^ff ff . 
 In the other weak forms before consonant-endings the stem is either 
 gif*^ or gjff ; thus, gif^*<^ or grff^T^. 
 
 438. 1^, 'measure' (mid.), and 2^, 'move, go' (mid.), form 
 
 * In combination with {^ or ^ of an ending, the ^ of ^VJ 
 does not give ^, but follows the general rule of aspirate and of 
 surd and sonant combination; and the lost aspiration is thrown 
 back upon the initial of the root. 
 
174 
 
 Lesson XLI. 
 
 fJTjft and fSTfl' before consonant-endings, fjT'^ and f%^ before 
 vowel-endings; thus, 3rd persons indie. f^T'ft^, fWTT^, fJUT^- 
 
 439. ^ 'pour, sacrifice' (act. and mid.), makes the 2nd sing, 
 imv. ^^1^; 3rd persons impf. ^I^ft<!;. '?r^^dl»l> ^I^ff^- 
 
 440. 1. 1|^, 'fear' (act.), may shorten its vowel in weak forms; 
 
 thus, fM^ira; or firfwra:, fMVsrni: or f^firqifi:- — 2- ■f^, ' be 
 
 ashamed' (act.), changes its weak stem fy£\ to fSffglT before 
 vowel -endings; thus, indie. 3rd persons f^^f^f, l^^rl^, fsj- 
 
 Vocabulary XLI. 
 
 Verbs: 
 137 (ddddti, datte) give. 
 
 + IT entrust. 
 l^itT (dddhati, dhatte) put, place. 
 
 + '^rftr close, shut. 
 
 Snbst.: 
 "Wl^ n., safety; feeling of safety. 
 ^'^\ ^-i demon. 
 ^^f?I f', oblation, 
 Jlf^ m., n. pr. 
 JftI m., gazelle. 
 f^TT n., possessions, wealth. 
 ■JJ^ m., n., rest, remainder. 
 ^ttrm m., one who has per- 
 
 + '^put on ; (mid.) ta^e, receive. 
 
 + f% arrange, ordain. 
 
 + ^H_ unite, put together ; lay on, 
 l^(ydAaft) quit, abandon, neglect. 
 ■^ (jihrdti) be ashamed. 
 
 formed the ablution customary 
 at the end of religious pupilage. 
 Adj.! 
 
 tw, f- "% divine. 
 
 fWfi[S) f. '^> excellent, remark- 
 able. 
 
 Adv.: 
 ^|<ll{, at evening. 
 
 Exercise XLI. 
 
 ^«il% f^faia*ft ^Jwrerrf^ f^^ t^% i 
 
Lesson XLI. XLII. 175 
 
 ^^ f^lTt 5^<<HM^% 'n^T f^fcT II ^<1 II 
 ^ ^»^ T t^HflT II <1 II ^T^ infT^W^fl" P^f ^f»rcr*R"RT^- 
 
 ■erra: II ^ II % f ^T^ f%VTr% JTf<ft sglfTT^l ^ftf^ II 9 II 
 «fti ^^ '?rf%»i^# ftr^r^ v[^ mH\ ^mvi » m ii fn^i *r- 
 
 f?T (voc. sing, f.) ^ftf^ '^t^^ f^T^T ^Tf^Ttlll ^11 ^^511 WT^ 
 
 ^WT^ trf^t xj^ qr^Tft T ^nrTfi. II ^ II ^^ 5j5U!i4j7ri qnJiT 
 ftcn ^^g^jjjnwf^^ ^^fTT 55 1^ f^^Tf ^^ II « II TTf^r- 
 ^rmt (part., ace. pi.) ^fT '^f^^f%^ ^J^^: ^I'niiTiTJ^ II a ii 
 
 ■RT^rf^TfT^ Si:^W Vdl.si<f>«»T ^^fV II 10 || 
 
 11, Let the Adhvaryus pour the sacrificial offerings into the 
 fire. 12. The seers ordain forty sacraments in the law-books 
 (^fW)- 13. Da^aratha entrusted his sons to Vasistha as scholars. 
 14. Meeting a woman in the forest, one should say to her: "Sister, 
 be not afraid ". 15. Let a Snataka carry (wear) a garland, and an 
 umbrella-and-shoes. 16. One who takes (part.) roots-fruits-or-grain 
 from a strange-field, is to be punished. 17. Let the two doorkeepers 
 close the door. 18. Do not neglect the teacher's command. 19. The 
 royal-sage, who wore much jewelry, shone (f^-HT) ^'^^^ great- 
 brilliancy, like the sun. 20. The scholars who-have-not-learned- 
 fSeir-lessons are ashamed before their teacher (ace. or gen.). 
 
 Lesson XLII. 
 
 441. Yerbs. Nasal class. All roots of this class end in con- 
 sonants. As class-sign they insert a nasal before the final con- 
 
 * With the suffix 1^, f. »^, are formed adjectives signifying 
 ' made or composed or consisting of- — In the second line, ' bear 
 the name ' merely, i. e. are not in reality such. 
 
176 Lesson XLII. 
 
 sonant, unless one be there already (as in ?T^)> this nasal is 
 adapted to the consonant, except in the strong forms, where it ia 
 expanded to the syllable wf [TJf], which bears the accent. 
 
 442. The combination of the final radical consonants with 
 those of the personal endings is in accordance with the rules al- 
 ready given for the root and reduplicating classes. 
 
 443. Thus, ^^^ 'join'; strong stem ^"I^, weak ^^. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 _^. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 
 ^MfsJT 
 
 g»W^ 
 
 *i'^«. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 a^^t 
 
 g-iR 
 
 ■4Jv*4«m' 
 
 ' ^"f^^ 
 
 ^t 
 
 <j3fl«f 
 
 gfi^ 
 
 n-ir* 
 
 U*^ 
 
 g^sfirf 
 
 [mperfect. 
 
 ^331% 
 
 ^■^ 
 
 ^tj-t^+i 
 
 ^^»^ 
 
 ■'Weji^^ 
 
 ■•«^r^ 
 
 ^5^ff 
 
 ^^'^f^ 
 
 -jiij^m 
 
 'M*!!;*^ 
 
 ^m 
 
 ■■«*!■'*=^«^|^ 
 
 ^^5»l«H*t 
 
 ■^tl'tJMJi: 
 
 ^ii^'\ 
 
 -N^^IH 
 
 ^a^l 
 
 ^*iih 
 
 '^T^^TTTH; 
 
 Mig^rT 
 
 
 
 Imperatire. 
 
 
 
 g«l<JilR 
 
 gi^TR 
 
 ^TWTT 
 
 T^ 
 
 gT5IT^ 
 
 giI3JT»r| 
 
 -ij^^Pw 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 h, 
 
 ^¥ 
 
 ^T^TJi: 
 
 ^vd^Jl^ 
 
 5'rar 
 
 U^*^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 ^^i*< 
 
 ^r^m^r; 
 
 W^T^i: 
 
 Opt. act.: ^aqiJI^ etc.; mid.: ggfJTf etc. 
 
 Part, act.: ^^^3, f- g^tft; mid,: ^^5T. 
 
 444. Root ^J\i^^ 'obstruct'; strong stem ^Tjra, weak ^s^T. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 ^nrfuT ^^^ ^^irec ^ ^^f ^5*^ 
 ^iirft ^*^^ ^?f^ ^# ^5^T^ ^5J«f^ 
 
 • Instead of ^^^^R(., '*J-d;Ji|, and the like, it is allowed 
 (and more usual) to write ^^^^, g^ri^etc; also ^^!«r^, ^^etc, 
 instead of ''^^l'^ etc.; in each case omitting the consonant im- 
 mediately following the nasal. 
 
Lesson XLII. 
 
 177 
 
 Imperatire. 
 
 ^^ir^Tt^ ^TsrvT^ ^Tpn^ ^isr^ ■^»!niiT^% ^pnrmt 
 
 Imperf. act.: ^r^T!n>m) ^■^Wfl^i '^T^'Pt; '^^^ etc.; mid.: 
 ^I^fHl etc. — Opt. act.: ^^^T^l. elc. ; mid.j ^^^ etc. — Part, 
 act.: ^!trnT^, f- '^^Icft'; mid" %^T^- 
 
 445. Roots fqtr_, 'grind, crush' (act.); and t^^, 'injure, 
 destroy' (act.): 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ^ftpra ^<reTH '^rft^ ^rff«TO: or "^ wfwm; ^f|^ 
 
 Ind. 2nd persons: flwf^, fMBH,, fTO; — ffffW, tf^TO.. 
 f^. ImT» 2nd persons: fins^f^, f't^^., 'PTS; — tff^. ff^R^. 
 
 446. H^, 'crush' (act.), combines flTST^ with fTf and g into 
 Tl^tS and ^^• 
 
 Vocabulary XLII. 
 
 Verts: 
 ^[q (indcljie) kindle, light. 
 
 f^^ (chindtti, chinddhe) cut, cut 
 
 oir. 
 
 + '^ take away, remove. 
 
 + '^^ exterminate, 
 gtriT^ (cans, stem) awaken, 
 fcra (pindsti) grind, crush. 
 3^ (bhandkti) break, destroy. 
 fv\Z (jbhindtti, hUnddhe) split. 
 vm (bhmdkti, hhunkte) eat, enjoy. 
 
 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 
 
 ^gr (yundkti, yunkle) join ; yoke, 
 harness. 
 + 1^ appoint, establish. 
 
 ■^V (rundddhi, runddhe) obstruct, 
 check; besiege. 
 
 flra (pndsti) leave, leave re- 
 maining. 
 + f% set apart, distinguish. 
 
 ft, + ^r*^ unite. 
 
 f^^ Qiindsti) injure, destroy. 
 
 12 
 
178 
 
 Lesson XLII. 
 
 SnliBt.: 
 ■^^^T f., condition, state. 
 ^t|^ f., dawn; also personified, 
 
 Usas, the Dawn. 
 c)iU^'^ m., thorn; enemy. 
 IJTO m., bite, mouthful, 
 cn^^ m-, rice. 
 •qTrfqi n., crime. 
 i:^'^ m., grandson. 
 '^^ m., relative. 
 
 %^5T n., writing, copying. 
 f^^T^'iT «i-, the Himalaya Mts. 
 Adj.: 
 
 ^af^pr high. 
 
 '^T^ suitable for Ksatriyas. 
 '11^ domestic. 
 
 irffigi^, f. o^, unfavorable. 
 ■^*T, f. '^, splendid, beautiful, 
 excellent. 
 
 Exercise XLII. 
 
 TJ^t tl^n'R^T^f rlfqi^ ^»TTJT^ II ?^ II 
 fTRIJ^fSW ^ ^ t«T^ TT T TT II ?8 II 
 
 tff^ I1 1 1I ^^TrjfwHt ^if^ f^rans?^ TT^^ ^^^ ^"^^ 
 JTfTTi^w^^^ II R II ^rarr ^Twt ^^t ^'^p*r^^ ^ % f^ 
 vr^fj^ II ? II T% ^r^fii^Tinn^: ^25: ^Tf^f^f»iTf*R#qT 
 f^^fwrr^Tf^^B^TftRTt^i^ II 8 II TrrarfAa-ii^M^i ^^n 
 ^f wf«T wRTf^ t^^ x:^ i^ ^Tf T^ ^5^ II mi ^ 
 
 cT% ^gw: ^Tci; II § II ^ft Tif?i^ f^rf^jffftiTfs *i«riM 
 
 ^ II ^ II 'R ft^l<0'lt ^iWlf fTTTlf^ f^T^'rfr ^^' ^5*11 
 ^^niTf^ »T '^■R t^TIf ^^ f^^: II <10 II 
 
 II. After Jayasinha had long besieged Girinagara, he destroyed 
 
 * The antecedent of this relative is the subject of ^'eftHYfW- 
 ** Translate as though dative. 
 
Lesson XLIII. 179 
 
 (H^) it iit last. 12. An ascetic shall eat only 240 mouthfuls in a 
 month (loc). 13. "Kindle the fire; cat branches for firewood 
 (ttr*1*t«}*i;); milk the cows; grind grain": thus said one priest 
 to another early in the morning. 14. The teacher entrusted (f^-'g^I ) 
 the scholars with the copying of the books (cpd., dat.). 15. The 
 mountain -ran^e. Himavant checks the course of the clouds 
 with its exceedingly-high peaks. 16. The doers-of -right ("cfif^) 
 are happy in Heaven, enjoying the fruits-of-iAeir-works. 17. A 
 king who has conquered a foreign realm must not exterminate 
 the royal-family. 18. Aryans must kindle the domestic-fire at the 
 time-of-the-wedding. 19. Women pounded the rice with pestles. 
 
 Lesson XLIII. 
 
 447. Verbs. Perfect-System. In the later language the perfect- 
 system comprises only an indicative mode and a participle, each 
 both active and middle. Its formation is essentially alike in all 
 verbs; its characteristics are: 1. reduplication; 2. distinction of strong 
 and weak forms; 3. endings in some respects peculiar; 4. the fre- 
 quent use of the union-vowel i. 
 
 448. Reduplication. 1. Initial consonants are reduplicated ac- 
 cording to the rules given in Less. XLI for the reduplicated pre- 
 sent-stem. 
 
 2. Medial and final vowels, short and long, are represented by 
 the corresponding short vowel, diphthongs by their second element ; 
 but ■^ (or -^X) is represented always by ^, never by ^ as in the 
 reduplicated present-stem. Thus, im^, xjsjiH,; ^TT) fl^T; f^^, 
 ■ftrf^; %^, 1%^ ; 3IT, 5f»n; f, ^• 
 
 3. Initial '^sr, followed by a single consonant, becomes ^T 
 (through ^•■%); thus, '^^, ■^TT^. 
 
 4. Initial ^ and ^ follow the same analogy; but in the strong 
 
180 Lesson XLIII. 
 
 forms, where the root-vowel is gunated, the reduplicating vowel is 
 protected from combination by the insertion of ^ or ^^;^ thus, 
 ■^ , strong perfect-stem ^ijM (i-y-es) weak '|^ (i. e. i-is) ; >a-^, 
 strong ^3^=^ (u-v-oc), weak ^f^ (u-uc). 
 
 5. Roots beginning with vowels long by nature or position do 
 not in general make the ordinary perfeot-system, but use instead 
 a periphrastic formation (see below). But '^TFt, is an exception, 
 making the constant perfect-stem '^"n^, j and a few roots with initial 
 ^ or ■^ show the anomalous reduplication •411 «^ in the perfect.* 
 
 449. Strong and weak forms. In the three persons sing. act. 
 the root-syllable is accented, and exhibits usually a stronger form. 
 As regards the strengthening: 
 
 1. In roots with medial vowels long by nature or position, 
 and in those with initial ^, the difference of strong and weak forms 
 does not appear, except in accented texts. 
 
 2. Medial and initial vowels are gunated, if possible, in the 
 strong forms; thus, fir^, w. f^*rff, s. t^^J ^W, W. t:«(^, s. 
 ^^^j ^3^, w. 'af^, 8. ■^Wt'^: (§ 448, 4). 
 
 3. Medial ^ before a single final consonant is vriddhied in the 
 3rd pers., and optionally in the 1st; thus, from 'ira, in 1st sing, 
 either nq^ or tJUl^, in 2nd TJtl^, in 3rd XPH^. 
 
 4. A final vowel takes either guna or vrddhi in the Ist person, 
 guna in the 2nd, vrddhi in the 3rd; thus, from «f^, in 1st fsjM or 
 fH%, 2nd f^, 3rd f^l^. 
 
 450. The root K makes, irregularly, the perfect-stem '^TT, and 
 adds ^ before a vowel-ending. 
 
 451. Some- roots, instead of strengthening the vowel in the 
 
 * The grammarians prescribe (doubtless falsely) this redupli- 
 cation for all verbs beginning with ^ or ^ followed by more than 
 one consonant. 
 
Lesson XLIII. 181 
 
 strong forms, weaken it in the weak forms; some few even do 
 both. See below. 
 
 452. Personal Endings* The perfect-endings are these: 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1. a lid md e vdhe mdhe 
 
 2. tha dthus d se hike dhve 
 8. a dtus us e dte re 
 
 Bat roots ending in a take du in IstandSrd sing, act.; thus, 
 
 453. Union-Towel. The endings beginning with consonants 
 are in classical Sanskrit usually joined to the base by the union- 
 vowel ^. The most important rules for the use of ^ are as 
 follows : 
 
 1. The \ of 3rd pi. mid. always has ^ before it. 
 
 2. The other endings beginning with consonants, except 7f, 
 take it in nearly all verbs. But it is rejected throughout (except 
 from \) by eight verbs: viz. lefi 'make', lit 'bear', ?I 'go', 
 2'f 'choose', ^ 'run', ^ 'hear', ^ 'praise', ^ 'flow'. 
 
 3. For its use or omission in 2nd sing. act. the rules are too 
 complicated to be given here. 
 
 454. With the union-vowel ^ a final radical X or ■!■ is not 
 combined into ^, but becomes ^ or (if more than one consonant 
 precede) ^; thus, from ^, f^rfaR ni-ny-i-va. 
 
 Examples of inflection. A. Roots in final vowels. 
 
 455. I. Eoots in ^ or %. The TJ and ^ of gunated and vrid- 
 dhied vowels become ^H? and ^^ before the vowel beginning 
 an ending. See also § 454. 
 
 Thus, 1. ?ft: Act.: Sing. 1. fil^ra or f%^^, 2. f^P^^ or 
 fsi^^, 3. fJnrra; du. 1. fVrf^, 2. f^sq^B;, 3. f^^^; pi- 1. 
 firf^, 2.f5li?r,3.f^np[;. — Mid.: Sing, l.f^, 2.f5rf^, 3.f%^; 
 
182 Lesson XLIII. 
 
 du. 1. fiif«lt, 2. t^Pen^, 3. t^P^m; pi. 1. P\f^% 2. fnfiJT^, 
 3. fffjq^. 
 
 2. •#: Act.: Sing. 1. ^^WH or t^sfil^, 2. f^^if^^ or f^^^, 
 3. I^VH; du. 1. f^f^f^I^, 2. t^f?|i^^, 3. o^H^; pi. 1. f^. 
 f^ff%IJT, 2. t^flB^, 3. t^f^i^. 
 
 456. II. Boots in ^ or ^ follow the model of the last-mentioned. 
 Thus, ^: Act.: Sing. 1. •B^S:^ or g^T^, 2. gst^ (not ggf^^ — 
 see § 453, 2), 3. ^FT^; du. 1. g^, 2.^^^^, 3.^^^. - ^: 
 Act. : du. ^^f^^ etc. 
 
 457. Vf is irregular in the perfect. (Cf. § 450) : 
 
 OS 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 1. ^^ ^^^ ^^T ^^ ^f»jf%^ ^jjf^^rl 
 
 2. ^jjf^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^f^ ^f^ 
 ^•■^1^ ^'J?^ ^^^ ^'^^ ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 458. III. Roots in^. 1. l|i (see § 453, 2): 
 
 2. ^cfi^ ^^"o^ ^^ ^^ ''5r»irr% ^"^ 
 
 3. '^giTT ^^Rg^ ^^ ^^ ^^ '^f^ 
 
 So also Vt, ^, 2^ 'choose'- 2. The other roots in ^ make the 
 first persons thus: from V, ^^sTT or •^ySTX., ^ftfW, ^tllT; ^) 
 
 459. If the final '^ be preceded by more than one consonant, 
 the formation is as follows: ^, 1. ?RIT or ^^TTT, 2. ^^^, 
 3. ^RIK; <J"- ^r^fr^) ^^flT^lC etc. — the ^ being gunated. 
 
 460. IV. Boots in '^n (including those written by the natives 
 with TJ or ^or ^). These take '^ in Ist and 3rd sing, act.; and 
 the '^T is lost before vowel-endings and ■?[. 1. 1^(7: 
 
 2. ^\n^, ^fer^ ^>ii^ ^ tf^ ^^^ ^^ 
 3-^ ^VH^ ^^ ^ ^>Tt^ ^f%it 
 
 2' tZTT) ^> a.nd similar roots, make their weak forms from the 
 
Lesson XLIII. 183 
 
 simpler root-forms ift, ^ etc. ; and 57 makes its strong forms also 
 from ■^•, thus, ^f^ or «rfT^ etc. 
 
 B. Roots in final consonants. 
 
 461. I. With medial Towel capable of guna. 
 
 1. f»^: Act: Sing. I. t^, 2.t^iTf^;!f, 3. f^; du. f^f^- 
 f^ etc.; pi. t^rfirf^l etc. Mid.: f^t*[^ etc. 2. So from rT^: 
 HTft^ etc.; 3. from J^: 1. ^4, 2. ^^^ or ^13, 3. ^^; 
 da. 'ff^flj^ etc. 
 
 462. II. With initial vowel capable of guna. 
 
 1. X\- Sing. 1. ^^, 2. ^ftlj, 3. ^^; du. 1. ^fq^, 
 2- t^^. 3. t^^; pi. 1. ipm, 2. t^, 3. ^. 2. ^3:^;: 
 ^3^t^ etc. 3. The root ^, 'go', also follows this rule, forming 
 X^'^ etc., 3rd. pi. t;^^. 4. -^^ makes (see §448, 5) ^TR^, 
 ^Hf^Sf etc. 
 
 463. III. With initial ^. 
 
 ^T^, ^rre etc.; •^^j •?rR[ etc. Bat ■'3S(^ (originally -^PT) 
 makes ^"iij etc. (§ 448, 5). 
 
 464. IV. With medial ■^. 
 
 1. ^U^;: Act.: sing. 1. ^9^^ or ^^^TR, 2. ^^f^T^, 3. '^^TT; 
 du. ^i^f«|«r etc. Mid.: ^^^ etc. 
 
 Thus all such roots beginning with more than one consonant, 
 or with an aspirate, a guttural mute, or ^. 
 
 465. 2. Roots in general having medial '^ before a single 
 final consonant, and beginning also with a single consonant which 
 is repeated unchanged in the reduplication — i. e. not an aspirate, 
 a guttural, or '^ — contract with the reduplication into one syllable, 
 with TJ as its vowel, in the weak forms; and this is allowed also 
 in 2nd sing. act. when the union-vowel '^ is taken.* Thus, tj^, 
 S. TJTI^ and xnn^, w. '^: 
 
 * Several roots not having the form here defined are said to 
 undergo the same contraction, most of them optionally. 
 
184 Lesson XLIII. 
 
 X(t(W^, v(t^-^ "^^^ "^ "^f^ ^T% '^fr^ 
 
 466. 3. Certain roots beginning with "Sf va (also one with '^ ya) 
 and ending in one consonant, reduplicate with the syllable ^ (the 
 one root just mentioned, with X)i s-^d abbreviate the ^ (^f) of the 
 root to '^ {X) '^^ weak forms. They are treated like roots with 
 initial 'J (^: § 463) but retain the full root form in the strong 
 persons. These roots are g^, ef^, ^, ^s^, ^^ 'dwell', and 
 ^; also ^of. Thus, ■g^: Act. sing. 1. ^3^^ or ^^T^, 2. ^3^- 
 ^^ or ^^f%^, 3. ^TT^ ; dn- ^rf^W (u-uc-i-va) etc. Mid. Bf% etc. 
 - ■?j5r^: Act. sing. 1. X^ °^ <*<N, 2. jy(^ or f ^rfgj^, 3. X^J^; 
 du. i;;^f^ etc. Mid. ^^ etc. 
 
 467. 4. Several roots which have medial '^ between single 
 consonants, but cannot follow the rule of § 465, drop oat the ^ 
 from the weak forms. These roots are, in the classical language, 
 'sit.' fC' ^^' ^t,' *"*^ *'^** ^'t.' 'which might be expected to 
 follow § 465. They form the weak stems ^^, SJTfC., W^ , «(^; 
 and al^ . Thus, ^l^ or ^^TT etc., '^f^^ etc. ^i^ makes its 
 strong stem ^^(^ and ^m<t^. 
 
 468. 5. The roots ^'^, '^t^^, and one or two others, redupli- 
 cate from the semivowel, and contract ^ and '^ to ^ and ^ in 
 weak forms. Thus, strong ^I'E^ or ^bcim^, weak ^'qxt^. 
 
 469. 1. The root ^^, 'speak', is found only in this tense, 
 and only in the following forms: sing. 2. '^JTWj 3- Hl^i du. 2. '^T- 
 1^55., 3. '^Tfrj^i;; pl- 3. '^TTF'EC.- These forms have only the value 
 of the present.— 2. The root if^, 'know ', makes a perfect without 
 reduplication, but otherwise regular, which has only present-value ; 
 see § 417. 2f%^, 'find', forms the regular f^f%?. 
 
 470. The roots f^, f^, ^, and ff, form as perfect-stems 
 f%^, f^f^, tM^r, and f%f%r. 
 
Lesson XLIII. 185 
 
 471. Perfect participle. 1. Active. The ending of the pf. part, 
 active is '^^ (mid. ^r^, w. '^:\), which is added to the weak per- 
 fect-stem.* When this is monosyllabic the union-vowel ^ is inserted 
 (but not in the weakest cases, before ^OT). Thus, a. from ^ , 
 strong stem of part. tflRT^, mid. tftf^, w. t^; from XJ^, 
 
 "^Tf^, qf^^tt- '^^\; from ^^, ^f^^TB;. '3if^^<i;, ^^j 
 
 from Jl, ^^to;, ?[f^^, «[f^^. But, JFrora ^, f%ift^, fsT- 
 ^^, f^ig^; from ^, g^T^, g^^, ^■^; from ^, f^- 
 f*lli^' f%f»Tfft.i t%f*t^- — &• The root 3m; makes as its 
 strong stem of pf. part. grftJT^t^ or ^ni^T^, mid. grfTJT^ or 
 ^T5^, weakest only SJTgtf^. Similarly, from ^, Wf^TRC. or 
 W?n^i^, srfg^r^^ or 51^:^, ^f ^- — c. if^, ' know ', makes 
 tiftra: etc.; 2f^, 'find', f^f%l[TO: etc. 
 
 2. Middle. The pf. part, middle is made with the suffix '^TTj 
 which is added to the weak stem as this appears in the middle 
 voice; thus, ^ , ^=^1^; VT, ^^T; ^, "^Wmi ^> f^'lTR; 
 
 Periphrastic Perfect. 
 
 472. Most roots beginning with a vowel long by nature or po- 
 sition adopt a periphrastic formation in the perfect tense; the same 
 is also taken by the secondary conjugations, and optionally by a 
 few primary roots not falling in the above category. It is made 
 as follows: 
 
 473. To the accusative of a derivative noun-stem in '?rr, made 
 from the present-stem which is the general basis of each conjugation, 
 are added, for the active, the perfect active forms of ^ or ^l^ (or, 
 very rarely, of M); for the middle, only the perfect middle forms 
 
 * Mechanically, the weakest participle-stem is identical with 
 the 3rd pi. act. (of course, 11 instead of ^. 
 
186 Lesson XLIII. XLIV. 
 
 of oR. Thus, from ^tTT^rf?T, pf- ^TTITTH or '^T^H^T; 
 from f;^, ^^T^%- 
 
 474. Force of the Perfect. In classical Sanskrit the perfect 
 coincides in meaning with the imperfect, as a tense of narration, 
 but is less often met with. 
 
 Lesson XLIV. 
 
 475. Verbs. Future-System (and Conditional). The verb has 
 two futures: I. The simple, or s-future, which is by far the older, 
 and much more common, than the other; and II. the periphrastic 
 future. 
 
 476. I. Simple Future. This tense contains an indicative mode 
 and a participle, active and middle. It may be made from all 
 verbs. The tense-sign is the syllable '^, added to the root either 
 directly, or by the union-vowel ^ (in the latter case becoming ^[^). 
 The root has the ^M?8a-strengthening when possible; and some roots 
 with medial ^ gunate with "^ instead of '^"^. The inflection is 
 precisely like that of the present indicative of a verb of the 
 a-conjugation ; thus, from aj, l^f^^fTT, '>% 
 
 477. When ^ is not taken, final radical consonants suffer the 
 same changes before tg as before ;e^ in the inflection of the root- 
 class or reduplicating or nasal class. Thus, from ^^, Vt^fTT; 
 
 %^f7l; fli^, ^T^fTT; J\, ^'^fjf. The root ^ ' dwell ', makes 
 
 478. 1. Most roots ending in vowels reject ^; thus, 27, ?T- 
 ^rfJI; TT, TT^rfrl; f^, %^rf?f; ^, ^ftTSrRr- 2. But all roots in 
 ^ take ^; thus, ^, ^fx:^?!; ^, cTR^jfll; and also the roots ^ 
 (llf^raf?!) and aj^ (J^f^iEgffTl). 3. ^^ makes ^(Tft^rfTT. 
 
Lesson XLIV. 187 
 
 479. In general, the verbs which take ^ in the infinitive and 
 periphrastic future (see below), take it also in this tense. But the 
 accordance is far from complete; and these parts should be learned, 
 as a matter of usage, for any given verb. 
 
 480. Stems of causative inflection, and denominatives in '^^, 
 make their future-stems in -4|(i|U|; thus, ^^, ^^Rimfd- 
 
 481. Participle. The participles, act. and mid., are made from 
 the future-stem precisely as from the present-stem; thus, ^J, ^- 
 ^Pff (f. -Wt), ^T^m^; f. gift's, SBfr^ntTR- Cf. §§ 260, 
 262. 
 
 482. Conditional. A tense called the conditional (indie, only) 
 is made from the stem of the simple future precisely as the im- 
 perfect is made from the present-stem, and similarly inflected. 
 Thus, '^RJT^H;, ^<*r<«l*i; ^I^#, ^ratr^- it is of extremely 
 rare occurrence. 
 
 483. II. Periphrastic Fntnre. This tense, which is allowed to 
 be made from all verbs, contains a single indicative tense, active,' 
 It is formed by the nomm agentis in 3, having the value of a future 
 active participle, to the nom. sing, of which (cTT) are added, in the 
 1st and 2nd persons of all numbers, the corresponding inflected 
 forms of the pres. of l^J^ 'be'. In the 3rd persons the nomen 
 agentis is used alone, in the proper number, without the auxiliary. 
 
 484. The root has in most cases the same form before the 
 suffix rl which it takes before the gj^ of the infinitive. Thus, 
 
 t^; fir, %5; ^, ^tg; ij. Hf^?; f< ^; ^R'f^' ^i'rf'iH. 
 
 485. The inflection is then as follows: 
 
 * The Hindus also prescribe a middle formation ; it has, how- 
 ever, practically no existence. 
 
188 Lesson XLIV. 
 
 1. ^Tf^ ^T'^^ ^Tsra: 
 
 2. ^Ii#rf% ^^^ ^T^ 
 
 3. ^ ^R^rfr ^cIkh: 
 
 Aorist-System. 
 
 486. The aorist comprises three quite distinct formations, each 
 with certain sub-varieties; but all are bound together into one 
 complex system by certain correspondences of form and meaning. 
 In classical Sanskrit aorists are comparatively rare. Their value 
 is quite that of impf. or pf. as tenses of narration. But they are 
 used also (though not nearly so often as the prohibitive opt.) with 
 the particle Ifl, in prohibitions, the augment being then omitted; 
 thus, TTT «[T: 'do not give'; ?TT ^^! 'do not fear'. With this ex- 
 ception the aorist always has the augment in classical Sanskrit. 
 The tense comprises, in the later language, only an indicative mode.* 
 The main varieties of aorist are three: I. Simple Aorist; II. Redu- 
 plicated Aorist ; III. Sibilant Aorist. 
 
 487. I. Simple aorist. (1) Boot aorist. This aorist is precisely 
 like an imperfect of the root-class. It is limited to the active voice 
 of a few roots in Wl, and of ?J. E. g. 
 
 Like 1^: \n, '^raTct;; ^t, ^r^in:; ^. "Wdcf^; ^n 'go', ^- 
 
 488. (2) The a-aorist. This is like an imperfect of the a-class, 
 
 active and middle. Thus, from f^T^, 1st persons '^if^-cj^, ^rflf^T^, 
 
 ■^rftRTT; ^rftl%, ^rf^TRtf. ^rf^TTff- in general the root 
 
 The precatire is strictly a peculiar aor. optative; but it is so 
 rare that its formation need not be explained here. 
 
Lesson XLIV. 189 
 
 assumes a weak form ; but three or four roots in final Ig take gma. 
 Thus, ^^rTK> ^^; 11, ^RTft; >^"l., ^'^^ti;; ^^^, ^w^fi:; 
 ^5, ^^l^; IT^, ^rar^; ^1, ^^^t^;. — irregular: ^T, ^- 
 
 'Sffi:; ST. ^s^i; ^T, ^pgti;; irna:, ^ftr^; 2^^ 'throw', ^t- 
 
 ^ci; (anomalous). ^^ makes ^wt^cj., and XRi;, '^q^, which, 
 with one or two others, were doubtless originally reduplicated 
 aorists. 
 
 489. II. Reduplicated Aorfst (3), This aorist differs from all 
 others in that it has come to be attached nearly always to the deriv- 
 ative (caus., etc.) conjugation in ^'?J, as its aorist. The connection 
 is not formal, as the aorist is not made from the stem in ^^, but 
 from the root. Its characteristic is a reduplication, of quite pe- 
 culiar character. 
 
 490. The reduplicated aorist is very unusual in classical San- 
 skrit, and it will be sufficient for the present to give an example 
 or two of its formation. Thus, 515^^ makes -il'aTl'al'Ift, » W^, 'Wft|- 
 ■55111?^; ^T, WfMH'tRC.- The inflection is the usual one of imper- 
 fects of the a-conjugation. 
 
 491. III. Sibilant Aorist, of four varieties. (4) The s- aorist. 
 The tense-stem is made by adding ;^ to the augmented root, which 
 usually has its vowel strengthened. E. g. ^: Act.: sing. 1. ^%- 
 ^Ji;, 2. ^%^, 3. ^^; du. 1. ■^KEg, 2. ^^SH:, 3. '9SJ%Fm;; 
 pi. 1. ^%BJT, 2. '^jn^, 3. ^%^. Mid.: sing. 1. ^%fil, 2. '^I^TI, 
 3. '^%S; du. 1. ^wl^ff, 2. ^'%inm»l, 3. ^^cTm;; pi. 1- '^S^- 
 larff, 2. ■^IJ^;, 3. 41'^Mrt. — ^TH (mid.only): sing. 1. ■^'STfCET, 
 2. ^raan^. 3. ^5iair etc. 
 
 492. (5) The w-aorist. The tense-stem is made by adding ^ 
 by means of an inserted ^. The root is generally strengthened. 
 E. g. •o 'purify': Act.: sing. 1. ^Htf^tfi^, 2. ^nn^^, 3. ^PTT- 
 ^^; du. 1. ^HTf^, 2. -4(141 RgT^, 3. oigTJ^; pi. 1. »f^TST, 
 2. 'f^, 3. t^rg^. — Mid, sing. 1. '^RTf^t^, 2. ^Hlf^^-reC, 3. "^J- 
 
190 Lesson XLIV. XLV. 
 
 ttrf^; du. 1. of^^gff, 2. »fw^mn:, s. o^n^; pi- 1- "f^^ff, 
 
 2. "»f%OT, 3. »f%^. — This is the only aorist of which forms are 
 made in the secondary and denominative conjugations (but for 
 causatives and denominatives in t5RI, cf. § 489). 
 
 493. (6) The s«s-aorist is active only, the corresponding middle 
 being of the a-forra. An example will suffix hero. 7JJ: sing. 1. '^- 
 ^I'HjM'i^ etc., quite like the inflection of the ««-aorist. 
 
 494. (7) The sa-aorist. f^^^: Act. sing. 1. ^iH^i^lH.i 2. "^^, 
 
 3. "'^fc^^; and so on, like an impf. of the a-conjugation. But in the 
 mid. the grammarians prescribe the 1st. sing. wfTf^i ^nd 2nd and 
 3rd du. ^rf^^T^fl^ and 'cTTt- 
 
 495. Aorist Passive. Generally the middle forms of aorists 4, 
 5, or 7, are used also for the passive. Roots which do not ordin- 
 arily take aorists of these forms, may make them like 4 or 5 espe- 
 cially for the passive. 
 
 496. But a 3rd pers. sing., of peculiar formation, has become 
 a recognized part of the passive conjugation. It is formed by add- 
 ing ^ to the root, which takes also the augment, and is usually 
 strengthened, in some cases by guria, in others by vrddU. After 
 final -^ is added ^. Thus, ^, -ilMlRl; ^, ^^f^; ,f, ^^Tft; 
 
 ^'^, ^^Tf^; — but •^, ^r^; f^, ^ii^; ^T, '^Tf^. 
 Lesson XLV. 
 
 Derivative or Secondary Conjugations. 
 
 497. Secondary conjugations are those in which a whole 
 system of forms, more or less complete, is made from a derivative 
 conjugation-stem, this whole system being usually connected with 
 a certain definite modification of the original radical sense. These 
 conjugations are: I. Passive. II. Intensive. III. Desiderative. 
 IV. Causative. V. Denominative. 
 
Lesson XLV. 191 
 
 498. I. FassiTe. The present-system of the passive has been 
 described ; as also the pecaliar 3rd pers. sing, used as aor. pass., 
 the past pass, participle in ff or wT, and the fat. pass, participles 
 or gerundives. In all other parts of the verb middle forms are 
 used, if necessary, with passive meaning. 
 
 499. II. Intensive. The intensive conjugation signifies the 
 intensification or the repetition of the action expressed by the 
 primary conjugation of a root. Forms outside the present-system 
 are too rare to need notice here; indeed, even within that system 
 they are by no means common in the later language. Intensives 
 fall into two classes. 
 
 500. 1. The verbs of the first class (only act.) form their in- 
 tensive-stem by reduplication , and the reduplicating syllable is 
 strengthened, a. Radical '^ and '^ are reduplicated with '^j ^ 
 and t; with TJ, ^ and ^ with ^; thus, TR^, ^TV, %^, ^fPj^- 
 h. Sometimes the reduplicating syllable has a final consonant, taken 
 from the end of the root; thus, x|x|'^, TTT^- c. Sometimes the 
 reduplication is dissyllabic, an i-vowel being inserted after the 
 final consonant of the reduplicating syllable; thus, «jO^*t' — 
 The model of inflection is the present-system of the reduplicating- 
 class, but deviations are not rare; in particular, an 'l^is sometimes 
 inserted between stem and ending. 
 
 501. 2. From the intensive-stem as just described may be formed 
 another , formally identical with a passive-stem , by the suffix TI. 
 It takes middle inflection, but has no passive value, being used 
 precisely as is the intensive jast mentioned. Thus, ^gr , TTXjTlf^. 
 
 502. A few intensives , having lost their value as such, come 
 to be used as presents, and are treated by the native grammarians 
 as simple roots. Thus ^17^, really intensive of ^ 'wake', is 
 assigned to the root-class: pres. STITf^ etc., du. oimqti, etc.; 
 impf. 1. ^q<HK<i , 2. ■^rWHTj;, 3. -^I^lflj; dn, ^iwr^ etc. So 
 
192 Lesson XLV. 
 
 also ^ (Xs^T) intens. of s[T 'run', used as a present with the sense 
 'be poor'. f»fgf 'wash', and some others, use the intensive 
 present -system in the same way, and are assigned to the re- 
 duplicating class ; thus, 3rd sing. %%fw, 3rd pi. %f%llf!l. 
 Intensive forms outside the present-system are very rare. 
 
 503. III. DesideratiTe. By this conjugation is denoted a desire 
 for the action or condition denoted by the simple root; thus, 
 fq^rf'T 'I drink', desid. tWrerf'T 'I wish to drink'. 
 
 504. To form the desiderative-stem the root is reduplicated, 
 and adds ^, sometimes ^[^ . The consonant of the reduplication 
 is determined by the usual rules; the vowel of reduplication is ^ 
 if the root has an o-vowel, an i-vowel, or '^j and ''3 if the root 
 has an u-vowel. Thus, -^J, fT(^^^^■, ^, fsi^HfTT; V, ^^ftj 
 
 505. A number of roots form an abbreviated desiderative- 
 stem ; thus, '^S([^^, kj^f^i ^, tl[<^rtW- 
 
 506. The conjugatio.n in the present-systemi is like that of 
 other a-stems. Outside of that desiderative forms are quite in- 
 frequent. The perfect is the periphrastic. The aorist is of the 
 js-form; thus, 'It^, ntT^c[^; ''^rRTtflf^^. The futures are made 
 with the auxiliary vowel ^; thus, ^Tf^^'fiT, ^f^rfTf^- The 
 verbal nouns are made with ^ in all forms where that vowel is 
 ever taken. A passive may be made; thus^ f^'""'©^ 'it is desired 
 to be obtained'; part.frP^fT- 
 
 507. IV. Causative. 1. The present-system of the causative 
 has been treated of already. 2. The perfect is the periphrastic, 
 the derivative noun in '^ being formed from the causative-stem; 
 thus, vr<*(t ^«irR[- 3' The aorist is the reduplicated, made in 
 general directly from the root, and formally unconnected with the 
 causative-stem; thus, T3, ^(^t^C^H,, ^f^JJ^^t- In a few instances, 
 where the root has assumed a peculiar form before the causative- 
 sign, the reduplicated aoiist is made from this form, not from the 
 
Lesson LXV. 193 
 
 simple root; thus, ^T, ^TTJ^lrfTT) ^fllf^^tt.- 4. Both futures are 
 made from the causative-stem, the auxiliary ■?[ replacing the final 
 ^; thus, \irCf^^f^> ^sTT^f^nTTf^- 5. The verbal nouns and 
 adjectives are in part formed from the causative-stem in the same 
 manner as the futures, in part from the causatively strengthened 
 root-form; thus, pass. part. ^rTf%TT; fut. pass. part, (gerundive) 
 rl^fT^r, ^TTJr; inf. ^^t^IBTC; gerund «|(^(*|»c(T, ""mV^, »1- 
 WH (§ 310). 
 
 508. Cansative passive and desiderative. These may be made 
 from the causative-stem as follows. 1. The pasSive-stem is formed 
 by adding the usual passive sign ^ to the causatively strengthened 
 root, the syllables "^Tf being omitted ; thus, VT^J^. 2. The desider- 
 ative-stem is made by reduplication and addition of the syllables 
 ■^TJ, of which the ^ replaces the final '^ of the causative-stem; 
 thus, t^^TTTt^^rRTj f^Tr^f^nrfff- This is a rare formation. 
 
 509. v. Denominative. A denominative conjugation is one 
 that has as basis a noun-stem. In general, the base is made from 
 the noun-stem by means of the conjugation-sign 7S(, which has the 
 accent. Intermediate between the denominative and causative con- 
 jugations stands a class of verbs plainly denominative in origin but 
 having the causative accent. Thus, from JT»3, T('^(^'(l mantrdyate; 
 from eflfd, ^"^iffd klrtdyati. See § 76. 
 
 510. The denominative meaning is of the greatest variety; 
 e. g. 'be like', 'act as', 'regard or treat as', 'make into', 
 'desire, crave' — that which is signified by the noun-stem. 
 Examples: from W^ 'penance, asceticism', HM^Ih 'practise 
 ascetism'; from 'UT^, ^JT^rffl 'honor'; chUilN^ 'blacken'; 
 ^^^T^rfTT 'seek horses'; iftm^Td 'play the herdsman, protect'; 
 q^RTpT ' desire wealth ' ; fj^^fSirfrr ' play the physician, cure' ; m-^o(u- 
 JjrfTT 'desire a son', from the poss. cpd ir^e|niT 'desiring a son'- 
 
 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. j^g 
 
194 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 Glossary to the Exercises. 
 
 For the alphabetic order of Sanskrit words see p. xii. 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English. 
 
 Adjectives in -a form their feminine in -a, unless otherwise stated. 
 
 ahsa m., die, dice. 
 aksan (ate': 275) n., eye. 
 agnixn., fire; as n. pr., Agni, the 
 
 god of fire. 
 agnihotrin m., a kind of priest. 
 agra n., front; tip, end. 
 anga n., limb ;' body. 
 angiras (253) m., certain mythical 
 
 characters. 
 anjali m. , a gesture (Voc. 37). 
 anu a., small; as n., atom. 
 atas adv., hence. 
 ati adv., across, past; in cpds, 
 
 to excess. 
 atiihi m., guest. 
 atra adv., here, hither. 
 atJia adv., then ; thereupon. 
 atharvaveda m., the fourth Veda. 
 adas (asdu : 287) pron., that one ; 
 
 so-and-so. 
 adija adv., to-day. 
 adyatana adj., of to-day. 
 adroha m., faithfulness. 
 adharma m., injustice, wrong. 
 
 adhas adv., below, down. 
 adhastat adv., below; prep., w. 
 
 gen., underneath. 
 adhi adv., over, above, on. 
 adhika a., additional; superior. 
 adhlta part, of adhi-i. 
 adhuna adv., now. 
 adhvaryu m., priest who recites 
 
 the Yajnrveda. 
 ]/ an (dniti: 429) breathe; — + 
 
 pra breathe; live. 
 an, before cons, a, negative prefix. 
 anaiuh (278) ra., ox. 
 anaw<araOTadv.,after,iramediately 
 
 afterward ; as prep., w. abl., 
 
 right after. 
 anartha m., misfortune. 
 anavadya a., faultless. 
 anahilapataka n., n. pr., a city. 
 anu adv., after, along, toward. 
 anukula a., favorable ; as n., favor. 
 anvjnd f., permission. 
 anurupa a., suitable. 
 aneka a., several. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 195 
 
 avrta n., untruth. 
 
 anta m., end; in loc, at last. 
 
 antara a., inner ; as n., interior, 
 
 middle; interval, difference; oc- 
 casion, juncture. Cf. 376, 4. 
 
 andka a., blind. 
 
 andhra m., n. pr., a people. 
 
 anna n., food, fodder. 
 
 anya (231) pron. adj., other. 
 
 anyatra adv., elsewhere. 
 
 anvanc (272) a., following. 
 
 anvaya m., descendant, progeny. 
 
 ap (277) f. pi., water. 
 
 apara (233) proa, adj., hinder; 
 other. 
 
 api (190) adv., untoj further; as 
 conj., also, even. 
 
 apsaras f., heavenly nymph. 
 
 abhaya n., feeling of safety ; safe- 
 ty- 
 
 dbhi adv., to, unto. 
 
 ahhipraya m., plan, design ; view. 
 
 dbhyasa m., study, recitation. 
 
 amrta a., immortal ; as n., nectar. 
 
 ambd (273) f., mo Cher. 
 
 ay am same as idam. 
 
 ari m., enemy. 
 
 arlha m., purpose; meaning; 
 wealth. 
 
 y arthaya (den. : arthdyate) ask 
 for (w. two ace); +pra idem. 
 
 aryaman (284) m., n. pr. 
 
 ]/ arh (drhati) deserve; have a 
 right to; w. inf. (320), be able. 
 
 aZam adv., enough; very; w.instr., 
 enough of, away with ; w. dat., 
 suitable for. 
 
 ali m., bee. 
 
 ava adv., down, off. 
 
 avafya a., necessary. 
 
 avasthd f., condition, state. 
 
 avanc (272) a., downward. 
 
 ]/ lap (afnute) acquire, obtain; 
 
 1- sam-upa idem. 
 
 \' '2ag (a(ndti) eat; caus. {dedya- 
 
 ti) make eat, give to eat. 
 aftti (332) num., eighty, 
 agru n., tear. 
 afva m., horse. 
 afvin m. du., n. pr., the A^vins 
 
 (the Indian Aiog xoupoi). 
 asta (332) num., eight. 
 astadofa (332) num., eighteen. 
 astdvinfati (329,332) num.,twenty- 
 
 eight. 
 ylas (dsti: 426) be, exist. 
 y'2as {dsyati) throw, hurl; — 
 
 + abhi repeat, study, learn; — 
 
 + ni entrust; 1- pr>a throw 
 
 forward or into. 
 asi m., sword. 
 asura m., demon. 
 asdu same as adas. 
 asthan (astM: 275) n., bone. 
 asmad same as vayam; as stem 
 
 in cpds, cf. 352, 4. 
 ahan (ahar, ahas: 271) n., day. 
 aham (223) pron., I. 
 ahita a., disagreeable. 
 aho excl., oh I ah! 
 ahoratra n., a day and a night. 
 
 a (130) adv., hither, unto; as prep., 
 
 w. abl., hither from; until. 
 dkdra m., form, figure. 
 akdga m., air, sky. 
 dkrsta part, of d-krs. 
 akrdnta part, of d-kram. 
 13* 
 
196 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 dgamana n., arrival. 
 
 acaxa m., "walk and conversa- 
 tion"; conduct; observance. 
 
 acarya m., teacher. 
 
 ajna f., command. 
 
 atman m., soul, self; often simple 
 reflexive pronoun. 
 
 ddi m., beginning; in cpds, cf. 
 375, 1. 
 
 m,, sun. 
 
 adega m., command, prescription. 
 V' ap (apndti,apnute) acquire, reach; 
 
 h ava, pra, or anu-pra, idem ; 
 
 + sam idem ; finish. 
 apad f., calamity. 
 apta part, of ap, trustworthy; fit. 
 dyusmant (263) a., long-lived. 
 dvista, part, of vif + d, entered 
 
 (by), i. e. filled (with). 
 afd f., hope. 
 dfu a., swift. 
 dframa m., hermitage. 
 ]/ ds (aste: 424) sit; caus. (a- 
 
 sdyati) place; l-wpa sit by; 
 
 wait upon; reverence. 
 dsana n., seat, chair. 
 dharar}a n., bringing. 
 dhdra m., food. 
 dhuti f., oblation, offering. 
 
 \/i (eti {-iti: 408]) go: — -|- adlii 
 mid., go over, repeat, read; 
 caus. (adhydpdyati) teach; — 
 
 -I- anu follow ; 1- apa go away ; 
 
 — + abhi approach ; y astam 
 
 (lit'ly go home) set (of the sun, 
 etc J; h wd rise; + upa ap- 
 proach ; 1- pra go forth ; die. 
 
 icchd f., wish. 
 
 itara (231) pron. adj., other, 
 
 itas adv., hence. 
 
 iti adv., thus, so. 
 
 ittham adv., in this way, so. 
 
 idam (285-286) pron., this, this 
 
 here. 
 yidh, indh (inddhe: 444) kindle, 
 
 light. 
 indu m., moon. 
 
 indra m., n. pr., the god Indra. 
 indraprastha n., n. pr., Delhi. 
 indrdni f., n. pr., a goddess. 
 iyant (263) a., so great ; so much. 
 iyam fem. of idam. 
 iva adv., postpos., as; like. 
 y'h'« (icchdti: 109) wish, desire. 
 isu m., arrow. 
 iha adv., here, hither. 
 
 ]/ Iks (jk§ate) see, behold ; — (- upa 
 
 neglect; — +prati expect. 
 idrg, f. -i, a., such. 
 |/5p (iste: 422) rule, own (gen.). 
 Ifvaraxa., master; lord; rich man. 
 
 ucchrita part, of ud-gri, high. 
 ud adv., up, up forth or out. 
 udanc (272) a., northward. 
 udadhi m-., ocean. 
 udaya m., rise. 
 udara n., belly. 
 
 udyata part, of ud-yam, ready. 
 udydna n., garden. 
 udyoga m., diligence. 
 udyogin a., diligent, energetic. 
 upa adv., to, toward. 
 upanayana n., initiation. 
 upanisad f., certain Vedic work?. 
 upahhoga m., enjoyment. 
 
I. Sanskrit-EDglish Glossary. 
 
 197 
 
 upavita n., sacred cord of the 
 
 three higher castes. 
 upanah (249) f., sandal, shoe. 
 ubha a., du., both. 
 was n., breast. 
 uru, f. urvt, a., wide. 
 urvafi f., n. pr., an Apsaras. 
 usas {., dawn ; as n. pr., Usas, 
 
 goddess of the dawn. 
 
 V'r (rcchdti: 109) move; go to; 
 
 fall to one's lot, fall upon ; cans. 
 
 {arpdyati) send; put; give. 
 fksa m., bear. 
 rgveda m., the Rigveda. 
 re f., verse of the Rigveda; in 
 
 pi., the Rigveda. 
 rna n., debt. 
 rtvij m., priest. 
 rsi m., seer. 
 
 eha (231, 232) num., one; pi., 
 some; eke" eke, some** others. 
 ekada adv., once upon a time. 
 ekadafa (332) num., eleven. 
 ekadaga (334) a. eleventh. 
 etad (231) pron., this, this here. 
 eva adv., just, exactly. 
 evam adv., so, thus. 
 esa same as etad. 
 
 ostha m., lip. 
 
 ausadha n., medicine. 
 
 ka (232) pron. 1, interrogative, 
 who, what; kim w. instr. , cf. 
 note on p. 89. — 2. indefinite, 
 adj. and subst., chiefly w. parti- 
 
 cles ca, cana, cid, apt, some one 
 
 or other; so also w. relatives; 
 
 oftenest in neg. clauses : no one 
 
 whatever (236). 
 kata m., mat. 
 kantaka m., thorn, enemy. 
 kantha m., neck. 
 kanva m., n. pr. 
 katham adv., how ? 
 \/kaihaya (den. : kathdyaii) relate, 
 
 tell. 
 kada adv., when? 1- cana, cid, 
 
 apt, at some time, ever; often 
 
 w. neg. 
 kani^tha a., youngest. 
 kamyas a., younger. 
 kanya f., daughter, maiden. 
 kapi m., monkey, 
 kapota m., dove. 
 \/kamp (kdmpate) tremble. 
 kara m., hand ; trunk (of elephant) ; 
 
 ray; toll, tax. 
 karin m., elephant. 
 karuna a., lamentable. 
 karna m., ear. 
 kartr m., doer, maker (204); 
 
 author. 
 karman n., deed ; ceremony ; fate. 
 ^kal + sam (saihkaldyati) put 
 
 together, add. 
 kalaha m.. quarrel, 
 kald f., crescent. 
 kalinga m., n. pr., a people. 
 kaliyuga n., the "Iron Age" of 
 
 the world. 
 kalyana n., advantage; salvation. 
 kavi m., poet. 
 kana a., one-eyed. 
 kanti {., charm; grace. 
 
198 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 kama m., desire, love ; as n. pr., 
 the god of love. 
 
 kamadugha a., granting wishes; 
 as f. subst., sc. dfienu, the fab- 
 ulous Wonder-cow. 
 
 kamaduh a., idem. 
 
 kaya m., body. 
 
 karana n., reason, cause. 
 
 -karin a., causing, making. 
 
 kdrya n., business, concern. 
 
 kola va., time. 
 
 kalidasa m., n. pr., a poet. 
 
 kavya n., poem. 
 
 kagi f., n. pr,, a city, Benares. 
 
 kdstha n., fagot; wood. 
 
 kdsthamaya a., made of wood. 
 
 Mm neut. of ka ; w. tu, however. 
 
 kiyant (263) pron. adj., how 
 great? 
 
 klrti i., glory. 
 
 kutas adv., whence? why? 
 
 kutra adv., where? whither? 
 
 kunta m., spear. 
 
 ]/ kup (kupyati) be angry (gen. 
 or dat.). 
 
 kumdra m., boy, prince. 
 
 kugala a., able; clever; learned. 
 
 1/ VcfQcaroti, kuruti: § 394-5) make, 
 
 do, perform; 1- adhi put at 
 
 the head, make ruler over (loc.) ; 
 
 h apa do evil to, harm (gen,, 
 
 loc, ace.) ; y apa-d pay ; — 
 
 -I- alam prepare, adorn ; 1- avis 
 
 (dviskaroti) make known, ex- 
 hibit; — +upa do good to, be- 
 nefit (gen., loc.) ; h tiras (ti- 
 
 rask.) hide ; blame ; \- puras 
 
 put at the head ; h prati pay, 
 
 recompense, punish (ace. rei, 
 
 gen., dat., or loc. pers.); — 
 
 +prddus make known or visible ; 
 
 1- sam (395) prepare, adorn. 
 
 \/2kj- (kirdti) strew, scatter; — 
 
 + vi, idem. 
 ]/krt (krntdti: 110) cut, cut off; 
 
 h ava idem. 
 
 krti f., work (literary). 
 krtrima a., adopted. 
 krtsna a., whole, entire. 
 krpana a., poor; niggardly. 
 krpd f., graciousness, pity. 
 ykrs (kdrsati) draw ; \- a draw 
 
 on or up; — (krsdti) plough. 
 krsi f , agriculture. 
 krsivala m., husbandman, peasant. 
 kfSTia a., black; as m., n. pr., the 
 
 god Krsna. 
 \^ kip (Jcdlpate) be in order; tend 
 
 or conduce to (dat.) ; cans, (kal- 
 
 pdyati, -te) ordain, appoint. 
 ketu m., banner. 
 kega m., hair. 
 
 kdildsa m., n. pr., a mountain. 
 ko{i f., peak ; point, tip. 
 kopa m., anger. 
 kosa ni., treasure ; treasury. 
 kdunteya m., n. pr. 
 kdusalyd f., n. pr. 
 \/kram (krdmati, krdmate: 134) 
 
 step; — + ati pass beyond; 
 
 transgress; pass (of time); — 
 
 + d stride up to, attack; — 
 
 + nis go out. 
 \/ krl (kni}dti, krmltd) buy. 
 krldd f., game, sport. 
 ykrudh (krudhyati) be angry (gen. 
 
 or dat.). 
 krodha m., anger. 
 
I. Sanskrit- English Glossary. 
 
 199 
 
 hia adv., where? whither? + cit 
 sometimes, ever. 
 
 k§ana m. n., moment; time. 
 
 ksatriya m., warrior, man of the 
 second caste. 
 
 ksaya m., decay, destruction. 
 
 ]fksan (ksaridti, k§ar),ute) hurt, 
 wound. 
 
 I'ksal (ksaldyati) wash; — -^-pra 
 idem. 
 
 ksatra a., suitable for Ksatriyas. 
 
 \/2k»l (ksindti) destroy. 
 
 ksitipa m., king. 
 
 ]/ksip (ksipdH) hurl, throw. 
 
 k^t'^a part, of iksi, reduced, de- 
 cayed, ruined. 
 
 ksira n., milk. 
 
 ksudra a., little, small. 
 
 ksudh f., hunger. 
 
 ksetra n.. field. 
 
 Ykhan (khdnati) dig. 
 khara m., ass. 
 
 ganga f., n. pr., the Ganges. 
 
 gaja m., elephant. 
 
 I'ganaya (den.: gandyati) number, 
 count; 1- ava despise. 
 
 gati f., gait; course. 
 
 gandlia m., odor, perfume. 
 
 gandharva m., a Gandharva, one 
 of a band of celestial singers. 
 
 ]/gam (jgdechati : 100) go ; 1- anu 
 
 follow; — + abhi visit, attend; 
 
 \-ava understand; \-asiam 
 
 go down, set (cf. » + astam); — 
 + a come; — + wd rise; — 
 + nis come forth; proceed from; 
 
 — + sam (mid.) come together, 
 meet (instr.). 
 
 ganyas comp., very honorable. 
 
 \'2ga igayati) sing. 
 
 g&ndharva, f. -i, a., in the manner 
 of Gandbarfas. 
 
 y gaii {ghhate) plunge; — + ava 
 dive or plunge under (ace). 
 
 gir f., voice, song. 
 
 giri m., mountain. 
 
 gtta n., song; singing, 
 
 gur}a m., quality, excellence. 
 
 guru m., teacher. 
 
 '^ guh {gUhati: 101) hide, conceal; 
 caus. (guhdyati) idem. 
 
 guhd f., cave. 
 
 grha n., house. 
 
 grhastha m., householder, head of 
 family. 
 
 grhya a., domestic. 
 
 go (209) ni., f., bull, steer, cow; 
 as f., fig., speech. 
 
 gotva n., ox-nature, stupidity. 
 
 gopa m., cowherd, shepherd; 
 guardian. 
 
 \'gopaya (den. : gopdyati) be keep- 
 er ; guard. 
 
 gdurava n., weight; dignity. 
 
 y granth (grathndti) string to- 
 gether; compose. 
 
 grantha m., literary work, book. 
 
 ]/ grah (grhndti, grhmte) receive, 
 seize ; — + ni hold, restrain, 
 check ; — + prati take. 
 
 grama m., village. 
 
 gi'dsa m., bite, mouthful. 
 
 ghafa m., pot, vessel. 
 
200 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 ghasa m., fodder, hay. 
 
 ghrta n., clarified batter; ghee, 
 
 yghra (jighrati: 102) smell. 
 
 ca end. conj., and, also, re, -que; 
 
 sometimes =if. 
 cakra n., wheel. 
 \/caks (caste: 421) see, behold; 
 
 \- a relate; call, name; — 
 
 + vi-a explain. 
 caksus n., eye. 
 catur (332) num., four. 
 caturtha, f. -«, a., fourth. 
 caturdaga (332) num., fourteen. 
 catuspad (282) a., quadruped. 
 catvaringat (332) num., forty. 
 candra m., moon. 
 candramas m., moon. 
 '\/ cam, used duly with a (acdmati), 
 
 sip; rinse the mouth. 
 camatkara m., astonishment. 
 \/car (edrati) go, wander ; graze 
 
 (of cattle); tr., perform, commit; 
 
 \- a perform, complete, do; 
 
 — + sam-a idem ; \- ud caus. 
 
 (uccdrdyati) pronounce, say. 
 -cava a., moving, going. 
 carana m., n., foot, leg. 
 carita n., behavior, life. 
 carman n., hide, skin ; leather. 
 carmamaya a., leathern, 
 \'cal (cdlati) stir; 1- pra move 
 
 on, march ; \-pra-vi^ tr., move, 
 
 stir. 
 caturmasya n., a certain sacrifice. 
 camikara n., gold. 
 car a m., spy. 
 caru a., beautiful, 
 y/cj {cindti, cinute) gather; — + 
 
 nis or vi-nis decide, conclude; 
 
 + pra gather; — + vi idem ; — 
 
 + sam collect. 
 citta n., notice ; thought; mind. 
 ]/ cint (cintdyati) consider. 
 dram adv., long, a long time. 
 \/ cud + pra in cans, (pracoddyati), 
 
 impel. 
 \'cur (cordyatt) steal. 
 cu4d {., top-knot, scalp. 
 ced adv., postpos., if. 
 \/ cest (cestati, -te) stir, be alive. 
 cdulukya m., n. pr., a people. 
 \/cyu (cydvate') totter, fall ; — -{-vi 
 
 fall away. 
 
 chattra n., umbrella. 
 
 chdyd f., shade. 
 
 ychid (chindtti, chinddhe) cut, cut 
 
 off; — + ava idem ; 1- « take 
 
 away, remove ; \- ud exter- 
 minate. 
 
 jagat n., that which moves ; men 
 and beasts ; the world. 
 
 yjan (jdyate : 155 ; jandyatt) trans. 
 (/an%a!/i and active forms) beget, 
 produce; intrans. (jdyate and 
 middle forms) be born (mother in 
 loc), arise, spring up; — + ud 
 (ujjdyate) be born, arise (abl.); 
 1- pra or sam idem. 
 
 jana m., man ; pi., and coll. in 
 sing., people, folks. 
 
 janaka m., father. 
 
 jananl f., mother. 
 
 janman n,, birth, existence. 
 
 jaya m., victory. 
 
 jaras (280) f., old age. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary, 
 
 201 
 
 jar a (280) f., old age. 
 
 jala n., water. 
 
 yjalp (jdlpati) speak; chat. 
 
 Yjagaraya (caus.) awaken. 
 
 jati f., birth ; caste ; kind. 
 
 jamdtr m., son-in-law. 
 
 jaya f., woman, wife. 
 
 jala n., net. 
 
 yji (^jdyati) trans, and intrans., 
 conquer, win; — -{■ para, mid., 
 be conquered (cf. in Voc. 9). 
 
 jina m., n. pr., a name of Buddha. 
 
 jihva f., tongue. 
 
 ■\/jiv (jwati) live. 
 
 jwita n., life. 
 
 juhu f. , spoon , esp. sacrificial 
 spoon. 
 
 jetr m., conqueror, victor, 
 
 -jna a., knowing. 
 
 yjna (janati, janite : 403) know; 
 
 \- anu permit; 1- a caus. 
 
 (ajnapdyati) command ; \- vi 
 
 recognize. 
 
 jnana n., knowledge; insight. 
 
 jya f.j bowstring. 
 
 jyestha (340) a., best; oldest. 
 
 jyotisa n., astronomy ; astronomi- 
 cal text-book, 
 
 jyotis n., light; star; heavenly 
 body. 
 
 ta (228-230) pron., he, etc. ; that, 
 both subst, and adj. ; also as 
 def. article, 
 
 taksagila f., n. pr., Taxila, a city, 
 
 |/ tad (taddyati) strike, beat, 
 
 ta^aga m., pond. 
 
 ta^it f., lightning, 
 
 tdn4ula m., rice. 
 
 tatas adv., thence, therefore; there- 
 upon. 
 tatra adv., there, thither. 
 tatha, adv., in that way, so. 
 tad nora. and ace. s. n. to ta; as 
 
 adv., therefore. 
 tada adv., then. 
 tadyatJid adv., namely, to wit. 
 X'tan (tandti, tanute), tr., stretch, 
 
 extend; perform (a sacrifice); 
 
 V a cause, bring about ; — 
 
 ■\- pra extend. 
 "[/tap (tdpati, -te), tr. and intr., 
 
 burn ; pain ; in pass., suffer, do 
 
 penance. 
 tapas n., heat; self-torture. 
 tapasvin a., practising ascetism; 
 
 as m., ascetic. 
 ytam (t&myati: 131) be sad. 
 taru m., tree. 
 
 taruna, f. -«, a., young, delicate. 
 tasthivans pf. part, of stha ; as n., 
 
 the immovable. 
 tddrf a., such. 
 tdlu n., palate. 
 tdvant adj., so great, so much; 
 
 tavat as adv., so long, so much; 
 
 often concessive, like done, dock, 
 tiraskarini f., veil. 
 tiryanc (272) a., going horizontally; 
 
 as subst., animal. 
 tilaka m., ornament (often fig.). 
 tlra n., bank, shore. 
 tlrtha n., bathing-place; place of 
 
 pilgrimage. 
 tivra a., great, strong, violent, 
 tu conj., but, however. 
 ytud (tuddti) push; strike, 
 ytul (Jtoldyati) weigh. 
 
202 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 ]/tus (tusyati) rejoice, take pleasure 
 
 in (w. instr.). 
 1/ tr (tdraii) cross over ; - — h ava 
 
 descend; + ud emerge; 1- pra 
 
 in caus. (pratdrdyati), deceive. 
 trtfya, f. -a (335), a., third. 
 y trp (tfpyati) satisfy oneself. 
 trsna f., thirst, desire. 
 tejasvin a., courageous. 
 ytyaj (tydjaii) leave, abandon; 
 
 + pari leave off, give up. 
 trayodaga (332) num., thirteen. 
 tri (332) num., three. 
 tringat (332) num., thirty. 
 triloka n. , -kt f. , the threefold 
 ■ world. 
 
 trivrt a., triple, threefold. 
 trifirsan a., three-headed. 
 tristubh f., name of a metre. 
 tryagtti num., eighty three. 
 tva stem of pron. of 2d pers. (226 ; 
 
 cf. 352, 4). 
 tvad so-called stem of pron. tva. 
 tvastr m., n. pr., a. god, Tvastar. 
 
 ]/danf (da fail) bite. 
 
 danstrd f., tooth. 
 
 daksa m., n. pr. 
 
 dak^ina a., right-hand; southern. 
 
 dania m., stick; punishment. 
 
 ydan^aya (den.: danddyati) pun- 
 ish. 
 
 dadhan (dadhi: 275) n., curds. 
 
 dadA^owc (weakest -dAw)m., n.pr. 
 
 ]/ dam (damyati .•131) control ; caus. 
 (damdyati) tame; compel. 
 
 days, {., compassion, pity. 
 
 daridra a., poor. 
 
 dargana n,, philosophical system. 
 
 daga (332) num., teu, 
 
 dagaratha m., n. pr. 
 
 dasta part, of dang. 
 
 ]/ dah (ddhati) burn. 
 
 l/lrfa (dddati, datte: 436) give; in 
 caus. (dapdyati) make give or 
 pay ; — + a take (312) ; — + pra 
 entrust; give in marriage. 
 
 yida {dydti: 132) cut. 
 
 datr m., giver; as adj. (204), gen- 
 erous. 
 
 dana n., gift, present ; generosity. 
 
 danava m., demon. 
 
 dasa m., slave, groom. 
 
 ddsl {., female slave, servant. 
 
 dina n., day. 
 
 div (277) f. (rarely m.), sky. 
 
 divasa m., day. 
 
 divya a., heavenly, divine. 
 
 ydig (digdti) show, point out; — 
 
 + a. command ; \- upa teach, 
 
 instruct. 
 
 dig f., point, cardinal point; 
 quarter, region ; direction. 
 
 y dih (degdhi : 428) smear. 
 
 dirgha a,., long; — am adv., afar, 
 
 dirghdijus a., long-lived. 
 
 y dw (divyati) play. 
 
 ydu (dundti), intr., burn, feel dis- 
 tressed; tr., distress (ace). 
 
 dulfkha n., misery; misfortune. 
 
 dugdha n., milk. 
 
 durjana m., scamp, rogue. 
 
 durdaga f., misfortune. 
 
 durlabha a., hard to find or reach ; 
 dificult, 
 
 y dtis (dtisyati) be defiled. 
 
 dusprayukta a., badly arranged. 
 
 dussanta m., n. pr. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 203 
 
 dus insep. prefix, bad ; hard. 
 
 Yduh {ddgdhi, dugdhe: 428) milk. 
 
 duhitr f., daughter. 
 
 data m., messenger, envoy. 
 
 ^dj- in caus. (ddrdyati) + vi tear 
 
 open. 
 ]'drg (127) see; cans, (dargdyati) 
 
 show; pass, (drgydte) seem, 
 
 look. 
 drg f., look, glance ; eye. 
 deva m., god; f. -I, goddess; 
 
 queen. 
 devaki f., n. pr. 
 devakula n., temple. 
 devatd f., divinity, deity. 
 dega m., region, land. 
 daiva, f. -i, divine. 
 dosa m., fault. 
 dyuti f., brilliancy. 
 dravya n., property ; object. 
 drastr m., seer; author (of Vedic 
 
 hymns, etc.). 
 y dru (drdvati) run. 
 '\l druh {driihyati) be hostile, offend. 
 dva (332) num., two. 
 dvahstha m., doorkeeper. 
 dvdr f., door, gate. 
 dvija m., Aryan. 
 dvijdti m., Aryan. 
 dvittya (335) a., second. 
 dvipad (282) a., biped. 
 t/rfw«« (^dvesti, dviste) hate; — + 
 
 /)ra hate extremely. 
 dvis m., enemy. 
 dvis adv., twice. 
 dmpin m., panther. 
 
 dkana n., money, riches. 
 dhanin a., wealthy. 
 
 dhamis n., bow. 
 
 dharma m., right; law; virtue. 
 
 V/ldAa (dddlidti, dhatti: 435) put, 
 place ; — + api close, cover, 
 
 keep shut; \- a put on; mid., 
 
 receive; 1- sam-a lay or place 
 
 on; — + ni lay down; — + 
 pari in caus. {-dhapdyatf), make 
 put on, clothe in (two ace); 
 
 \- vi arrange, ordain; 1- 
 
 sam put together, unite; lay on. 
 
 \/2dhd (dhdyati: 126) suck. 
 
 dhdtr m., creator. 
 
 dhdnya n., grain. 
 
 dhdrmika a., right, just. 
 
 ^ dhdv (dhdvati) run; — + anu 
 run after. 
 
 dhdvana n., running; course. 
 
 dhl f., understanding, insight. 
 
 dhimant a., wise, prudent. 
 
 dhira a., steadfast, firm, brave. 
 
 \/dhu (dhunoti, dhunute: 391), 
 shake. 
 
 j/rfAr in caus. (dhdrdyati) bear. 
 
 dAriJ f., firmness; courage. 
 
 dhenu f., cow. 
 
 dhairya n., steadfastness. 
 
 ydhyd (dhyayati) think, ponder. 
 
 wa adv., not ; with opt., cf. 207. 
 
 naksatra n., lunar mansion. 
 
 nagara n., -if., city. 
 
 nadi f., river. 
 
 ■^nand (ndndati, -te) + ahhi re- 
 joice in, greet joyfully (ace). 
 
 Ynam (ndmati), intr., bow, bend ; 
 tr., honor, reverence (ace). 
 
 nomas n., honor, glory. 
 
 nara m., man {vir and homo). 
 
204 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 naraka m., hell. 
 
 narmada f., n-pr., a river in India. 
 
 nala m., n. pr. 
 
 nava a., new. 
 
 nava (332) num., nine. 
 
 navati (332) num., ninety. 
 
 navadafa (332) num., nineteen. 
 
 navma ^, new. 
 
 l^naf (ndpyati) perish; — + vi 
 perish; disappear. 
 
 \/nah (ndhyati) bind; — + sam 
 gird, equip oneself. 
 
 naga m., snake. 
 
 nataka n., drama, play. 
 
 ndman n., name; noma adv., by 
 name. 
 
 nan f., woman, wife. 
 
 nail f., pipe, conduit. 
 
 nofa m., destruction. 
 
 ni adv., down; in, into. 
 
 nitya a., constant; daily; -am as 
 adv., alvpays, daily. 
 
 nidega m., command. 
 
 ynind (nindati) blame. 
 
 nipuna a., shrewd, skilled. 
 
 niyata, part, of ni-yam, ordain- 
 ed, fixed, permanent. 
 
 nirdaya a., pitiless. 
 
 nirvrti f., contentment, happiness. 
 
 nis adv., out, forth. 
 
 nigcaya m., decision, certainty. 
 
 \'nt (ndyati; caus. naydyatt) lead, 
 
 guide; 1- apa lead away; — 
 
 + a bring; h upa introduce, 
 
 consecrate, initiate; — + nis 
 bring to an end, determine, 
 settle; — + pari lead about; 
 marry. 
 
 nica a., low. 
 
 niti f., conduct of life; ethics, pol- 
 itics. 
 ntruj a., healthy, well. 
 nilakantha m., n. pr. 
 ]/nrt {nftyati) dance. 
 nrtta n., dance, dancing. 
 nrpa m., king. 
 nrpati m., king. 
 netr m., leader. 
 
 netra n., leading-rope, cord ; eye. 
 nau f., ship. 
 nyanc (272) a., low. 
 ny&ya m., logic. 
 nyayya a., right, proper. 
 
 paksa m., wing, side; party. 
 
 paksin m., bird. 
 
 pahka n., mud, bog. 
 
 \/pac (pdcati) cook. 
 
 panca (332) num., five. 
 
 pancadaga (332) num., fifteen. 
 
 pancapancaga (334) a., fifty-fifth. 
 
 pancagat (332) num., fifty. 
 
 l/yaj (pdtdyati) split open. 
 
 27a^u a., skilled. 
 
 )/pafA (pdthati) recite, read. 
 
 pani m. pi., n.p"., certain demons. 
 
 pani^ita m., learned man; pandit. 
 
 )/paf (pdtati) fall, fly; — + wd 
 fly up. 
 
 paJi (274) m., lord, master; hus- 
 band. 
 
 pattra n., leaf, letter. 
 
 patni f., wife, consort. 
 
 pathi same as panthan. 
 
 pathya a., wholesome. 
 
 pad (282) m., foot. 
 
 l/i^orf (pddyate) go; — -|- vi-d in 
 caus. (vydpdddyati) kill; [■ 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 205 
 
 nis (nispddyate) grow, arise from 
 
 (abl.); H pra flee for refuge 
 
 to (ace). 
 pada n., step; place. 
 padma m. n., lotus. 
 panthan (278) m., road, path. 
 payas n., milk. 
 
 j^ara (233) a., chief, highest; other. 
 paramatman m., the world-spirit. 
 paragu m., axe. 
 para adv., to a distance, away. 
 pari adv., round about, around. 
 parivraj (247, 2) m., wandering 
 
 ascetic. 
 parisad f., assembly. 
 parvata m., mountain. 
 \'palay (pdlayate: cf. p. 116, note) 
 
 flee. 
 ^/pag (pdfyati: 127) see. 
 pafu m., beast. 
 pagcat adv., behind (w. gen.). 
 y/lpa (pibati: 102) drink; cans. 
 {paydyati) give to drink, water. 
 ]/2pa (pdii) protect; caus. pald- 
 
 yati) idem. 
 pataliputra n., n. pr., the city 
 
 Patna. 
 patha m., lecture, lesson. 
 pani m., hand. 
 panini m., n. pr. 
 pandava m., descendant of Panda. 
 pataka n., crime, sin. 
 patra n., pot, vessel. 
 pada m., foot; quarter; ray, beam. 
 papa a., bad; as n. subst., sin. 
 pdrthiva m., prince. 
 parvatt f., n. pr. 
 pdlana n., protection. 
 paga m., noose, cord, snare. 
 
 pagupalya n., cattle-raising. 
 
 pitr m., father; du., parents; pi., 
 Manes. 
 
 VPH (pindsfi) grind, crush. 
 
 I'pi same as pyd. 
 
 pina part, of pi, fat. 
 
 ]^pzd (ptddyati) torment, vex. 
 
 pums same as pumans. 
 
 punya a., meritorious, holy, aus- 
 picious; as u., merit. 
 
 putra m., son ; -trt f., daughter. 
 
 punar adv., again, but. 
 
 pumans (279) m., man, male. 
 
 pur f., city. 
 
 pura adv., earlier, formerly. 
 
 purana, f. -a. and -i, a., former, 
 ancient; as n., one of a class of 
 works on the creation, etc. 
 
 purusa m., man {homo). 
 
 pururavas m., n. pr., Puriiravas. 
 
 purohita m., domestic priest. 
 
 pulinda m., n. pr., a tribe in India. 
 
 ]/pus (jpusndti) make increase or 
 grow. 
 
 pusta part, of pus, stout, fat. 
 
 puspa n., flower. 
 
 pustaka n., book (manuscript). 
 
 ]/pu {pundti, punite) clean. 
 
 ]/puj (pujayati) honor. 
 
 pitra m., flood, high-water. 
 
 puru m., n. pr. 
 
 pusan (284) m., n. pr., Pusan, 
 the Sun-god. 
 
 prthivt f., earth, ground. 
 
 prthu a., broad, wide. 
 
 prthvi f., earth. 
 
 prthvlraja m., n. pr. 
 
 \/lpr (piparii) fill, f- ' 
 
 po§aka m., supporter, maintainer. 
 
206 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 pdutra m., grandson. 
 
 pdura m., citizen. 
 
 Vpyd (pydyate) swell, get stout. 
 
 pra adv., forward, forth. 
 
 prakagin a., bright, glistening; 
 act., illaminating. 
 
 ypraeh (prcchdti) ask, ask about. 
 
 praja f., creature, subject. 
 
 prati adv. and prep., back, back, 
 again ; towards (postpos. , w. 
 ace). 
 
 pratikula a., unfavorable. 
 
 pratyanc (272) a., backward, west- 
 ward. 
 
 pratyaham adv., daily. 
 
 \fpraih in caus. (prathdyatt), 
 spread ; proclaim. 
 
 prathama (335) a., first. 
 
 prabhdva m., might, power. 
 
 prahhuta a., much ; many. 
 
 pramatta a., careless. 
 
 praydga m., n. pr., Allahabad. 
 
 prayukta part, of pra-yuj. 
 
 prayoktr m., arranger, user. 
 
 pralaya m., destruction. 
 
 pragna m., question. 
 
 prasanna, part, of pra-sad, well- 
 disposed. 
 
 prahara m., stroke, shot ; wound. 
 
 prdnc (272) forward, eastward. 
 
 prd^a m., often pi., breath, life. 
 
 prdnin m., living creature. 
 
 pratar adv., early, in the morning. 
 
 prdyafcitta n., penance, expiation. 
 
 prayena adv., commonly. 
 
 prdsdda m., palace. 
 
 priya a., dear. 
 
 priyakarman a., kind. 
 
 priyavdc a., saying pleasant things, 
 
 sociable. 
 
 priyavddin a., idem. 
 
 X^pri (priniti^ prirflte), act., de- 
 light; mid., rejoice; caus. (yri- 
 i^dyati), make glad, please. 
 ]/plu (pldvate) + a drench. 
 
 phala n., fruit, reward. 
 phalavant a., fruitful. 
 
 yhandh (badhndti, badhniti) bind; 
 
 entangle, catch; join; com- 
 pose. 
 handhu m., relative. 
 lala n., strength, might. 
 halavant a., strong, mighty. 
 halhtha a., strongest. 
 hahu a., much, many. 
 6aZa a., young; asm., child, boy; 
 
 f. -a, girl. 
 &a«pa m., tear, tears. 
 hdJiu m., arm. 
 hindu m., drop. 
 huddha part, of JwdA, awakened ; 
 
 enlightened. 
 buddhi f., prudence, intelligence. 
 buddhimant a., prudent. 
 Y budh (bSdhati, -te; bMhyaU,-te), 
 
 wake ; know. 
 budha m., wise man, sage. 
 brahmacarya n., life of holiness, 
 
 esp. religious studentship. 
 brahmacdrin a., studying sacred 
 
 knowledge; as m. , Brahman 
 
 student. 
 brdhman n., devotion ; sacred word 
 
 (of God); sacred knowledge; 
 
 world-spirit. 
 brahmdn (a personification of ird- 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 207 
 
 hman)m., the supreme AU-Soal; ' 
 
 Brahma, the Creator. 
 hrahmdhan (283) m. , killing a 
 
 Brahman. 
 brahmana m., priest. Brahman. 
 ]/bru (hraviti, brute), speak, say; 
 
 — \-pra explain, teach, announce; 
 
 1- vi explain, announce. 
 
 bhakta a., devoted, true. 
 bhakti f., devotion; honor. 
 X'bJiaks (bhaksdyati) eat. 
 bhaksana n., eating. 
 bhagavant a., honorable, blessed. 
 \/bhaj (bhdjati, -te) divide; \-m 
 
 distribute. 
 y/bhanj (bhandkti) break, destroy. 
 bhadra a., good, pleasant ; as n., 
 
 fortune. 
 bhaya n., fear. 
 
 bharatakhanda m., n. pr., India. 
 bhartr m., supporter; preserver; 
 
 lord, master; husband. 
 bhava m., n. pr., a name of piva. 
 bhavant, f. hhavatl; in voc. bhos, 
 
 f. bhavati; used in respectful 
 
 address instead of pronoun of 
 
 2nd person. Cf. § 264. 
 bhasman n., ashes. 
 I'bha (bhatt) gleam, glance; — 
 
 + d or vi idem. 
 bhaga m., part, piece, share. 
 -bhaj a., sharing. 
 bhanu m., sun. 
 bhara m., burden. 
 bharya f., wife, woman. 
 \/ bhas (bhdsate) speak; — +prati 
 
 answer (ace. of pers.); — ^-sam 
 
 converse. 
 
 bhdxd f , speech, language. 
 
 bhdsvant a., shining, brilliant. 
 
 ]/ bhiks (bhikmte) beg, get by beg- 
 ging- 
 
 bhiksa f., alms. 
 
 bhikm m., beggar; ascetic. 
 
 \/bhid (bhindtti, bhinddhe) split. 
 
 \'blii (bibheti) fear; in caus. (bhl- 
 sdyate, bhaydyate) terrify. 
 
 \iblmj (bhwndkti, bhunkte) eat, 
 enjoy; cans. (Mq/ayafi) feed ; — 
 + upa enjoy. 
 
 -bhuj a., enjoying. 
 
 bhujyu m., n. pr., a Vedic person. 
 
 bhuvana n., world. 
 
 \fbhu (bhavati, -te) become; be, 
 exist; — + abki overpower; 
 
 — + pari despise; (- pra 
 
 arise; be mighty, rule; oalere. 
 
 bhu f., earth, ground. 
 
 bhuta part, of bhu; as n. subst., 
 being, creature. 
 
 bhUti f., prosperity, blessing. 
 
 bhubhuj m., king. 
 
 bhvhhrt m., king; mountain. 
 
 bhumi f., earth, ground, land. 
 
 bhUyas (340) comp. adj., more; 
 -yas adv., mostly. 
 
 bhOsana n., ornament. 
 
 \ bhr (bhdrati, -te) support (lit. and 
 
 fig)- 
 bhrgukaccha n., n. pr., Baroch, a 
 
 holy place in India. 
 
 bhrtaka m., servant. 
 
 bhrtya m., servant. 
 
 bhrfam adv., greatly, much. 
 
 bheka m., frog. 
 
 bhoga m., enjoyment. 
 
 bhojana n., meal. 
 
208 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 hhos see bhavant. 
 
 ybhram (hhrdmyati: 131) wander 
 
 about, flit ; — + pari idem. 
 bhratr m., brother. 
 bhru t., eyebrow. 
 
 maksika f., fly, gnat. 
 
 maghavan (270) m., Indra. 
 
 y/maji (mdjjati) sink ; — h m id em. 
 
 mani m., jewel. 
 
 mati f., mind. 
 
 matimant a., shrewd, prudent. 
 
 matsya m., fish. 
 
 mathi same as manthan. 
 
 mad called stem of aham; cf. 
 
 352, 4. 
 ^mad (mAdyati) get drunk; — 
 
 + pra be careless. 
 madhu n., honey. 
 madhuparka m., sweet drink. 
 madkulih m., bee. 
 madhya a., middle; as n., middle; 
 
 waist. 
 yman (many ate; manute) think, 
 
 suppose ; — + sam honor. 
 manas n., mind. 
 manusya m., man (homo), 
 manoratha m., wish. 
 manohara a., agreeable; entranc- 
 ing. 
 mantra m., sacred text; spell, 
 
 charm. 
 mantrin m., minister; councillor. 
 I'manth (mathnhti) stir. 
 manthan (278) m., stirring-stick. 
 mandara m., n. ^r., a mountain, 
 njarana n., death. 
 marut m., wind ; pi., n. pr., the 
 
 Storm-gods. 
 
 mastaka n., head. 
 
 mahant (261) a., great. 
 
 mahanasa n., kitchen. 
 
 maharaja m., great king. 
 
 mahisa tn., n. pr. 
 
 mahisi f., queen. 
 
 l''lma .(mi(«; mimite: AZS) mea- 
 sure ; (- W2« work, create. 
 
 ma adv. and conj., not; used in 
 prohibitions, etc., like Lat. ne, 
 greek /uij'; cf. 195. 
 
 mahsa n., flesh. 
 
 mafr f., mother. 
 
 madhurya n., sweetness. 
 
 manava m., man (homo). 
 
 manasa n., sense; understanding. 
 
 mdnusa, f. -i, human. 
 
 marga m,, road, way, street. 
 
 rraaZa f., garland. 
 
 masa m., month. 
 
 BM^ra n., friend. 
 
 mitradruh (249) a,, friend-be- 
 traying. 
 
 mma m., fish. 
 
 C'wiZ (milati) wink ; + m close 
 the eyes. 
 
 mukla f., pearl. 
 
 mukti {., salvation, deliverance. 
 
 mukha n., mouth, face. 
 
 mukhya a., principal, first. 
 
 y'muc (muncdti: 110) free, release; 
 muktvd, without (312). 
 
 ymud (mddate) rejoice; 1- anu 
 
 allow. 
 
 muni m., sage; ascetic. 
 
 \'mus (mmndti) steal, rob. 
 
 musala m. n., club, pestle. 
 
 l^muh (muhyati) be confused or 
 dazed or stupid. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 209 
 
 murdhaga a,, on the head. 
 
 murdhan m., head. 
 
 mula n., root. 
 
 \imr (mriydte : 155) die ; cans, (md- 
 
 rdyati) kill. 
 mrga m., wild animal; gazelle. 
 ]/mrgaya (den. : mrgdyate) hunt 
 
 for, seek. 
 mfgaya f., chase, hunting. 
 \/mrj (mdrsti: 423) rub, wipe ; 
 
 cans. (inarjdyati)Tuh off, polish; 
 
 1- apa, pari or pra, wipe off. 
 
 mrta, part, of mr, dead, fallen. 
 
 mrtyu m., death. 
 
 mrd {., earth, dirt. 
 
 riiekhald f., girdle. 
 
 megha m., cloud. 
 
 moksa m., deliverance; salvation. 
 
 moha m., infatuation. 
 
 ya (231) rel. pron., used as subst. 
 and adj., who, which, what; cf. 
 234 fF. 
 
 }/yaj (ydjati, -te) sacrifice (ace. 
 pers., instr. rei); caus. (ydjd- 
 yati) make to sacrifice, offer sa- 
 crifice for (ace). 
 
 yajus n., sacrificial formula, text. 
 
 yajna m., sacrifice. 
 
 yajniya a., suitable for sacrificing. 
 
 \/yat (jjdtate) strive after (dat.). 
 
 yatas adv., whence; wherefore. 
 
 yati m., ascetic. 
 
 yatna m., exertion. 
 
 yatra adv., where, whither. 
 
 yatha adv., in which way ; as. 
 
 yada adv., when, if. 
 
 yadi adv., if. 
 
 }/yam (ydcchati: \00) furnish, give; 
 
 Ferrj', Sanskrit Primer. 
 
 [■ ud undertake ; 1- ni or- 
 dain, fix, appoint. 
 yamuna f., n. pr., the river Jumna. 
 yavana m., Greek, barbarian. 
 yagas n., glory, fame. 
 ya§ti f., stick, staff. 
 y yd (ydti) go; with abstracts, 
 
 come into such and such a state ; 
 
 — + d approach. 
 ydtrd f., march, journey ; support. 
 ydma m., watch of the night. 
 ydvant a. , how much or many ; 
 
 ydvat as adv., as long as, while; 
 
 as soon as. 
 yuga n., age of the world. 
 yugma n., pair. 
 \'WJ (yundkti, yuhkti) join, yoke, 
 
 harness; caus. (yojdyati) idem; 
 
 h ni place, appoint, establish ; 
 
 1- pra arrange ; use. 
 
 yuddha n., battle. 
 
 Yyudh (yudhyate) fight (instr.). 
 
 yuvati f. to yuvan. 
 
 yuvan (269) a., young; f. yuvati. 
 
 yusmad called stem of yuyam ; as 
 
 stem in cpds (352, 4.), you. 
 yUpa m., sacrificial post. 
 yuyam (226) pron., you. 
 
 yraks (rdksati) protect. 
 raksaria n., protection. 
 raksitr m., protector. 
 yrac (racdyati) arrange, compose 
 
 (a literary work). 
 rajju {., cord. 
 yraiij + anu (anurdjyati , -te) be 
 
 inclined or devoted to (loc). 
 rana m. n., battle. 
 ratna n., jewel. 
 
 U 
 
210 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 ratha va., wagon. 
 
 rathya f., street. 
 
 '\/rdbh (rdbhate) grasp; — +a 
 take hold on, begin. 
 
 X'ram {rdmate) amuse oneself; — 
 + vi (virdmati) cease (abl.). 
 
 rafmi m., ray; rein. 
 
 rasa m., taste, feeling. 
 
 rasavant a., tasteful. 
 
 raksasa m., demon. 
 
 ]/rd,j (rdjati, -te) direct, rule; 
 shine; be illustrious. 
 
 rajan m., king. 
 
 rajya n., kingdom. 
 
 ratri f., night. 
 
 y/ rddh (radhndti) succeed ; — |- apa 
 do wrong. 
 
 rdma m., n. pr., a hero. 
 
 ramayana n., a noted poem. 
 
 rdvana m., n. pr., a demon. 
 
 rafi m., heap. 
 
 yru (rauti: 410) cry, scream; — 
 + vi idem. 
 
 yruc (rdcate) please (dat., gen.). 
 
 ruj {., sickness, disease. 
 
 yrud (rdditt: 429) weep. 
 
 ruddha, part, of rudh, besieged, 
 surrounded; suffused. 
 
 -\/rudh (rundddhi, runddhe) ob- 
 struct, check, besiege; 1- wpa 
 
 besiege. 
 
 rudhira n., blood. 
 
 ]/ruh (rohati) rise, spring up, 
 grow ; cans, {rohdyati, ropdyati) 
 make rise or grow, plant; — 
 
 + ava descend; \- a climb, 
 
 mount, ascend ; 1- pra grow 
 
 up. 
 
 ruk§a a., harsh, rough. 
 
 rupa n., form, beauty. 
 rupaka n., gold-piece. 
 rai (277) m., rarely f., possessions, 
 
 wealth. 
 rohini i., n. pr. 
 
 laksa n., a hundred thousand. 
 
 laksmi (276) f. , goddess of for- 
 tune. 
 
 X'lag (Idgati) attach, hang, cling. 
 
 laghu, f. -ghu or -ghvi, a., liglit ; 
 small, little. 
 
 lankd f., n. pr., Ceylon. 
 
 \'lap Qdpati) prate; 1- vi com- 
 plain. 
 
 ■^lahh (Jdbhate) rective, take; 
 caus. (lambhdyati) make receive, 
 give. 
 
 laldta n., forehead. 
 
 lavana n., salt. 
 
 lahgala n., plough. 
 
 labha m., acquisition, gain. 
 
 ]/ likJi (likhdti) scratch, write. 
 
 ]/lip (limpdti) smear. 
 
 \/Uh (le4hi, li4he: A2T) lick; — 
 + ava idem. 
 
 \/lunth (lurithdyati) + nis rob. 
 
 ]/lup (lumpdti) break to pieces; 
 devastate; plunder. 
 
 ]/lubh (lubhyati) covet (dat., loc). 
 
 lekhana n., writing, copying. 
 
 loka va., world ; sing, and pi., 
 people. 
 
 lobha m., desire, avarice. 
 
 loman n., hair. 
 
 loha n., metal; iron. 
 
 vahga va., race, family. 
 vakra a., crooked, bent. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 211 
 
 vaksas n., chest, breast. 
 
 j/offlc (vdkti: 415) speak, say; 
 name; caus. (vdcdyati) oiake (a 
 written leaf) speak, i. e. read. 
 
 vanij m., merchant. 
 
 vatsa m., calf. 
 
 y«ad (vddati) speak, say; — 
 + abhi in caus. {ahMvaddyatt) 
 
 greet; 1- vi (mid.) dispute, 
 
 argue. 
 
 vadha m., killing, murder. 
 
 vadhu f., woman ; wife. 
 
 vana n., woods, forest. 
 
 vanavdsin a., forest-dwelling. 
 
 \'vand (vdndate) greet, honor. 
 
 Yvap (pdpati) scatter; sow. 
 
 vapus n., body ; figure. 
 
 vayam (223) pron., we. 
 
 vayas n., age. 
 
 Ivard m., suitor, bridegroom. 
 
 2vdra m., choice, privilege; favor. 
 
 Svara a., best ; better (w. abl. : 
 than). 
 
 vardka m., boar. 
 
 varuna m., n. pr., a god. 
 
 varna m., color; caste. 
 
 yvarnaya (varndyati) describe, 
 portray. 
 
 vartin a., abiding, being. 
 
 varsa n., year. 
 
 vallahha a., dear. 
 
 y/vag (vdsti) wish. 
 
 yvas (vdsati) dwell; 1- ni in- 
 habit, dwell ; 1- pra go away 
 
 on a journey; — + prati in- 
 habit. 
 
 vasati f., dwelling. 
 
 vasu n., wealth, money. 
 
 vasudeva m., n. pr. 
 
 vastra n., garment. 
 
 |/t>a^ (wdAaft') tr. , carry, bear; 
 intr., proceed; flow; blow. 
 
 vd end., or. 
 
 vac f., voice ; word. 
 
 vdcya a., blameworthy, culp- 
 able. 
 
 vanijya n., trade. 
 
 vdta m., wind. 
 
 vdnaprastha m., a Brahman in 
 the third stage of his life. 
 
 vdpt f., cistern. 
 
 vayasa m., crow. 
 
 vdyu m., wind. 
 
 vdri n., water. 
 
 oi adv., apart, away, out. 
 
 vinfa (334) a., twentieth. 
 
 vingati (332) num., twenty. 
 
 vinfatitama (334) a., twentieth. 
 
 vikramdditya a., n. /)r., a king. 
 
 \/vij (vijdti) tremble ; \- ud ia 
 
 caus. (udvejdyatt) terrify. 
 
 vitta n., possessions; wealth. 
 
 ^/vid (vetti; veda: 416 — 417) know, 
 consider; caus. (veddyati) inform 
 (dat.) ; h ni caus., idem. 
 
 ]/2vid (vinddti, -te) find, acquire. 
 
 -vid a., knowing. 
 
 vidyd {., knowledge, learning. 
 
 vidvdns a., knowing, wise. 
 
 vidvista pass. part, of vi-dvis, 
 detested. 
 
 vidhi m., rule, fate; Brahma. 
 
 vidheya a., obedient. 
 
 vinaya m., obedience. 
 
 vind prep. , without (with instr. 
 or ace, often postpos). 
 
 vipdka m., ripening; recompense. 
 
 vipra m., Brahman. 
 14* 
 
212 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 vibhu, f. -bhvi, a. pervading, far- 
 reaching; omnipresent, mighty. 
 
 vivdha m., wedding, marriage. 
 
 vivekin a., shrewd. 
 
 ['vif (vifdti) enter; — ■{■ sam-a 
 approach; — + upa seat one- 
 self; 1- pra enter, penetrate. 
 
 vif m. pi., people; the Vai^ya- 
 caste. 
 
 ■oigista part, of vi-fis, excellent, 
 remarkable. 
 
 vifruta part, of vi - gru, famous. 
 
 vifva (231) a., all (Vedie). 
 
 vifodsa m., trast, confidence. 
 
 •oisa n., poison. 
 
 vimu m., n. pr., a god. 
 
 vihaga m., bird. 
 . vihita part, of vi-dhd, ordained. 
 
 ]/ Ivr (vrndti, vr^ute) cover, sur- 
 round ; i- a cover ; 1- apa-d 
 
 open ; \-vi explain ; manifest ; 
 
 1- sam shut. 
 
 \/'2vf (vrnite; vardyati, -te) choose, 
 select. 
 
 vrka m., wolf. 
 
 vrksa m., tree. 
 
 ]/vrt (vdrtate) tarn; exist, subsist, 
 
 be, become ; h wi return home ; 
 
 \-pra get a-going, break out, 
 
 arise; continue; cans, (act.) con- 
 tinue (trans.). 
 
 vrtta n., conduct. 
 
 vrttdnta m. , state of affairs; 
 news. 
 
 vrtra m., n. pr., a demon. 
 
 vrddha part, of vrdh, old. 
 
 ]/ vrdh (vdrdhate) grow ; caus. 
 (vardhdyati, -te) make grow; 
 bring up. 
 
 \/vrs (vdrsati) rain , give rain ; 
 lig., shower down; overwhelm. 
 
 veda m., science, knowledge ; esp. 
 sacred knowledge, holy writ. 
 
 vedand f., pain. 
 
 veddnta m. , a system of philo- 
 sophy. 
 
 vedi f., altar. 
 
 vdi assev. particle, to be sure, in 
 sooth; often untranslated. 
 
 vdifya m., man of the third caste. 
 
 vyanjana n., spice. 
 
 yvyath in caus. (vyathdyati) tor- 
 ment. 
 
 \/vyadh (vidkyati) hit, pierce. 
 
 vyallka a., false, wrong. 
 
 vyavahdra m., trial, law -suit; trade. 
 
 vydkarana n., grammar. 
 
 vydghra m., tiger. 
 
 vyddha m., hunter. 
 
 vyddhi m., disease, illness. 
 
 vyddhita a., sick, ill. 
 
 vyasa m., n. pr. 
 
 \/vraj (vrdjati, -te) proceed; — 
 + wander forth ; become an as- 
 cetic. 
 
 vrana m., wound. 
 
 vrata n., vow, obligation; duty. 
 
 \/fans (fdnsatt) praise; proclaim; 
 
 \- pra proclaim. 
 
 \'fak (fakn6ti)he able; sometimes 
 
 pass., cf. 322. 
 Qaka m., Scythian. 
 fakata m., car. 
 gakuntald f., n. pr. 
 gahkd f., hesitation. 
 gata (332-333) n., a hundred. 
 gatatama a., hundredth. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 213 
 
 gatru m., enemy. 
 
 fdbda m., sound, noise, word. 
 
 }/ gam (fdmyati) become quiet, 
 be extinguished, go out. 
 
 fayya f., bed, couch. 
 
 fara ax., arrow. 
 
 fara'nta n., protection. 
 
 farad f., autumn; year. 
 
 fartra n., body. 
 
 farva m., n. pr., a name of Qiva. 
 
 (akhd f., branch; edition, red- 
 action. 
 
 fdnti f., repose. 
 
 \/fas(fdste) command; rule; pun- 
 ish. 
 
 fdstr m., governor, punisher. 
 
 fastra n., science; text-book. 
 
 y files {giksate) learn. 
 
 fikhara m., summit. 
 
 firoi n., head. 
 
 fiva&., beneficent, gracious; bless- 
 ed; as m., n. yr., a god. 
 
 fifu m., child. 
 
 ^fis (pndsti) leave, leave remain- 
 ing; — + ava remain over, sur- 
 vive ; \-ud idgm ; 1- w set 
 
 apart, distinguish. 
 
 fisya m., pupil, scholar. 
 
 ^pi (fete: 409) lie; sleep; — 
 ■\adhi lie asleep on (ace). 
 
 flta a., cold. 
 
 l/pac (focati) grieve, sorrow. 
 
 fuci a., pare, clean. 
 
 funa^fqia m., n. pr. 
 
 -\i fuhh(fdbhate) be brilliant, shine. 
 
 ^ha a., good; splendid. 
 
 ]/ fus (fusyati) dry up. 
 
 fudra m., man of the fourth caste. 
 
 fudratva n., condition of a QuAra. 
 
 fur a m., hero. 
 
 frgala m., jackal. 
 
 fesa m. n., rest, remainder, 
 
 fesa m., a fabulous snake sup- 
 porting the earth. 
 
 ]ffram (frdmyaii: 131) become 
 weary. 
 
 grama m., pains, trouble. 
 
 fToddha n., oblation to the Manes 
 (cf. in Voc. 16). 
 
 '^fri-\-d {dfrdyate) go for pro- 
 tection, take refuge with (ace). 
 
 fri f., luck, fortune, riches; as 
 n. pr., goddess of fortune; as 
 prefix to proper names, famous, 
 honorable, etc. 
 
 fTtmant a., rich ; famous. 
 
 ]/ fru (ffrnoti, frnute: 391) hear; in 
 caus. (frdvdyati) make hear, i. e. 
 recite, proclaim (ace. pers.). 
 
 fruta part, oi fru; as n , learning. 
 
 fruti f., hearing; holy writ. 
 
 freyas a., better; best; freyas as 
 n., salvation. 
 
 fvan (269) m., dog. 
 
 fvafura m., father-in-law. 
 
 fvafru f., mother-in-law. 
 
 fvas adv., to-morrow. 
 
 y foax (fodsiti: 429) breathe; — 
 -\-sam-d breathe gently: revive; 
 
 \-vi be confident; trust (gen. 
 
 or loc.). 
 
 fveta a., white. 
 
 sattrinfat (329) num., thirty-six. 
 sadaflti (329) num., eighty-six. 
 sas (332) num., six. 
 sasti (332) num., sixty. 
 sastha, f. -I (335), a., sixth. 
 
214 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 so^aga (332) num., sixteen. 
 
 samyukta part, of sam-yuj, pro- 
 vided with, 
 
 samvatsara m., year. 
 
 samgaya m., doubt. 
 
 sakrt adv., once. 
 
 sakthan (sakthi: 275) n., thigh. 
 
 sakhi (274) m., friend. 
 
 sakhi i., female companion, friend. 
 
 sajja a., ready. 
 
 \/ sanj (sdjati; sajjdte: cf. in Voc 
 22) hang on, be fastened on 
 (loc). 
 
 satkara m., hospitality. 
 
 sattra n., sacrifice. 
 
 satya n., truth, righteousness. 
 
 '\/ sad (sidatt) sit; settle down; be 
 
 overcome or exhausted ; [■ a 
 
 approach; \-8a'm-a seat one- 
 self; caus. {-saddyati) meet, en- 
 counter; \- ni sit down; — 
 
 + fra be favorable. 
 
 sada adv., always. 
 
 sadrga, f. -I, a., similar; worthy. 
 
 samdigdha a., doubtful; unsteady. 
 
 samdhyd f., twilight. 
 
 sant, part, of \as, being, existing ; 
 good; as m., good man; as f. 
 satt, good woman, especially a 
 widow who immolates herself. 
 
 sapta (332) num., seven. 
 
 saptati (332) num., seventy. 
 
 saptadapa (332) num., seventeen. 
 
 sabhd {., council, meeting, court. 
 
 sam adv., along with ; completely. 
 
 samaksam adv., before , in the 
 presence of (gen ). 
 
 samartha a., capable, able. 
 
 samagama m., meeting, encounter. 
 samaja m., convention, company. 
 samidh f., fagot. 
 samtpa a., near; as n., vicinity, 
 
 nearness, presence. 
 samudra m., ocean. 
 samunnati f., height, elevation; 
 
 high position. 
 sameta a„ provided with. 
 sampurna part, of Ipr + sam, 
 
 full. 
 samyak adv., well, properly. 
 samraj m., great king; emperor. 
 sarit {., river. 
 sarga m., creation. 
 sarpa m., snake. 
 sarva (231) a., all. 
 sarvatra a., everywhere. 
 savitf m., n.pr., the Sun-god Sa- 
 
 vitar; sun. 
 ^Z sah (sdhate) endure. 
 saha adv., together; prep., often 
 
 postpos. , with, along with, 
 
 (instr.). 
 sahacara m., companion; -j f., 
 
 wife. 
 sakasd adv., suddenly, quickly. 
 sahasra n., a., thousand. 
 sahdya m., companion, helper. 
 sdksin m., witness. 
 sddhana n., means, device. 
 sddhu m., holy man, saint. 
 sSman n., Vedic melody, song; 
 
 pi., the Samaveda. 
 sdmanta m., vassal. 
 sdmpratam adv., at present. 
 sdyam adv., at evening. 
 sdrasa m., crane. 
 sinha m., lion. 
 
I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 215 
 
 \/sic (sincdti) drip, drop, moisten ; 
 
 yabhi anoint as king. 
 
 yflsidh (sedhati) repel; \-prati 
 
 hold back ; forbid. 
 1'' Isidh (sidhyati) succeed ; in caus. 
 
 (sadhdyati) perform; acquire. 
 sindhu m., n. pr., the Indus. 
 sman f., border, boundary; out- 
 skirts. 
 su adv., well; easy; very. 
 {' su (sundti, sunute) press. 
 sukha n., fortune, luck, happiness. 
 sundara, f. -5, a., beautiful. 
 sumanas a., favorably-minded ; as 
 
 f., flower. 
 surdpa m., drunkard. 
 suvarna n., gold. 
 suhrd m., friend. 
 \/su (sute) generate, bring forth; 
 
 — +pra generate. 
 sukta n., Vedic hymn. 
 suta m., driver, charioteer. 
 suda m., cook. 
 surya va., sun. 
 ysr(sdrati) flow; — +anu follow 
 
 up; \-apa go away; in caus. 
 
 {-sdrdyati) drive away. 
 ^srj (srjdti) let go, create; — 
 
 + ud let loose or out; raise (the 
 
 voice^. 
 V srp (sdrpati) move ; — \-pra idem. 
 srsti f ; creation. 
 setu m., bridge, dike. 
 send f., army. 
 \/sev (sevate) serve, honor; — + 
 
 ni dwell; devote oneself to; 
 
 attend. 
 sdinika m., soldier. 
 idinya n., army. 
 
 somam., the intoxicating ferment- 
 ed juice of the Soma-plant. 
 
 skandha m., shoulder. 
 
 y stu (jftauti: 411) praise. 
 
 stuti f., song of praise; praise. 
 
 y stf (strridti, strnute; stj-ndti, 
 stfTtite) scatter, strew ; — -f upa 
 scatter, bestrew. 
 
 stena m., thief. 
 
 stotra a., song of praise. 
 
 stn (276) f., woman. 
 
 y sthd (ti§thati) stand, intr. ; be in 
 or on, etc., be situated; caus. 
 (sthdpdyati) put, place; appoint; 
 stop; — + adhi mount, stand 
 
 over; rule, govern; h anu 
 
 follow out, accomplish ; (cf. also 
 
 p. 96, last note) ; \- ud arise, 
 
 rise (cf. Voc. 40) ; (- upa ap- 
 proach, reach ; — + pra mid., 
 start off; in caus. (act.), send ; — 
 ■{■sam in caus., cause to remain 
 
 sthdna n., place, locality; stead. 
 
 stliita part, of stha; cf. 290, end. 
 
 stMti f., condition. 
 
 ^snd, (snati) bathe. 
 
 sndtaka m., one who has perform- 
 ed the ablutions customary at 
 the end of religious pupilage. 
 
 sndna n., bathing, bath. 
 
 sndyu m., tendon, bowstring. 
 
 snigdha part, of snih, affectionate. 
 
 ]/snih {snihyati) feel inclined to, 
 love (gen., loc). 
 
 snusd {., daughter-in-law. 
 
 ]/sprf (sprgdti) touch. 
 
 \'sprh (spi-hdyati) desire (dat.). 
 
 sma end., slightly assev. ; often 
 accompanies a present tense, 
 
216 
 
 I. Sanskrit-English Glossary. 
 
 giving it the force of an histor- 
 ical tense. 
 
 y smr (smdraW) remember; think 
 oil; call to mind; teach; esp. in 
 pass, smaryate 'it is taught, i. c. 
 traditional'. 
 
 smj-ti f., tradition; law-book. 
 
 sraj f., garland. 
 
 sra§(}- m., creator. 
 
 sva a., own; one's own. 
 
 }/ svanj (svdjate) embrace; — + 
 pari (Cf. Voc. 21) idem. 
 
 svadff a., similar. 
 
 \/svap (svdpiti: 429) sleep. 
 
 svapna m., sleep, dream. 
 
 svayam pron., own self, self. 
 
 svayambhU a., self-existent; asm., 
 epithet of Brahma. 
 
 svarga m., heaven. 
 
 svasf f., sister. 
 
 svadu a., sweet. 
 
 svadhySya m., private recitation 
 of sacred texts. 
 
 evamin m., possessor, lord. 
 
 svairam adv., at pleasure. 
 
 hata part, of han. 
 
 y/han (hdnti: 419) kill; cans. (gha- 
 tdyati), have killed; — + apa 
 remove; — -I- abhi smite; — 
 
 + sam-d wound; 1- m kill; 
 
 l-pra*i hinder; injure, offend; 
 
 — - + earn write. 
 
 -han (283) a., killing. 
 
 hanu f., jaw. 
 
 hanumant m., n. pr., a monkey- 
 king. 
 
 hantr m., killer, slayer. 
 
 hari m., n. pr., a god. 
 
 harina m., gazelle. 
 
 hala m. n., plough, 
 
 havis n., oblation. 
 
 hasta m., baud. 
 
 hastin m., elephant. 
 
 ]/lha {jdhati) abandon, give up; 
 
 neglect. 
 |/2Aa (jihtte: 438) move. 
 
 \/hi Qiindti) send; \-pra idem. 
 
 hi assev. particle, surely ; causal, 
 
 for, because. 
 \'Mn8 (hindsti) injure, destroy. 
 hita part, of Idfia; as adj., ad- 
 vantageous ; as n., advantage. 
 himavant a., snowy; as m., the 
 
 Himalaya Mts. 
 hma part, of Iha, abandoned; 
 
 wanting in; w. instr., without. 
 ^hu (juhdti, juhutd) sacrifice. 
 hutabhuj (nom. -bhuk) m., fire. 
 y hu see hvd. 
 \ hf (hdrati) take away ; steal ; 
 
 plunder; — + apa idem; — + 
 
 a act. and mid., fetch, bring ; 
 
 \- ud-d cite, mention; 1- 
 
 praty-a bring back; — -^ vd 
 
 save, rescue. 
 hrd (281) n., heart. 
 hrdaya n., heart. 
 yhfs (tidr§ati, hrsyati) rejoice, be 
 
 delighted; — + pra idem. 
 he interj., 0, ho. 
 hemanta m., winter. 
 hrasvam adv., near by. 
 \/hri {jihriti) be ashamed. 
 hrl f., modesty, bashfulness. 
 ]/hva (hvdyati) call ; in caus. (Jtva- 
 
 ydyati) have called ; — -{a call, 
 
 summon. 
 
II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 217 
 
 II. English 
 
 abandon, to: tyaj; Ihd. 
 
 able: samartha; (akya. 
 
 able, to be: fak. 
 
 according to : aim, postpos. 
 
 acquire, to: labh; ap. 
 
 Agvins: agvinau, da. 
 
 address, to: hru. 
 
 adore, to: nam -^^ pro. 
 
 adorn, to: \kr-\-dlam. 
 
 advantage: hita n. ; kalyana n. 
 
 adversity; duhkha n. 
 
 afraid, to be : blii. 
 
 afterward : tatas. 
 
 again: punar. 
 
 against : prati. 
 
 age: vayas n. 
 
 all: sarca; (entire) vifva. 
 
 all protecting: vigvapa. 
 
 allow, to: jnd+anu. 
 
 alms : bhiksa f. 
 
 alone (adv.): eva. 
 
 also: eq>i. 
 
 altar: vedi f. 
 
 although : api. 
 
 always : sadd, nityam. 
 
 amuse oneself, to: ram. 
 
 ancient: pwana. 
 
 and : ca, postpos. ; tatha. 
 
 anger: kopa m.; krodha m. 
 
 animal: tiryanc m. 
 
 announce, to: l»td-|-ni, cans. 
 
 -Sanskrit. 
 
 answer, to: bhds+ prati. 
 
 appoint, to : kip, caus. ; yuj + ni, 
 
 approach, to: gam+d; yd+d. 
 
 argument (reason): vac f. 
 
 arise, to: bhu; (get up) sthd+ ud. 
 
 arm: bdhu m. 
 
 army : send f. 
 
 arrive, to: gam + d. 
 
 arrow: fara m.; isu m. 
 
 Aryan: dvija m.; dvijdti m. 
 
 ascetic : muni m. ; yati m. ; pari- 
 vrdj m. ; tapasvin m. ; — to be- 
 come an a., vraj+pra. 
 
 ashamed, to be: hri. 
 
 ashes: bhasman n. 
 
 ask, to (inquire): prach. 
 
 ask for, to: arthaya. 
 
 assembly: sabhd f. ; parisad t, 
 
 astronomy : jyotisa n. 
 
 attain, to: labh; 2vid; lap; dp; 
 dp +ava or pro. 
 
 attainment: Idbha m. 
 
 anthor: kartr m.; (of Vedic 
 hymnns, etc.) drasfr m. 
 
 axe; par a fu m. 
 
 bad: papa. 
 bank : tira n. 
 banner: ketu m. 
 barbarian : yavana m. 
 bathe, to: md. 
 
218 
 
 II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 battle: rana xa. n. ; yuddha n. 
 be, to: hhu; vrt; (be situated) 
 
 stha. 
 bear, to : bhr ; (bring forth) su; 
 
 su +pra. 
 bear : rksa m. 
 beat, to: tad. 
 
 beautiful: sundara; rupavant, 
 beauty: rupa n. 
 become, to: bhuj vft. 
 bee: ali m. ; madhulih m. 
 beg, to : bhiks. 
 begin, to: rabh+d. 
 behind : pafcdt (w. gen.), 
 behold, to: Iks. 
 Benares: kafi f. 
 bend, to: nam. 
 benefit, to; 'ikr+upa. 
 beseech, to : pad+pra. 
 besiege, to: rudh; rudh + upa. 
 best : frestha; jyestha. 
 betake oneself, to: yd; fri + d. 
 better : freyas ; jyayas. 
 bind, to: bandh. 
 biped : dvipad. 
 bird: vihaga m.; pak§in xa. 
 birth : jdti f. ; janman n. 
 black : krma. 
 
 blame, to: rand; lkr-\-tiras. 
 blessed: hhagavant; (as prefix) 
 
 gri. 
 blood: rudhira n. 
 blow, to (intr.) : vah. 
 boat: nau f. 
 body: fanra n.; vapus n.; kdya 
 
 m. ; (heavenly: sun, etc.): jyotis n. 
 bone: asihan n. 
 book: (manuscript) pustaka n.; 
 
 (work) grantha m. 
 
 born, to he: jan; jan + ud. 
 
 both : ubha da. 
 
 bow, to : nam. 
 
 boy : bdla m. ; kumdra m. 
 
 Brahman: brdlimana at.; dcija m.; 
 
 dvijdti m.; vipra m. 
 branch; gdkhd f. 
 brave: dhira. 
 breast: uras n. ; vaksas n. 
 bridegroom; vara m. 
 bring, to: ni+a; hr + d. 
 broad : prthu ; uru. 
 brother: bhrdtr m. 
 burn, to : dah. 
 business: kdrya n. 
 but: tu; kitiitu; punar. 
 
 call, to: hed; (name) vac; vad. 
 
 capable: saviartha. 
 
 caste: jdti f. 
 
 cattle : go m. pi. 
 
 cease, to: fam; ram + vi. 
 
 celebrated: vigruta; primant. 
 
 chain : hara m. 
 
 charioteer; suta m. 
 
 charm: kanti f.. 
 
 check, to: dam, cans. ; rudh, 
 
 chest: vaksas n.; uras n. 
 
 child: bdla m. ; pepu m. 
 
 choose, to: 2«r. 
 
 cistern: vdpl f. 
 
 citizen : pdura m. 
 
 city: nagara n. ; -i f.; pur f. 
 
 cleverness: buddhi f. 
 
 climb, to : rwA + d. 
 
 close, to : Ivr + sam ; IdAa + api, 
 
 cloud: megha m. 
 
 coachman: suta at. 
 
 come, to: gam + a; yd + a; i ■{■ 
 
II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 219 
 
 abhi or a; come out : gam + m's; 
 
 yd + nis. 
 command, to: dif+d; jnd-\-d cans, 
 command: ajnd f . ; nidega m. 
 commit, to: car -)- d; Vkr. 
 companion: sahdya m.; sdhaca- 
 
 ra m. 
 company: samdja m. 
 compose, to: rac. 
 conduct: vrtta n. 
 confine, to : rudh + ni. 
 conquer, to : ji. 
 consecrate, to : ni + upa. 
 consider, to: cint; Ivid. 
 consort : patrii f. 
 cook, to: pac. 
 copying: lekhana n. 
 cord, sacred : upavtta n. 
 count, to : ganaya, 
 courageous : tejasvin. 
 course: gati f. 
 cover, to : Ivr (mid.) ; Ivr + sam 
 
 (mid.), 
 cow: dhenu f.; go f. 
 cowherd: gopa m. 
 create, to: srj. 
 creator: dhdtr m.; srastr m. 
 creature: prdnin m.; jagat n. 
 crescent: kald f. 
 cross, to: tr. 
 crow: vdyasa m. 
 curds: dadhan n. 
 cut, to: krt; chid. 
 cut off, to : kft + ava; chid + ava. 
 
 daily: nitya; (adv.) nityam; pro- 
 
 tydham. 
 dancing: nrtta n. 
 
 daughter: kanyd f. ; putrl f . ; f/w- 
 
 hitr f. 
 day: divasa ni. ; rfina n. ; aAan n. ; 
 
 d. by d. : dine dine ; pratyaham ; 
 
 a day and a night: ahordtra n. 
 dead: mrta; vipanna. 
 decide, to (settle) : nl + nis. 
 deed : karman n. 
 deity : devatd f. 
 delicate: taruna. 
 delight, to (tr.): tus, caus. 
 deliverance: mukti f. 
 demon: rdksasa m. 
 depart, to : i + apa. 
 describe, to: varnaya. 
 desire, to : luhh. 
 destroy, to: hhanj. 
 despise, to : man + ava ; bhu + pari. 
 determine, to: d + nis or vi-nis. 
 devoted: hhakta; snigdha. 
 devotion: bhakti f. 
 die: aksa m. 
 
 die, to: mr; i + pra; pad+ vi. 
 difficult: durlabha; duskara. 
 dig, to: khan. 
 diligence: udyoga m. 
 diligently; bhrgam. 
 disappear, to : nag + vi. 
 disease : ruj f. ; vyddhi m. 
 dismount, to : ruh + ava. 
 disown, to: khyd -^^ prati-d. 
 dispute, to : vad + vi. 
 distress, to : du. 
 distribute, to : bhaj + vi. 
 divine : divya. 
 do, to: \kr; car -^^ sam- a. 
 domestic: grhya. 
 dog : gvan m. ; pun? f. 
 1 door : dvdr f. 
 
220 
 
 II. English-Sanskrit-Glossary. 
 
 doorkeeper: dvahstha m. 
 dove : kapota m. 
 draw, to : vah. 
 drink, to : Ipd. 
 driver: suta m. 
 drop, to : sic. 
 drop: bindu m. 
 
 dwell, to: Svas; vas + ni; dwell 
 on (fig.): sanj. 
 
 ear: karna m. 
 
 earth : prtMvl f. ; bhu f. ; hhumi f. 
 
 east, eastern : jirdnc ; the E. : praci 
 
 f., sc. dig. 
 eat, to ; ad; 2af; bhaks; bhuj. 
 eating: bhaksana n. 
 eclipse, to : Ikr + tiras. 
 eight: asta. 
 eighth: astama. 
 eighty: afiti f. 
 eightieth : agititama. 
 eldest; jyestha. 
 elephant : gaja m. ; hastin m. 
 eleventh : ekddaga. 
 emerge, to : fr + ud. 
 eminent, to be: gubh. 
 emperor: samrdj m. 
 encompass, to : Ivr ; chid + ava. 
 end: anta m. 
 endure, to: sah. 
 
 enemy: ari m.; gatru m. ; dvis m. 
 enjoy, to : bhuj. 
 enjoyment: bhoga m. 
 enter, to : vig + pra. 
 entrancing: manohara. 
 envoy: duta m. 
 entrust, to : Ida + pra. 
 equip, to : nah -t sam. 
 eulogy: stotra n. 
 
 even (adv.): api. 
 
 every : sarva. 
 
 evil (adj.) : papa ; (subst.) papa n. 
 
 exceedingly: ati. 
 
 explain, to: 6™ + «j; Iwr + ot; 
 
 caks + vi-d. 
 exterminate, to : chid + ud. 
 eye: netra n. ; caksus n. ; aksan n.; 
 
 locana n. 
 
 face: mukha n. 
 
 fagot: samidh f. 
 
 fair: sundara. 
 
 fall, to: pat; pat + ni; fall to 
 
 one's lot: r; fallen (killed): 
 
 patita; mfta. 
 fame : kirti f. ; yagas n, 
 family : van^a m. 
 famous: vigruta. 
 fast (firm): drdha. 
 fasten, to: bandh. 
 fat: pma; pusta. 
 father: janaka m.; pitr m. 
 fault, to find: \kr-\- tiras. 
 faultless: anavadya. 
 fear: bhaya n. 
 field : ksetra n. 
 fifth: pancama. 
 fight, to : yudh. 
 filled: pUrna; sampurna. 
 finally : ante. 
 find, to: 2oid. 
 finish, to: dp + sam. 
 fire: agni m. ; hutabhuj m. 
 firewood: samidh f. 
 first : prathama ; at first ; jjra- 
 
 fish : matsya m. ; mina m. 
 fit, to: yuj. 
 
n. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 221 
 
 five: panca. 
 
 flee, to : paldtj. 
 
 flit, to: bhram. 
 
 flocis : pafu m. pi. 
 
 flower: puspa n.; sumanas f. 
 
 fly, to: pat; fly up : pat + ud. 
 
 fodder : ghasa m. 
 
 foe: ari m. ; fatru m. 
 
 follow, to : gam + anu; i + anu. 
 
 fond, to be: tus. 
 
 food: anna n. 
 
 foot : pdda m. ; pad m. 
 
 force : bala n. 
 
 foreign: para. 
 
 forehead : lalata n. 
 
 forest: vana n. 
 
 forest-dwelling: cfflwauasjn. 
 
 form, to : \ma + nis. 
 
 formula (sacrificial): yajus n. 
 
 fortune : prj f., often pi. ; goddess 
 
 of f. : pri f. 
 forty: catvaringat f. 
 four: catur. 
 free, to : muc. 
 friend: mitra n.; sakhi m. ; su- 
 
 hrd m. 
 friond-betrayer : mitradruh. 
 front: agra n.; in f. of: agre, 
 
 samaksam (gen.), 
 fruit: phala n. 
 fruitful : phalavant. 
 full: purna; sampurna. 
 
 gain, to: labh. 
 garden: udydna n. 
 garland: mala f.; sraj f. 
 gate: dvar f. 
 gather, to : ci ■\- sam. 
 gazelle: hari^a m. ; mrga m. 
 
 generous : ddtr. 
 
 get, to: labk; lag; dp. 
 
 gift: rfa«o n. 
 
 gird, to: nah + sam. 
 
 girdle: mekhald f. 
 
 girl: kanyd f. ; bald f. 
 
 give, to : yam ; Ida, 
 
 giver: ddtr m. 
 
 glance: drg f. 
 
 glory : Mrti f. ; yagas n. 
 
 go, to: car: yd; gam; i; go on 
 
 (continue) : vrt + pra. 
 god: dewa m.; goddess: devt f. 
 gold: SMDfflrna n. 
 govern, to : gds ; rajyarh kr. 
 good: sddhu; sant. 
 gracious: giva. 
 gracioiisness : krpd f. 
 grain : dhdnya n. 
 grammar: vydkarana n. 
 grasp, to ; grah. 
 graze, to : car. 
 great: mahant. 
 great king: mahardja m. 
 greater: mahlyas; adhika. 
 greatly: bahu; blirgam. 
 greedy : lubdha. 
 Greek: yavana m. 
 greet, to : vand ; vad + abhi, cans, 
 grieve, to: du. 
 
 ground ; bhumi f. ; on the g. : adhas, 
 grind, to: pis. 
 guard, to: raks; gopaya. 
 guest: athiti m. 
 guilt: pdpa n.; enas n. 
 
 hand : kara m. ; pdni m. ; hasta m. 
 hang, to : sanj ; lag. 
 happiness : sukha n. 
 
222 
 
 II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 happy, to be: mud. 
 
 hard to find : durlabha. 
 
 harm, to : Ikr + apa. 
 
 hate, to : dvis ; dvis + pra. 
 
 hear, to: fru. 
 
 heart : hrdaya n. ; hfd n. 
 
 heaven : svarga m. 
 
 heavy: guru. 
 
 hell : naraka m. 
 
 here: atra; iha. 
 
 hero : gura m. ; vira m. 
 
 hesitation: ganka f. 
 
 high: ucchrita. 
 
 high water: jswra m. 
 
 hold shut, to: Idha + api. 
 
 holy: sadhu. 
 
 holy writ: fruti f. 
 
 home (adv.) ; grham. 
 
 honey: madhu n. 
 
 honor, to: puj; nam; sev. 
 
 hope: afffl f. 
 
 horse: agva m. 
 
 house : grha n. : master of the h., 
 
 grhastha m. 
 householder : grhastha m. 
 house-priest : purohita m. 
 how?: katham. 
 human: manusa. 
 hunter: vyadha m. 
 hurl, to: 2as; ksip. 
 husband: pati m.; hhartf m. 
 hymn: sukta o. 
 
 I: aham, 
 
 impart, to : Ivid + ni, caus. 
 inclined, to be: snik. 
 increase, to: vrdh. 
 India: Iharatakhari^a m. 
 initiate, to: nl + upa. 
 
 injustice: adharma m. 
 intelligence: buddhi f. 
 iron: loha n. 
 
 jaw: hanu f. 
 
 jewel: wa?ii m.; rafna n. ; 6Am- 
 sana n. 
 
 kill, to : mr, caus. ; Aaw ; han, caus. 
 
 kindle, to: ic2A. 
 
 king: nrpa m.; wfpafj m.; pa- 
 
 rthiva m. ; raj'an m. ; bhubhuj 
 
 m.; hhubhft m. 
 kingdom: rdjya n. 
 know, to : Ivid ; ^na. 
 knowledge : vidya, f. ; jwana n. 
 
 lament, to: lap + «J. 
 
 land: dega m. 
 
 language: Moja f. 
 
 last, at: ante. 
 
 law: dharma m. ; w'd^i m. 
 
 law-book: smrti f.; dharmagd- 
 
 stra n. 
 law-suit: vyavahdra m. 
 lead, to: wi. 
 leader: neir. 
 learn, to: gam + awa; Iwid; i + 
 
 adhi. 
 learned : vidvdns ; paniita ; kugala. 
 learning: vidyd f. 
 leather: carman n. 
 leavings: ucchista n. 
 lesson: adhydya m. 
 lick, to: ZiA; M + ava. 
 life: jlvita a.; dyus n.; carita n. 
 light: y^oii* n. 
 light (not heavy): laghu, 
 like: iva. 
 
II. English-Sanskrit Glossary, 
 
 223 
 
 limb: anga n. 
 
 lion: sinha m. 
 
 lip : o^ba m. 
 
 listen, to: fru. 
 
 live, to: jiv; vrt; an + pra. 
 
 long: dlrgha; (adv.) dram. 
 
 look at , to : Iks + pra. 
 
 lord: ifvara m.; /)a<i m. 
 
 lotus: padma m. n. 
 
 love, to : snih. 
 
 love, god of 1. : kama m. 
 
 lunar mansion: naksatra a. 
 
 maiden : kanyd f. ; hcdd f. 
 
 maidservant: dasl f. 
 
 make, to: Ikr. 
 
 man (t'iV): nara m.; pumahs m.; 
 
 purusa m.; (Aomo): j'ana m.; 
 
 mdnat'a m. ; manusyaia. ; nara m. 
 mankind : jana m. pi. 
 many: bahu; prahhuta. 
 march, to : cal + pra. 
 marriage: vivaha ra. 
 marry, to : ni + pan. 
 master: bhartr m. ; pa<i m. 
 mat: kata m. 
 means: sadhana n. 
 medicine: Susadha a. 
 meet, to (intr.) : ^awi + sam (mid.), 
 meeting: samdgama m. 
 melted butter: ghrta n. 
 mention, to : hr + itc^-o. 
 merchant: vanij m. 
 merit: puny a n. 
 mighty: balin; balavant; vibhu. 
 milk, to: duh. 
 milk : tera n. ; payas n. 
 mind: manas n.; maii f. 
 minister: mantrin m. 
 
 misfortune: duhkha n.; opad f. 
 
 modesty: An f. 
 
 moisten, to: sic. 
 
 monarch; samrdj m. 
 
 money: dhana a.; vasu n. 
 
 month: mdsa m. 
 
 moon: candramas m. ; candra m.; 
 indu m. 
 
 mostly : bhuyas. 
 
 morning, in the: pratar. 
 
 mother: matr f. ; ambd f. 
 
 mother-in-law : fvafru f. 
 
 mountain : giri m. ; parvata m. 
 
 month : mukha n. 
 
 much: prabhuta; bahu. 
 
 mouthful : grasa m. 
 
 murder, to: mr, caus.; han; ban, 
 caus. 
 
 must: arli; of. §320 and Exer- 
 cise 30. 
 
 name: naman n. ; by n. : nama. 
 name, to: vac; vad; (reckon) 
 
 ganaya. 
 neck: kantha m. 
 neglect, to: \hd. 
 net: jcHa n. 
 never: na kadd + apt, aid, or 
 
 cana. 
 news: vrttdnta m. 
 night: rdtri f. 
 
 no one: na ka + api, cid, or cana. 
 north, northern: udanc; the N.: 
 
 udicl f., sc. dif. 
 not: na; md. 
 nothing: na kirn -i- apt, cid, or 
 
 cana. 
 now : adhuna ; sdmpratam. 
 
224 
 
 II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 O: he. 
 
 obedient : vidheya. 
 
 oblation: haois n. 
 
 occur, to: drg, pass.; ^vid, pass. 
 
 ocean: udadhi m.; samudra m. 
 
 offend, to: han+prati; Xha. 
 
 offering (sacrificial) : havis n. 
 
 old: vrddha; oMer: jy ay as. 
 
 omnipresent : vibhu. 
 
 once: sakrt. 
 
 one: eka. 
 
 only: eva. 
 
 opinion ; mati f. ; mata n. 
 
 or; vd, postpos. ; athava. 
 
 ordain, to: kip, caus. ; \dhd-\-vi 
 
 ordained : vihita. 
 order, to : jna + a, caus. 
 other; anya; itara, apara. 
 outskirts: siman f. 
 overcome, to : 2pr. 
 overwhelm, to: vrs. 
 own, one's own: sva. 
 ox: anaduh m. 
 
 pair: yugma n. 
 
 palace : prdsdda va. 
 
 parents : pitr, m. du. 
 
 part: hhaga m. 
 
 path : marga m. ; panthan m. 
 
 pearl : mukta f. 
 
 peasant: krpvala m. 
 
 penance : tapas n. ; prayagcitta n. 
 
 people : jana, pi. ; loka, s. and pi. 
 
 perform , to : sidh , caus. ; car; 
 
 car+sam-a; (a sacrifice) tan, 
 perfume: gandha m. 
 perish, to: naf + vi. 
 pestle: musala m. n. 
 pierce, to: vyadh. < 
 
 pilgrimage: tirthayatra f. 
 pious: sadhu. 
 
 place, to: Idha; dha + sam-d. 
 
 place: pada n.; defa va. 
 
 plan: abhiprdya m. 
 
 plant, to : ruh, caus. 
 
 play, to : div. 
 
 please, to: rue. 
 
 pleasure: sukhan.; with p., pleas- 
 antly: sukkena; (wish, choice) 
 icchd f. ; kdma ca. ; at p. : sve- 
 ccJiaya. 
 
 plough: Idngala n.; hala va. n. 
 
 plough, to : krs. 
 
 plunder, to: lut),th; hr ; lup. 
 
 poem : kdvya u. 
 
 poet: kavi m. 
 ■point out: to; dig. 
 
 polluted, to be: du§. 
 
 poor: daridra. 
 
 possessions: dhana n. 
 
 post, sacrificial : yupa xa, 
 
 pot: ghata m. 
 
 pound, to : pis. 
 
 pour, to: hu. 
 
 power: hala n. 
 
 powerful : halin ; halavant. 
 
 praise, song of p. : stutii. ; stotra n. 
 
 praise, to: gam; stu. 
 
 pray for, to: arth. 
 
 prescription: ddega va. 
 
 presence: samtpa n. 
 
 previous ; pUrva. 
 
 priest: rtvij va. 
 
 prince: kumdra va. 
 
 property: vasu n.; dhana n. 
 
 prosperity: bhuti f. 
 
 protect, to: rak? ; ipa; pd, caus. 
 
 protection; gararj.a n. 
 
II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 225 
 
 protector: raksitf m. 
 punish, to: dan4aya; fas. 
 punishment: dar!,4a m. 
 put, to: sths, caus.; Idha; yuj 
 + ni. 
 
 quadruped: catmpad. 
 
 quarter: pdda ca.; (of the sky) 
 
 dig f. 
 queen : devt f. ; rdjhi f. ; mahisi f. 
 
 rain : vfsti f. 
 
 rain, to (give rain) : vfs. 
 
 raise, to (the voice) : srj + ud. 
 
 ray: pdda ni. ; ragmi m. 
 
 .reach, to : lahh ; dp + pra. 
 
 read, to: » + adhi; (aloud) path; 
 
 vac, caus. 
 realm: rdjya n. 
 receive, to: lahh; grah; grdh 
 
 + prati; Ida + a. 
 recitation (private) : svddhydya m 
 recite, to : path ; (tell) kath. 
 reckon, to: ganaya. 
 recompense, to : \kr + prati. 
 reduced (in fortune): ksijf.a. 
 region: dif f.; defa m. 
 rein : ragmi m. 
 rejoice, to: tus; mud, 
 remember, to: smr. 
 restrain, to : grah + ni. 
 return, to : vrt + ni. 
 rice: tan^-ula m. 
 
 reverence, to: nam; puj; ds + upa 
 reward : phala n. 
 rich: dhanin; grlmant; vasumant 
 
 (comp. and sup. sometimes va 
 
 siyas, vasisfha). 
 
 Perry, Sanskrit Primer. 
 
 riches : dhana n. ; vasu n. ; gri {.; 
 
 rdi m. 
 righteousness: satya n. 
 right (subst.): dharma m. 
 Rigveda: fgveda m. ; fcas f. pi. 
 rise, to (of sun, etc.) : gam + ud ; 
 
 i + ud. 
 river : nadl f . ; sarit f. 
 road: mdrga m.; panthan va. 
 rob, to: mus, Iw^th. 
 root: mula n. 
 rub, to : mrj ; mrj, caus. 
 royal: raja-, in cpd. 
 rule, to : sthd + adhi ; Ig. 
 ran, to: dhdv; dru. 
 running: dhdvana n. 
 
 sacrament: samskdra m. 
 sacrifice, to: yaj; (for some one) 
 
 yaj, caus. 
 sacrifice: yajna m. 
 sacrificial formula: yajus n. 
 sage: rsi m. 
 sake of, for the : artha in cpd 
 
 (cf. 375, 3). 
 salt: lavana n. 
 
 salvation: muktif.; hhutii.; hitaa. 
 satiated: trpta, 
 satisfy, to: trp, caus.; (oneself) 
 
 trp. 
 save, to : h}" + ud. 
 Savitar : savitf m. 
 say: vad; vac; bru. 
 scatter, to: 2kf. 
 scholar: gi§ya: (learned man) 
 
 pa'i}4ita m. 
 science: gdstra n. 
 sea: udadhi m.; samudra m, 
 I seat oneself, to : sad + ni. 
 15 
 
226 
 
 II. Eoglish-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 second : dvittya. 
 
 see, to: pag; dfg; Iks; Iks + pra. 
 
 seer: rsi m. 
 
 send, to: stha+pra, cans. 
 
 servant: bJirtya m.; bhrtaka m. 
 
 serve: sev. 
 
 set, to: (place) Idha; (intr., of 
 Sim, etc.) i + astam; gam+ astam. 
 
 shade: chayd f. 
 
 she, etc. : sa, f. of ta. 
 
 shine, to: pibfi; raj; bhd + vi. 
 
 ship : ndu f. 
 
 shoe: updnah f. 
 
 show, to: drf, cans. 
 
 shrewd: patu. 
 
 shut, to: \dhd + api; Ivr + sam. 
 
 sick : vyddhita ; rugna. 
 
 side: paksa ta. 
 
 sin : papa n. ; enaj n. 
 
 sing, to: igd. 
 
 singing: gita n. 
 
 sip, to : cam + d. 
 
 sister: soasr f. 
 
 sit, to : sad; sad + ni. 
 
 situated, to be : vft. 
 
 six: sas. 
 
 sixth : sastha. 
 
 skilled: papi. 
 
 sky: div f. ; rfip f. pi.; dkafa n. 
 
 slave: rfa«a m.; ddsl f. 
 
 slay, to: rar, cans.; Aaw. 
 
 sleep, to: svap; fl. 
 
 smell, to; ghra. 
 
 smite, to: hr + pra; han + abhi. 
 
 so: Hi; evam: tathd. 
 
 soldier: sdinika m. 
 
 some (pi.): eka pi.; some • • oth- 
 ers : ke cit • • ke cit. 
 
 sometimes: kva cit. 
 
 son : putra m. ; s&ta m. 
 son-in-law : jdrtiatr m. 
 song: gir f. ; glta n.; (of praise) 
 
 stotra D. ; stuii f. 
 soul: dtman m. 
 sow, to: vap. 
 speak, to: vad; vac; bhds. 
 spear: kunta m. 
 speech : vac f . ; bhasd f. 
 spoon : juhu f. 
 stand, to (intr.): sthd. 
 state, to: bru. 
 steal, to: cur; mus; lun{h. 
 steer: go m. 
 stick: dan4a m. 
 
 stone : drsad f. ; (precious) mani m. 
 stop, lo (tr.): rudh. 
 strange (another's): para, 
 street: rathyd {.; mdrga m. 
 strike, to: ta4.. 
 strive, to: yat. 
 strongest: balistha, 
 study, to : i -H adhi (mid.) ; las + 
 
 abhi. 
 subject: prajd f. 
 such: idff. 
 suffering: duhkha n. 
 suffused: ruddha. 
 suitable: anurUpa. 
 summit: gikhara m. 
 snn : bhdnu m. ; dditya m. 
 survive, to: fi§ + tid. 
 sweet: svddu. 
 swift: dfu. 
 sword: asi m. 
 
 take, to: da + a; grah; grah + 
 
 prati. 
 take place, to: jan; bhu 
 
II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 227 
 
 take refuge, to: padipra. 
 
 tasteful: rasavant. 
 
 tax: kara tn. 
 
 teach, to: i ■\- adhi, caus.; dig + 
 
 up a. 
 teacher: guru m.; acarya m. 
 tear: agru n.; baspa m. 
 tell, to: kathaya; vad. 
 temple: devakula n. 
 ten; daga. 
 tend to, to : Mp. 
 terrify, to : bhl, caus. ; vij + ud, 
 
 caus. 
 text-book: fostra n. 
 that: ta; ayam; asau. 
 then: tada. 
 there: tatra. 
 thereupon: tatas. 
 thief: stena m. ; cdura m. 
 think, to: cint ; man; think on: 
 
 smr; dhya. 
 third : trtiya. 
 thirty: tringat. 
 thirty-three : trayastrmgat. 
 this: ta; ayam. 
 thou: tvam. 
 three : tri. 
 threefold : trivrt. 
 thrice: tris. 
 
 thus: iti; evam; tatha. 
 time: kala m. 
 to-day: adya. 
 to-morrow: gvas. 
 tongue : jihvd f. 
 torment, to : pid; vyaih, caus. 
 touch, to : sprg. 
 trade : vyavahara m. ; vanijya. 
 travel, to : vas + pra; stha + pra 
 
 n. (mid.). 
 
 treasury: kosa m. 
 
 tree : vfksa m. ; taru m. 
 
 tremble, to: kamp. 
 
 true : satya; (faithful) bliakta, 
 
 truth : satya n. 
 
 twelfth: dvddaga. 
 
 twelve: dvddaga. 
 
 twenty-eight: a^tdvingati. 
 
 twenty-seven: saptavingati. 
 
 twice: dvis. 
 
 twilight: sandhyd f. 
 
 twine: bandh. 
 
 two: dva. 
 
 umbrella: chattra n. 
 understand, to : gam + ava, 
 unite, to (intr.) : gam + sam (mid.), 
 untruth : anrta n. ; asatya n. 
 upanisad : upanisad f. 
 useful, to be: sev. 
 
 vassal : samanta m. 
 
 Veda: veda m. 
 
 verse : gloha m. ; (of Rigveda) to f. 
 
 vessel: pdtra n. 
 
 victorious, to \)&: ji. 
 
 victory: jaya m. 
 
 view (opinion) : mati f. ; mata n. 
 
 village: grama m. 
 
 virtue : dharma m. ; punya n. 
 
 visit, to : gam, + abhi. 
 
 voice: vdc f. ; gir f. 
 
 wagon: ratha m. 
 
 warrior: ksatriya m. 
 
 wash, to: k§al; sprg. 
 
 water : jala a. ; vdri n. ; ap f. pi. 
 
 wave: vici m. 
 
 we: vayam. 
 
 15» 
 
228 
 
 II. English-Sanskrit Glossary. 
 
 wear, to : dhr, caus. ; bhr. 
 
 weary, to become: gram. 
 
 weave, to: granth; bandh. 
 
 wedding: vivaha m. 
 
 weep, to: rud. 
 
 west, western: pratyanc; the 
 
 West : pratict f., gc. dif. 
 what (rel.): ya. 
 wheel: cakra n. 
 when (rel.) : yadd. 
 when ? : kada. 
 whence?: kutas. 
 where (rel.): yatra. 
 where?: kva; kutra. 
 which (rel.) : ya. 
 which (of two)?: katara. 
 white: gveta. 
 whither?: kva; kutra. 
 who (rel.): ya. 
 who?: ka. 
 whoever : ya ka + api, aid or 
 
 cana; often by rel. alone, 
 whole: krtsna. 
 why?: kutas; kasmdi. 
 wicked: papa. 
 
 wife : bharya f. ; ndri f. ; patm f. 
 win, to : ji. 
 wind : vdyu m. ; vdta m. 
 
 winter: hemanta m. 
 
 wipe, to : mj-j; mrj + apa or pari. 
 
 wish, to* is. 
 
 with: saha, w. inst.; or by instr. 
 
 alone, 
 withered : mldna. 
 without: vind (instr., ace), 
 witness: sdksin m. 
 wolf: vrka m. 
 woman : narl f. ; vadhU f. ; stri f. ; 
 
 jayd f. 
 woman-servant: ddsi f. 
 wood : kdstha n. ; (forest) vana n. 
 word : vac f. ; gabda m. 
 work : karman n. ; (literary) gra- 
 
 ntha m. 
 world: loka m.; jagat n.; bhv,- 
 
 vana n. 
 world-spirit: brahman n. 
 worship, to : puj. 
 worthy: sadrga, 
 wound, to : ksan. 
 wreath : maid f. ; sraj f. 
 
 year : samvatsara m. ; varsa m. n. 
 yoke, to: yuj, caus. 
 yonder: tatra. 
 young: yuvan. 
 
Appendix. 
 
 Hindu Names of Letters. 
 
 The Hindas call the different sounds, and the characters re- 
 presenting them, by the word kara (* maker') added to the sound 
 of the letter, if a vowel, or to the letter followed by a, if a con- 
 sonant. Thus, a (both sound and character) is called akara; «, 
 ukdra; k, kakara; and so on. But sometimes kdra is omitted, and 
 a, fi, ka, etc., are used alone. The r, however, is never called ra- 
 kdra, but only ra or repha ('snarl'). The anitsvdra and visarga 
 are called by these names alone. 
 
 Modern Hindu Accentuation of Sansl(riL 
 
 In the pronunciation of Sanskrit almost all Brabmans employ, 
 "with insignificant variations, an ictus-accent, which is quite different 
 from the older musical accent (svara) described in Indian and 
 European grammars, and employed nowadays exclusively in the rec- 
 itation of the Veda. The older system, moreover, as marked in 
 the Vedic texts, has been subjected to very considerable modi- 
 fications by the Hindus in the traditional recitations of the Yedic 
 schools. 
 
 The modern ictus-accent is weaker than that of English. The 
 more important rules governing its use are as follows: 
 
 1. a. In primitive verbs and derivatives from them the root- 
 syllable is usually accented, b. But the accent never goes further 
 back than the fourth place, and seldom back of the third. It may 
 rest on the third syllable only if the penult be short; on the fourth, 
 only if both antepenult and penult be short ; thus, kdranam, kdranat, 
 but karanena; hodhati, ksipasi, ndgyatha, but bodhdvah, ksipdmah, 
 napydnti; dtihitd, duhiiaram, but duMtfndm. 
 
 2. Derivatives from nouns generally retain the accent of the 
 
230 Appendix. 
 
 primitive, with the limitations given in 1. 6.; thus, rdnku, rankava; 
 gdrga, g&rgyal}, but gargyayani. A naturally short vowel in the 
 penult, if followed by a group of consonants containing y or «, 
 does not generally become long by position; thus, prdbala, praba- 
 lyam; ukta, uktatvat. 
 
 3. In verbs and verbal derivatives joined with prepositions, in 
 augmented and, reduplicated forms, and sometimes in declensional 
 forms, the accent is recessive, if the root or stem-syllable be short; 
 thus, Agamat, dnatam, anA§thitam, but utkrsfam, niruktam ; dgamat, 
 dksipat, but hibhdrti, tus{S,va,jagdu. Polysyllabic prepositions, when 
 prefixed to other words, retain their own accent as secondary accent ; 
 thus, upagaccJiati, lipagamatam. 
 
 4. In compounds, unless the first member be a monosyllabic 
 word, each part generally retains its own accent, but that of the 
 principal member is the strongest ; thus, rdjapurusam, pdrvatagi- 
 kharakaram ; but unmukham, diggajam, prafisyam. 
 
 The division of syllables is much more apparent in Sanskrit 
 than in English. In reading Sanskrit prose the Hindus generally 
 drop into a sort of sing-song reciteiiwo. Verses are always chanted. 
 
Corrections and Additions. 
 
 p. 10. At end o^§ 38 add: The four semivowels are always sonant. 
 
 P. 27. Add to § 102: The final yg( a of the root is shortened in 
 the reduplicated stem, except in the first persons. — Add 
 to § 103 : In the dual and plural of all declensions the 
 vocative is like the nominative. 
 
 P. 31. Add to § 112.5: It is also used as terminus ad quern. 
 
 P. 39, 1. 7. For: makes some forms with short ^ a read: makes 
 also forms according to the unaccented a -class: thus, 
 >fTf?T bhrdmati etc. 
 
 P. 40, 1. 7. At beginning of line insert: the. 
 
 P. 43, Vocab., s. v. "a pr. After: overcome insert: (evils). 
 
 P. 49, Vocab., s. v. ifj^ + ^[j^. After : meet insert : (yo, instr.'). 
 
 P. 53, 1. 9 from below. After "^^ insert: | ^. 
 
 P. 56, 1.10. For: besought read: beseech. — L. 11. For: were 
 read: are. 
 
 P. 59. At end of § 188 add: The impf. pass, is similarly inflected. 
 
 P. 60, 1. 19. For: pratisedati read: pratisedhati. 
 
 P. 65. Dele the first word (the) of the page. 
 
 P. 70, 1. 10 fiom below. Bead: accompanied. 
 
 P. 72, 1. 12. After: are insert: so. 
 
 P. 73, 1. 9 from below. For: wf^ read: «r^:. 
 
 P. 74, 1. 7. After: saved insert: (ud-hr: cf. § 267). 
 
 P. 87, 1. 12. Bead: Final "^ and ^ of a stem regularly become. 
 
 P. 90, last line. Bead: posspssive. 
 
 P. 117, 1. 6. For: TTSTT rend: TrfTPTT. 
 
 P. 119, Vocab. Insert in last line: + 'Wf{,—'^ come together, join. 
 
 P. 126. Add to § 329 the following: Note also: 1[T^ i^, etc., but 
 for 82 only ^sfifd; -^f^fll 23, ^'aHjilSltT; 33, for 
 83 only ■anftffT; ^'t^^ i<?, ^fftsif^l ^S, etc.; '^reT- 
 f^^lfTT 28, ^TOTN^m: 5*' ^a i ^nn fl 88. 
 
Corrections and Additions. 
 
 P. 135, 1. 5. For: TT!^'! read: « f \' <^ «t. 
 
 P. 137, 1. 2. Read: ^TT^T^f^^- 
 
 P. 138, 1. 12. Dele gf\iif%^ 'firm in battle'. 
 
 P. 180, 1. 17. For: ^*if^ read: f^JT^. 
 
 P. 182, 1. 1. For: f^fsit read: fitp^lj^. 
 
 P. 186, 1. 1. Read: ^t^zrfTT- 
 
 P. 190, 1. 6. For: suffix read: suffice. 
 
 P. 192, 1. 13 from below. For: ^^^m[^ read: ^T^^. 
 
 P. 196, col. 1. S. V. ]/«, insert: + sam-d come together, join. 
 
 P. 197, col. 1. Insert: rsabhadatta m., n. pr. 
 
 P. 199, col. 1. S. V. ygam, insert : + upa-d come near. 
 
 P. 205, col. 2, 1. 2 from below. Read: \'lpr {piparti; caaa. pUrdyati) 
 fill. Aho insert in Vocah.: \/2 pj- (pdrdyati) overcome 
 (evils); prevail. 
 
 P. 207, col. 2, 1. 5. Read: bhiksd f., begging, alms. 
 
 P. 208, col. 1, 1. 2. Read: ]/bhram (bhrdmati, -te; bhrdmyati: 131). — 
 Col. 2, 1. 11. Read: Greek jU))'; cf. 195, 486. — L. 9 from 
 below. After: release insert: let fly, sboot. 
 
 P. 209, col. 2, 1. 2. Insert: +pra give, give in marriage. — S. v. 
 ]/yuj + ni, add: caus. set (as jewels). 
 
 P. 212, col. 1, 1. 5. Insert: + pra idem. — Col. 2,1.15 from below. 
 Read: + pra wander forth. — L. 9 from below. Read: 
 + pra idem. 
 
 P. 214, col. 2, 1. 9. Read: sameta ((/i + aam-a) a., followed by, pro- 
 vided with.